EPC3000 FM Programmable

Controllers
EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

User Guide
HA033650ENG Issue 1
August 2021

Expertise in systems and solutions, services and support.

Table of Contents EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Table of Contents
Table of Contents ........................................................................... 3
Safety Information ........................................................................ 11
Important Information..................................................................................11
Safety and EMC ........................................................................... 12
Hazardous Substances .................................................................................... 18
Cybersecurity ............................................................................... 19
Introduction ................................................................................................ 19
Cybersecurity Good Practices ................................................................... 19
Security Features....................................................................................... 19
Principle of Secure by Default ............................................................. 19
HMI Access Level / Comms Config Mode ........................................... 21
HMI Passwords.................................................................................... 21
OEM Security Password ...................................................................... 21
Comms Configuration Level Password................................................ 21
Ethernet security features .................................................................... 22
Communications watchdog.................................................................. 23
Configuration backup and recovery ..................................................... 23
User Sessions...................................................................................... 23
Memory/Data Integrity................................................................................ 24
Achilles® Communications Certification..................................................... 24
Decommissioning....................................................................................... 24
Legal Information ......................................................................... 25
Introduction .................................................................................. 26
Controller Concept ..................................................................................... 26
User Guide Concept .................................................................................. 26
How to Videos............................................................................................ 26
Issue Status of this Manual........................................................................ 27
Installation .................................................................................... 28
What Instrument Do I Have?............................................................................ 29
EPC3000 FM (Factory Mutual) version...................................................... 29
Order Code .......................................................................................... 30
Unpacking Your Controller ......................................................................... 31
Dimensions ................................................................................................ 32
Installation.................................................................................................. 35
Panel Mounting the Controller ............................................................. 35
Panel Cut Out Sizes ............................................................................ 36
Recommended minimum spacing of controllers .................................. 36
Terminal Wiring ............................................................................ 38
Terminal Layout EPC3016 Controller............................................................... 39
EPC3016 Options ...................................................................................... 39
Terminal Layout EPC3008 and EPC3004 Controller ....................................... 40
EPC3008 and EPC3004 Options............................................................... 40
Isolation Boundaries......................................................................................... 41
EPC3008/EPC3004 Isolation..................................................................... 41
EPC3016 Isolation ..................................................................................... 41
Wire Sizes ........................................................................................................ 42
Controller Power Supply .................................................................................. 42
Fuse Protection.......................................................................................... 43
Line/Mains Voltage Power Supply ............................................................. 43
Low Voltage Power Supply ........................................................................ 43
Sensor Inputs (Measuring Input)...................................................................... 44
Primary Sensor Input (Measuring Input) .................................................... 45
Secondary Sensor Input (Measuring Input) ............................................... 46

HA033650ENG Issue 1 3
Table of Contents EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Inputs/Outputs (IO)........................................................................................... 47
Input/Output 1 (I/O1) .................................................................................. 47
Input/Output 2 (IO2) ......................................................................................... 49
Input/Output 4 (IO4) ................................................................................... 51
Output 3 (OP3)........................................................................................... 52
General Information About Relays and Triacs and Inductive Loads ................ 53
Current Transformer......................................................................................... 54
Contact Closure Inputs (DI1 and DI2) .............................................................. 55
Transmitter Power Supply ................................................................................ 56
Digital Inputs/Outputs 1 to 8............................................................................. 56
Example 1 BCD Switch Wiring................................................................... 56
Example 2 Digital Inputs Wiring ................................................................. 57
Example 3 Digital Outputs Wiring .............................................................. 57
Digital Communications Connections .............................................................. 58
EIA-232 Wiring........................................................................................... 58
Serial Communications EIA-485 ................................................................ 59
EIA-422 Wiring........................................................................................... 60
Ethernet Wiring .......................................................................................... 60
Wiring Examples .............................................................................................. 61
Heat/Cool Controller .................................................................................. 61
CT Wiring Diagram .................................................................................... 62
Start Up Modes ............................................................................ 63
Start up............................................................................................................. 63
Start up Diagnostic mode................................................................................. 63
General Description of Front Panel Displays ................................................... 64
EPC3016.................................................................................................... 64
EPC3008.................................................................................................... 64
EPC3004.................................................................................................... 65
General Description of Operator Buttons................................................... 66
Button Layout....................................................................................... 66
Button Operation.................................................................................. 66
Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller .......................................................... 68
Quick Start Tables...................................................................................... 69
Quick Code Set 1................................................................................. 69
Quick Code Set 2................................................................................. 70
Quick Codes DIO ................................................................................. 70
To Save or Discard Quick Codes ......................................................... 72
Configure the Communications Protocol ............................................. 73
To Re-Enter Quick Code mode ............................................................ 74
Start Up - New Configured Controller .............................................................. 75
Bar Graph ............................................................................................ 75
Setpoint................................................................................................ 75
Subsequent Start-ups ...................................................................................... 76
Start-up Modes .......................................................................................... 76
Standby...................................................................................................... 77
Auto-scaling of decimal point ............................................................... 78
Operator Levels ........................................................................... 79
Overview .......................................................................................................... 79
Operator Level 1 .............................................................................................. 80
Auto/Manual Mode..................................................................................... 80
System Messages...................................................................................... 81
Setting the Comms Password ............................................................. 81
Comms Configuration Active ............................................................... 81
Bargraph .................................................................................................... 81
Level 1 Operator Parameters..................................................................... 82
Level 1 Programmer Display...................................................................... 83
Programmer List .................................................................................. 83
Programmer Status Indicator ............................................................... 84
Operator Level 2 .............................................................................................. 85
To Select Operator Level 2 ........................................................................ 85
Level 2 Operator Parameters..................................................................... 86

4 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Table of Contents EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Level 2 Programmer Display...................................................................... 88

Programmer List .................................................................................. 88
Program Setup List .............................................................................. 89
Operator Level 3 .............................................................................................. 90
To Enter Level 3 ......................................................................................... 90
Level 3 Operator Parameters..................................................................... 91
To Return to a Lower Level ........................................................................ 91
Navigation Diagram ..................................................................... 92
Toolkit Blocks ............................................................................................. 92
Features............................................................................................... 93
Navigation Diagram.......................................................................................... 94
Configuration Level ...................................................................... 96
Function Blocks................................................................................................ 96
Configuration Level Parameters ................................................................ 97
To Select Configuration Level .............................................................. 98
To Return to Level 1............................................................................. 98
Configuration and Level 3 Navigation Diagram ......................................... 99
Examples ............................................................................................. 99
Analog Input List (a1 a2).......................................................................... 102
Units................................................................................................... 105
Status................................................................................................. 106
I/O List (io) ............................................................................................... 107
Output Splitting ................................................................................... 111
Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms ....................................112
DI/O List (O.d.IO) ......................................................................................113
CT List (Ct)................................................................................................114
Loop List (LOOP) ......................................................................................116
Loop - Main Sub-list ............................................................................117
Configuration Sub-List ........................................................................119
Setpoint Sub-list................................................................................. 121
Feedforward Sub-list.......................................................................... 124
Autotune Sub-list ............................................................................... 126
PID Sub-list ........................................................................................ 128
OP Sub-list......................................................................................... 131
Diagnostics Sub-list ........................................................................... 133
Programmer List (PROG) ........................................................................ 135
Program Setup List (P.SEt) ...................................................................... 138
Alarms List (ALm) .................................................................................... 141
BCD List (bCd)......................................................................................... 145
Recipe List (RECP).................................................................................. 147
To Save Recipes ................................................................................ 149
To Load a Recipe ............................................................................... 149
Communications List (COmm)................................................................. 150
Main Sub List (mAIN)......................................................................... 151
Network Sub List (nWrk) .................................................................... 153
Broadcast Sub List (bCSt) ................................................................. 154
EtherNet/IP Sub List .......................................................................... 155
BACnet Sub List (b.NEt) .................................................................... 156
Modbus Master List (mOd.m) .................................................................. 157
Main Sub List (mAIN)......................................................................... 158
Diagnostics Sub List (dIag) ................................................................ 161
DataPoint Sub List (DATA)................................................................. 163
Maths List (mAth)..................................................................................... 169
Select Input ........................................................................................ 171
Logic Operator List (LGC2)...................................................................... 172
8 Input Logic Operator List (LGC8).......................................................... 174
Timer List (tmr)......................................................................................... 176
Timer Modes ...................................................................................... 177
Counter List (Cntr) ................................................................................... 180
Totalizer List (tOtL)................................................................................... 182
8 Input Analog MUX List (AN.SW) ........................................................... 184

HA033650ENG Issue 1 5
Table of Contents EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

User Value List (u.VAL) ............................................................................ 186

Input Monitor List (I.mon) ......................................................................... 187
Switchover List (SW.OV).......................................................................... 189
Logic OR List (OR)................................................................................... 191
Instrument List (INSt) ............................................................................... 193
Information Sub-List (INFO)............................................................... 194
Display Functionality Sub-List (HmI).................................................. 195
Security Sub-List (SEC) ..................................................................... 197
Diagnostics Sub-List (diAG)............................................................... 199
Modules Sub-List (mOdS) ................................................................. 202
Enables .............................................................................................. 202
Calibration Sub-List (CAL) ................................................................. 203
Input Linearization (LIN16)....................................................................... 204
LIN16 Parameter Navigation ............................................................. 204
Linearization Block Parameters ......................................................... 205
Remote Input List (REm.1) ...................................................................... 207
Comms Indirection Table ......................................................................... 208
Q Code List .............................................................................................. 210
Configuration Using iTools ......................................................... 212
What is iTools? ............................................................................................... 212
What is an IDM?............................................................................................. 212
To Load an IDM........................................................................................ 212
Connecting a PC to the Controller ................................................................. 213
Using the Configuration Clip .................................................................... 213
Using the Communications Port .............................................................. 214
Using Option Comms............................................................................... 214
Starting iTools................................................................................................. 215
The 'Browser' List..................................................................................... 216
Configuration Access ............................................................................... 217
Setting Comms Configuration Password ........................................... 218
To Put iTools into Configuration Mode ............................................... 219
Instrument List ................................................................................... 221
Terminal Editor ......................................................................................... 222
Graphical Wiring ...................................................................................... 223
Example 1: To Wire an Alarm............................................................. 224
Example 2: To Connect an Alarm to a Physical Output ..................... 224
Example 3: To Wire Sensor Break ..................................................... 225
Example 4: To Configure a Bargraph................................................. 225
Example 5: To Wire a Retransmission Output ................................... 226
Applications.............................................................................................. 228
EPC3000 FM Limit Alarm - High ........................................................ 228
EPC3000 FM Limit Alarm - Low......................................................... 230
Flash Memory Editor................................................................................ 232
Parameter Promotion......................................................................... 233
User Defined Messages .................................................................... 235
Recipes .............................................................................................. 237
Watch Recipe Editor .......................................................................... 240
To Load a Custom Linearization Table............................................... 242
Cloning..................................................................................................... 243
Save to File ........................................................................................ 243
To Clone a New Controller ................................................................. 243
Clone Load Unsuccessful .................................................................. 244
Cold Start ........................................................................................... 244
Alarms ........................................................................................ 245
What are Alarms?........................................................................................... 245
Alarm Types ............................................................................................. 246
Absolute High .................................................................................... 246
Absolute Low ..................................................................................... 246
Deviation High ................................................................................... 246
Deviation Low .................................................................................... 247
Deviation Band .................................................................................. 247

6 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Table of Contents EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Rising Rate of Change....................................................................... 247

Falling Rate of Change ...................................................................... 248
Digital High ........................................................................................ 248
Digital Low ......................................................................................... 248
Sensor Break ..................................................................................... 248
Hysteresis .......................................................................................... 249
Delay.................................................................................................. 249
Effects of Delay and Hysteresis ......................................................... 249
Inhibit ................................................................................................. 251
Standby Inhibit ................................................................................... 251
Latching ............................................................................................. 252
Blocking ............................................................................................. 252
To Set Alarm Threshold............................................................................ 253
Alarm Indication ....................................................................................... 253
To Acknowledge an Alarm........................................................................ 254
Alarms Advanced ........................................................................................... 256
Programmer ............................................................................... 257
What is a Programmer? ................................................................................. 257
Programs........................................................................................................ 258
Segments ....................................................................................................... 258
Ramp Time............................................................................................... 258
Dwell ........................................................................................................ 258
Step.......................................................................................................... 258
Call........................................................................................................... 259
End........................................................................................................... 259
Standard Functionality ................................................................................... 260
Recovery Strategy after a reset or power outage .................................... 260
Ramp back (Dwell Segments) ........................................................... 260
Ramp back (Ramp or Time-to-target segments)................................ 261
Sensor Break Recovery ........................................................................... 261
Holdback .................................................................................................. 261
Servo To PV/SP ....................................................................................... 261
Event Outputs .......................................................................................... 261
Digital Inputs ............................................................................................ 262
Program Cycles ....................................................................................... 262
Configuration Mode Reset ....................................................................... 262
Program Selection ................................................................................... 262
Rules for Program Creation / Editing ....................................................... 263
Program & Segment Times...................................................................... 263
Resolution ................................................................................................ 264
Programmer Time Base Accuracy ........................................................... 264
Typical Loop to Programmer Graphical Wiring ........................................ 265
Communications ...................................................................................... 266
Modbus Address Ranges................................................................... 266
EI-Bisynch Mnemonics ...................................................................... 267
To Setup a Program from the HMI ........................................................... 268
To Run/Hold the Program from the HMI ............................................ 270
To Setup a Program Using iTools............................................................. 271
To Name Programs and Segments.................................................... 274
To Save and Load Stored Program Files (*.uip) ................................ 275
To Run, Reset and Hold a Program in iTools ..................................... 276
Programmer Parameters in iTools.................................................................. 278
Programmer.Run...................................................................................... 278
Programmer.Setup................................................................................... 280
WorkingProgram ...................................................................................... 282
WorkingSegment ..................................................................................... 284

HA033650ENG Issue 1 7
Table of Contents EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Control ....................................................................................... 286

Types of Control ............................................................................................. 287
PID Control .............................................................................................. 287
Reverse/Direct Action ........................................................................ 292
Loop Break ........................................................................................ 292
Gain scheduling ................................................................................. 292
Motorized Valve Positioning Control ........................................................ 293
Boundless Valve Position (VPU)........................................................ 293
Motorized Valve Control in Manual mode .......................................... 293
On-Off Control.......................................................................................... 294
Feedforward ................................................................................................... 295
Disturbance feedforward.......................................................................... 295
Setpoint feedforward................................................................................ 296
Static or dynamic compensation .............................................................. 297
Split Range (heat/cool)................................................................................... 298
Cooling Algorithm..................................................................................... 299
Non-linear cooling .............................................................................. 299
Channel 2 (heat/cool) Deadband ....................................................... 300
Bumpless Transfer ......................................................................................... 301
Sensor Break ................................................................................................. 301
Operating Modes............................................................................................ 302
Start-up and Recovery ............................................................................. 302
Setpoint subsystem........................................................................................ 303
Remote/Local Setpoint Source Selection ................................................ 304
Local Setpoint Selection .................................................................... 304
Remote Setpoint ................................................................................ 304
Setpoint limits........................................................................................... 305
Setpoint Rate Limit................................................................................... 305
Target SP ................................................................................................. 305
Tracking ................................................................................................... 306
Back-calculated SP and PV ..................................................................... 306
Setpoint Integral Balance......................................................................... 306
Output Subsystem.......................................................................................... 307
Output selection (including Manual Station) ............................................ 307
Output Limiting......................................................................................... 307
Rate limiting ............................................................................................. 308
Power feedforward (line voltage compensation)...................................... 308
Autotuning ...................................................................................................... 309
Autotuning multiple zones........................................................................ 314
Digital Communications ............................................................. 315
Serial Communications .................................................................................. 315
EI-Bisynch................................................................................................ 315
EI-Bisynch Limitations ....................................................................... 317
Modbus RTU ............................................................................................ 318
Serial Comms Parameters................................................................. 318
Ethernet Communications.............................................................................. 319
Setting Up the Ethernet Module............................................................... 319
Ethernet Parameters.......................................................................... 320
Protocols ........................................................................................................ 327
EtherNet/IP .............................................................................................. 327
EPC3000 Controller EtherNet/IP Features ........................................ 327
CIP Object Support ............................................................................ 328
Setting Up The EtherNet/IP Scanner ................................................. 328
Configure Scanner Connection Settings to the EPC3000 Controller
EtherNet/IP Adapter ........................................................................... 333
Establishing Communications............................................................ 339
Data Formats ..................................................................................... 339
The EDS File ..................................................................................... 339
Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 339
BACnet..................................................................................................... 341
BACnet Objects ................................................................................. 341

8 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Table of Contents EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

BACnet Services................................................................................ 341

BACnet Object Mapping .................................................................... 341
Configuring BACnet ........................................................................... 342
Modbus Master ........................................................................................ 344
Overview ............................................................................................ 344
Modbus Master Configuration............................................................ 344
Comms Indirection Table ................................................................... 357
Fieldbus IO Gateway...................................................................................... 358
Input Linearization (LIN16) ......................................................... 360
Custom Linearization ..................................................................................... 360
Example 1: Custom Linearization - Increasing Curve.............................. 361
To Setup the Parameters ................................................................... 361
Example 2: Custom Linearization - Skipped Points Curve ...................... 363
Example 3: Custom Linearization - Decreasing Curve ............................ 365
Adjustment of the Process Variable ......................................................... 366
User Calibration ......................................................................... 369
Controller only Calibration.............................................................................. 369
To Calibrate the Analog Input................................................................... 369
Using iTools ....................................................................................... 370
To Return to Factory Calibration ........................................................ 371
Two Point Offset....................................................................................... 372
Using the Controller HMI.......................................................................... 373
Calibration using a Dry Block or Equivalent............................................. 374
To Calibrate a Voltage or Current Analog Output ........................................... 375
Using the Controller HMI.......................................................................... 375
Using iTools.............................................................................................. 376
To Calibrate the Current Transformer............................................................. 377
Notification Messages ................................................................ 378
OEM Security ............................................................................. 380
Implementation ........................................................................................ 380
OEM Configuration List............................................................................ 382
OEM Operator List ................................................................................... 382
Effect of the ‘OEM ParamList’ Parameter ................................................ 383
‘OEMParamLists’ On ......................................................................... 384
‘OEMParaLists’ Off ............................................................................ 384
Technical Specification ............................................................... 385
General .................................................................................................... 385
Function Blocks Available .................................................................. 386
Environmental specifications, standards, approvals and certifications .... 387
EN ISO 13849 Assessment Declaration .................................................. 387
Mechanical............................................................................................... 388
Dimensions ........................................................................................ 388
Weight................................................................................................ 388
Input and Outputs .................................................................................... 389
I/O and Communication types ........................................................... 389
I/O Specifications ............................................................................... 389
Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................ 390
Remote Setpoint (Aux) Analog input (EPC3016 only) ....................... 390
Current transformer input................................................................... 390
Contact closure inputs LA and LB...................................................... 390
Logic I/O modules ............................................................................. 391
Logic I/O open collector type (EPC3008/3004 controllers only) ........ 391
TRIAC module ................................................................................... 393
Isolated DC output module ................................................................ 393
Power supply and transmitter power supply ...................................... 393
Communications ................................................................................ 393
Operator interface .............................................................................. 394

HA033650ENG Issue 1 9
Table of Contents EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Appendix: EI-BISYNCH Parameters .......................................... 395

Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM) ................................. 400
FM Limit function (Low & High) - Overview.................................................... 400
Setting up ....................................................................................................... 401
Wiring and Connections........................................................................... 401
FM Relay (Output 3, OP3) ................................................................. 401
Application (FM Limit Alarm High / Low) selection................................... 401
Alarm Types (FM) .................................................................................... 402
Setting an Alarm (FM) ........................................................................ 402
Acknowledging an Alarm (FM) ........................................................... 403

10 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Safety Information EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Safety Information

Important Information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following
special messages may appear throughout this manual or on the equipment to warn of
potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal
injury if the instructions are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential

personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this
symbol to avoid possible injury or death.

DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury. The safety alert
symbol shall not be used with this signal word.

Notes:
1. Electrical equipment must be installed, operated, serviced and maintained only
by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for
any consequences arising out of the use of this material.
2. A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the
construction, and operation of electrical equipment and its installation, and has
received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 11
Safety and EMC EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Safety and EMC

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Power down all equipment before starting the installation, removal, wiring,
maintenance or inspection of the product.

For permanently connected equipment, include a disconnecting device such as an

isolating switch or circuit breaker in the installation.

Use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm the power is off.

Power line and output circuits must be wired and fused in compliance with local and
national regulatory requirements for the rated current and voltage of the particular
equipment. i.e. UK, the latest IEE wiring regulations, (BS7671), and USA, NEC
Class 1 wiring methods.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Reasonable use and responsibility

The safety of any system incorporating this product is the responsibility of the
assembler/installer of the system.

The disconnecting device must be in close proximity to the equipment and within
easy reach of the operator, and it must be marked as the disconnecting device for the
equipment.

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. While
every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information, your supplier
shall not be held liable for errors contained herein.

This controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications
which meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC.

Use in other applications, or failure to observe the installation instructions of this

manual may compromize safety or EMC. The installer must ensure the safety and
EMC of any particular installation.

Failure to use approved software/hardware with our hardware products may result in
injury, harm, or improper operating results.

12 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Safety and EMC EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment must be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by
qualified personnel.

No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out

of the use of this material.

A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction
and operation of electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety
training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.

QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL
Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents
of this manual and all other pertinent product documentation are authorized to work
on and with this product.

The qualified person must be able to detect possible hazards that may arise from
parameterization, modifying parameter values and generally from mechanical,
electrical, or electronic equipment.

The qualified person must be familiar with the standards, provisions, and regulations
for the prevention of industrial accidents, which they must observe when designing
and implementing the system.

INTENDED USE
The products described or affected by this document, together with software and
options, are EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004 Programmable Controllers (referred to
herein as “controller”). They are intended for industrial use according to the
instructions, directions, examples, and safety information contained in the present
document and other supporting documentation.

The product must only be used in compliance with all applicable safety regulations
and directives, the specified requirements, and the technical data.

Prior to using the product, a risk assessment must be performed in respect of the
planned application. Based on the results, the appropriate safety-related measures
must be implemented.

Since the product is used as a component within an overall machine or process, you
must ensure the safety of the overall system.

Operate the product only with the specified cables and accessories. Use only
genuine accessories and spare parts.

Any use other than that explicitly permitted is prohibited and can result in
unanticipated hazards.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 13
Safety and EMC EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Electrical equipment must be installed, operated and maintained by only qualified
personnel.
Turn off all power to product and all I/O circuitry (alarms, control I/O etc.) before
starting the installation, removal, wiring, maintenance or inspection of the product.
Power line and output circuits must be wired and fused in compliance with local and
national regulatory requirements for the rated current and voltage of the particular
equipment, i.e. UK, the latest IEE wiring regulations, (BS7671), and USA, NEC
class 1 wiring methods.
The unit must be installed in an enclosure or a cabinet. Failure to do this impairs the
safety of the unit. An enclosure or a cabinet should provide fire enclosure and/or
restriction of access to hazards.
Do not exceed the device’s ratings.
This product must be installed, connected and used in compliance with prevailing
standards and/or installation regulations. If this product is used in a manner not
specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the product may be
impaired.
The controller is designed to operate if a temperature sensor is connected directly to
an electrical heating element. The Primary Sensor Input IP1 is not isolated from the
logic outputs and digital inputs DI1 and DI2, therefore, these terminals could be at
line potential. You must ensure that service personnel do not touch connections to
these inputs while they are live.
With a live sensor, all cables, connectors and switches for connecting the sensor
must be mains rated for use in 230Vac +15% CATII.
Do not insert anything through the case apertures.
Tighten terminal screws in conformance with the torque specifications.
A maximum of two wires, identical in type and cross sectional size can be inserted
per terminal. Strip the insulation from the cables by a minimum of 6mm (0.24") in
order to ensure good contact with the terminal. Do not exceed a maximum exposed
cable conductor length of 2mm (0.08").
If a current transformer (CT) is used in the installation, a voltage limiting device fitted
across the CT terminals, will help to prevent high voltages appearing at the CT
terminals if the controller is unplugged. A suitable device is two back-to-back zener
diodes rated between 3 and 10V, 50mA.
Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical
work practices. See NFPA 70E or CSA Z462.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

14 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Safety and EMC EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
If upon receipt, the unit or any part within is damaged, do not install but contact your
supplier.
Do not allow anything to fall through the case apertures and ingress the controller.
Ensure the correct wire gauge size is used per circuit and it is rated for the current
capacity of the circuit.
When using ferrules (cable ends) ensure the correct size is selected and each is
securely fixed to the wire using a crimping tool.
The controller must be connected to the correct rated power supply unit or supply
voltage in accordance with the supply voltage rating displayed on the controller
label. or in the User guide. Use only isolating PELV or SELV power supplies to
supply power to the equipment.

EPC3000 ("Line Voltage" intimates 230v only, but what if its 12, 24 48Volt:
The controller must be connected to the correct line voltage in accordance with the
order code and line voltage shown on the controller label. Use only isolating PELV
or SELV power supplies to supply power to the equipment.

EPC2000 (24v Only):

Do not connect the controller directly to line voltage.Use only isolating PELV or
SELV power supplies to supply power to the equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 15
Safety and EMC EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not use the product for critical control or protection applications where human or
equipment safety relies on the operation of the control circuit.
Observe all electrostatic discharge precautions before handling the unit.

Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the
controller is mounted for example, carbon dust. In conditions of conductive pollution
in the environment, fit an air filter to the air intake of the cabinet. Where
condensation is likely, for example, at low temperature, include a thermostatically
controlled heater in the cabinet.
Avoid ingress of conductive materials during installation.
Use appropriate safety interlocks where personnel and/or equipment hazards exist.
Install and operate this equipment in an enclosure appropriately rated for its
intended environment.
Routing of wires, to minimize the pick-up of EMI (Electromagnetic interference), the
low voltage DC connections and the sensor input wiring must be routed away from
high-current power cables. Where it is impractical to do this, use shielded cables
with the shield grounded. In general keep cable lengths to a minimum.
Do not disassemble, repair or modify the equipment. Contact your supplier for
repair.
Ensure all cables and wiring harness are secured using a relevant strain relief
mechanism.
Wiring, it is important to connect the unit in accordance with the data in this User
guide and use copper cables (except the thermocouple wiring).
Only connect wires to identified terminals shown on the product warning label, the
wiring section of the product User guide or Installation sheet.
Safety and EMC protection can be seriously impaired if the unit is not used in the
manner specified. The installer must ensure the safety and EMC of the installation.
If the output is not wired, but written to by communications, it will continue to be
controlled by the communications messages. In this case take care to allow for the
loss of communications.
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of
control systems. Only persons with such expertise must be allowed to program,
install, alter and commission this product.
During commissioning ensure all operating states and potential fault conditions are
carefully tested.
Do not use, or implement a controller configuration (control strategy) into service
without ensuring the configuration has completed all operational tests, been
commissioned and approved for service.
It is the responsibility of the person commissioning the controller to ensure the
configuration is correct.
The controller must not be configured while it is connected to a live process as
entering Configuration Mode pauses all outputs. The controller remains in Standby
until Configuration Mode is exited.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or
equipment damage.

16 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Safety and EMC EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Actuators that are sensitive to switching pulse or cycle times should be fitted with a
protective device. For example, refrigeration compressors should be fitted with a
lockout timer to add additional protection against switching too quickly.
Any changes made to the controllers flash memory require the controller to enter
configuration mode. The controller will not control the process when in configuration
mode. Ensure that the controller is not connected to an active process when in
configuration mode.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or
equipment damage.

CAUTION
EQUIPMENT OPERATION HAZARD
If being stored before use, store within the specified environmental conditions.

A Cold Start function erases ALL settings, removes the existing configuration and
returns the controller to its original state. To minimize data loss the controller’s
configuration should be saved using a backup file, before committing a Cold Start.
A cold start of the controller must only be carried out under exceptional
circumstances as it will erase ALL previous settings and return the controller to its
original state.
"A controller must not be connected to any equipment when performing a cold start."
Cleaning. Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels. A mild soap solution may
be used to clean other exterior surfaces.

To minimize any potential loss of control or controller status when communicating

across a network or being controlled via a third party master (i.e. another controller,
PLC or HMI) ensure all system hardware, software, network design, configuration
and cybersecurity robustness have been correctly configured, commissioned and
approved for operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Symbols
Various symbols may be used on the controller label. They have the following
meaning:

D Risk of electric shock

O Take precautions against static

P Regulatory compliance mark for Australia (ACA) and New Zealand (RSM)

* Complies with the 40 year Environment Friendly Usage Period

J Dispose of in accordance with WEEE Directive

C Mandatory conformity marking for certain products sold within the European
Economic Area
South Korea KC Certification for Electrical and Electronic Products

HA033650ENG Issue 1 17
Safety and EMC EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Hazardous Substances
This product conforms to European Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
(using exemptions) and Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of
Chemicals (REACH) Legislation.

RoHS Exemptions used in this product involve the use of lead. China RoHS legislation
does not include exemptions and so lead is declared as present in the China RoHS
Declaration.

Californian law requires the following notice:

WWARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead
compounds which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. For more information go to:
http://www.P65Warnings.ca.gov

18 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Cybersecurity EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Cybersecurity
What is in this Chapter?
This chapter outlines some good practice approaches to cybersecurity as they relate
to use of EPC3000 series controllers, and draws attention to several features that
could assist in implementing robust cybersecurity.

CAUTION
EQUIPMENT OPERATION HAZARD
To minimize any potential loss of control or controller status when communicating
across a network or being controlled via a third party master (i.e. another controller,
PLC or HMI) ensure all system hardware, software, network design, configuration
and cybersecurity robustness have been correctly configured, commissioned and
approved for operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Introduction
When utilizing Eurotherm EPC3000 series controllers in an industrial environment, it
is important to take ‘cybersecurity’ into consideration: in other words, the installation’s
design should aim to prevent unauthorized and malicious access. This includes both
physical access (for instance via the front panel or HMI screens), and electronic
access (via network connections and digital communications).

Cybersecurity Good Practices

Overall design of a site network is outside the scope of this manual. The
Cybersecurity Good Practices Guide, Part Number HA032968 provides an overview
of principles to consider. This is available from www.eurotherm.com.

Typically, an industrial controller such as the EPC3000 controller together with any
associated HMI screens and controlled devices should not be placed on a network
with direct access to the public Internet. Rather, good practise involves locating these
devices on a firewalled network segment, separated from the public Internet by a
so-called ‘demilitarized zone’ (DMZ).

Security Features
The sections below draw attention to some of the cybersecurity features of EPC3000
series controllers.

Principle of Secure by Default

Some of the digital communication features on the EPC3000 series controllers can
provide greater convenience and ease-of-use (particularly in regards to initial
configuration), but also can potentially make the controller more vulnerable. For this
reason, these features are turned off by default:

HA033650ENG Issue 1 19
Cybersecurity EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Comms Ports and Channels Disabled by Default

EPC3000 series controllers support a variety of digital communications (see
"EPC3016 Options" on page 39, "EPC3008 and EPC3004 Options" on page 40 and
"Communications List (COmm)" on page 150). When a controller is unconfigured the
type of digital comms is set up with the Quick Start Codes, see section "Configure the
Communications Protocol" on page 73. By default, the ports and channels
associated with any digital comms are closed to traffic, unless that method of
communication is explicitly selected using the parameters in the mAIN menu (see
"Main Sub List (mAIN)" on page 151) or by using the Comms Setup at first start up
(see "Configure the Communications Protocol" on page 73.

The only exception to this principle is for the configuration port on the left side, as
viewed from the front fascia. This is a USB connection via a bespoke
Eurotherm-supplied ‘config clip’ cable, for communication with Eurotherm’s iTools
software (see "Using the Configuration Clip" on page 213). Whilst this port is always
enabled, it is physically inaccessible when the controller is installed and mounted. It
can only be accessed by removing the controller from its mounting, thus
disconnecting all other I/O connections.

Bonjour auto-discovery disabled by default

Ethernet connectivity is available as an option on EPC3000 series controllers (see
"EPC3016 Options" on page 39 and "AutoDiscovery" on page 320), including the
Bonjour service discovery protocol (see "Bonjour" on page 320). Bonjour enables the
controller to be automatically discovered by other devices on the network without the
need for manual intervention. However, for cybersecurity reasons, it is disabled by
default, as it could be exploited by a malicious user to gain access to the controller.

See also section "AutoDiscovery" on page 320 and information on how to turn it on, if
required.

Port Use
The following ports are being used:

Port Protocol

44818 TCP/UDP EtherNet/IP (see below)

22112 UDP EtherNet/IP (see below)
2222 UDP EtherNet/IP (see below)
502 TCP Modbus (Master and Slave)
47808 UDP BACNET
5353 UDP Zeroconf

The following should be noted about the EtherNet/IP ports:

• Ports are always closed by default and are only opened when the corresponding
comms protocol is set.

• UDP Port 5353 (Auto-discovery/ZeroConf/Bonjour, open only when

Comms.Option.Network.AutoDiscovery parameter is ON.

20 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Cybersecurity EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

HMI Access Level / Comms Config Mode

As described in "Operator Levels" on page 79, EPC3000 series controllers feature
tiered, password-restricted operator levels, so that available functions and
parameters can be restricted to appropriate personnel.

Level 1 functions are the only ones that do not require password access, and are
typically appropriate for routine operator use. The controller powers up in this level.
All other levels are password-restricted. Level 2 makes an extended set of
operational parameters available, typically intended for use by a supervisor. Level 3
parameters would typically be set when an authorized person was commissioning the
device for use in a particular installation. Config level allows access to all the
controller’s parameters. password-restricted access to these parameters is also
possible over digital communications, using Eurotherm’s iTools software
("Configuration Using iTools" on page 212),

At config level, it is also possible to customize the other levels from their defaults,
restricting certain parameters to only be available at a higher level, or making certain
parameters available at lower levels (see "Parameter Promotion" on page 233). In
addition, you can configure the availability of setpoint program parameters such as
Run/Reset, Program Edit and Program Mode and control parameters, such as
Auto/Manual, Setpoint, and Manual Output.

HMI Passwords
When entering passwords via the HMI, the following features help protect against
unauthorized access:

• Each digit is obscured (replaced with an underscore character) after entry, to

help protect against an unauthorized person seeing the password as it’s typed in.

• Password entry is locked after three invalid attempts. The time it stays locked for
is configurable (see "Security Sub-List (SEC)" on page 197). This helps protect
against “brute force” attempts to guess the password.

• The controller records the number of successful and unsuccessful login attempts
for each level of password (see "Diagnostics Sub-list" on page 133). Regular
auditing of these diagnostics is recommended, as a means to help detect
unauthorized access to the controller.

OEM Security Password

An optional OEM security feature is provided to give Original Equipment
Manufacturers (OEMs) a layer of protection against theft of their intellectual property,
and is designed to help prevent unauthorized cloning of controller configurations.
This protection includes application-specific internal (soft) wiring and limited access
to certain parameters via comms (by iTools or a third party comms package).

Comms Configuration Level Password

The password for Config Level access via iTools has the following features to help
protect against unauthorized access (see "Instrument List" on page 221 for more
details):

• There is no default password for comms configuration level.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 21
Cybersecurity EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

• User needs to set the comms configuration password on first connect from
iTools.

• If password is not set Fixed comms and Options comms will be in Comms
Lockdown mode (see below).

• Comms configuration password is encrypted before sending via comms.

• Passwords are salted and hashed before being stored.

• Number of password attempts is 5. If more than 5 unsuccessful attempts are

made, the Password Lock function is triggered.

• Tools will enforce a minimum password length of 8 characters.

Comms Lockdown mode

In Comms Lockdown mode, Fixed comms and Option comms will only have
read/write access to a limited set of parameters, see the following table. Config clip
connection and HMI will not be affected.

Table 1: Comms Lockdown Limited Parameter Set

Parameter Modbus Address Access String length

CNOMO Manufacturing ID 0x0079(121) Read-only -

CNOMO Instrument ID 0x007A(122) Read-only -
Instrument firmware version 0x006B(107) Read-only -
CommsPasswordIsSet 0x0080(128) Read-only -
KeyExchange 0x53F4(21492) Read/Write 35
CommsPassword 0x5621(22049) Write-only 96

Ethernet security features

Ethernet connectivity is available as an option in EPC3000 series controllers (see
"EPC3016 Options" on page 39 and "EPC3008 and EPC3004 Options" on page 40).
The following security features are specific to Ethernet:

Ethernet rate protection

One form of cyberattack is to try to make a controller process so much Ethernet traffic
that it drains systems resources and useful control is compromised. For this reason,
the EP3000 series includes an Ethernet rate protection algorithm, which will detect
excessive network activity and help to ensure the controller’s resources are
prioritized on the control strategy rather than servicing the Ethernet traffic. If this
algorithm is running, the rate protection diagnostic parameter will be set to ON
(see "Network Sub List (nWrk)" on page 153).

22 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Cybersecurity EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Broadcast Storm protection

A ‘broadcast storm’ is a condition which may be created by cyberattack whereby
spurious network messages are sent to devices which cause them to respond with
further network messages, creating a chain reaction that escalates until the network
is unable to transport normal traffic. The EPC3000 series controllers includes a
broadcast storm protection algorithm, which will automatically detect this condition,
stopping the controller from responding to the spurious traffic. If this algorithm is
active, the broadcast storm diagnostic parameter will be set to ON (see "Network
Sub List (nWrk)" on page 153).

Communications watchdog
EPC3000 series controllers include a ‘comms watchdog’ feature. This can be
configured to raise an alert if any of the supported digital communications are not
received for a specified period of time. See the four watchdog parameters in "Main
Sub List (mAIN)" on page 151. These provide a way to configure appropriate action if
malicious action interrupts the controller’s digital communications.

Configuration backup and recovery

Using Eurotherm’s iTools software, you can ‘clone’ an EPC3000 series controller,
saving all its configuration and parameter settings to a file. This can then be copied
onto another controller, or used to restore the original controller’s settings—see
"Cloning" on page 243.

For cybersecurity reasons, password-restricted parameters are not saved in the

clone file when in operator mode (Level 1).

Clone files include a cryptographic integrity hash, meaning that if the file contents is
tampered with, it will not load back into a controller.

A clone file cannot be generated or loaded if the OEM Security feature option is
configured and active.

User Sessions
Communication connections only have two permission levels - an ‘Operator mode’
and a ‘Configuration mode’. Any connection via comms (Ethernet or serial) is
separated into its own unique session. A user logged in via the TCP socket will not
share permissions with a different user logged in, for example, via the serial port and
vice versa.

In addition, only a single user can be logged into an EPC3000 series controller in
Configuration mode at any one time. If another user attempts to connect and select
Configuration mode, the request will be denied until the other user exits the
Configuration mode.

If a power cycle occurs all sessions will be in Operator Mode when connections are
re-established.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 23
Cybersecurity EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Memory/Data Integrity

FLASH Integrity
When an EPC3000 series controller powers up, it automatically performs an integrity
check on the entire contents of its internal flash memory. Additional periodic integrity
checks are also performed in 256 byte blocks during normal runtime. If any integrity
check detects a difference from what is expected, the controller will stop running and
display a FL.er alert (see "Notification Messages" on page 378).

Non-volatile Data Integrity

When an EPC3000 series controller powers up, it automatically performs an integrity
check on the contents of its internal non-volatile memory devices. Additional periodic
integrity checks are performed during normal runtime and when non-volatile data is
being written. If any integrity check detects a difference from what is expected, the
controller enters Standby mode and displays a RAM.S, PA.S, REG.S or OPT.S alert as
appropriate (see "Notification Messages" on page 378 for more details).

Cryptography Usage
Cryptography usage is employed in the following areas:

• ROM startup integrity checking.

• Promote/Message table checksum security.

• Clone files.

• Custom linearization tables.

• Firmware upgrade signing.

Achilles® Communications Certification

The EPC3000 series of controllers have been certified to Level 1 under the Achilles®
Communications Robustness Test Certification scheme. This is an established
industry benchmark for the deployment of robust industrial devices recognized by the
major automation vendors and operators.

Decommissioning
When an EPC3000 series controller is at the end of its life and being
decommissioned, Eurotherm advises reverting all parameters to their default settings
(see "Cold Start" on page 244 for instructions). This can help to protect against
subsequent data and intellectual property theft if the controller is then acquired by
another party.

24 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Legal Information EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Legal Information
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or
technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This
documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for
determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications. It
is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk
analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific
application or use thereof. Schneider Electric, Eurotherm Limited or any of its
affiliates or subsidiaries shall not be responsible or liable for misuse of the
information contained herein.

If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors
in this publication, please notify us.

You agree not to reproduce, other than for your own personal, noncommercial use,
all or part of this document on any medium whatsoever without permission of
Eurotherm Limited, given in writing. You also agree not to establish any hypertext
links to this document or its content. Eurotherm Limited does not grant any right or
license for the personal and noncommercial use of the document or its content,
except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your own risk.
All other rights are reserved.

All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when
installing and using this product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance
with documented system data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to
components.

When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the
relevant instructions must be followed.

Failure to use Eurotherm Limited software or approved software with our hardware
products may result in injury, harm, or improper operating results.

Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.

Life Is On Schneider Electric, Eurotherm, EurothermSuite, ECAT, EFit, EPack,

EPower, Eycon, Chessell, Mini8, nanodac, optivis, piccolo and versadac are
trademarks of Eurotherm Limited SE, its subsidiaries and affiliated companies. All
other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

© 2021 Eurotherm Limited. All rights reserved.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 25
Introduction EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Introduction

Controller Concept
EPC3000 controllers are a range of programmable single loop process controllers
which are certified for cybersecurity communications robustness. A range of math,
logic, totalizer and specialized functions is also available.

A simple "Quick Start" code is used to configure standard applications essential for
controlling specific processes. This enables fast commissioning "Out of the Box"
without the need for configuration software. Applications include (but are not limited
to) heat or heat/cool temperature control, carbon potential control, dew point control,
etc. These applications are pre-configured, providing the user with a starting point for
customizing to an individual process.

Eurotherm iTools is a software package which is designed for this purpose by

providing user function block wiring in addition to a range of other features. It is
available as a free download from www.eurotherm.com or can be ordered on a DVD.

User Guide Concept

This User Guide is generally laid out in the following manner:

• The first part explains mechanical and electrical installation and covers the same
topics as in the Installation and wiring sheet supplied with each instrument but in
more detail.

• Operation of the instrument, including Quick Start Configuration. In general the

descriptions in the manual assume that the controller is configured with no
application loaded or with a heat or heat cool controller application loaded.

• Configuration of the instrument from the front panel.

• Configuration of the instrument using Eurotherm iTools configuration package.

• Description of different function blocks in the instrument, such as Control Loop,

Programmer, Digital Communications, OEM Security, and Input Linearization.

• Calibration procedure.

• Technical specification.

This User Guide describes general control applications which may be configured
using the Quick Start Codes.

Specific applications such as Temperature control (Quick Start codes 1, 2 and 3),
Carbon Potential control (Quick Start code 4) and Dew Point control (Quick Start
code 5) are described in supplements to this manual. The supplement part numbers
are HA033033, HA032987 and HA032994 respectively and are available from
www.eurotherm.com.

How to Videos
“How To” video demonstrations may be found at www.eurotherm.com, which will help
to demonstrate the information that is being provided in this User Guide. They are
also available on YouTube.

26 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Introduction EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Issue Status of this Manual

Issue 1 created for the addition of the EPC3000 FM (Factory Mutual) version of the
EPC3000 series controllers and meets the requirements of FM Approval Standard
FM 3545 - Temperature Limit and Supervisory Switches.

The following are topics included or revised specifically for EPC3000 FM:

• "Applications" on page 228

• "Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM)" on page 400

HA033650ENG Issue 1 27
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Installation

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Electrical equipment must be installed, operated and maintained by only qualified
personnel.

Turn off all power to product and all I/O circuitry (alarms, control I/O etc.) before
starting the installation, removal, wiring, maintenance or inspection of the product.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of
control systems. Only persons with such expertise must be allowed to program,
install, alter and commission this product.

During commissioning ensure all operating states and potential fault conditions are
carefully tested.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

In typical temperature control processes there may be issues when heating is

constantly on. Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on include:

• The temperature sensor becoming detached from the process.

• Thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit.

• The controller heating being constantly on.

• An external valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition.

• The controller setpoint too high.

• Loss of communications.

Where damage or injury is possible we recommend fitting a separate

over-temperature protection unit with an independent temperature sensor which, will
isolate the heating circuit.

Alarm relays do not provide protection under all failure conditions and should not be
relied on.

What is in this Chapter?

• A general description of the instrument.

• What is in the package.

• Order codes.

• Instrument dimensions and mounting in a panel.

28 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

What Instrument Do I Have?

The EPC programmable controller range provides precise control of industrial
processes and is available in three standard DIN sizes:
1
• ⁄16 DIN Model Number EPC3016, nominal size W 48mm x H 48mm (1.89in x
1.89in)

• 1⁄
8 DIN Model Number EPC3008, nominal size W 48mm x H 96mm (1.89in x
3.78in)
1
• ⁄4 DIN Model Number EPC3004, nominal size W 96mm x H 96mm (3.78in x
3.78in)

Universal input(s) accept various thermocouples, RTDs or process inputs.

Universal input/output (I/O) can be configured for control, alarm, re-transmission

outputs or contact inputs.

A changeover relay is available as standard in all controllers.

Controllers may be powered from either an AC line supply [100 - 230Vac +/-15%] or
low voltage [24Vac/dc (nominal) supply] depending on the order code.

EIA-485 (RS-485) digital communications is available in EPC3008 and EPC3004 as

standard and as an option in EPC3016.

Options available are:

1. A current transformer (CT) input plus a further contact input.

2. Ethernet communications protocol.

3. EIA-232/422 (RS-232/422) digital communications using MODBUS or EI-Bisynch

protocols is available in EPC3016 to provide compatibility with previous products.

More detailed functionality can be configured if the EPC3000 controller is put into
configuration mode. Configuration mode is password protected (see "Configuration
Level" on page 96).

Two panel sealing versions are available:

• Curved front. Panel sealing to NEMA 12X/IP65 qualified with indoor use only.

• Washdown. Panel sealing to NEMA 4X/IP66 qualified with indoor use only.

EPC3000 FM (Factory Mutual) version

The EPC3000 is also available as a Factory Mutual approved version - EPC3000 FM
- that is specifically designed to meet the Over Limit (High or Low) requirements for
industrial processes, and has the FM Approval Standard FM 3545 - Temperature
Limit and Supervisory Switches.

The 2 versions, EPC3000 and EPC3000 FM do differ, so attention should be paid

when defining, ordering and configuring the different controllers.

For further information see the following User Guides

• EPC3000 FM Programmable Controllers - User Guide (HA033650ENG Issue 1)

• EPC3000 Programmable Controllers - User Guide (HA032842ENG Issue 5).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 29
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Order Code
The controller may be ordered against a hardware ordering code only. In this case
when it is new and first switched on 'out of the box' it will start in a 'Quick
Configuration' mode ("Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller" on page 68).
Alternatively, it may be ordered against both hardware and software codes, in which
case it will be supplied configured and will start up directly showing the operator
display ("Start Up - New Configured Controller" on page 75).

Labels fitted to the sleeve show the ordering code, serial number, date of
manufacture, and terminal connections for the hardware fitted. For the latest order
codes please refer to the EPC3000 Data Sheet (HA032952) which can be found at
www.eurotherm.com.

30 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Unpacking Your Controller

The controller is supplied with:

• Controller, as ordered, fitted in its sleeve, two panel retaining clips and sealing
gasket mounted on the sleeve. The views below show the washdown version.

EPC3016

EPC3008 EPC3004

• Component packet containing snubbers (as ordered) for relay and triac outputs
(See "General Information About Relays and Triacs and Inductive Loads" on
page 53) and a 2.49Ω resistor for a current input (See "Linear Input (mA, mV or
V)" on page 45). The quantity depends on the fitted modules.

Snubber
2.49Ω
resistor

• Installation sheet Part Number HA032934 in English, French, German, Spanish,

Italian, Chinese and Russian.

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
If upon receipt, the unit or any part within is damaged, do not install but contact your
supplier.

Ensure only the originally supplied connectors are used.

Ensure the correct wire gauge size is used per circuit and it is rated for the current
capacity of the circuit.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 31
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Dimensions
General views of the controllers are shown below together with overall dimensions.

EPC3016 Controller

Front View
Curved front Washdown Width including
latching clips

Width 49.4 mm 48.1 mm 50 mm

Height
1.94 inch 1.89 inch 1.97 inch

Height 49.4 mm 48.1 mm

1.94 inch 1.89 inch

Width

Side View
B A 13.7 mm
Distance from panel 0.54 inch
to latching lug
Latching clip
45 mm B 13.2 mm
(1.77 in) Distance from panel 0.52 inch
to button top
Buttons
C 90 mm
Distance behind 3.54 inch
A C
panel

Top View

45 mm
1.77 in

32 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EPC3008 Controller
Front View
Curved front Washdown Width including
latching clips

Width 49.4 mm 48.1 mm 50 mm

1.94 inch 1.89 inch 1.97 inch

Height 97.3 mm 96.1 mm

3.83 inch 3.78 inch
Height

Latching clips
(both sides)

Width

Side View
B

A 15.1 mm
Distance from panel 0.59 inch
to latching lug

92 mm B 15.3 mm
3.62 in Distance from panel 0.60 inch
Latching to button top
clip
C 90 mm
Distance behind 3.54 inch
Buttons panel

A C

Top View

45 mm
1.77 in

HA033650ENG Issue 1 33
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EPC3004 Controller

Front View

Height

Latching clips
(both sides)

Width

Curved front Washdown Width including

latching clips

Width 97.3 mm 97.3 mm 98 mm

3.83 inch 3.83 inch 3.85 inch

Height 97.3 mm 97.3 mm

3.83 inch 3.83 inch

Side View
B

A 15.3 mm
Distance from panel 0.60 inch
to latching lug

92 mm B 15.3 mm
3.62 in Distance from panel 0.60 inch
Latching to button top
clip
C 90 mm
Distance behind 3.54 inch
panel
Buttons

A C

Top View

92 mm
3.62 inch

34 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Installation

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Electrical equipment must be installed, operated and maintained by only qualified
personnel.

Turn off all power to product and all I/O circuitry (alarms, control I/O etc.) before
starting the installation, removal, wiring, maintenance or inspection of the product.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

This instrument is intended for permanent installation, for indoor use only, and
enclosed in an electrical panel.

Select a location which is subject to minimum vibrations, the ambient operating

temperature is between 0 and 55oC (32 - 131oF) and operating humidity of 0 to 90%
RH non condensing.

The instrument can be mounted on a panel up to 15mm (0.6”) thickness. A minimum

panel thickness of 2mm (0.08in) mild steel is recommended to maintain a correct IP
rating.

To ensure effective panel sealing, mount on a non-textured surface.

Please read the safety information in "Safety and EMC" on page 12 before
proceeding.

Panel Mounting the Controller

1. Prepare a cut-out in the mounting panel to the size shown. If a number of
controllers are to be mounted in the same panel observe the minimum spacing
shown, see "Recommended minimum spacing of controllers" on page 36.

2. Carefully remove the panel retaining clips from the sleeve.

3. To achieve effective panel sealing, make sure the gasket is not twisted and is
fitted behind the front bezel of the controller.

4. Insert the controller through the cut-out.

5. Make sure that the panel retaining clips spring back into place to maintain the
panel sealing. Secure the controller in position by holding it level and pushing
both retaining clips forward.

6. Peel off the protective film from the display.

7. In the unlikely event that it should be necessary to remove the sleeve from the
panel, make sure that all power is turned off. Remove the controller from its
sleeve. Very carefully unhook the panel retaining clips from the side. A small
insulated screwdriver may be used to help unhook the clips.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 35
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The instrument includes polarizing features to help prevent the following:

a. The instrument being inserted upside down into sleeve.

b. Insertion of Low-Voltage PSU unit into High-Voltage PSU sleeve.

c. Insertion of other instruments into a sleeve with non compatible terminal

assignment.

Panel Cut Out Sizes

45 mm, − 0.0 + 0.6 92 mm − 0.0 + 0.8

1.77 in, −0.00, +0.02 3.62 in −0.00, +0.03

45 mm, − 0.0 + 0.6

EPC3016 1.77 in, −0.00, +0.02

EPC3008
92 mm − 0.0 + 0.8 EPC3004
3.62 in −0.00, +0.03

45 mm, − 0.0 + 0.6

1.77 in, −0.00, +0.02

(Not to scale)

Recommended minimum spacing of controllers

Applies to all models.

10 mm (0.4in)

38 mm (1.5in) (Not to scale)

36 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Installation EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Remove the Controller from its Sleeve

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Electrical equipment must be installed, operated and maintained by only qualified
personnel.

Turn off all power to product and all I/O circuitry (alarms, control I/O etc.) before
starting the installation, removal, wiring, maintenance or inspection of the product.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Ensure that the controller is powered down before attempting to remove it from its
sleeve. It can then be removed from its sleeve by easing the latching clips outwards
and pulling it forward out of the sleeve. When plugging it back into its sleeve, ensure
that the latching clips click back into place to maintain the panel sealing.

If the Ethernet option is fitted, ensure that the Ethernet cable is removed from the rear
of the controller before removing it from its sleeve.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 37
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Terminal Wiring
What is in this Chapter?
This chapter describes terminal connections and wiring.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Ensure all cables and wiring harness are secured using a relevant strain relief
mechanism.

Avoid ingress of conductive materials during installation.

Only connect wires to identified terminals shown on the product warning label, the
wiring section of the product User guide or Installation sheet.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

38 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Terminal Layout EPC3016 Controller

NO
1A CT 3A NO
IO1
1B C 3B C OP3 FM Relay Output
C (for FM High/Low
NO 2A LA 3C Limit)
NC
IO2
2B HD VI
C
Line/Mains Power L HE V+
Supply 
N HF V−
100-230Vac +/−15%
48 to 62Hz T/C Pt100 mA mV/1V/10V
Low Voltage Power Options Pt1000 FM Temperature
Supply Input
24
24Vac/dc +20%/−15%
Polarity not important 24

EPC3016 Options

Option C1 Option C2 Option C3 Option CR Option CE

EIA-232 EIA-485 EIA-422 Remote SP Ethernet

CT Input CT Input CT Input Digital Input

1 x Digital Input 1 x Digital Input 1 x Digital Input

Key to symbols used in the wiring diagrams

Logic (SSR drive) Relay output Changeover relay
output output

0-10V/0-20mA Triac output

analog output
Current Contact input
transformer input

HA033650ENG Issue 1 39
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Terminal Layout EPC3008 and EPC3004 Controller

NO
1A D1 3A NO
IO1
1B D2 3B C OP3 FM Relay Output
C (for FM High/Low
NO 2A D3 3C NC
Limit)
IO2
2B D4 HD COM
C Digital
LB Options D5 HE A(+) Communications
DI2 Digital (Contact)
input LC D6 HF B(−) EIA-485 (RS-485)

NO 4A D7 CT
CT input
IO4 4B D8 C
C
DI1 Digital (Contact)
5A DC LA input
24V Transmitter
power supply 5B SI VI
Line/Mains Voltage L S+ V+
2.49
Power Supply N
2.49
S− V−
100–230Vac ±15%
mV mA Pt100 T/C T/C Pt100 mA mV
48 to 62Hz
1V Pt1000 Pt1000 1V
10V 10V
Low Voltage 24
Power Supply 24 IP2 Secondary Sensor Input IP1 FM Temperature
24Vac/dc +20%/−15% Input
Polarity not important

EPC3008 and EPC3004 Options

Digital I/O Digital I/O

D1 - D8 D1 - D4
Voltage input Voltage input
On (1) >4V, <35V On (1) >4V, <35V
Off (0) >-1V, <+1V Off (0) >-1V, <+1V
Contact input On <100Ω Contact input
Off >28KΩ On <100Ω
Off >28KΩ

Secondary Secondary
Sensor Input Sensor Input

Option I8 Option IE
PV Input PV Input
8 × Digital I/O Ethernet
4 × Digital I/O

40 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Isolation Boundaries
The drawings show double and basic isolation boundaries.

EPC3008/EPC3004 Isolation
300V ac 300V ac
double double

Serial/Ethernet
Comms
Power Rectification 300V ac basic
Power isolation
supply
circuits
All digital inputs
and outputs
300V ac
double *
System Primary PV input
Secondary PV input circuits
*
300V ac
double
CT measurement
Relays and triacs
*
300V ac 300V ac
double double

0-20mA/0-10V
Transmitter PSU
isolated modules

Not isolated from each other

*

EPC3016 Isolation

300V ac 300V ac
double double

Serial/Ethernet
Comms
Power Rectification
300V ac basic
Power isolation
supply
circuits
All digital inputs
and outputs

*
300V ac System
double circuits

Primary PV input
Relays and triacs
*

300V ac
double
CT measurement
0-20mA/0-10V
isolated modules *

* Not isolated from each other

HA033650ENG Issue 1 41
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Wire Sizes
The screw terminals accept wire sizes from 0.5 to 1.5 mm (16 to 22AWG). Hinged
covers help prevent hands or metal making accidental contact with live wires. The
rear terminal screws must be tightened to 0.5 N⋅m (4.4 lb⋅in).

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Tighten terminal screws in conformance with the torque specifications.

A maximum of two wires, identical in type and cross sectional size can be inserted
per terminal. Strip the insulation from the cables by a minimum of 6mm (0.24") in
order to ensure good contact with the terminal. Do not exceed a maximum exposed
cable conductor length of 2mm (0.08").

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Controller Power Supply

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Power line and output circuits must be wired and fused in compliance with local and
national regulatory requirements for the rated current and voltage of the particular
equipment, i.e. UK, the latest IEE wiring regulations, (BS7671), and USA, NEC
class 1 wiring methods.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER
FIRE HAZARD
The controller must be connected to the correct rated power supply unit or supply
voltage in accordance with the supply voltage rating displayed on the controller
label. or in the User guide. Use only isolating PELV or SELV power supplies to
supply power to the equipment.
EPC3000 ("Line Voltage" intimates 230v only, but what if its 12, 24 48Volt:
The controller must be connected to the correct line voltage in accordance with the
order code and line voltage shown on the controller label. Use only isolating PELV
or SELV power supplies to supply power to the equipment.
EPC2000 (24v Only):
Do not connect the controller directly to line voltage.Use only isolating PELV or
SELV power supplies to supply power to the equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Wiring, it is important to connect the unit in accordance with the data in this User
guide and use copper cables (except the thermocouple wiring).

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

42 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Fuse Protection
External fuse protection must be provided to the power supply input to the controller.

Recommended external fuse ratings are as follows:

• For 24V ac/dc, 48 to 62Hz, fuse type: T rated 2A 250V.

• For 100–230Vac, fuse type: T rated 2A 250V.

Line/Mains Voltage Power Supply

Line
Neutral

• 100 to 230Vac, ±15%, 48 to 62Hz.

• Power rating EPC3016: 6W; EPC3008 and EPC3004: max 9W.

Low Voltage Power Supply

24V
24V

• 24Vac, +10/-15%, 48 to 62Hz.

• 24Vdc, −15%, +20% + 5% ripple voltage.

• The polarity is not important.

• Power rating EPC3016: 6W; EPC3008 and EPC3004: max 9W.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 43
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Sensor Inputs (Measuring Input)

This input is available on all models.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
The Primary Sensor Measuring Input is not isolated from Digital Inputs/Outputs (DI1
to 2 and DI1 to 8) and the CT input. If the sensor is not at ground or a safe potential
then IP1/2, Digital Inputs and CT will be at the same potential and care needs to be
taken in components ratings and instruction to personnel to ensure safety.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
POTENTIAL INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not run input wires directly alongside power cables.
When shielded cable is used, it must be grounded at one end only.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

NOTICE
MEASUREMENT INACCURACIES
There are several factors that can potentially cause measurement inaccuracies.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
To mitigate these factors:

• Do not run input wires together with power cables.

• When shielded cable is used, it must be grounded at one point only.

• Any external components (such as zener barriers, etc.) connected between

sensor and input terminals may cause incorrect measurement due to excessive
and/or un-balanced line resistance or possible leakage currents.

• The Primary Sensor Input is not isolated from the logic outputs & digital inputs.

• Pay attention to line resistance; a high line resistance may cause measurement
inaccuracies.

• Do not connect a single sensor to more than one instrument. Sensor break
operation could be severely compromised.

44 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Primary Sensor Input (Measuring Input)

Thermocouple Input

+
V+
V-
-

• Use the correct compensating cable (preferably shielded) to extend

thermocouple cabling, ensure that polarity is strictly followed throughout and that
thermal junctions are avoided in any intermediate connections.

RTD Input

PRT
PRT
Lead Compensation

• The resistance of the three wires must be the same. The line resistance may
cause measurement inaccuracies if it is greater than 22.

Linear Input (mA, mV or V)

mA/mV/V Input

Shield

• If shielded cable is used it should only be grounded in one place as shown.

• For a mA input connect the 2.49 burden resistor (R) supplied between the +
and − input terminals as shown. The resistor supplied is 1% accuracy 50 ppm.

Two-Wire Transmitter Inputs

Using internal 24V power supply (⅛ DIN and ¼ DIN only).

+ -
V+

V−
− 2.49 2-wire
transmitter
+
5A +
5B −

All models using an external power supply.

+
V+ −
V− 2.49 2-wire transmitter
− + +
−
External power
supply

HA033650ENG Issue 1 45
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Secondary Sensor Input (Measuring Input)

The secondary sensor input is not available in EPC3016 controller whereas it is an
orderable option for both the EPC3008 and EPC3004 controllers. It is protected by
Feature Security see section "Feature passwords" on page 221.

Secondary Thermocouple Input

+
S+
S−
−

Use the correct compensating cable (preferably shielded) to extend thermocouple

cabling, ensure that polarity is strictly followed throughout and that thermal junctions
are avoided in any intermediate connections.

Secondary RTD Input

SI PRT
S+ PRT
S− Lead Compensation

The resistance of the three wires must be the same. The line resistance may cause
measurement inaccuracies if it is greater than 22.

Secondary Linear Input (mA, mV or V)

+
S+
mA/mV/V Input
S−
−
Shield

If shielded cable is used it should be grounded in one place only as shown

For a mA input connect the 2.49 burden resistor (R) supplied between the + and −
input terminals as shown. The resistor supplied is 1% accuracy 50 ppm.

Secondary Two-Wire Transmitter Inputs

Using internal 24V power supply (⅛ DIN and ¼ DIN only)

+
S+ -
S− 2.49 2-wire
−
transmitter
5A +
+
5B
−

All models using an external power supply.

+
S+ −
S− 2.49 2-wire
transmitter
− + +
−
External power
supply

46 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Inputs/Outputs (IO)

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Electrical equipment must be installed, operated and maintained by only qualified
personnel.
Turn off all power to product and all I/O circuitry (alarms, control I/O, etc.) before
starting the installation, removal, wiring, maintenance or inspection of the product.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

I/O1 and I/O2 are available as standard in all models. I/O4 is available as standard in
models EPC3008 and EPC3004. This I/O may be ordered as Contact Input, Triac
Output, Logic Output, Analog Output or Form A Relay Output.

I/O3 is a changeover relay and is available as standard in all models

The function of the I/O is pre-configured by the application ordered, or configured

using the Quick Start Codes, "Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller" on page 68.
Alternatively, the function can be changed in Configuration level ("I/O List (io)" on
page 107) or through iTools ("The 'Browser' List" on page 216).

Input/Output 1 (I/O1)

I/O1 Relay Output (Form A, normally open)

1A
1B

• Isolated output 300Vac CAT II.

• Contact rating: 2A 230Vac +15% resistive.

• Contact rating minimum: 100mA 12V.

• The output switching rate must be set to prevent damage to relay and the output
device in use. See "Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms" on page 112.

I/O1 Logic (SSR drive) Output

+
1A
-
1B

• Not isolated from the sensor input, the current transformer input or the digital
inputs.

• Output ON state: 12Vdc at 44mA max.

• Output OFF state: <300mV, <100µA.

• The output switching rate must be set to prevent damage to the output device in
use. See "Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms" on page 112.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 47
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

I/O1 Triac Output

1A
1B

• Isolated output 300Vac CATII.

• Rating: 40mA to 0.75A rms, 30V rms to 230V rms +15% resistive load.

I/O1 Analog Output

+
1A
−
1B

• Output isolated 300Vac.

• Software configurable: 0–10Vdc, 0–20mA or 4–20mA.

• Max load resistance: Voltage >450 Current <550

• Calibration accuracy: % of reading + Offset.

– Voltage better than +(0.5% + 50mV).

– Current better than +(0.5% + 100µA).

• If additional isolated contact inputs are required, Analog Output modules can be
configured to provide this in Configuration level (Parameter dI see section "I/O
List (io)" on page 107 or using iTools ("Configuration Using iTools" on page 212)

– Contact open > 365Contact closed < 135

I/O1 Contact Input

1A
1B

• Not isolated from the current transformer input, sensor input 1 or logic outputs.

• Switching: 12Vdc at 40mA max.

• Contact open > 500. Contact closed < 150.

48 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Input/Output 2 (IO2)
I/O2 Relay Output (Form A, normally open)

2A
2B

• Isolated output 300Vac CAT II.

• Contact rating maximum: 2A 230Vac +15% resistive.

• Contact rating minimum: 100mA 12V.

• The output switching rate must be set to prevent damage to the relay and output
device in use. See "Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms" on page 112.

I/O2 Logic (SSR drive) Output

+
2A
−
2B

• Not isolated from the sensor input, the current transformer input or the digital
inputs.

• Output ON state: 12Vdc at 44mA max.

• Output OFF state: <300mV, <100µA.

• The output switching rate must be set to prevent damage to the output device in
use. See "Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms" on page 112.

I/O2 Triac Output

2A
2B

• Isolated output 300Vac CATII.

• Rating: 40mA to 0.75A rms, 30V rms to 230V rms +15% resistive load.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 49
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

I/O2 Analog Output

+
2A
-
2B

• Output isolated 300Vac

• Software configurable: 0–10Vdc, 0–20mA or 4–20mA.

• Max load resistance: Voltage >450 Current <550

• Calibration accuracy: % of reading + Offset.

– Voltage better than +(0.5% + 50mV).

– Current better than +(0.5% + 100µA).

• If additional isolated contact inputs are required Analog Output modules can be
configured to provide this in Configuration level (Parameter dI see section "I/O
List (io)" on page 107 or using iTools ("Configuration Using iTools" on page 212).

– Contact open > 365Contact closed < 135.

I/O2 Contact Input

2A
2B

• Not isolated from the current transformer input, sensor input 1 or logic outputs.

• Switching: 12Vdc at 40mA max.

• Contact open > 500. Contact closed < 150

50 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Input/Output 4 (IO4)

I/O4 Relay Output (Form A, normally open)

4A
4B

• Isolated output 300Vac CAT II.

• Contact rating maximum: 2A 230Vac +15% resistive.

• Contact rating minimum: 100mA 12V.

• The output switching rate must be set to prevent damage to the relay and output
device in use. See "Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms" on page 112.

I/O4 Logic (SSR drive) Output

+
4A
−
4B

• Not isolated from the sensor input, the current transformer input or the digital
inputs.

• Output ON state: 12Vdc at 44mA max.

• Output OFF state: <300mV, <100µA.

• The output switching rate must be set to prevent damage to the output device in
use. See "Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms" on page 112.

I/O4 Triac Output

4A
4B

• Isolated output 300Vac CATII.

• Rating: 40mA to 0.75A rms, 30V rms to 230V rms +15% resistive load.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 51
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

I/O4 Analog Output

+
4A
−
4B

• Output isolated 300Vac

• Software configurable: 0–10Vdc, 0–20mA or 4–20mA.

• Max load resistance: Voltage >450 Current <550

• Calibration accuracy: % of Analog reading + Offset.

– Voltage better than +(0.5% + 50mV).

– Current better than +(0.5% + 100µA).

• If additional isolated contact inputs are required Analog Output modules can be
configured to provide this in Configuration level (Parameter dI see section "I/O
List (io)" on page 107 or using iTools ("Configuration Using iTools" on page 212).

– Contact open > 365Contact closed < 135

I/O4 Contact Input

4A
4B

• Not isolated from the current transformer input, the sensor input or logic outputs.

• Switching: 12Vdc at 40mA max.

• Contact open > 500. Contact closed < 150

Output 3 (OP3)
Output 3 is available in all models. It is a Form C (changeover) relay. (In some earlier
models this was referred to as AA Relay).

The function of the I/O is fixed by the application ordered, or configured using the
Quick Start Codes, "Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller" on page 68.
Alternatively, the function can be changed in Configuration level ("I/O List (io)" on
page 107) or through iTools ("The 'Browser' List" on page 216).

3A
3B
3C

• Isolated output 300Vac CAT II.

• Contact rating: 2A 230Vac +15% resistive.

• The output switching rate must be set to prevent damage to the output device in
use. See "Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms" on page 112.

52 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

General Information About Relays and Triacs and Inductive Loads

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
High voltage transients may occur when switching inductive loads such as some
contactors or solenoid valves. These transients may introduce disturbances which
could affect the performance of the controller.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

For these types of load it is recommended that a snubber is connected across the
normally open contact of the relay switching the load. The recommended snubber
consists of a series connected resistor and capacitor (typically 15nF/100Ω). The
snubber is intended to prolong the life of the relay contacts.

CAUTION
FALSE TRIGGERING OF TRIAC OUTPUTS
A snubber should be connected across the triac output terminals to help prevent false
triggering under line transient conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not connect snubbers in certain high impedance loads.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

When the relay contact is open or a high impedance load is connected to it, the
snubber passes a current (typically 0.6mA at 100Vac and 1.2mA at 230Vac).
You must ensure that this current will not hold on low power electrical loads. If the
load is of this type the snubber should not be connected.

−A

−B

Line Neutral

−A

−B

Line Neutral

HA033650ENG Issue 1 53
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Current Transformer

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
The CT input and Digital Inputs are not isolated from the Primary Sensor Input
terminals. If the sensor is not at ground or a safe potential then the CT and Digital
Inputs will be at the same potential and care needs to be taken in components
ratings and instruction to personnel to ensure safety.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The current transformer input is an option in EPC3016 controller. It is supplied as

standard in EPC3008 and EPC3004 controllers.

A further contact input (LA) shares a common terminal (C) with the CT providing up to
three (EPC3016 controller) and five (EPC3008 and EPC3004 controllers) contact
inputs.

CT
C

• CT input current: 0–50mA rms (sine wave, calibrated) 50/60Hz.

• CT input resolution: 0.1A for scale up to 10A, 1A for scale 100A, 10A for scale up
to 1000A.

• CT input accuracy: +1% of reading.

• A burden resistor, value 10, is fitted inside the controller.

DANGER
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
A voltage limiting device fitted across the CT terminals, will help to prevent high
voltages appearing at the CT terminals if the controller is unplugged. A suitable
device is two back-to-back zener diodes rated between 3 and 10V, 50mA.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

54 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Contact Closure Inputs (DI1 and DI2)

Up to two digital inputs are available which may be connected to external contacts.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
The Digital Inputs and CT input are not isolated from the Primary Sensor Input
terminals. If the sensor is not at ground or a safe potential then the CT and Digital
Inputs will be at the same potential and care needs to be taken in components
ratings and instruction to personnel to ensure safety.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Digital input 1 is supplied with the current transformer, except on the Ethernet option
in EPC3016 where LA is available but the CT is not.

Digital Input 2 is only available in EPC3004 and EPC3008.

Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2

C LB
LA LC

• Switching: 12Vdc at 13mA max.

• Contact open > 400. Contact closed < 100

• The function of the I/O is fixed by the application ordered, or configured using the
Quick Start Codes, "Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller" on page 68.
Alternatively, the function can be changed in Configuration level ("I/O List (io)" on
page 107) or through iTools ("The 'Browser' List" on page 216).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 55
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Transmitter Power Supply

The Transmitter power supply is not available in the Model EPC3016.

It is fitted as standard in the Models EPC3008 and EPC3004.

+ 5A
24V
- 5B

• Isolated output 300Vac CAT II.

• Output: 24Vdc, ±10%. 28mA max.

Digital Inputs/Outputs 1 to 8
Up to 8 digital inputs/outputs are available on the options terminals depending on the
option fitted. These are marked D1 to D8.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
The Digital Inputs/Outputs and CT input are not isolated from the Primary Sensor
Input terminals. If the sensor is not at ground or a safe potential then the CT and
Digital Inputs will be at the same potential and care needs to be taken in
components ratings and instruction to personnel to ensure safety.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

• Current sinking output. External DC PSU 15V minimum, 35V maximum.

• Voltage sensing logic input. High level input voltage 4V minimum. 35V maximum.
Low level input voltage −1V minimum, +1V maximum.

• Contact closure input. Contact closed 0 to 100. Contact open >28k.

Example 1 BCD Switch Wiring

The diagram below shows an example of wiring a typical BCD switch using the first
four digital inputs of EPC3008 or EPC3004 controllers which could be used to select
a program number.

D1

D2 8 1

D3
C
C
D4
2 4
D5

D6

D7

D8

DC

The BCD Inputs can be turned on in Level 3 or Configuration level, see "BCD List
(bCd)" on page 145.

56 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Example 2 Digital Inputs Wiring

Digital Inputs (Logic Inputs or Contact Closure in any combination).

D1

D2 Logic
inputs
D3

D4

D5

D6 Contact
closure
D7 inputs

D8

Common DC

Example 3 Digital Outputs Wiring

Digital Outputs (Relay, Thyristor or SSR Drive in any combination).

D1 SSR

D2 Relay

D3 Relay

D4 Relay

D5 Relay

D6 SSR

D7 SSR

D8 SSR

Common DC - +
External power supply 15 to 35Vdc

HA033650ENG Issue 1 57
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Digital Communications Connections

In the EPC3008 controller and the EPC3004 controller, EIA-485 (RS-485) is
standard. EIA-232 (RS-232) and EIA-422 (RS-422) are not supported.

In the EPC3016 controller, EIA-485 (RS-485), EIA-422 (RS-422) and EIA-232

(RS-232) are supported via the option board.

ModbusRTU or EI-Bisynch protocol is used for compatibility with existing controllers.

Ethernet (ModbusTCP) is also supplied as an option in all controllers.

When connecting a computer to EIA-232 a USB adaptor is typically used. It is good

practice to use electrically isolated adaptors, since electrical noise from an industrial
situation may otherwise be transmitted to the computer damaging it.

To help prevent earth ground loops, the cable shield should be grounded at one point
only.

Isolated 300Vac CAT II.

Note: In the following wiring diagrams, the terminal functions are correct, but the
terminal layout may not be in the same order as on the instrument.

EIA-232 Wiring
EIA-232 is available in EPC3016 controller only and is used to connect one master
and one slave.

Twisted pair
EPC3016

HF Tx
Rx
USB
Tx HE Rx
Com
HD Common

EIA-232 to
USB converter Shielding Ground at one end

58 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Serial Communications EIA-485

The EIA-485 Modbus RTU function of an EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004 controller
provides an alternative digital communications method to Ethernet. It is independent
of Ethernet and can be used at the same time that Ethernet communications are
active. Data transmission is slower than Ethernet, but it is an effective
communications method in some situations.

It may be used in the following example contexts:

1. Connection to legacy EIA-485 Automation networks for SCADA or data

acquisition.

2. Direct connection to Programmable Logic Controllers using a serial network.

3. To interconnect an EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004 controller, for example to use

the broadcast master function to send a digital master setpoint profile to
downstream slave devices.

4. To connect Eurotherm iTools, typically in situations where older types of

instruments such as Series 3000 controllers are being replaced and EIA-485
infrastructure is already present. Ethernet will always be a better connection
method for new installations.

When connecting a computer to EIA-485, a USB adaptor is typically used. It is good

practice to use electrically isolated adaptors, since electrical noise from an industrial
situation may otherwise be transmitted to the computer damaging it.

EIA-485 supports up to 32 devices per network segment. Segment repeaters may be

used to increase the number of devices in an EIA -485 network. Note that 220Ω
termination resistors are required at the start and end of the RS485 line. Without
these, communications will suffer intermittent faults.

Connections using a suitable converter are shown in the following

diagram.
220
Twisted pair
termination
EPC3000 Controller
resistor

Rx HF Tx
USB
Tx
HE Rx

Com HD Common

EIA-485 to
USB converter Shielding Ground at
one end Daisy chain to
further controllers
or PLCs

220
termination HF Tx
resistor
HE Rx

HD Common

HA033650ENG Issue 1 59
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EIA-422 Wiring
EIA-422 (sometimes referred to as EIA-485 4-wire) is available as an option in
EPC3016 only. It allows up to 31 slaves to be connected to the network using
separate transmit and receive twisted pairs. As with the previous example the use of
a suitable communication converter is recommended to convert EIA-422 to USB. The
wiring connections are shown below.

220 termination resistor, RT, on

the last Rx of the converter unit

HA NC

Rx- HB Rx+

USB Rx Rx+ HC Rx−

Twisted pair
Tx Com HD Com
Com Twisted pair
Tx- HE Tx+

Tx+ HF Tx−

EIA-422 to USB
converter Shielded cable Daisy chain to
further
EPC3016
controllers

HA NC
220 termination resistor, RT, on
HB Rx+
the Rx terminals of the last
instrument in the line HC Rx−

HD Com
HE Tx+

HF Tx−

Ethernet Wiring
An Ethernet network port is available via an RJ45 connector, provided on the options
board if ordered.

Green

Amber

The connector has a pair of LED indicators.

Green = network speed. ON = 100, Off = 10.

Flashing amber = network activity.

The connection is 10/100BASE-T, autosensing.

60 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Wiring Examples

Heat/Cool Controller
This example shows a heat/cool temperature controller where the heater control uses
a SSR, triggered by a logic output on IO1, and the cooling control uses the relay, IO2.

See Note below

L
Cooling Controller
Heater
fuse fuse
fuse

Solid State 1A 3A
Relay
1B 3B
e.g. ESWITCH
2A 3C
Snubber
2B VI
+
Heater L V+
Cooling T/C
solenoid N V-
-

DANGER
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
For permanently connected equipment, include a disconnecting device such as an
isolating switch or circuit breaker in the installation.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

• The disconnecting device must be in close proximity to the equipment and within
easy reach of the operator.

• The disconnecting device must be marked as the disconnecting device for the
equipment.

Note: A single switch or circuit breaker can drive more than one instrument.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 61
Terminal Wiring EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

CT Wiring Diagram
This diagram shows an example of wiring for a CT input.

Current
Solid State
L Transformer
Relay
Heater N
e.g. ESWITCH
Heater Fuse Thermocouple

1A CT 3A

1B C 3B Current
Transformer (CT)
2A LA 3C

Controller fuse 2B HD VI
L
+
L HE V+
N
N HF V− -

Note: A burden resistor value 10Ω is mounted inside the controller.

DANGER
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
To help prevent a build up of high voltages at the output of the CT, if it is
disconnected from the controller, it is recommended that a voltage limiting device be
connected directly across the output of the CT. A suitable device is two back to back
zener diodes, rated between 3 and 10V at 50mA, as shown in the diagram above.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

62 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Start Up Modes
What is in this Chapter?
This chapter describes:

• What to expect when the controller is first switched on from new out of the box.

• A general description of the display and button functions.

• Power up after the instrument has been configured or commissioned.

Start up
Start Up (or Power Up) refers to the operation of the controller when switched on.

EPC3000 range controllers are designed to be application based. Their start up

modes will, therefore, vary depending on what was ordered. This chapter will
describe, in more detail, the different ways in which the controller operates at power
up.

1. Controller new 'out of the box' supplied unconfigured. "Start Up—New

Unconfigured Controller" on page 68.

2. Controller new 'out of the box' supplied fully configured according to the order
code. "Start Up - New Configured Controller" on page 75.

3. Subsequent start ups - Controller previously configured. Go to section

"Subsequent Start-ups" on page 76.

Start up Diagnostic mode

In all cases the controller display will perform a diagnostic in which all bars of each
character and every beacon is illuminated. In a configured controller the diagnostic
display is followed by the firmware version number and the instrument type number,
then a short summary of the Quick Codes. (A new unconfigured controller shows the
Quick Codes only, see section "Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller" on page 68).
In general the start up diagnostics is the same for each model.

The opening display is dependent upon its configuration status and is described in
subsequent sections.

The controller will scan for the types of the hardware fitted. If different hardware is
detected from that expected, then a message will be displayed and the instrument
will go into standby mode. To clear this message, either arrange to have the module
replaced with the expected module type OR configure the expected module
parameter value to match the fitted module parameter value.

A keyboard check will also be carried out.

The controller will go into standby if the
check does not complete as expected.

≈3s
V. xxx
≈3s
3004 V. xxx
1J4j4 V. xxx
1wmxx

HA033650ENG Issue 1 63
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

General Description of Front Panel Displays

EPC3016
- Process Variable (Green, Red when in alarm).
- During navigation: parameter value.

4-digit PV. Engineering units of the process variable

(examples include ℃, ℉, K, %, %RH, %C,
Flashes when any new alarm PH or blank).
occurs. The beacon will be
permanently lit when an alarm is
acknowledged but is still active. Engineering units of the lower display
(examples include %, mA or blank).
Programmer ramp/dwell status.

Active setpoint
(RSP, SP, SP2).
Output status

When lit, indicates that

When lit, indicates user comms are active.
that manual mode
has been selected.

Alphanumeric display capable of presenting Cyrillic text

• The parameter displayed can be selected via the
parameters in the HMI subclass of the instrument
function block.
• The ‘Home’ display, shows a scrolling message when
active.

EPC3008

Flashes when any new alarm occurs.

The beacon will be permanently lit when
an alarm is acknowledged but is still
Engineering units of the process variable
active.
(examples include ℃, ℉, K, %, %RH, %C,
4.5-digit PV. PH or blank).

Alphanumeric display
Shows a numeric value such as setpoint
or output value or a parameter Engineering units of the lower display
mnemonic.
(examples include %, mA or blank).

Alphanumeric display.
Shows a numeric value such as
setpoint or output value or a scrolling
description of the parameter mnemonic
All other display content as per EPC3016.

Segmented bar graph.

64 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EPC3004

5-digit PV

All other display content as per

EPC3016 and EPC3008.

The start up display depends on the controller configuration and is described in

subsequent sections.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 65
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

General Description of Operator Buttons

On EPC3016 only the 4 navigation buttons (Page, Scroll, Down, Up) are available.
On EPC3008 and EPC3004 all 6 buttons (4 navigation and 2 function) are available.

Button Layout

F1 F2

Page Scroll Lower Raise

Button Operation

Raise

The raise button increments parameter values to limits.

Parameter enumerations, however, do wrap-around.

Lower
The lower button decrements parameter values to limits.

Parameter enumerations, however, do wrap-around.

Page
In Operator levels 1 or 2 the Page button will select between the Home display or the
Programmer Edit and Run lists (if one of the programmer features is enabled).

In Levels 3 or Config the Page button will scroll through list headers (no auto-repeat).
If the Page button is pressed within a list, the display reverts to the top of the list. The
top of the list shows the list header only with no initial parameters.

Page (held for >3 seconds)

The Goto parameter is selected directly. This operation can be performed from any
display. If the Page is held for >3 seconds at power-up the Quick Start Mode is
selected following the entry of a password.

Page+Raise
Scroll back the list headers (with auto-repeat).

Scroll
Select parameters in turn, returning to the first parameter in the list or to a list header
if Level 3 or Configuration level is selected. If the button is held down the list will
auto-repeat. In levels 1 and 2 this button also scrolls through promoted parameters
when the HOME screen is selected.

Scroll+Raise
Scroll back through parameters from bottom to top (with auto-repeat).

66 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Page+Scroll - all variants

Jump directly to the "HOME page". The current operating level remains unchanged. If
the HOME page is already selected, these buttons will perform the custom function
as detailed in "Functionality of the F1 and F2 and Page + Scroll buttons" on
page 196. The default is Alarm Acknowledge.

Raise+Lower (Run/Hold)
If a programmer option is enabled and a program is configured, a momentary press
of these keys toggles between Run and Hold modes.

Raise+Lower (hold for >3 seconds - Mode)

If a programmer option is enabled and a configured program is running, holding these
buttons will abort the program.

If the HOME page is selected and the Programmer is not running, holding these
buttons will invoke the 'Mode' display where the Loop Mode parameter will allow
selection of Auto or Manual mode.

F1 and F2
F1 and F2 buttons are not available in EPC3016.

The functionality of these buttons is set by the Instrument function block. The default
settings are:

• F1: Auto/Man.

• F2: Run/Hold.

Note: A time-out applies to all displays. If no button presses are detected within a
timeout period (default 60s), the display will revert back to the Level 1 "HOME page".

HA033650ENG Issue 1 67
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller

If the controller is new and ordered as unconfigured it will start up in 'Quick Start
Mode'. This is a built in tool which is provided to allow users to configure the product
for the most commonly used functions such as the application type, input type, range,
and digital input functions. The Quick Configuration code consists of two ‘SETS’ of
five characters each. The upper section of the display shows the set selected, the
lower section shows the five digits which make up the set. Each digit may result in
multiple parameter values being set. The opening set is SET1 as shown.

Initially all characters are shown as an X. This is generally the default character for
‘not fitted/none’ or ‘use default’. The first character, initially flashing, selects the
Application Type as listed in the Quick Start Tables in the following sections. To select

the required application type press or .

Note: Quick Code 1 will only be available if the correct hardware is fitted for the
application. For example, the VPU application must have IO1 and IO2 as relay, triac
or logic outputs.

Press  to select the second character. The second character selects the ‘Input 1
Type’ as listed in the Quick Start Tables in the following sections. If hardware or
features are not available then the character is skipped over when pressing scroll.

Continue to set up all 5 characters using the Quick Start Tables.

When the last character in SET1 has been entered the display will automatically go to
SET2.

Adjust these in the same way as SET1.

At any time to return to the start of SET1, press

 

WARNING
HAZARD OF INCORRECT CONFIGURATION
Incorrect configuration can result in damage to the process and/or personal injury
and must be carried out by a competent person authorized to do so. It is the
responsibility of the person commissioning the controller to ensure the configuration
is correct.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or

equipment damage.

More detailed features available in the product may also be configured by entering a
Configuration Level. This is explained in "Configuration Level" on page 96, or by
using iTools as explained in "Configuration Using iTools" on page 212. iTools is a
configuration package available free of charge from Eurotherm by accessing
www.eurotherm.com.

68 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Quick Start Tables

The first digit in SET 1 will select an application which automatically configures
relevant function block parameters and creates connections between them to make a
complete control strategy relevant to that application.

The Configuration Using iTools chapter has a section called "Applications" on

page 228, which provides a general description of the available applications and their
associated graphical wiring (as diagrams).

Descriptions of each EPC3000 FM application are available in:

• "Applications" on page 228

• "Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM)" on page 400

Quick Code Set 1

Notes:
1. If no application is selected (1st character in SET 1 = X) the display will go
directly to the EXIT screen. If accepted the controller will take on a set of default
values. Any further configuration may be carried out by accessing the
Configuration Level ("Configuration Level" on page 96) or through iTools
configuration software ("Configuration Using iTools" on page 212).
2. For linear inputs the minimum/maximum input voltage/current will cause the
display to read range low/high respectively.
3. If the input 2 is not fitted Set 2 will be selected immediately after Input 1 Range
has been set.

* Temperature, Carbon potential and dew point control are described as separate
supplements to this manual and are available from www.eurotherm.com. Part
numbers HA033033, HA032987 and HA032994 respectively.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 69
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Quick Code Set 2

Notes:
1. The Quick Code assumes that the CT input is monitoring the current of the heat
channel load which in all applications is wired to IO1.PV.
2. If IO.1 module is a DC Output module then CT Input digit is not alterable.
3. If CT input is not set to X, the CT Input will be enabled and will monitor the
current; however, CT alarms will not be configured. This means that if CT alarms
are required they must be wired by the user. A typical example of wiring alarms is
shown in section "Example 1: To Wire an Alarm" on page 224.

Quick Codes DIO

If the Options module has been fitted then the function of the module is defined by
fixed configurations. These are selected by Digit 4 in the previous table. The fixed
configurations are listed in the table below:

Example of Quick Codes

SET1: 1. J. 3. X. X

SET2: X. M. W. 7. C

70 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The controller is configured for PID Heat Only, Input 1 Thermocouple Type J, Range
0–400℃, Input 2 and Range not used, CT Input not used, Digital Input LA will select
Auto/Manual, Digital Input LB will select Global Acknowledge of Alarms, the optional
digital IO will be configured in accordance with ‘Config 7 in the above
table,Temperature Units Degrees Celsius.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 71
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Save or Discard Quick Codes

When all characters have been entered the display will show:

If No is selected (by pressing  ) the display returns to SET1.

Press or to select SAVE then either press  to save immediately or wait
for 2 seconds to save automatically. This accepts the Quick Configuration Codes and
the controller enters Operator Level 1.

OR

Press or to select Disc then either press  to select or wait for 2
seconds to accept. This discards the last entered codes and returns the controller to
its previous settings.

Selecting either SAVE or diSc will result in the instrument performing a restart.

72 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configure the Communications Protocol

From firmware versions V3.01 and above, the communications protocol and
associated selections may be chosen during the start-up sequence. This is to simplify
access to Digital Communications when the instrument is being configured. When
the controller is new and first switched on, or following a cold start, the following
sequence is displayed at start up and after the Quick Codes have been saved:

Operation Action Display Notes

Digital comms
setup is selected COmm
SETUP
Select the
required serial 1. Press  to select the NONE NONE - No serial comms
protocol serial Protocol to be m.Rtu - ModbusRTU
used for your process
S. PROT
EI.bS - EI-Bisynch
This list only appears for serial
comms (EPC3004, EPC3008,
EPC3016 with Serial Option
board).
If Modbus or
EI-Bisynch is 2. Press  to select the 1
selected node address
ADDR
Select Ethernet
protocol 3. Press  to select NONE NONE = No Ethernet
Ethernet Protocol m.tCP - ModbusTCP Slave only
E. PROT
EIP.m - EtherNet/IP Slave and
Modbus TCP Slave
bAC.m - BACnet Slave and
Modbus TCP Slave
m.mst - Modbus TCP Master and
Slave
This list only appears if the
Ethernet option module is
installed and the features have
been purchased.
Turn Auto See "AutoDiscovery" on
discovery on or 4. Press  to select OFF page 320.
off Auto Discovery OFF - No auto discovery
A. DISC
On - Auto discovery enabled
Save and exit
comms set up 5. Press  No No - Return to comms set up
Save - Save the comms settings
exit
Disc - Discard comms settings.
The questions will be asked again
at the next power up.

Note: In all cases the option is selected using or .

HA033650ENG Issue 1 73
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Re-Enter Quick Code mode

It is possible to re-enter Quick Start mode, by holding down the Page key during
power up. Enabling Comms Protocol does not appear when the quick code is
re-entered.

It is then necessary to enter the configuration level password. See "To Select
Configuration Level" on page 98.

If the configuration of the instrument is subsequently modified by a change made via

Configuration Mode this will be shown by the quick code digits being separated by
the decimal place dot (indicating that the codes shown may not reflect the current
configuration). If the codes are then accepted the instrument is re-configured to
satisfy the code settings.

Notes:
1. If the config clip is connected the instrument may be powered from the USB port
of the PC. In this case it is necessary to disconnect the config clip to re-enter
Quick Start Mode. Alternatively, disconnect the power pins from the config clip.
See "Using the Configuration Clip" on page 213.
2. If a Cold Start (See "Cold Start" on page 244) has been invoked the instrument
will always start in Quick Code Mode without the need to enter the configuration
password. Enabling Comms Protocol will then be displayed.

74 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Start Up - New Configured Controller

If a product has been ordered using the Order Code it will already be configured.
When new, ‘out of the box’, it will then power up in operating Level 1.

Also, if it has previously been configured, for example, using the Quick Codes then it
will start up in Operating mode.

The start up display is dependent upon the application or the way in which the
controller is configured, see ‘Start-up Modes’ in the following section.

The view shown above is generally referred to as the ‘HOME’ Display.

In EPC3008 and EPC3004 the HOME display normally consists of three lines. The
upper line normally shows the Process Value "PV",

The center line normally shows the Working Setpoint "WSP" if the controller is
working in its normal Auto Mode or the Output demand if it is in Manual Mode.
(Auto/Manual control is explained in section "Auto/Manual Mode" on page 80.

The lower line shows a scrolling message providing a longer description of the
selected parameter. It may also display a further parameter value if this has been set
up in the instrument block, see "Display Functionality Sub-List (HmI)" on page 195.

Bar Graph
In EPC3008 and EPC3004 a bargraph may also be configured using iTools. The
bargraph may be ‘soft’ wired to any convenient source such as PV input or output
demand, see "Example 4: To Configure a Bargraph" on page 225.

EPC3016 has two lines of display. The line below the top one alternates between a
mnemonic and the scrolling message. A bargraph is not available.

Setpoint
The Setpoint is defined as the value which the process is required to attain. The
value of the setpoint may be obtained from a number of sources, for example,
manually using the front panel keys, via the programmer function block, via an
external analog source, via digital communications. The working setpoint is,
therefore, defined as the current setpoint derived from any of these sources.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 75
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Subsequent Start-ups
When the controller is no longer new and has been in normal use it will start up in
Level 1, even when it has been powered down in Operator level 2 or 3. If, however, it
was powered down when in Configuration level it will power up in ‘Standby’ and show
a message - ‘POWERED DOWN WHILST IN CONFIG MODE’. To clear the message
re-enter configuration level (with password - see "To Select Configuration Level" on
page 98), then, either continue with changes to the configuration or accept existing
changes by exiting configuration level. The reason for this is that the controller may
have been part configured prior to shut down and either needs completion of the
configuration or confirmation that no further changes are required.

Start-up Modes
The controller may start in Manual or in Auto Mode depending on the setting of the
‘Recovery Mode’ parameter, see section "Configuration Sub-List" on page 119.

If the Recovery Mode has been set to Manual (default) the controller will start in ‘Man’
mode. It will show the letter ‘M’ and the ‘hand’ symbol in the display. Initially the output
will be at the ‘Fallback Value’, see section "OP Sub-list" on page 131, but may then
be changed using the raise or lower buttons. Auto mode may also be selected.

If the Recovery Mode has been set to ‘Last’ the controller will start in either in Manual
mode or Auto mode depending on whatever mode it was in prior to being powered
off. ‘Auto’ mode is shown in the EPC3004 controller view in the previous section.

For further information on start up modes see section "Start-up and Recovery" on
page 302.

76 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Standby
Standby is the term given when the instrument strategy is not controlling due to the
following reasons:

• If the instrument is being configured i.e. in Quick Code Mode, Configuration

Mode or a clone file is being loaded.

• If the instrument has detected an unexpected condition (for example, was

powered down whilst in configuration mode, or fitted hardware does not match
expected hardware). See "Start up Diagnostic mode" on page 63 for more
information on unexpected conditions that will place the instrument into standby.

• If the instrument is forced into standby via the

Instrument.Diagnostics.ForceStandby parameter, see "Subsequent Start-ups" on
page 76.

When the instrument is in standby, the following occurs:

• All relay, logic or triac outputs are placed into their 'Off' state, unless being used
as Valve Raise (Up) / Lower (Down). In this case the Standby Action is
configurable by the ‘StandbyAction’ parameter (Rest, Up, Down) found in the ‘IO’
list, (section "I/O List (io)" on page 107).

• Analog outputs will go to the ‘OutputLow’ limit found in the ‘IO’ list.

• The control loop will be placed into Hold.

• If an alarm has the ‘StandbyInhibit’ parameter set to ‘On’ (section "Alarms List
(ALm)" on page 141), then the alarm is inhibited (active alarms will be turned Off
and new alarm conditions will not be acted upon).

• If in standby due to the instrument being configured, a running program will reset.

WARNING
LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS
If an output is not internally wired by the application, but is written to by
communications, ensure that the appropriate action is taken in the event that
communications is lost.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or

equipment damage.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 77
Start Up Modes EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Auto-scaling of decimal point

The range of values displayed on the ‘top line’ will vary for each instrument version. If
a value exceeds the display capabilities, the resolution will automatically be reduced
by a factor of 10, up to the display limit in the table below. If the value cannot be
displayed, HHHH or LLLL will be shown.

Auto-scaling is applied to parameter values being edited via the HMI.

Instrument Decimal Minimum Maximum

points
EPC3016 0 −1999 9999
1 −199.9 999.9
2 −19.99 99.99
3 −1.999 9.999
EPC3008 0 −1999 19999
1 −199.9 1999.9
2 −19.99 199.99
3 −1.999 19.999
EPC3004 0 −19999 99999
1 −1999.9 9999.9
2 −199.99 999.99
3 −19.999 99.999
4 −1.9999 9.9999

78 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Operator Levels
What is in this Chapter?
This chapter describes the different operator levels:

• Operator Level 1.

• Operator Level 2.

• Introduction to Operator Level 3.

• Return from a higher level to a lower level of operation.

Overview
There are 5 levels of operation:-

1. LEv1 - Level 1 has no password, the control is active and only the home list is
accessible.

2. LEv2 - Level 2. The control is active and an extended home list is accessible.

3. LEv3 - Level 3. The control is active and the complete operator parameter set is
shown and modifiable; the complete Configuration parameter set is shown, (read
only); the user calibration (two point cal) facility is available.

4. ConF - Configuration level is used to setup the whole controller; the

configuration parameters are accessible; the operator parameters are available,
without the need to switch to operator mode. The instrument calibration
parameters are also available in this mode. See "User Calibration" on page 369.

Levels 2, 3 and Configuration can be restricted by passwords.

5. In addition the Quick Start Mode (See "Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller"
on page 68) is provided to allow users to configure the product in the minimum
number of operations. It is only available at power up after the instrument is cold
started or by holding the Page key during power up.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 79
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Operator Level 1
Operator Level 1 is entered:

1. After the Quick Code has been entered for those controllers supplied
unconfigured.

2. After power up when the controller has been configured.

The display shown below is for a typical temperature controller.

Process Value (PV)

Manual output level (%) or Setpoint (SP) (Required Temperature)

Scrolling messages (when applicable)

Bargraph (not EPC3016)
The new setpoint is
entered when the
Press to increase the setpoint button is released and
is indicated by a brief
Press to decrease the setpoint flash of the SP value

In general the current value of the process is shown in the upper display.

By default the controller will start in’ Manual’ Mode. This is shown by ‘M’ in the display,
the ‘Hand’ symbol, the value of the output (in %) and the bargraph (if available).

In ‘Auto’ mode, the required value (Setpoint) is shown in the lower display.

Additional scrolling messages are shown, for example, when operator parameters
are selected (see section "Level 1 Operator Parameters" on page 82). These may be
standard descriptions of the parameter currently selected or they may be user
specific messages which have been set up using iTools. (See "Parameter Promotion"
on page 233).

Auto/Manual Mode
In Manual mode the value of the output is increased or decreased directly by the
operator using the Up and Down buttons.

In Auto mode the process is adjusted automatically by the controller in response to

differences between the setpoint and the actual measured value.

In Operator Level 1 the controller may be placed into manual operation as follows:

• By default in EPC3008 and EPC3004 controllers, Auto/Manual may be selected

by the user by toggling the F1 button.

• By default in EPC3016 controller Auto/Manual may be selected by the user by

pressing and holding the and buttons for longer than 3 seconds. This

will show the A-M (Auto-manual select) parameter. Then press or to
toggle between auto and manual.

80 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Manual is indicated in the HMI by showing the ‘Hand’ symbol and the character ‘M’.

The current level of the output demand is shown as a percentage. This may be

increased or decreased by pressing the or buttons respectively.

Note: Alternative ways to select Auto/Manual may be configured and will be

explained in subsequent chapters of this manual.

System Messages
In addition to standard (or customized) scrolling messages, System Messages may
be shown at any time. A list of these is shown in "Notification Messages" on
page 378. The following two messages are typical and could appear at start up.

Setting the Comms Password

If the comms password has not been set and either Fixed comms or Option comms
has been configured then this notification message will be scrolled across the HMI
'PLEASE SET THE COMMS PASSWORD VIA ITOOLS'. Until the comms password
is set, Fixed comms and Option comms will have a limited parameter read/write
access. This security feature is described in section "Comms Configuration Level
Password" on page 21.

Comms Configuration Active

The scrolling message ‘COMMS CONFIGURATION ACTIVE’ will be displayed if, for
example, iTools is connected to the controller and has been placed in configuration
mode by iTools. The controller will be placed into standby mode.

The character ‘H’ signifies that the controller has been placed into Hold mode and is
displayed as shown below.

Note: The displays shown above also apply if the controller is in Operator Levels 1,
2 or 3.

Bargraph
In EPC3008 and EPC3004 a bargraph may also be shown which displays the
configured value as a horizontal bar. This is set up in Configuration Level (See
"Display Functionality Sub-List (HmI)" on page 195).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 81
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Level 1 Operator Parameters

A minimal list of parameters is available in Operator Level 1 which is designed for day
to day use. Access to these parameters is not restricted by a password.

Press  to step through the list of available parameters. The mnemonic of the

parameter is shown in the lower display. Alternatively, press and hold  then press

to scroll forward through parameters and to scroll back.


Press to return to the Home display.

The value of the parameter is shown in the upper display. If the value is read/write

press or to adjust. If no key is pressed for 60 seconds the controller returns

to the HOME display. The navigation is shown diagrammatically for the first two
parameters in the example below:

The parameters that appear depend upon the functions configured. The list can also
be customized using iTools by adding or removing parameters. The table below
shows an example of the list of parameters in Level 1. Parameters may be added to
or deleted from this list, see "Parameter Promotion" on page 233.
Parameter Scrolling name Description Further
Mnemonic information
W.OUT WORKING OUTPUT The output demand – 0% to 100% or
−100% to +100%.
R-L Remote-local select Selects the Remote or Local setpoint "Loop - Main
source. Sub-list" on
page 117.
SP1 SETPOINT 1 The value which the process is
required to attain as set by setpoint 1.
SP2 SETPOINT 2 The value which the process is
required to attain as set by setpoint 2 if
selected.
ai1.PV pv The current value of the process (read
only) read by the primary input IP1.
ai2.PV pv The current value of the process (read If the secondary
only) read by the secondary input IP2. input is used.
LD.I CT Load Current The current being supplied to the If the CT is being
heater as measured by the CT. used.

82 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Level 1 Programmer Display

By default, if the controller has the programmer installed, the status of a running
program can be displayed.

Programmer List


pROg
Press the page button , the display will show list

Repeatedly press  to read the currently running program.

Parameters displayed depend on the program and the type of segment configured
but generally include the following:

Parameter Scrolling name Description

Mnemonic
p.num program number Alterable but does not affect the running program.
p.name program name Read only. This parameter is available in firmware
versions V3.01 and above.
p.cur current program Read only.
c.name current prog name Read only.This parameter is available in firmware
versions V3.01 and above.
p.mode program mode Displays the current mode e.g. Run, Hold, Reset.
p.sp program setpoint Read only.
p.tim.l program time left Read only.
p.cyc.l program cycles left Read only.
s.num current segment number Read only.
s.name segment name Read only.This parameter is available in firmware
versions V3.01 and above.
s.type current segment type Read only.
s.tim.l segment time left Read only.
tsp target setpoint Read only.
r.rate ramp rate Read only.
evt.x event x Event off or on. Further events are shown if configured.
p.advn program advance Read only.

By default the programmer parameters available in Level 1 are read only. It is

possible, however, to provide programmer edit access to Level 1, see "Programmer
List (PROG)" on page 135. If this has been done the lists of parameters is shown in
section "Level 2 Programmer Display" on page 88.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 83
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Programmer Status Indicator

The current status of the running program is displayed as follows:

State Ramp/Step Up Dwell Ramp/Step Down
Reset

Run

Hold/Holdback Flashing (1 Flashing (1 Flashing (1

second second second
period 66% period 66% period 66%
duty cycle) duty cycle) duty cycle)

Complete Not applicable Flashing (2 Not applicable

(Dwell End) seconds
period 66%
duty cycle)

84 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Operator Level 2

To Select Operator Level 2

Operator level 2 is normally restricted by a password. By default the password is
0002 in a new controller. Enter Level 2 as follows:

Operation Action Display Notes

Select Level 2 
1. Press and hold LVL2
until Goto is shown.
goto
2. Press to choose
LEv 2 (Level 2).

3. Press  to enter.
Enter the
password 4. Press or to 0___ Press  to move to the next
enter the correct digit digit.
value of the password.
code
The default password for level 2 is
'0002'.
5. Press  to accept A special case exists if a security
the value and move to code has been configured as
the next digit. '0000'. If this has been done it is
not necessary to enter a code and
6. The controller will now the controller will enter the chosen
show the top of the level immediately.
HOME list in Level 2.
If an incorrect code is entered the
display will return to HOME. After
three wrong attempts the
password entry system will lock
out for a time set by the ‘password
Lockout Time’ set in the "Security
Sub-List (SEC)" on page 197.
Select Level 2 7. Repeatedly press The list of available parameters is
parameters 00 given in the table in the next
 . section.
w. out

HA033650ENG Issue 1 85
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Level 2 Operator Parameters

Parameters available in level 1 are also available in level 2, but level 2 includes
additional parameters for commissioning purposes and for more detailed operation.

Press  to step through the list of available parameters. The mnemonic of the

parameter is shown in the lower display. Press to return to the previous
parameter.

The value of the parameter is shown in the upper display. If the value is read/write

press or to adjust. If no key is pressed for 60 seconds the controller returns

to the top of the HOME list.

By default the following table lists all possible parameters available in both Levels 1
and 2. Parameters associated with a particular feature will only be shown if that
feature is configured.

Parameter Scrolling name Description Further

Mnemonic information
W.OUT WORKING OUTPUT The output current demand – 0% to 100% Level 1 & 2
or -100% to +100%.
R-L Loop Remote/Local Selects the Remote or Local setpoint Level 1 & 2
source.
SP.HI SETPOINT HIGH Maximum value allowed for the local
setpoints (SP1 and SP2).
SP.LO SETPOINT LOW Minimum value allowed for the local
setpoints (SP1 and SP2).
SP1 SETPOINT 1 The value which the process is required to Level 1 & 2
attain as set by setpoint 1
SP2 SETPOINT 2 The value which the process is required to Level 1 & 2
attain as set by setpoint 2 if selected.
SP.UP Setpoint Rate up Limits the maximum rate at which the
working setpoint can change in an
increasing (upwards) direction.
Setpoint rate limiting is often used to
prevent rapid bumps in controller output
that may damage equipment or product, or
cause upset to downstream processes.
SP.DWN Setpoint Rate down Limits the maximum rate at which the
working setpoint can change in an
increasing (downwards) direction.
AI1.PV PV The current value of the process (read Level 1 & 2
only) read by the primary input IP1.
AI2.PV PV The current value of the process (read Level 1 & 2
only) read by the secondary input IP2.
TUNE AutoTune Enable Starts an autotune. "Autotuning" on
page 309
PB.H Ch1 Proportional Channel 1 (heat) proportional band.
Band
PB.C Ch2 Proportional Channel 2 (cool) proportional band.
Band
TI Integral Time Integral time.
TD Derivative Time Derivative time.
cbh cutback high High cutback.
threshold
cbl cutback low Low cutback.
threshold

86 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Scrolling name Description Further

Mnemonic information
MR Control Manual If the integral parameter is turned off the
Reset controller is working in proportional only or
proportional + derivative. This parameter
allows the output to be adjusted manually
to offset and difference between SP and
PV.
HYS.H Control Ch1 On Off If channel 1 is configured for On/Off control
Hysteresis this parameter allows a difference to be set
between the output being on or off.
HYS.C Control Ch2 On Off If channel 2 is configured for On/Off control
Hysteresis this parameter allows a difference to be set
between the output being on or off.
C.DB Control Ch2 The Ch1/Ch2 Deadband is a gap in
Deadband percent between output 1 going off and
output 2 coming on and vice versa.
For on/off control this is taken as a
percentage of the hysteresis.
OUT.HI Output High Limit To limit the maximum controller output.
OUT.LO Output low Limit To limit the minimum controller output.
LD.I CT Load Current This is the sampled RMS current Level 1 & 2
measured during the on time of the heater.
LK.I CT Leak Current The RMS current measured flowing
through the load during the off states of the
controller.
LD.SP CT Load Threshold Sets a threshold to trigger an alarm if the
load current is exceeded.
Lk.SP CT Leak Threshold Sets a threshold to trigger an alarm if the
leak current is exceeded.
oc.sp CT overcurrent Sets a threshold to trigger an over current
threshold alarm if the current measured exceeds a
maximum limit set by the process.
cs.id Customer ID A user configurable non-volatile
identification parameter.
rec.no dataset to load Selects which recipe dataset to load.
store dataset to save Selects which of the 5 recipe dataset in
which to store the current active
parameters.

The home list can be customized by adding up to 60 parameters; iTools will be

required to configure the promoted parameters, see "Parameter Promotion" on
page 233.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 87
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Level 2 Programmer Display

If the controller has the programmer installed, by default, the programmer can be
edited and operated from the HMI. A step by step guide to setting up a program is
given in "To Setup a Program from the HMI" on page 268.

Programmer List


pROg
Press the page button , the display will show list

Repeatedly press  to read the currently running program. The program can be
Run, Held or Reset from this list.

Parameters displayed are (but not limited to depending on the program):

Parameter Scrolling name Description

Mnemonic
p.num program number Alterable, but does not run a program.
p.name program name Read only.This parameter has been added in firmware
versions V3.01 and above.
p.cur current program Read only.
c.name current prog name Read only.This parameter has been added in firmware
versions V3.01 and above.
p.mode program mode The programmer can be changed to Run, Hold, Reset,
p.sp program setpoint Read only.
p.tim.l program time left Read only.
p.cyc.l program cycles left Read only.
s.num current segment number Read only.
s.name segment name Read only.This parameter has been added in firmware
versions V3.01 and above.
s.type current segment type Read only.
s.tim.l segment time left Read only.
tsp target setpoin Read only.
r.rate ramp rate Read only.
evt.x event x Event off or on. Further events are shown if configured.
p.advn program advance Alterable YES/NO. Advances the program to the next
segment.

88 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Program Setup List

By default programs can be set up in Level 2.

p. set

Press the page button , the display will show list

Repeatedly press  to read the currently running program. Programs can be
edited from this list.

Parameter Scrolling name Description

Mnemonic
p.num program number Alterable but does not run a program. If the program is running
WORk is shown signifying the working program.
p.name program name Read only.This parameter has been added in firmware versions
V3.01 and above.
hb.sty holdback style Alterable: PROG (holdback applies to the whole program).
SEGm (holdback applies to each segment).
hb.typ holdback type Alterable: OFF, LOW, HIGH, bANd. For a full definition see
"Holdback" on page 261.
ramp.u ramp units Alterable: P.SEC (per second), P.mIN (per minute), P.HR (per
hour).
dwel.u dwell units Alterable: SECS, mINS, HrS.
p.cyc program cycles Alterable: The number of time a program repeats. CONt
(continuous) or 1 to 9999.
Default 1
p.end program end type Alterable: Behavior when the program ends dWEL (dwell at
current setpoint). RSEt (reset). tRAk (track).
s.num current segment Alterable:
number
s.name segment name Read only.This parameter has been added in firmware versions
V3.01 and above.
s.typ segment type RAtE, tImE, dWEL, Step, CALL, ENd.
tsp target setpoint Alterable:
r.rate ramp rate Alterable:
ev.op event output Alterable:
dur duration Alterable: Appears if the segment type is Dwell or Time.
r.time time to target Alterable: Appears if the segment type is Time.
c.prog call program Alterable: Appears if the segment type is Call.
c.cyc call cycles Alterable: Appears if the segment type is Call.

The above is a summary the parameters which are displayed (but not limited to) and
depends on the program. A full description of the parameter meanings and how to set
up programs is given in the following sections:

• Configuration chapter "Programmer List (PROG)" on page 135.

• Programmer chapter "Programmer" on page 257.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 89
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Operator Level 3
In Operator level 3 (and in Configuration Level) all parameters are organized in lists
(or groups). Only parameters related to enabled functions are shown.

Each list may contain operator level and configuration parameters; the parameters
are only shown when the instrument is in the appropriate mode. If a list does not
contain at least one displayable parameter, it is skipped completely.

During navigation, the lower display shows the mnemonic code of the parameter or
the List header. After 6 seconds, a scrolling string with either the parameter or the List
description will be displayed.

To Enter Level 3

Operation Action Display Notes

Select Level 3  LEv1 is displayed first. Continue
1. Press and hold until LVL3 to hold the button to obtain
LEv 3 is shown. LEv3.
goto
2. Press  to enter.
Enter the
password 3. Press or to 0___ Press  to move to the next
enter the correct digit digit.
value of the password.
code
The default password for level 3
is '0003'.
4. Press  to accept the A special case exists if a pass
value and move onto the LEV3 code has been configured as
next digit. pass '0000'. If this has been done it is
not necessary to enter a code
5. If the correct password and the controller will enter the
has been entered the chosen level immediately.
message PASS will be
If an incorrect code is entered
displayed momentarily. the display will return to HOME.
The controller is now
If an incorrect code is entered
operating in Level 3.
the display will return to HOME.
After three wrong attempts the
password entry system will lock
out for a time set by the
‘password Lockout Time’ set in
the "Security Sub-List (SEC)" on
page 197.
Select list  This shows the Analog Input
headers 6. Repeatedly press A1 List.

list Press

+ to return to
the previous list header.
Select This shows the Input Type.
parameters in the 7. Repeatedly press   tC
list
IN. TYP

To return to the HOME page relevant to the controller mode press the 'Home' key
combination (Page+Scroll).

The HOME display is also selected after a timeout period with no key presses. The
timeout defaults to 60 seconds but can be adjusted between 0 and 60 seconds. A
setting of 0 means no timeout (see "Display Functionality Sub-List (HmI)" on
page 195), so that the HMI remains in the selected level.

90 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Operator Levels EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Level 3 Operator Parameters

The Operator Level 3 lists are essentially the same as configuration level. These are
shown in the next chapter.

To Return to a Lower Level

From Level 3 you can select Level 1 or Level 2 as follows:


1. Press and hold until Goto is displayed.

2. Press or to select LEv1 (or LEv2).

3. Press  to accept.

The display will briefly show PASS and will return to the selected level default display.

A security code is not required when going from a higher level to a lower level.

Note: if the controller had been switched off whilst operating in levels 2 or 3 it will
return to operator level 1 when switched on again. If it was switched off when in
configuration level it will start up with a message - P.CnF - powered down whilst in
config mode. See section "Subsequent Start-ups" on page 76.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 91
Navigation Diagram EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Navigation Diagram
The Navigation Diagram shows the series of operations of the front panel buttons
which are required to navigate to specific parameters.

For ease of access parameters are arranged in lists. Each list has a header and each

header is selected by repeated presses of the ’Page’ button  . Each list header
has a title, for example, the first header is the Analog Input (AI LIST).

A list may have a number of instances. For example, if two Analog Inputs are
supplied then the list is split into 1 INST and 2 INST selected using the ‘Raise’ and

‘Lower’ buttons / .
Similarly a list may have a number of Sub-Lists. For example, the LOOP list. The

sub-lists are selected by entering the first sub-list, using the ‘Scroll’ button  , then
using the ‘Raise’ or ‘Lower’ buttons to select the following sub-lists.

When the appropriate list or sub-list has been selected use the ‘Scroll’ button to scroll
through a list of parameters. Use the Page button to scroll back.

The Navigation Diagram which follows shows these button presses diagrammatically.

The Navigation Diagram generally includes all lists and all parameters available in
configuration level. Some parameters may not be shown in Level 3 and only those
lists and parameters which are required for a particular application are displayed on
the controller.

Toolkit Blocks
Toolkit blocks are orderable features which consist of a number of function blocks.
These may be added later using ‘Feature Security’ see section "Security Sub-List
(SEC)" on page 197.

Two types of Toolkit blocks may be ordered:

• Standard. This is available in all firmware versions.

• Enhanced. This is available in firmware versions 3.01 and above.

A maximum of 200 wires are available regardless of which toolkit block option has
been purchased. A "standard" instrument may be upgraded to an "enhanced" variant
using an online feature code purchase.

The table below lists the function which are available depending upon which toolkit
option is ordered:

92 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Navigation Diagram EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Features
Function Block No Toolkit Standard Enhanced
• Maths Operators 0 4 8
• Logic Operators Lgc2 0 4 8
• Logic Operators Lgc8 0 2 4
• Timer 0 3 4
• Counter 0 4 12
• Totalizer 0 1 2
• Analog Multiplexers 0 1 2
• User Values 0 1 1
• Input Monitors 0 2 2
• Switchover Block 0 1 1
• Input Linearization 0 2 2

The function blocks are described in the Configuration chapter.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 93
Navigation Diagram EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Navigation Diagram
Return to previous  +
Enter CONF or
1 to 2 d1 to d8
LEV3  A1  io  O.dIO  Ct
 ZIRC Zirconia list appears only if  To LOOP list
LIST LIST LIST
 
LIST

LIST purchased/enabled
     

1 2 io.1 io.2 OP.3 io.4 LA Lb d1 d2 MAIN CONF CLN Imp

INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST CT.EN s.list
INST INST s.list s.list s.list
CT.SRC
CT.RNG    
                       
CT.LAT
IDENT LD.SP
IN.TYP IN.TYP IDENT IDENT IDENT IDENT IDENT IDENT IDENT State Probe Cln.en z.run
LIN LIN TYPE LK.SP
TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE c.pot O2.typ Clean z.abrt
PV OC.SP
UNITS UNITS PV PV PV PV PV PV PV Dew.pt O2.unt Abrt.c Imped
DEC.P DEC.P SENSE LD.I
VAL.HI VAL.HI OUT VAL.HI SENSE SENSE SENSE O2 Co.idl c.tmr z.max.r
OUT LK.I
RNG.HI RNG.HI VAL.LO VAL.LO SENSE VAL.LO OUT Sat.lim Min.t c.mv z.thrs
LD.ALM
RNG.LO RNG.LO OUT.HI OUT.HI OUT.HI Out.st Soot.k c.rcov z.rst
MV.HI MV.HI LK.ALM
OUT.LO OUT.LO OUT.LO Soot c.rst
OC.ALM
MV.LO MV.LO OUT OUT OUT Cof Brnof
SHUNT SHUNT CT.ACK
M.O.T M.O.T M.O.T H2f c.frq
CT.HYS
PV.OFS PV.OFS CYCl.T CYCl.T CYCl.T Pf Max.t
FILT.T FILT.T SENSE SENSE SENSE Prb.in c.min.r
CJ.TYP CJ.TYP INER INER INER Tmp.in c.max.r
SB.TYP SB.TYP BKLSH BKLSH BKLSH p.bias
SB.OUT SB.OUT STBY STBY STBY t.bias
CJC.IN CJC.IN FLBK.V FLBK.V FLBK.V
PV PV
PV.ST PV.ST
MV.IN MV.IN

Return to previous  +
From CT or
1 to 6
ZIRC list  LOOp  PROG  P.SET

ALm  bCd  RECP  To COMMS list
LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST
 

     
   
mAIN CFG SP FF AtuN PiD OP diAG 1 2
S.LIST S.LIST S.LIST S.LIST S.LIST S.LIST S.LIST S.LIST E.ACCS P.NUM INST INST BCD.1 LOAD
R.ACCES p.name BCD.2 SAVE
        RECOV HB.STY   BCD.3 E.ALT
         
SERVO HB.TYP BCD.4
A-M HEAT.T RNG.HI F.TYPE TUNE G.SCH FLBK.V L.BRK.T R.RESN HB.VAL TYPE TYPE BCD.5
R-L COOL.T RNG.LO DV T.HI SET OUT.HI L.BRK.D RESN RAMP.U STAT STAT BCD.6
MODE ACTN SP.HI F.GAIN T.LO BOUND OUT.LO L.BRK MAX.EV DWEL.U IN IN BCD.7
SP.SRC SP.SRC SP.LO F.BIAS T.CH2 GS.HYS H.OUT DEMO R.EVT P.CYC THLD THLD BCD.8
PV D.TYPe SP.SEL F.LEAD T.ALGO PB.H C.OUT DEV mx.prg P.END HYST HYST BCD.OP
TGT.SP PB.UNT SP1 F.LAG T.STAT PB.C MAN.OP TGT.OP mx.seg S.NUM LATCH LATCH BCD.ST
W.SP RECv.M SP2 F.HI Stage TI TRK.OP W.OP.HI s.name BLOCK BLOCK
W.OUT BAD.TX PSP.S F.LO Sgt.t TD CH2.DB W.OP.LO S.TYPE DELAY DELAY
HOLD MAN.TX PSP F.HOLD CBH OP.UP P.TERM TSP OUT OUT
TRACK AM.LVL RSP.T F.OP CBL OP.DWN L.VOLT R.RATE ACK ACK
F.MAN Sp.lvl RSP.HI FB.TRM MR OP.DIS W.PB.H R.TIME INHIB INHIB
I.HOLD m.lvl RSP.LO OP.HI PWR.FF W.PB.C DUR S.INHB S.INHB
RSP.EN OP.LO C.DB W.TI C.PRG.N REF REF
RSP HYS.H NLIN.C W.TD EV.OP RATE RATE
TRM.HI HYS.C STEP.V W.CBH RT.UNIT RT.UNIT
TRM.LO PB2.H TT.H W.CBL FILT.T FILT.T
TRIM PB2.C TT.C W.MR
RT.UNT TI2 R.OP.HI AT.LIM
SP.UP TD2 R.OP.LO. IN.HLD
SP.DWN CBH2 R.OP.DI IN.TRA
RT.DIS CBL2 IN.MAN
RT.DNE MR2 IN.AUT
RT.SVO OP.HI2 M.RDY
TRk.PV OP/LO2
TR.PRG HYS2.H
TR.RSP HYS2.C
SP.BAL

94 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Navigation Diagram EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Return to previous Up to 2 Timer and counters are

available from firmware version
 3.01 and greater To AN
From +
SWITCH
RECIPE list
COMM MATH Lgc2 Lgc8 1 to 4 tmr Cntr tOtL
list   1 to 8  1 to 8     
LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST
  
      
  
F.COM Fixed Comms O.COM Option Comms 1 2 1 2 1 2
INST INST INST INST INST INST INST INST Type Enbl Total
Time Dir In
        e.time r.cry Units
       
In o.flow Res
mAIN NWRK BCST mAIN NWRK BCST OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER Out Clock Alm.sp
s.list s.list s.list s.list s.list s.list
IN1.X IN1.X IN1 IN1 N.IN N.IN trigd Targt Alm.op
IN2.X IN2.X IN2 IN2 IN.inv IN.inv Count Run
            Reset Hold
UNITS UNITS FBACK FBACK Op.inv Op.inv
RES RES INV INV IN1 - 8 IN1 - 8 o.clr reset
INTF BAUD ENABL INTF IP.MD ENABL
L.LIM L.LIM OUT OUT Op Op
PROT PRTY DEST PROT IP.A1-4 DEST
H.LIM H.LIM STATE STATE STATE STATE
N.STA NODE VALUE N.STA IP.S1-4 VALUE
FBACK FBACK
W.TIME m.fmt W.TIME IP.G1-4
FB.VAL FB.VAL
W.ACTN W.ACTN MAC1 -6
SEL SEL
W.RCOV W.RCOV B.STM
IN1 IN1
W.FLAG W.FLAG R.PRT
IN2 IN2
DELAY DELAY M.FMT
OUT OUT
T.FMT T.FMT
STATE STATE

From Toolkit Enabled (The Toolkit Enabled includes lists from Math to Switch Over) Return to
TOTALIZER list AI list
Return to previous
  + 

1 to 3 1 to 12 1 to 2
AN.Sw u.VAL I.mon Sw.OV OR INSt 1 to 8 Lin Rem.1
LIST      LIST  
LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST
    
       
 
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 INFO HmI SEC diAG mOdS CAL 1 2
INST INST INST INST INST INST In.hi INST INST s.list s.list s.list s.list s.list INST INST
in
LIST
In.lo Rng.hi
      Sw.hi          Rng.lo
                
Sw.lo Scl.hi
In In In.1 In1 In1 Lang h.disp L2.p New.al Io.f Scl.lo
h.lim h.lim Units Units in in
In.2 Id Time.o
l.lim l.lim Res Res Max Max In2 In2 t.unit H.TIME L3.p g.ack Io1.e out out
f.val Stat Res
Fback Fback h.lim h.lim Min Min In3 In3 i.num K.LOCK Cfg.p Smpl.t Io2.f state state
f.typ Mode Units
Fb.val Fb.val l.lim l.lim Thold Thold In4 In4 i.type BG.TYP c.pas.d t.fmt Io2.e form form
Sel.in c.val Out
In.sel In.sel Value Value d.abv d.abv In5 In5 Psu BG.MAX c.pas.e f.stby Io4.f units units
t.abv t.abv b/mod In6 In6 i.ver BG.MIN p.lock e.stat Io4.e stat
In1–in8 In1–in8 statu statu Res Res
Out Out Alm.d Alm.d Out In7 In7 cm.id BG.PV c.mem R,cnt Opt.f Fback Fback
State State Alm.tm Alm.tm stat in8 in8 Cs.id F1.FN Opt.e Fb.val Fb.val
res res Al.op Al.op out out F2.FN Out.lo Out.lo
reset reset PS.FN Out.hi Out.hi
In.st In.st Num.pt Num.pt
Edt.pt Edt.pt
In1 In1
Out1 Out1

In16 In16
Out16 Out16

HA033650ENG Issue 1 95
Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configuration Level
Configuration of the instrument through the front panel is particularly useful where
relatively small changes are required on site, possibly during commissioning. For
larger or more detailed changes the use of Eurotherm iTools configuration package is
recommended and this is described in the next chapter.

What is in this Chapter

• This chapter describes how to configure the controller through the HMI.

• Lists all parameters which are available in each function block.

Function Blocks
The controller is made up of a number of hardware and software function blocks.
Each block has inputs and outputs which are wired together in software (soft wired) to
match the application for which the controller is intended.

The following diagram shows an example of function blocks which make up a typical
controller:

Inputs Control Outputs

TC
Processes
RTD Sensor input Input/output 1
mA (AI List) io List
V Control block
Loop List
Output 2
Setpoint
io List
Loop SP List

Digital Input A Output 3 To plant

Alarms block
IO List io List actuators
AL LIst

Digital Input B
IO List Timer block Output 4
tmr List io List

Current
transformer CT Alarm
CT List CT List

Digital EIA232,
Communications EIA425
Comm List Ethernet

The Temperature (or Process Value (PV) is measured by the sensor and compared
with a Setpoint (SP) set by the user.

The purpose of the control block is to reduce the difference between SP and PV to
zero by providing a compensating output to the plant via the output driver blocks.

The timer and alarms blocks may be made to operate on a number of parameters
within the controller, and digital communications provides an interface for data
collection, monitoring and remote control.

96 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The way in which each block performs is defined by its internal parameters. Some of
these parameters are available to the user so that they can be adjusted to suit the
characteristics of the process which is to be controlled.

These parameters are found in lists in Configuration Level.

The controller can also be configured using iTools as described in "Configuration

Using iTools" on page 212. iTools is proprietary software designed to configure
Eurotherm instruments and may be downloaded from www.eurotherm.com.

Configuration Level Parameters

In Configuration Level all parameters are organized in lists (in the same way as
Operator Level 3). Only parameters related to enabled functions are shown.

Each list may contain operator level and configuration parameters; the parameters
are only shown when the instrument is in the appropriate mode. If a list does not
contain at least one displayable parameter, it is not shown.

During navigation, the center display (lower display in EPC3016) shows the
mnemonic code of the parameter or the List header. A scrolling string with either the
parameter or the List description is displayed in the lower section of the display.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 97
Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Select Configuration Level

WARNING
HAZARD OF INCORRECT CONFIGURATION
Incorrect configuration can result in damage to the process and/or personal injury
and must be carried out by a competent person authorized to do so. It is the
responsibility of the person commissioning the controller to ensure the configuration
is correct.

In configuration level the controller does not control the process or provide alarm
indication. Do not select configuration level during a live process.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

The procedure is similar to that shown in "To Enter Level 3" on page 90.
Operation Action Display Notes
Select Level 3  LEv1 is displayed first. Continue to
1. Press and hold CONF hold the button to obtain LEv3.
until LEv 3 is shown.
goto
2. Press to select
CONF

3. Press  to enter
Enter the The default password for Configuration
4. Press  to move
password 0___ level is '0004'.
along to the next digit. A special case exists if a security code
code has been configured as '0000'. It is
5. Press or to then not necessary to enter a code and
select the correct digit the controller will enter the chosen level
value of the password. CONF immediately.

6. If the correct password pass If an incorrect code is entered the

display will return to HOME.
has been entered the
message PASS will be After three wrong attempts the
displayed momentarily.
Conf password entry system will lock out for
a time set by the ‘password Lockout
The controller is now list
Time’ set in the "Security Sub-List
operating in (SEC)" on page 197, and the scrolling
Configuration Level. message ‘HMI Config Level Locked
Too Many Incorrect password
Attempts’ will be displayed.
Select list  This shows the first list - Analog Input
headers 7. Repeatedly press A1 List.

list Press

+ to return to the
previous list header.
Select This shows the Input Type.
parameters in 8. Repeatedly press   tC
the list
IN. TYP

To Return to Level 1
From Configuration level it is not possible to select Level 2 or Level 3.


1. Press and hold until Goto LEv1 is displayed.

2. Press  to accept.

98 HA033650ENG Issue 1
Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configuration and Level 3 Navigation Diagram

The full navigation diagram for Level 3 and Configuration Levels is shown in section
"Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Press
 to scroll through each list header (the name of the function block) in turn.

Pressing  on one of these headers will do the following depending upon the
function block being accessed:

1. Display the first parameter (see Recipes).

2. Display the instance selection (see IO for named instances or Alarm for
numbered instances).

3. Display the subclass selection (see Loop).

When at 2 or 3 above, pressing up and down will cycle through the

instances/subclasses.

Examples
The following examples show how to navigate through different function blocks.

Example 1: no additional instances and no sub-classes

The CT list is an example of a class which contains no additional instances and no
sub-classes. In other words it is a simple list of parameters under the heading CT
which set up the current transformer.

1. Press
 until the list is displayed.

2. Then  press to scroll through the parameters.

3. To change the value of a selected read/write (R/W) parameter press or .

Example 2: multiple instances and no sub-classes (named)

The io List is an example of a class which contains multiple instances and no
sub-classes. The instances are named instances, such as io.1, io.2, OP.3, etc. (see
"I/O List (io)" on page 107). The list of parameters for each instance are not
necessarily the same.

The navigation diagram for this type of function block is shown below:

More Instances

First parameter

More parameters

1. Press
 to scroll to the io List.

2. Press  to select the first instance of the io parameters. This is displayed as
io.1 and INST and denotes that this is the first instance of parameters in that
category.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 99
Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

3. Press  again to scroll through parameters for io.1 or, to select the next

and subsequent instances press .

4. Press to scroll back.

5. To change the value of a selected read/write (R/W) parameter press or .

Example 3: multiple instances and no sub-classes (numbered)

The Alarm List is also an example of a class which contains multiple instances and
no sub-classes. The instances in this case are numbered instances, such as 1 to 6
"Alarms List (ALm)" on page 141. The list of parameters for each instance are not
necessarily the same.

More Instances

First parameter

More parameters

Example 4: single instance and multiple sub-classes

The Loop List is an example of a class that has a single instance and multiple
sub-classes. A sub-class (or List) groups parameters under meaningful
sub-headings. For example, all parameters associated with the setpoint are grouped
together in the SP List (displayed as S.LIST). Each subclass will be different.

The navigation diagram for this type of function block is shown below:

More Instances

First parameter

More parameters

Example 5: multiple instances and multiple sub-classes

The communications list is an example of a class which has multiple instances and
multiple sub-classes. The instances are Fixed and Option and the Sub Lists are
Main, Network, Broadcast.

More Instances

First subclass

First parameter

100 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Navigation

1. Press  to select parameters in a list.

2. Press or to change the parameter value (if not read only).
Some parameters are analog in which case the value can be changed between
limits.

Some parameters are enumerated which means they have a mnemonic associated
with them which can be selected from a list.

The following pages list all parameters which are available in the controller in their
respective lists. Parameters are only shown in the controller if the feature has been
supplied and enabled.

Notes:
1. R/O = Read Only in all levels.
2. Conf R/W = Read/Write in Configuration level only.
3. L3 R/W = Read/Write in Level 3 (and Config).
4. L3 R/O = Read Only in Level 3 (and all lower levels).

Enumerated values
In the value column for enumerated values in the following tables, the associated
numeric value is shown. This is the value that would need to be written if a 3rd party
comms master was being used. For example:

• tC (0)

• mV (1)

• V (2)

• mA (3)

• RTD (4)

HA033650ENG Issue 1 101

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Analog Input List (a1 a2)

The first press of

 after entering Level 3 or Configuration, will show the ‘ANALOG
INPUT’ list. From this list you can configure the input type and other characteristics of
Input 1 (and Input 2, if fitted).

• A1 instance 1 of the AI list contains the parameters available for IP1.

• A2 instance 2 of the AI list contains the parameters available for IP2. The IP2
input is an orderable option in EPC3008 and EPC3004. It is not available in
EPC3016.

Access to the Analog Input parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to CONF
 +
Enter CONF A1
To next list
 
level LIST
 (io)


1 2
There are 2 instances of
INST INST the AI list if the second
analog input is fitted
   
IN.TYP IN.TYP
LIN LIN
UNITS UNITS
DEC.P DEC.P
RNG.HI RNG.HI
RNG.LO RNG.LO
MV.HI MV.HI
MV.LO MV.LO
SHUNT SHUNT
PV.OFS PV.OFS
FILT.T FILT.T
CJ.TYP CJ.TYP
SB.TYP SB.TYP
SB.OUT SB.OUT
CJC.IN CJC.IN
PV PV
PV.ST PV.ST
MV.IN MV.IN

The parameters in the following list are identical for both 1 and 2.

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
INST Analogue input 1 Input 1 List (IP1). Conf R/W
2 Input 2 List (IP2) EPC3008 and EPC3004 only. L3 R/O

102 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
in.typ Input Type tC 0 Thermocouple. Conf R/W
Default: Thermocouple L3 R/O.
mV 1 milli volts.
V 2 Volts.
mA 3 milliamps.
RTD 4 Platinum resistance thermometer.
zirc 5 High Impedance Zirconia probe (only available on the secondary
input).
Lin Linearisation J 0 Thermocouple type J. Conf R/W
type L3 R/O.
k 1 Thermocouple type K.
Default: Type K Not shown if the
input type is RTD.
L 2 Thermocouple type L.
r 3 Thermocouple type R.
b 4 Thermocouple type B.
n 5 Thermocouple type N.
t 6 Thermocouple type T.
s 7 Thermocouple type S.
CSt.1 8 Custom linearization 1. To download special linearization tables Conf R/W
see "To Load a Custom Linearization Table" on page 242. L3 R/O.
CST.2 9 Custom linearization 2. Two tables may be downloaded into the Shown for all
EPC3000 series controllers. input types.
100 10 Resistance thermometer type PT100. Shown if the input
is RTD, mV, V or
1000 11 Resistance thermometer type PT1000.
mA.
LIN 12 Linear. Shown for mV, V
or mA inputs.
Sqr 13 Square root.
units Units See section "Units" on page 105 for a list of units used throughout. Conf R/W
L3 R/W
DEC.P Resolution nnnnn 0 The number of decimal points shown in the display. Conf R/W
nnnn.n 1 Range none to four decimal points. L3 R/O
nnn.nn 2 Default: nnnn.n
nn.nnn 3
n.nnnn 4
RNG.HI Range high Range high limit. Used to limit ranges of Thermocouple and RTD Conf R/W
input types, and scale mV, V and mA inputs. AI2 also includes L3 R/O
Zirconia.
Default tc 500; mV 40; V 10; mA 20; RTD 500; Zirconia 2000
RNG.LO Range low Range low limit. Used to limit ranges of Thermocouple and RTD
input types, and scale mV, V and mA inputs. AI2 also includes
Zirconia.
Default tc 0; mV 0; V 0; mA 4; RTD 0; Zirconia 0
mv.hi input high limit mV: -800.0 High limit for mV, mA or V inputs. Conf R/W
to 800.0 Default: mV 40; V 10; mA 20 Not shown for
V: -10.00 to thermocouple or
mV.lo input low limit Low limit for mV, mA or V inputs.
10.00 RTD inputs.
Default: mV 0; V 0; mA 4
mA: -800.00
to 800.00
shunt shunt value 1.00 to Value of the shunt resistor for mA inputs. Conf R/W
1000.00 Default: 2.49Ω.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 103

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
PV.OFS PV offset 0.0 A simple offset is provided to adjust the process variable by a Conf R/W
fixed amount across its span. This can be used to compensate for L3 R/W
known thermocouple and other tolerances which may exist in
multi instrument installation so that all instruments read the same
value.
See also "Calibration using a Dry Block or Equivalent" on
page 374 which describes the two point calibration adjust method.
This may be used to apply a linear correction to the temperature
reading.
Default: 0.0
FILT.T Filter time 0 to 60 Some industrial installations can cause electrical noise to be Conf R/W
constant introduced into the process measurement. This could be due, for L3 R/W
example, to EMC or mechanical linkages. A filter is provided to
reduce the frequency of electrical noise seen by the instrument.
The effect of electrical noise can be reduced by increasing the
filter time constant, but a compromise must be achieved as it
could affect the closed loop response of the system.
The larger the number, the slower the measured temperature will
be to respond to fluctuations.
Default: 1.6s
CJ.TYP CJC type AutO 0 A thermocouple measures the temperature difference between Conf R/W
the measuring junction (hot junction) and the reference junction L3 R/O
(cold junction). Auto uses the measurement of the temperature
Only shown for
made by the instrument where the thermocouple is connected to
its rear terminals. thermocouple
inputs.
Default: Auto
0 1 The reference junction is held at a fixed known temperature of 0
degrees usually by an external ice point method.
50 2 The reference junction is held at a fixed known temperature of 50
degrees usually by an external hot box method.
off 3 CJC is turned off. This could be used, for example, where a
thermocouple measurement is made by an external transmitter
which does not linearize the thermocouple curve.
SB.TYP SENSOR Off 0 The controller continuously monitors the impedance of a Conf R/W
break type transducer or sensor connected to the input. Off means sensor L3 R/O
break is not detected.
LO 1 Sensor break is detected if impedance at the terminals is above a
low threshold (typically between 3 to 5kOhms).
Default: Low
HI 2 Sensor break is detected if impedance at the terminals is above a
high threshold (typically between 12 to 20kOhms)
sb.out SENSOR OFF 0 No sensor break detected R/O
break
On 1 Sensor break detected. If the sensor break requires to activate a
output
soft alarm the sensor break output parameter can be wired to a
Digital High Alarm. (see section "Example 1: To Wire an Alarm" on
page 224.
CJC.IN CJC Temperature The CJC temperature is a measure of the temperature at the R/O
instrument terminals. It is relevant only for thermocouple inputs
and is provided as a diagnostic aid.
PV PV Process value is the displayed value on the instrument, usually Conf R/O
the measured temperature when the instrument is controlling a L3 R/O
temperature loop.
PV.ST PV Status The state of the PV is continuously monitored. Conf R/O
See section "Status" on page 106 for a list of enumerated values L3 R/O
MV.IN measured value This is the measured value in units of mV or ohms, dependent Conf R/O
upon input type. The value measured at the rear terminals can be L3 R/O
useful as a diagnostic aid to determine if the thermocouple or
linear input sensor is wired correctly.

104 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Units
The list below applies to all function blocks which contain Units

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
units Units None 0 No units will be displayed. Conf R/W
AtmP 1 Temperature units. ℃, ℉, K are set in the Instrument Info list section L3 R/W
"Instrument List (INSt)" on page 193.
V 2 Volts.
mV 3 Millivolts.
A 4 Amps.
mA 5 Milliamps.
PH 6 pH.
mmHG 7 Millimeter of mercury.
PSi 8 Pounds per square inch.
bAr 9 Bar.
mBar 10 millibar.
P.RH 11 Per cent relative humidity.
PErc 12 Per cent.
mmwG 13 Millimeter Water Gauge.
inwG 14 Inches water gauge.
inWW 15 Not used.
OhmS 16 Resistance (ohms).
PSIG 17 Pounds per square inch gauge.
P.O2 18 Per cent O2.

PPm 19 Parts per million.

P.CO2 20 Per cent CO2.

P.CP 21 Per cent carbon.

P.SEc 22 Per cent per second.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 105

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Status
The list below applies to all function blocks which contain global status enumeration.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
Good 0 The process variable is working correctly. Conf R/W
Off 1 Channel is configured to be off. L3 R/W

O.rng 2 When the input signal exceeds the upper input limit by more than 5% the PV
will flash indicating over range.
If the value is too high to fit the number of digits on the display "HHHH" will
flash (refer to "Auto-scaling of decimal point" on page 78 for display
capability for each instrument size).
U.rng 3 When the input signal exceeds the lower input limit by more than 5% the PV
will flash indicating under range.
If the value is too high to fit the number of digits on the display "LLLL" will
flash (refer to "Auto-scaling of decimal point" on page 78 for display
capability for each instrument size).
Hw.s 4 Input hardware status is unknown.
Rng 5 The input status is set to Ranging at the point of an analog input
configuration change. It will remain in Ranging until an exit from a config
induced instrument restart.
OFLw 6 Process variable overflow, possibly due to calculation attempting to divide a
number by a relatively small number.
Bad 7 The PV is not reading correctly which could be due to an open sensor.
Hwc 8 The hardware capabilities have been exceeded at the point of configuration,
for example configuration set to 0 to 40V when input hardware is capable of
up to 10V.
Ndat 9 Insufficient input samples to perform calculation.

106 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

I/O List (io)

The following modules may be fitted in the controller:

• None.

• Logic I/O module.

• Form A relay.

• Triac.

• Isolated DC output.

Output 1 beacon is operated from IO(1) when it is configured as an output.

Output 2 beacon is operated from IO(2) when it is configured as an output.

Output 3 beacon is operated from OP(3).

Output 4 beacon is operated from IO(4) when it is configured as an output.

Access to the Input/Output parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

From previous Return to previous list header To next list

list (AI)  + (O.diO)
 io 
LIST


io.1 io.2 OP.3 io.4 LA Lb
INST INST INST INST INST INST

           
IDENT IDENT IDENT IDENT IDENT IDENT
TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE
PV PV PV PV PV PV
VAL. HI VAL. HI OUT VAL. HI SENSE SENSE
VAL. LO VAL. LO SENSE VAL. LO
OUT. HI OUT. HI OUT. HI
OUT. LO OUT. LO OUT. LO
OUT OUT OUT
M. O. T M. O. T M. O. T
CYC. T CYC. T CYC. T
SENSE SENSE SENSE
INER INER INER
BKLSH BKLSH BKLSH
STBY STBY STBY
FLBK. V FLBK. V FLBK. V

The following table includes all available input/output parameters but the ones
displayed depend on how each I/O is configured.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 107

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
IDent IO HARDWARE ID None 0 This displays the type of IO hardware fitted. Choices are: Conf R/O
L.IO 1 Logic input/output. L3 R/O

ReLY 2 Relay.
ssr 3 Triac.
dc.OP 4 DC output.
L.iP 5 Logic input.
type type of io OnOF 10 On off output. Conf R/W
tpo 11 Time proportioning output. L3 R/O

up 15 Valve position raise.

Down 16 Valve position lower.
Valve positioning UP/DOWN works across pairs of outputs ie:-
UP : DOWN
IO.1 : IO.2
IO.2 : OP3
OP3 : IO.4
di 5 Contact closure input.
mA.OP 0 mA output.
V.OP 1 Voltage output.
PV process For an Input type : The measured process variable. Conf R/W
variable For an Output type : The demanded output value. L3 R/W
val.hi demand high Percentage PID demand value giving maximum output - "OUT.H" - Conf R/W
Allows for "Output Splitting" L3 R/W
Default: 100.0 Only shown for
val.lo demand low Percentage PID demand value giving minimum output - "OUT.L" - DC or time
Allows for "Output Splitting". proportioning
output
Default: 0.0
out.hi output high The maximum average output power that can be supplied from this
output - Allows for "Output Splitting"
Default: 100% for TPO; 20 for mA; 10 for V i.e. the highest possible
value for selected type.
out.lo output low The minimum average output power that can be supplied from this
output - Allows for "Output Splitting"
Default: 0
out output For Digital Output Types: Conf R/O
A value of 0 indicates that the output is low (relay de-energized) A L3 R/O
value of 1 indicates that the output is high (relay energized).
For DC Output Types:
This is the physical output value after the PV has been mapped via
the demand range parameters onto the output range.

108 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
m.o.t min on time auto 0 Minimum pulse time in seconds. This value sets the minimum Conf R/W
to 150.00 duration between any two switching events. Although it is named L3 R/W
'MinOnTime', it applies to both on and off pulses equally.
A contactor datasheet will often specify the minimum pulse time that
will help to ensure correct energizing and de-energizing of the
contactor. This may be the lowest value you should consider using as
a MinOnTime.
Auto(0) - Automatically sets the minimum on time for the output
hardware as follows:
Relay = 1s (time proportioning) or 0.1s (VP raise/lower)
Logic = 0.05s (time proportioning), 0.1s (VP raise/lower)
Alternatively, a value may be set manually but it should be noted that
this value will be clipped if it is below the minimum permissible value
for the hardware that is fitted (relay or logic - see settings above).
For VP raise/lower outputs, smaller values of MinOnTime may
actually produce less actuator activity. This is because the larger the
MinOnTime, the larger the valve movement, and thus the lower the
output resolution. This may lead to increased hunting. Generally
values less than 0.5s should be used.
Default: Auto
cycl.t cycle time Auto 0 This value sets the time proportioning output (TPO) and cycle time in Conf R/W
to 600 seconds. It is defined as the period of time between output L3 R/W
repetitions.
When this parameter is Auto (0), which is the default setting, the TPO
algorithm will run in a so-called Constant Ripple Mode. Under this
regime, the cycle time will be automatically and continuously
adjusted depending on the output demand. This is to maintain the
amount of ripple in the process at an approximately constant
amplitude. The benefit of this is that actuations are reduced on
average, which can increase the lifetime of contactors and relays. As
suggested, a demand of 50% will produce the shortest cycle time of
4*MinOnTime, and the cycle time is extended the further the demand
moves away from 50%. You should therefore choose a MinOnTime
that gives an appropriate minimum cycle time.
Alternatively, you can set a value of cycle time directly. When a value
is set, the algorithm will run in a so-called Constant Cycle Time
Mode. Under this regime, the algorithm will try to keep the cycle time
constant, assuming constant demand. Note that the cycle time will be
extended if the demand is such that the cycle time cannot be
achieved without violating the MinOnTime. In this case, the effective
cycle time will be extended just enough to help ensure the
MinOnTime and the demand are both achieved.
There are a number of factors that may influence the setting of an
appropriate CycleTime and it is often a trade off. For example, a
longer cycle time may extend the lifetime of contactors but reduce the
lifetime of heating elements. A longer cycle time will also increase the
amount of ripple in the process variable.
Default: Auto
sense sense of io NORm 0 Output normal. Conf R/W
This is the normal setting for control.
Output off when the PID demand is off. For control this is when
PV>SP.
For a Digital Input the input is active when the input is = 1.
Default: Normal
INV 1 Output inverted
This is the normal setting for alarms.
Output off is when the alarm is active.
Output on is when the alarm is in-active.
For a Digital Input the input is active when the input is = 0.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 109

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
iner inertia 0.0 to 30.0 Time taken in seconds for the valve motor to stop after power is L3 R/W
removed. 0.0 to 30.0 seconds.
Applies to valve position outputs only.
Default: 0.0
bklsh backlash 0.0 to 30.0 Time in seconds to take up any backlash in the valve actuator L3 R/W
linkage. 0.0 to 30.0 seconds.
Applies to valve position outputs only.
Default: 0.0
stby standby action Determines the valve positioning output action (Rest, Raise, Lower) Conf R/W
when the instrument is in Standby Mode.
Rest 0 The valve will remain in the current position.
Default: Reset
Up 1 The valve will open. Applies to io1.
Down 2 The valve will close. Applies to io2.
Valve positioning UP/DOWN works across pairs of outputs ie:-
UP : DOWN
IO.1 : IO.2
IO.2 : OP3
OP3 : IO.4
flbk.v fallback value 0.0 Fallback value which is to be outputted when the status is BAD Conf R/W
Default: the value of OUT.L

110 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Output Splitting
Output splitting is the process of having more than one output being driven from a
single control loop. For this to be possible the single loop output signal is divided
between two output channels.

This splitting of outputs is not done as a part of the control loop but rather as a part of
the output blocks.

LOOP OP1
0–100%
OP IN

OP2

IN

Functionality
• The control loop is not affected by the use of output splitting, it will still give its
output in the form of a 0–100% value.

• Each output block can be tailored individually in terms of turn on/off points and
percentage power output.

• The output from the loop is "wired" to the inputs of two output blocks.

• Each output block has a "ValHigh" and "ValLow" parameter. These values
represent the PID demand percentage giving maximum and minimum output
power respectively.

• Each output block also has a "OutHigh" and "OutLow" parameter. The values of
which determine the percentage limits of output power.

• The relationship between output power and input value can be seen in the graph
below:

PID Demand Signal

VAL.H

VAL.L

OUT.L OUT.H Electrical output

HA033650ENG Issue 1 111

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Cycle Time and Minimum OnTime Algorithms

The ‘Cycle Time’ algorithm and the ‘Min OnTime’ algorithm are mutually exclusive
and provide compatibility with existing controller systems. Both algorithms apply to
time proportioning outputs only and are not shown for on/off control.

A fixed cycle time allows the output to switch on and off within the time period set by
the parameter. For example, for a cycle time of 20 seconds, 25% power demand
would turn the output on for 5 seconds and off for 15 seconds, 50% power demand
would turn the output on and off for 10 seconds, for 75% power demand the output is
on for 15 seconds and off for 5 seconds.

Fixed cycle time may be preferred when driving mechanical devices such as
refrigeration compressors.

CAUTION
PROTECTION AGAINST SHORT CYCLING
Actuators that are sensitive to switching pulse or cycle times should be fitted with a
protective device. For example, refrigeration compressors should be fitted with a
lockout timer to add additional protection against switching too quickly.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

The ‘Min OnTime’ is described in the io table in the previous section.

If the control device is a relay or contactor the minimum on time should be set greater
than 10 seconds (for example) to prolong relay life. By way of illustration, for a setting
of 10 seconds the relay will switch (approximately) as shown in the table below:-

Power demand Relay ON time Relay OFF time

10% 10 100
25% 13 39
50% 20 20
75% 39 13
90% 100 10

It should be noted that the cycle time setting sets the nominal cycle time. The actual
cycle time may be extended or shortened under certain conditions, usually at the
extremes of the operating range, subject to MinOnTime. For example using the
above settings, if the power demand is 1% and the MinOnTime is set to 10 seconds
then the off time will have to extend approximately to 1000 seconds. Similarly, if the
demand is close to 100% then the on time must correspondingly increase.

The Minimum OnTime algorithm is often preferred for control of switching devices
using triac, logic or relay outputs in a temperature control application. It also applies
to valve position outputs.

Note: Consideration should be given to the number of operations which the relay is
expected to endure during its lifetime. See section "Relay Electrical Endurance" on
page 392.

112 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

DI/O List (O.d.IO)

This list only appears for an EPC3008 or EPC3004 if an option module is fitted that
has Digital Input/Output capabilities. EPC3016 does not support this list.

These digital I/O points can only be used as Logic Input or On/Off Outputs (ie : not
control outputs).

Access to the Digital Input/Output parameter list is summarized below. The full
Navigation Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From previous To next list
 O.dIO 
list (io) LIST (CT)



Repeat for
d1 d2
INST INST d1 to d8

   
IDENT IDENT
TYPE TYPE
PV PV
SENSE SENSE
OUT OUT

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
ident HW ident Hardware fitted: Conf R/O
E.NEt 2 E.NET: Ethernet comms + Secondary PV + 4 DIO Option module.
AID8 1 AI.D8: Secondary PV + 8 DIO Option module.
NoNe 0 No options board.
type type of io d1 0 Logic input. Conf R/W
OnOf 1 On Off output.
PV process OFF 0 If the type of IO is an input this shows the state of the digital input. R/O
variable If the type is an output this shows the demand state of the output.
On 1
sense sense of io NORm 0 Output normal. Conf R/W
This is the normal setting for control.
Output off when the PID demand is off. For control this is when PV>SP.
For a Digital Input the input is active when the input is = 1.
Default: Norm
inv 1 Output inverted.
This is the normal setting for alarms.
Output off is when the alarm is active.
Output on is when the alarm is in-active.
For a Digital Input the input is active when the input is = 0.
out output Off 0 A value of 0 indicates that the output is low (relay de-energized). Conf R/O
On 1 A value of 1 indicates that the output is high (relay energized). L3 R/O

HA033650ENG Issue 1 113

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

CT List (Ct)
This option can measure, via an external current transformer, the current flowing
through the electrical load when the heat output is 'on' (load current) and also when it
is 'off' (leakage current).

If the load current is lower than a threshold limit or the leakage current is higher than
a threshold limit, then an alarm triggers. The hysteresis to exit from either of these
conditions is user configurable between 0…5% of CT range, defaulted to 2%.

Access to the Current Transformer parameter list is summarized below. The full
Navigation Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +

From previous Ct To next list

 
list (O.dIO) LIST (LOOP or ZIRC)

 
CT. EN
CT. SRC
CT. RNG
CT. LAT
LD. SP
LK. SP
OC. SP
LD. I
LK. I
LD. ALM
LK. ALM
OC. ALM
CT. ACK
CT. HYS

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
CT.EN CURRENT No 0 CT module disabled. If set to NO, no further parameters are shown. Conf R/W
TRANSFORMER Default: No L3 R/O
yes 1 CT module enabled.
ct.src CT SOURCE NONE 0 None
Default: None
io.1 1 Input/Output 1.
io.2 2 Input/Output 2.
oP.3 3 Relay output.
io.4 4 Input/Output 4.
CT.RNG CT RANGE 100.0 Sets the CT range from 0 to the full range of the CT (1000). Conf R/W
Default: 100.0
CT.LAT CT ALARM NONE 0 No latching. Conf R/W
LATCH TYPE Default: None
AutO 1 Latched with automatic reset.
mAn 2 Latched with manual reset.
ld.sp load OFF 0 Load open circuit current alarm threshold - low alarm. Conf R/W
threshold to CT full scale Default: Off
value (1000)

114 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
lk.sp leak OFF 0 Leakage current in the off state alarm threshold - high alarm. Conf R/W
threshold to CT full scale Default: Off
value (1000)
oc.sp over OFF 0 Over current alarm threshold - high alarm. Conf R/W
threshold to CT full scale Default: Off
value (1000)
ld.i load current Measured load current. L3 R/O
lk.i leak current CT input leakage current. L3 R/O
ld.alm load current No 0 L3 R/O
alarm
Yes 1 The low load current alarm status is set high when the detected load
current is lower than the ld.sp threshold. This may indicate a partial
or total failure condition in the load (for example, a defective heating
element).
lk.alm leak current No 0 L3 R/O
alarm
Yes 1 The leak current alarm is set high when the measured current
exceeds the threshold during the controllers off states.
oc.alm over alarm No 0 L3 R/O
YES 1 The over current alarm is set true if the measured current exceeds
the over-current threshold.
CT Alarms should be soft wired to the input of an alarm block as generally described in section "Example 1: To Wire an Alarm" on page 224.
CT.ack CT AlarM No 0 L3 R/O
Acknowledge
YES 1 Acknowledge all CT alarms.
ct.hys ct alarm 2 To help prevent active/inactive alarm conditions due to electrical Conf R/W
hysteresis noise. The alarm conditions moving from active to inactive are
evaluated using a hysteresis value as a percentage of the CT Range
(0…5%).
Default: 2%

HA033650ENG Issue 1 115

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Loop List (LOOP)

For a further explanation of the way in which the loop operates and further
descriptions of parameters please refer to "Control" on page 286.

This list contains eight sub-lists: Main (mAIN), Configuration (CFG), Setpoint (SP),
Feedforward (FF), Autotune (Atun), PID (PId), Output (OP), Diagnostics (dIAG).

Access to the Loop parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation Diagram
is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

From previous list Return to previous list header

(Ct or ZIRC) To next list
 +
(PROG)
 LOOp 
LIST


mAIN CFG SP FF AtuN PiD OP diAG
S. LIST S.LIST S. LIST S. LIST S. LIST S. LIST S. LIST S. LIST

               
A-M HEAT. T RNG. HI F. TYPE TUNE G. SCH FLBK. V L. BRK. T
R-L COOL. T RNG. LO F. OP T. HI SET OUT. HI L. BRK. D
MODE ACTN SP. HI F. GAIN T. LO BOUND OUT. LO L. BRK
SP. SRC SP. SRC SP. LO F. BIAS T. CH2 GS. HYS H. OUT DEMO
PV D. TYP SP. SEL F. LEAD T. ALGO PB. H C. OUT DEV
TGT. SP PB. UNT SP1 F. LAG T. STAT PB. C MAN. OP TGT. OP
W. SP REC. M SP2 F. HI TI TRK. OP W. OP. HI
W. OUT BAD. TX PSP. S F. LO TD CH2. DB W. OP. LO
HOLD MAN. TX PSP F. HOLD CBH OP. UP P. TERM
TRACK AM. LVL RSP. T FB. TRIM CBL OP. DWN L. VOLT
F. MAN RSP. HI DV MR OP. DIS W. PB. H
I. HOLD RSP. LO OP. HI PWR. FF W. PB. C
INT. BAL RSP. EN OP. LO C. DB W. TI
RSP HYS. H NLIN. C W. TD
TRM. HI HYS. C STEP. V W. CBH
TRM. LO PB2. H TT. H W. CBL
TRIM PB2. C TT. C W. MR
RT. UNT TI2 R. OP. HI AT. LIM
SP. UP TD2 R. OP. LO. IN. HLD
SP. DWN CBH2 R. OP. DI IN. TRA
RT. DIS CBL2 IN. MAN
RT. DNE MR2 IN. AUT
RT. SVO OP. HI2 M. RDY
TRM. PV OP/LO2
TR. PRG HYS2. H
TR. RSP HYS2. C
SP. BAL

116 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Loop - Main Sub-list

The main sub-list defines how the control loop behaves under different modes.
Parameter Parameter Value Description Access
Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
a-m auto-manual Auto 0 Select automatic (closed loop) control. L3 R/O
select
mAn 1 Select manual operation (output power adjusted by the user).
Default: Manual
r-l remote-local Loc 1 Local Setpoint. L3 R/O
select In Auto mode, the loop uses one of its local setpoints (SP1/SP2) which is
alterable via the front panel or over comms.
Default: Local
rEM 0 Remote Setpoint. This selects the remote setpoint source.
This mode is commonly used, for example, in a cascade topology or with
a multi-zone furnace.
Although this parameter is used to select the remote setpoint, it will not
necessarily become active. The RSP_En input must be true and the RSP
must have a good status before it will become active. If either of these
conditions are not met, the loop will fallback to using the local setpoint.
MODE loop mode Reports the currently active operating mode. R/O
The loop has a number of possible operating modes which can be
selected by the application. It is possible for the application to request
several modes at once, so the active mode is determined by a priority
model, whereby the mode with the highest priority wins. The modes
shown below are listed in their priority order.
HoLd 0 Hold.
Priority 0: The controller Working Output will be maintained at its current
value.
Track 1 Track.
Priority 1: The controller output will follow the track output parameter. The
track output can either be a constant value or be derived from an external
source (e.g. an analog input).
f.man 2 Forced Manual.
Priority 2: This mode behaves in the same way as Manual but it indicates
that Auto mode cannot currently be selected.
This mode is selected if the PV status is not good (e.g. sensor break) and,
optionally, if a process alarm has triggered. When transferring to Forced
Manual from Auto mode, the output will go to the Fallback Value (unless
the hold action has been selected). Transferring to Forced Manual from
any other mode will always be bumpless.
This is used in a number conditions, further described in "Operating
Modes" on page 302.
man 3 Manual.
Priority 3: In manual mode, the controller passes authority over the output
to the operator. The output is alterable via the HMI or over comms.
tune 4 Tune.
Priority 4: This mode indicates that the autotuner is running and has
authority over the output.
auto 5 Auto mode.
Priority 5 (lowest): In Auto mode, the automatic control algorithm has
authority over the output.
sp.src setpoint Indicates the currently active setpoint source. L3 R/O
source
F.Loc 0 Forced local setpoint. The setpoint has fallen back to the local source
because the remote setpoint is not being accessed correctly.
Rem 1 The setpoint is derived from a remote source.
Loc 2 The setpoint is derived locally.
PV Process The process variable. This is typically wired from an analog input. R/W
variable

HA033650ENG Issue 1 117

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
tgt.sp target Adjust and display the current target setpoint. The target setpoint is the L3 R/O
setpoint value before rate limiting.
w.sp Working Displays the current working setpoint. This setpoint may be derived from a R/O
setpoint number of sources depending on the application. Examples are from the
programmer function block or a remote setpoint source.
w.out working The current output demand in %. R/O
output
hold output hold OFF 0 When on is selected the controller output will maintain its current value. L3 R/W
On 1
track output track OFF 0 Used to select Track mode. In this mode, the controller output will follow R/O
the Track Output value. The Track output may be a constant value or
On 1
come from an external source (e.g. an analog input). Track has priority 1
and so overrides all other modes apart from HOLD.
f.man forced OFF 0 When On is selected this mode behaves in the same way as Manual but R/O
manual whilst active it indicates that Auto cannot currently be selected.
On 1
When transferring to this mode from Auto, and this input is asserted, the
output will jump to the Fallback Value.
This input can be wired to alarms or digital inputs and used during
abnormal process conditions.
This mode has priority 2 and so will override all modes, except for Hold
and Track.
When any of the above modes are selected they will be indicated by the
mode parameter above.
i.hold integral No 0 L3 R/W
hold
YES 1 If asserted the integral component of the PID calculation will be frozen.
int.Bal integral No 0 This is a feature included in the controller which is not accessible via the Available in
balance HMI but is available in iTools and is, therefore, included here. iTools only
YES 1
This rising edge-triggered input can be used to force an integral balance.
This recalculates the integral term in the controller so that the previous
output is maintained, balancing out any change in the other terms.
This can be used to minimize bumps in output when it is known that, for
example, an artificial step change in PV will occur. For example, a
compensation factor has just changed in an oxygen probe calculation.
The integral balance is intended to prevent any proportional or derivative
kick, instead allowing the output to be smoothly adjusted under integral
action.

118 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configuration Sub-List
The configuration sub-list defines control type and how certain parameters behave
for particular conditions. These parameters are unlikely to require changing once the
application has been configured.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
heat.t ch1 control pid 2 PID Proportional, Integral, derivative, full three term control. Conf R/W
type Default: PID L3 R/O
VPu 3 Valve position unbounded (no feedback potentiometer is required).
OFF 0 Control loop channel inoperative.
OnOF 1 On Off control.
cool.t ch2 control pid 2 PID Proportional, Integral, derivative, full three term control. Conf R/W
type L3 R/O
VPu 3 Valve position unbounded (no feedback potentiometer is required).
OFF 0 Control loop channel inoperative.
Default: Off
OnOF 1 On Off control
actn control REV 0 Reverse acting. Output decreases as PV increases. This is the normal setting Conf R/W
action for heating processes. Not applicable to on/off control. L3 R/O
Default: Reverse
dir 1 Direct acting. Output increases as PV increases.
d.typ derivative PV 0 Only changes in PV cause a derivative output. Conf R/W
type Generally used for process systems particularly using valve control where it L3 R/O
reduces wear on valve mechanics. Not applicable to on/off control.
Default: PV
Err 1 Changes to either PV or SP will cause a derivative output.
The derivative term will responds to the rate of change of the difference
between PV and the setpoint. Not applicable to on/off control.
pb.unt proportiona EnG 0 The proportional band is set in engineering (PV) units. For example, degrees Conf R/W
l band units C. L3 R/O
Default: Eng
PErc 1 The proportional band is set in percent of loop span (RangeHigh minus
RangeLow).
recv.m recovery This parameter configures the loop recovery strategy. This strategy is Conf R/W
mode followed in the following circumstances: L3 R/W
• Upon instrument start-up, after a power cycle or power outage.
• Upon exit from Instrument Configuration or Standby conditions.
• Upon exit from Forced Manual (F.MAN) mode to a lower priority
mode (e.g. when the PV recovers from a bad status or an alarm
condition goes away).
LAST 0 Last Mode with Last Output.
The loop will assume the last mode with the last output value.
Default: Last
mAn 1 Manual Mode with Fallback Output.
The loop will assume MANUAL mode with the fallback output value, unless
exiting from Forced Manual (F_MAN) in which case the current output will be
maintained.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 119

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
bad.tx pv bad If the PV goes ‘bad’ (e.g. due to a sensor break) this parameter configures the Conf R/W
transfer type of transfer to Forced Manual (F_Man). L3 R/W
type Note that this is only followed if transitioning to F_Man from Auto.
Transitioning from any other mode will always be bumpless and transitioning
due to the F_Man input being asserted will always go to the Fallback Value.
FALL 0 The FallbackValue will be applied to the output.
Default: Fall
HoLd 1 The last good output will be applied. This will be an output value from
approximately 1 second before the transition.
man.tx manual Type of auto/manual transfer Conf R/W
transfer L3 R/W
trAc 0 The Manual Output will track the Working Output while the mode is not
type
MANUAL. This helps to ensure a bumpless transfer when the mode does go
into MANUAL.
Default: Trac
StEP 1 The Manual Output will be set to the Manual Step Value while the mode is not
MANUAL.
LASt 2 The Manual Output will remain at the last value used.
am.lvl automan Used to set the access level at which the AutoMan parameter can be Conf R/W
access level changed from the HMI. It is often used to help prevent unauthorized use of L3 R/W
manual mode.
LEv1 0 Auto/manual select is available in level 1.
Default: Lev1
LEv2 1 Auto/manual select is available in level 2.
Lev3 2 Auto/manual select is available in level 3.
sp.lvl setpoint This sets the access level at which the setpoint can be altered from the HMI. Conf R/W
access level It is often used to help prevent unauthorized changing of setpoints. L3 R/W
Lev1 0 Target setpoint is available in level 1.
Default: Lev1
LEv2 1 Target setpoint is available in level 2.
LEv3 2 Target setpoint is available in level 3.
m.lvl manOPacces This parameter sets the access level at which the manual output can be Conf R/W
changed from the home screen. L3 R/W
Lev1 0 Manual output can be changed in level 1.
Default: Lev1
Lev2 1 Manual output can be changed in level 2.
LEv3 2 Manual output can be changed in level 3.

120 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Setpoint Sub-list
The setpoint sub-list defines setpoint parameters such as limits, rates of change,
trims and tracking strategies.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

rng.hi range high Range high limit. Selectable between the high limit of the selected Conf RW
input type to the ‘Range Low’ limit parameter. L3 RO
Default: 1372.0
rng.lo range low Range low limit. Selectable between the low limit of the selected input Conf RW
type to the ‘Range High’ limit parameter. L3 RO
sp.hi setpoint high Maximum allowable setpoint setting. Range is between ‘Range High’ Conf RW
limit limit and ‘Range Low’ limit. L3 RW
Default: 1372.0
sp.lo setpoint low Minimum allowable setpoint setting. Range is between ‘Range High’ Conf RW
limit limit and ‘Range Low’ limit. L3 RW
sp.sel setpoint sp1 0 Select setpoint 1. Conf RW
select Default: SP1 L3 RW
sp2 1 Select setpoint 2.
sp1 setpoint 1 The current value of setpoint 1. Range from Low to high setpoint Conf RW
limits. L3 RW
sp2 setpoint 2 The current value of setpoint 2. Range from Low to high setpoint Conf RW
limits. L3 RW
PSP.S PSP select OFF 0 Program setpoint not selected. Not available on
HMI
On 1 Program setpoint selected.
PSP Program The current value of the programmer setpoint. Not available on
Setpoint HMI
rsp.t remote This parameter configures the remote setpoint topology.
setpoint type
SEtP 0 The remote setpoint (RSP) is used as a setpoint for the control
algorithm. If required, a local trim can be applied.
Default: Setp
trim 1 The local setpoint (SP1/SP2) is used as the setpoint for the control
algorithm. The remote setpoint (RSP) acts as a remote trim on this
local setpoint.
rsp.hi rsp high limit Sets the maximum range limit for the remote setpoint. Conf RW
Default: 1572.0 L3 RW
rsp.lo rsp low limit Sets the minimum range limit for the remote setpoint.
Default: -1572.0
rsp.en remote On 1 This input is used to enable the remote setpoint (RSP). The remote Conf RW
setpoint setpoint cannot become active unless this input is asserted. L3 RW
enable This is typically used in a cascade arrangement and allows the master
to signal to the slave that it is providing a valid output. I.e. the master
controller's Loop.Diagnostics.MasterReady parameter should be
wired into here.
OFF 0 Disable the remote setpoint.
RSP remote The remote setpoint (RSP) is typically used in a cascade control Conf RW
setpoint arrangement or in a multi-zone process, where a master controller is L3 RW
transmitting a setpoint to the slave.
For the remote setpoint to become active, the RSP status must be
good, the RSP_En input must be true and RemLocal must be set to
Remote.
The RSP can either be used as a setpoint itself (with a local trim if
required) or as a remote trim on a local setpoint.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 121

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

trm.hi setpoint trim Local setpoint trim upper limit. Lower range limit is set by the trm.lo. Conf RW
high L3 RW
trm.lo setpoint trim Local setpoint trim lower limit. Upper range limit is set by the trm.hi
low
trim setpoint trim To adjust the value by which the setpoint is being trimmed between Conf RW
trm.hi and trm.lo L3 RW
rt.unt setpoint rate P.SEc 0 Set the setpoint rate limit to units per second, units per minute or units Conf RW
limit units per hour. L3 RW
P.min 1
Default: P.Sec
P.hr 2
sp.up setpoint rate OFF. 0 Limits the rate at which the setpoint can increase when setpoint ramp Conf R/W
up 0.1 to full rate is used. OFF means no rate limit is applied. L3 R/W
range Default: Off
sp.dwn setpoint rate OFF. 0 Limits the rate at which the setpoint can decrease when setpoint ramp Conf R/W
down 0.1 to full rate is used. OFF means no rate limit is applied. L3 R/W
range Default: Off
The next three parameters are only shown if either of the setpoint rate
limit parameters above are set to a value.
rt.dis setpoint rate No 0 Setpoint rate limit enabled. Conf R/W
limit disable L3 R/W
YES 1 Disable setpoint rate limit.
rt.dne rate limit No 0 Indicates that the working setpoint has reached the target setpoint. If R/O
done YES 1 the setpoint is subsequently changed it will ramp at the set rate until
the new value is reached.
rt.svo rate limit When the setpoint is being rate limited and servo-to-PV is enabled, Conf R/W
servo to pv changing the target SP will cause the working SP to servo (step) to L3 R/W
the current PV before ramping to the new target. This feature is only
applied to SP1 and SP2 and not to the program or remote setpoints.
OFF 0 Disabled.
On 1 The selected setpoint will servo to the current value of the PV.
trk.pv sp tracks pv OFF 0 No setpoint tracking when in manual. Conf R/W
in manual L3 R/W
On 1 When the controller is operating in manual mode the currently
selected SP (SP1 or SP2) tracks the PV. When the controller resumes
automatic control there will be no step change in the working SP.
Manual tracking does not apply to the remote setpoint or programmer
setpoint.
tr.prg sp tracks OFF 0 No setpoint tracking of the programmer. Conf R/W
program L3 R/W
On 1 SP1/SP2 tracks the programmer setpoint while the program is
running, so that there will no step change in the Working SP when the
program ends and the programmer is reset. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘Program Tracking’.
tr.rsp sp tracks rsp On 1 When the remote setpoint is selected SP1/SP2 tracks the remote Conf R/W
in remote setpoint, so that there will be no step change in the Working SP when L3 R/W
transitioning to the local setpoint source. The selected setpoint
returns to its set value at the rate set by the sp.up and sp,dwn
parameters.
OFF 0 Disabled.
sp.bal SP change When enabled, this causes the control algorithm to perform an Conf R/W
integral integral balance whenever the target setpoint is changed. It only L3 R/W
balance applies when the local setpoint is in use. The effect of this option is to
suppress proportional and derivative kicks whenever the setpoint
changes, so that the output moves smoothly to its new value under
integral action. This option is similar to having both proportional and
derivative terms act on PV only, and not error.
OFF 0 Disabled.
On 1 Enable. To suppress proportional and derivative kick.

122 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

BackCalcPV Back-calculated This output is the back-calculated PV. It is the value of PV minus the Not available on
PV setpoint trim. HMI
This is typically wired to the PV input of a setpoint programmer. Wiring
this input, rather than the PV itself, helps to ensure that the holdback
feature can take account of any setpoint trim that may be applied and
also allows setpoint programs to start smoothly with the working
setpoint equal to the PV, if configured.
BackCalcSP Back-calculated This output is the back-calculated SP. It is the working setpoint minus Not available on
SP the setpoint trim. HMI
This is typically wired to the servo input of a setpoint programmer, so
that it can start smoothly without bumping the working setpoint, if
configured.

Setpoint Limits
The figure below shows a pictorial overview of setpoint limits.

Rng.hi
+Span
sp.hi

rsp.hi trim.hi

sp1 sp2 rsp psp TargetSP wsp trim

rsp.lo trim.lo

sp.lo
-Span
Rng.LO

Span is taken to be the value given by Range High Limit - Range Low Limit.

Note: Whilst it is possible to set the RSP Limits outside the Range Limits, the RSP
value will still be clipped to the Range Limits.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 123

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Feedforward Sub-list
Feedforward is described in "Feedforward" on page 295. This list defines the strategy
to be adopted for a particular application.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

F.type feedforward OFF 0 No signal fed forward. Conf R/W

type
SP 1 The working setpoint is used as the input to the feedfoward compensator.
PV 2 The PV is used as the input to the feedfoward compensator. This is
sometimes used as an alternative to 'Delta-T' control.
REm 3 The remote Disturbance Variable (DV) is used as the input to the
feedfoward compensator. This is usually a secondary process variable
that can be used to head-off disturbances in the PV before they have a
chance to occur.
f.op feedforward 0.0 Feedforward compensator output in percent. R/O
contribution
The following parameters are available if F.Type is not set to OFF
f.gain compensator 1.000 Defines the gain of the feedforward value, the feed forward value is L3 R/W
gain multiplied by the gain.
Default: 1.0
f.bias compensator 0.0 The feedforward compensator bias/offset. This value is added to the L3 R/W
offset feedforward input. Note that the bias is applied after the gain.
f.lead lead time 0 The feedforward compensator lead time constant in seconds can be used L3 R/W
constant to 'speed-up' the feedforward action.
Set to 0 to disable the lead component. In general, the lead component
should not be used on its own without any lag.
The lead and lag time constants allow dynamic compensation of the
feedforward signal. The values are usually determined by characterizing
the effect of the input on the process (e.g. by a bump test).
In the case of a Disturbance Variable, the values are chosen so that the
disturbance and the correction 'arrive' at the process variable at the same
instant, thereby minimizing any perturbation.
As a rule of thumb, the lead time should be set equal to the lag between
the controller output and the PV, while the lag time should be set equal to
the lag between the DV and the PV.
f.lag lag time 0 The feedforward compensator lag time constant can be used to slow L3 R/W
constant down the feedforward action.
Set to 0 to disable the lag component.
The lead and lag time constants allow dynamic compensation of the
feedforward signal. The values are usually determined by characterizing
the effect of the input on the process (e.g. by a bump test).
In the case of a Disturbance Variable, the values are chosen so that the
disturbance and the correction 'arrive' at the process variable at the same
instant, thereby minimizing any perturbation.
As a rule of thumb, the lead time should be set equal to the lag between
the controller output and the PV, while the lag time should be set equal to
the lag between the DV and the PV.
f.hi feedforward +/-200.0 The maximum allowed value of feedforward output. L3 R/W
high limit % This limit is applied to the feedforward output prior to it being added to the
PID output.
Default: 200.0%
f.lo feedforward +/-200.0 The minimum allowed value of feedforward output. L3 R/W
low limit % This limit is applied to the feedforward output prior to it being added to the
PID output.
Default: -200%
f.hold hold No 0 When true, the feedforward output will maintain its current value. This can L3 R/W
feedforward be used to temporarily halt feedforward action.
YES 1

124 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

fb.trm pid trim 0 The PID trim limit limits the effect of the PID output. L3 R/W
limit The implementation of Feedforward allows the Feedforward component to
Range
0.0 to make the dominant contribution to the control output. The PID contribution
400.o can then be used as a trim on the Feedforward value. This arrangement is
sometimes known as "Feedforward with Feedback Trim".
This parameter defines symmetrical limits (expressed as a percentage of
output) around the PID output, to limit the magnitude of the PID
contribution.
If it is required to allow PID contribution to dominate, set a large value for
this parameter (400.0).
Default: 400.0
If F.type is set to Remote the following additional parameter is available
DV disturbance 0.0 The remote Disturbance Variable is typically a secondary measured L3 R/W
variable process variable. This is usually a secondary process variable that can be
used to head-off disturbances in the PV before they have a chance to
occur.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 125

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Autotune Sub-list
Autotune is used to automatically tune the PID loop to match the characteristics of
the process. See also "Autotuning" on page 309.

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
tune autotune Off 0 Autotune not enabled or abort an autotune. L3 R/W
On 1 Enable autotune.
t.hi autotune maximum −100 to To set a maximum limit on the output during tuning. L3 R/W
output +100% Default: 100
t.lo autotune minimum −100 to To set a minimum limit on the output during tuning. L3 R/W
output +100% Default: -100
t.ch2 CH2 tune type Configures which experiment will be used to determine the
relationship between channel 1 and channel 2 proportional bands.
std 0 Standard. Tunes the ch2 proportional band using the standard
relative ch2 tuning algorithm.
Default: Std
ALt 1 Alternative relative ch2 tuning.
Uses a model-based tuning algorithm that has been shown to give
enhanced results with higher-order, low-loss plants. In particular, it
performs well with heavily-lagged temperature processes.
OFF 2 Do not try to determine the relative gain.
This option can be used to help prevent the autotune trying to
determine the ch2 proportional band. Instead, it will maintain the
existing ratio between the ch1 and ch2 proportional bands.
In general, this option is not recommended unless there is a known
reason to select it (e.g. the relative gain is already known and the
tuner gives an incorrect value).
t.algo tune algorithm This parameter reports which autotuning algorithm is available for the R/O
current control configuration. The appropriate tuning algorithm is
autotmatically determined.
See also "Autotuning" on page 309 for further information on self
tuning.
none 0 There is no autotuner available for the current control configuration.
PID 1 The standard autotuner based on a modified relay method. It requires
two cycles to complete (not including the relative ch2 tune).
This is used for PID-only configurations and where there is no output
rate limiting configured.
Fouri 2 This algorithm uses the same modified relay method but uses a more
complex analysis based on the work of Joseph Fourier. It requires
three cycles to complete (not including the relative ch2 tune).
This algorithm is used for VP or mixed channel configurations and is
also used whenever there is an output rate limit set.

126 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
t.sta autotune status This parameter displays the current state of the autotune. R/O
OFF 0 Unavailable.
RdY 1 Ready to run an autotune.
Trig 2 Triggered.
An autotune has been triggered but a higher priority mode is
preventing it from starting. When the higher priority mode is no longer
active the tune will start.
Run 3 Running.
The autotuner is running and currently has authority over the
controller outputs.
done 4 Complete.
The autotune successfully completed and has updated the tuneset
parameters.
abor 5 Aborted. Autotune aborted.
TOut 6 Time Out.
If any stage of the autotune sequence exceeds two hours in duration,
the sequence will timeout and be aborted. It could be due to the loop
being open or not responding to the demands from the controller.
Very heavily lagged systems may produce a timeout if the cooling
rate is very slow.
The Stage Time parameter counts up the time in each stage.
OFLw 7 Overflow.
A buffer overflow occurred while collecting process data. Contact your
supplier for support.
stage stage of This reports the stage of the current autotuning sequence. R/O
autotune
IdLe 0 Idle. Not autotuning
Moni 1 Monitor. The process is being monitored. This stage lasts one minute.
The setpoint can be changed during this stage.
Init 2 Initial. An initial oscillation is being established.
Hi 3 Max. Maximum output applied.
Lo 4 Min. Minimum output applied.
R2G 5 R2G.
Relative channel 2 gain test is running.
If the calculated proportional band ratio is outside the range 0.1 and
10.0, The Ch1/Ch2 Proportional Band ratio will be clipped to these
limits but all other PID parameters are updated.
R2G limit may occur if the gain difference between heating and
cooling is too large. This could also occur if the controller is
configured for heat/cool but the cooling medium is turned off or not
working correctly. It could similarly occur if the cooling medium is on
but heating is off or not working correctly.
PD 6 PD Control. The autotuner is trying to control to setpoint and is
examining the response.
AnLs 7 Analysis. The autotuner is calculating the new tuning parameters.
stg.t time elapsed in The time elapsed in the current autotune stage. This is reset each
stage time the autotuner advances a stage. If this exceeds two hours, a
timeout will occur.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 127

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

PID Sub-list
The PID is used to display and set the current PID values. See also "PID Control" on
page 287.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
g.sch gain Gain scheduling is provided so that processes which change their Conf R/W
scheduler characteristics can be controlled. For example, in some temperature
type processes, the dynamical response may be very different at low
temperatures from that at high temperatures.
Gain Scheduling typically uses one of the loop's parameters to select
the active PID set -- this parameter is known as the scheduling variable
(SV). Two sets are available as standard and a boundary is provided
which defines the switching point.
The number of sets, and hence the number of boundaries, has been
increased from 2 to 8 in firmware versions V3.01 and above.
OFF 0 Gain scheduling not active.
set 1 The PID set can be selected by the operator.
It is possible to use soft wiring to control the selection of the gain sets.
This could be linked to the programmer segment, changing the PID
settings for individual segments or it could be wired to a digital input so
that the working PID set can be set remotely.
pV 2 The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the
process variable.
SP 3 The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the
working setpoint.
OP 4 The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the
output.
dEV 5 The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the
difference between the SP and PV.
modE 6 This parameter selects set 2 when the remote setpoint is active, and
set 1 when the local setpoint is active.
N.SET number of 1 - 8 Number of enabled tunesets. This is fixed at 2 unless the 8 gain set L3 R/W
sets feature has been ordered or unlocked using feature security.
set active tune set1 0 This shows the set being tuned and is displayed if g.sch = SET, PV, SP, L3 R/W
set OP or dev.
set2 1
set3 2
set4 3
set5 4
set6 5
set7 6
set8 7
bnd.1 tune set 0.0 Sets the level at which PID set 1 changes to PID Set 2. This only L3 R/W
switching applies when the schedule type = PV, SP, OP, dev.
point 1 The gain scheduler compares the scheduling variable against the
specified boundary.
If the scheduling variable is below the boundary then Set 1 is active. If
above the boundary then Set 2 is active and so on.
See also section "Gain scheduling" on page 292.
Default: 0.0
bnd.2 tune set 0.0 Sets the level at which PID set 2 changes to PID set 3. L3 R/W
switching
point 2
If 8 sets are available up to 8 boundaries are shown as BND.3 to BND.8. L3 R/W

128 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
gs.hys switching 1.0 This specifies the amount of hysteresis around the gain scheduling L3 R/W
hysteresis boundary. This is used to avoid continuous switching as the scheduling
variable passes through the boundary.
pb.h ch1 20.0 The proportional band for channel 1. This may be in % or engineering L3 R/W
proportional units as set by the parameter PB.UNT. These
band Default: 20.0% parameters are
displayed on the
pb.c ch2 20.0 The proportional band for channel 2. This may be in % or engineering
HMI if gain
proportional units as set by the parameter PB.UNT.
scheduling is off.
band Default: 20.0%
ti integral time 360 The integral time in seconds for channel 1. Set to 0 to disable integral
action.
Default: 360 seconds
td derivative 60 The derivative time in seconds for channel 1. Set to 0 to disable
time derivative action.
Default: 60 seconds
cbh cutback high Auto 0 Defines a High Cutback threshold in the same units as the proportional
threshold band (either engineering units or percent of span, depending on
configuration).
cbl cutback low Auto 0 Defines a Low Cutback threshold in the same units as the proportional
threshold band (either engineering units or percent of span, depending on
configuration).
MR Man reset 0.0 to Manual reset. This parameter only appears if the control algorithm is L3 R/W
100.0% PID or VPU, AND the integral time is set to 0 (Off). It is used to
(heat only) manually adjust the output power to offset for any difference between
-100.0 to SP and PV. See also "Manual Reset (PD Control)" on page 290.
100.0%
(heat/cool)
op.hi output high +100.0% to Gain scheduled output upper limit. L3 R/W
OP.LO Default: 100
op.lo output low −100.0% Gain scheduled output lower limit. L3 R/W
and OP.HI Default: -100
hys.h Ch 1 On/OFF Off 0 This parameter is only available if channel 1(heat) is configured for L3 R/W
Hysteresis 1 to 99999 On/OFF control. It sets the hysteresis between the output being on and
the output being off.
Default: 10
hys.c Ch 2 On/OFF Off 0 This parameter is only available if channel 2 (cool) is configured for L3 R/W
Hysteresis 1 to 99999 On/OFF control. It sets the hysteresis between the output being on and
the output being off.
Default: 10
pb2.h ch1 20.0 The proportional band for channel 1, for tuneset 2. L3 R/W
proportional This may be in % or engineering units as set by the parameter
band 2 PB.UNT.
Default: 20.0%
pb2.C ch2 20.0 The proportional band for channel 2, for tuneset 2. L3 R/W
proportional This may be in % or engineering units as set by the parameter
band 2 PB.UNT.
Default: 20.0%
ti2 integral time 360 The integral time in seconds for tuneset 2. Set to 0 to disable integral L3 R/W
2 action.
Default: 360 seconds
td2 derivative 60 The derivative time in seconds for tuneset 2. Set to 0 to disable L3 R/W
time 2 derivative action.
Default: 60 seconds
cbh2 cutback high Auto 0 Defines a High Cutback threshold, for tuneset 2, in the same units as L3 R/W
threshold 2 the proportional band (either engineering units or percent of span,
depending on configuration).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 129

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
cbl2 cutback low Auto 0 Defines a Low Cutback threshold, for tuneset 2, in the same units as L3 R/W
threshold 2 the proportional band (either engineering units or percent of span,
depending on configuration).
MR2 Man reset 2 0.0 to Manual reset for tuneset 2. This parameter only appears if the control L3 R/W
100.0% algorithm is PID or VPU, AND the integral time is set to 0 (Off). It is
(heat only) used to manually adjust the output power to offset any for any
-100.0 to difference between SP and PV. See also "Manual Reset (PD Control)"
100.0% on page 290.
(heat/cool)
OP.HI2 output high 2 100.0 Gain scheduled output upper limit for tuneset 2. Range between L3 R/W
+100.0% to OP.LO 2.
OP.lo2 output low 2 -100.0 Gain scheduled output lower limit for tuneset 2. Range between L3 R/W
−100.0% and OP.HI 2.
hys2.h Ch1 On/OFF Off 0 On-Off Hysteresis for channel 1/heat, for tuneset 2.
Hysteresis 2 1 to 99999 This is set in the units of the PV. It defines the point below setpoint
where the channel 1 output will turn on. The output will turn off when
the PV is at setpoint.
The hysteresis is used to minimize the chattering of the output at the
control setpoint. If the hysteresis is set to 0 then even the smallest
change in the PV, when at setpoint, will cause the output to switch. The
hysteresis should be set to a value which provides an acceptable life
for the output contacts, but which does not cause unacceptable
oscillations in the PV.
If this performance is unacceptable, it is recommended that PID control
with a time proportioning output is used.
Default: 10
hys2.c Ch 2 On/OFF Off 0 On-Off Hysteresis for channel 2/cool, for tuneset 2. L3 R/W
Hysteresis 2 1 to 99999 This parameter is only available if channel 2 (cool) is configured for
On/OFF control. It sets a second value of the hysteresis, for tuneset 2,
between the output being on and the output being off.
The comments above are also applicable to this parameter.
Default: 10
Parameters from PB2.H to HYS2.C above are repeated for every set configured. That is PB3.H to PB8.H and HYS3.C to
HYS8.C.

A further description of the above parameters is given in "Control" on page 286.

130 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

OP Sub-list
The output sub-list is used to display and set the output parameters. For further
descriptions of parameters see "Control" on page 286.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
flbk.v fallback 0.0% The Fallback Output Value is used in a number of circumstances: Conf R/W
output value
• If the PV status goes bad (e.g. sensor break), the loop will
enter Forced Manual mode (F_Man) with either the fallback
value or the last good output. This depends on the
configured PV Bad Transfer type.
• If Forced Manual (F_Man) mode is actived by an external
signal (e.g. a process alarm) then the fallback output value is
always applied.
• If the Recovery Mode is configured as
'ManualModeFallbackOP', then the controller will always
start up in Manual mode with the fallback output value. This
is also true when exiting Instrument Config or Standby
modes.
out.hi output high 100.0% to Maximum output power delivered by channels 1 and 2. L3 R/W
limit -100.0% By reducing the high power limit, it is possible to reduce the rate of
change of the process, however, care should be taken as reducing the
power limit will reduce the controllers ability to react to disturbances.
Range between Output Lo and 100.0%.
This parameter does not affect the Fallback Value being achieved in
Manual mode.
Default: 100
out.lo output low -100.0% Minimum (or maximum negative) output power delivered by channels 1 L3 R/W
limit to and 2. Range between Output Hi and −100.0%.
100.0% Default: 0
h.out channel 1 0.0 to The current value of channel 1 output demand. Channel 1 (Heat) R/O
output 100.0% output.
The Ch1 output is the positive power values (0 to Output Hi) used by
the heat output. Typically this is wired to the control output (time
proportioning or DC output). Range between Output Hi and Output Lo.
c.out channel 2 -0.0 to The current value of channel 2 output demand. The Ch2 output is R/O. Shown only
output -100.0% negative portion of the control output (0 – Output Lo) for heat/cool if Channel 2 is
applications. It is inverted to be a positive number so that it can be configured
wired into one of the outputs (time proportioning or DC outputs). Range
between Output Hi and Output Lo.
man.op manual 0.0 to The output value when in manual or forced manual modes. R/O
output value 100.0%
trk.op output track -100.0% This value will be used as the output when in track mode. L3 R/W
value to
100.0%
Ch2.db Channel Off or 0 The Ch1/Ch2 Deadband is a gap in percent between output 1 going off L3 R/W. Not
deadband 0.0 to and output 2 coming on and vice versa. applicable to VPU
100.0% For on/off control this is taken as a percentage of the hysteresis. outputs.

OP.up Output rate Off 0 Increasing output rate limit %/second. Limits the rate at which the L3 R/W.
up output from the PID can change. Output rate limit can be useful in Not applicable to
helping to prevent rapid changes in output from damaging the process VPU outputs.
or the heater elements. However, it should be used with care since the
higher setting could significantly affect the process performance.
Range OFF or 0.1%/Sec to display range.
OP.dwn Output rate OFF 0 Decreasing output rate limit %/second. Comments listed for Output L3 R/W
down Rate Up apply.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 131

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
op.dis disable When an output rate limit has been configured, this input can be used Conf R/W if
output rate as part of the strategy to temporarily disable rate limiting. OP.UP or
limits OP.DWN is
No 0 Enable.
enabled
Yes 1 Disable.
Pwr.FF Power OFF 0 Power Feedforward is a feature which monitors the line voltage and Conf R/W
feedforward adjusts the output signal to compensate for fluctuations before they L3 R/O
On 1
affect the process temperature. It is assumed that the supply to the
controller is the same as the supply to the load. Not applicable to
VPU outputs.
C.DB Channel 2 Ch1/Ch2 De22.0adband is a gap in percent between output 1 going off L3 R/W.
deadband and output 2 coming on and vice versa. Not applicable to
For on/off control this is taken as a percentage of the hysteresis. VPU outputs.
nlin.c Non-linear Channel 2 non-linear cooling algorithm. Selects the type of cooling Conf R/W.
cooling channel characterization to be used. L3 R/O
OFF 0 No non-linear cooling algorithm used. Ch2 output will be linear. Not applicable to
OiL 1 Often used in an extruder to provide cooling using oil. VPU outputs.

H2O 2 Often used in an extruder to provide flash cooling using water.

Fan 3 Often used in an extruder to provide on/off cooling using air or an
analog output to a VFD driving fan.
step.v manual step If the Manual Transfer type has been configured as 'Step' then this R/O
value value will be applied to the output on the transition from Auto to
Manual.
tt.h ch1 valve 22.0 The valve travel time in seconds for the channel 1 output. L3 R/W.
travel time This parameter must be set if the Ch1 Control Type is set to VP. Only shown if
The valve travel time is the time taken for the valve to move from Ch1 is VPU
fully-closed to fully-open. This must be the measured time to move output.
from endstop to endstop. This not necessarily the time printed on the
valve label.
In a Heat/Cool application Channel 1 is the heat valve.
Default: 22.0
tt.c ch2 valve The valve travel time in seconds for the channel 2 output. L3 R/W.
travel time This parameter must be set if the Ch2 Control Type is set to VP. Only shown if
The valve travel time is the time taken for the valve to move from Ch2 is VPU
fully-closed to fully-open. output.

This must be the measured time to move from endstop to endstop.

This not necessarily the time printed on the valve label.
In a Heat/Cool application, Channel 2 is the cool valve.
Default: 22.0
R.op.hi Remote 100.0% Can be used to limit the output of the loop from a remote source or L3 R/W
output high calculation.
limit Default: 100.0
R.op.lo Remote -100.0% Can be used to limit the output of the loop from a remote source or L3 R/W
output lower calculation.
limit Default: 0.0
r.op.di disable No 0 L3 R/W
Remote
YES 1 Disable remote output limits.
output
limits

132 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Diagnostics Sub-list
The diagnostic list contains parameters which may be used for troubleshooting or
may be soft wired as part of a control strategy.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
l.brk.t loop break OFF 0 Sets the loop break time. This parameter, along with L.BRK.D, sets Conf R/W
time the condition for loop break detection.
The loop break alarm attempts to detect loss of control in the
control loop by checking the control output, the process value and
its rate of change.
Loop break detection works for all control algorithms: PID, VP and
ON-OFF.
Note: This is not to be confused with load failure and partial load
failure.
l.brk.d loop break 10.0 If the controller output is saturated, this is the minimum change in Conf R/W
delta pv PV that the system would expect to see in 2× loop break times.
If the output is saturated and the PV has not moved by this amount
in 2×LoopBreakTime then the loop break alarm will be activated.
Default: 10.0
l.brk loop break No 0 R/O
detected
Yes 1 This flag indicates the a loop break has been detected.
demo enable demo OFF 0 Conf R/W
mode
On 1 Turns on the simulated plant for demonstration purposes.
dev deviation This is the process deviation (sometimes called error). R/O
It is calculated as PV minus SP. Therefore, a positive deviation
implies that the PV is above Setpoint, while a negative deviation
implies that the PV is below Setpoint.
tgt.op target output The requested control output. This is the output taken before rate R/O
any limiting.
w.op.hi working high This is the resolved upper output limit that is currently in use. It is R/O
output limit derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limits and the
global limits.
w.op.lo working low This is the resolved lower output limit that is currently in use. It is R/O
output limit derived from the gain scheduled limit, the remote limits and the
global limits.
p.term proportional This is the output contribution from the proportional term. This R/O
output term diagnostic is not available for VP.
i.term integral This is the output contribution from the integral term. This R/O
output term diagnostic is not available for VP.
d.term derivative This is the output contribution from the derivative term. This R/O
output term diagnostic is not available for VP.
l.volt measured line This is the line voltage measured by the instrument (in volts). This R/O
voltage is the value used for Power Feedforward if enabled.
w.pb.h scheduled ch1 The currently active channel 1 proportional band. R/O
prop band
w.pb.c scheduled ch2 The currently active channel 2 proportional band. R/O
proportional
band
w.ti scheduled OFF 0 The currently active integral time. R/O
intergral term
w.td scheduled OFF 0 The currently active derivative time R/O
derivative
term
w.cbh scheduled Auto 0 The currently active cutback high threshold. R/O
cutback high

HA033650ENG Issue 1 133

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
w.cbl scheduled Auto 0 The currently active cutback low threshold. R/O
cutback low
w.mr scheduled OFF 0 The currently active manual reset value. R/O
manual reset
at.lim output is No 0 R/O
saturated
YES 1 This flag will be asserted whenever the controller output is R/O
saturated (has hit a limit). This may be useful for a cascade
strategy.
in.hld hold mode No 0 R/O
active
YES 1 Hold mode is active. R/O
in.tra track mode No 0 R/O
active
YES 1 Track mode is active. R/O
in,man man or f_man No 0 R/O
mode selected
YES 1 Manual or F-mode selected. R/O
in.aut auto or f_auto No 0 R/O
mode selected
YES 1 Auto mode is selected. R/O
n.rem not remote No 0 R/O
YES 1 When true, this flag indicates that the controller is not ready to R/O
receive a remote setpoint.
Typically this is wired back to the Track output value of a cascade
master, such that the master can track the slave SP if the slave is
switched to local setpoint.
m.rdy master ready No 0 R/O
YES 1 When true, this flag indicates that the controller is not able to run R/O
as a cascade master.
Typically this is wired to the RSP_En input of a cascade slave,
such that the slave can control to a local setpoint if the master is
taken out of Auto mode.

134 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Programmer List (PROG)

In this list you set up the ‘fixed’ programmer conditions which are unlikely to change
from program to program, that is, they are generally set once for a particular process.

The actual creation and editing of programs is done in the PROGRAM SETUP list
which follows this section.

Access to the Programmer and Program Setup parameter list is summarized below.
The full Navigation Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From
previous list  PROG  P.SET  To next list
LIST LIST
(LOOP) (ALM)
   
E.ACCS P.NUM
R.ACCES HB.STY
RECOV HB.TYP
SERVO HB.VAL
R.RESN RAMP.U
RESN DWEL.U
MAX.EV P.CYC
R.EVT P.END
S.NUM
S.TYPE

Note: Program and Segment names TSP

R.RATE
have been added from firmware R.TIME
versions V.3.01 and above. See tables DUR
below. C.PRG.N
EV.OP

For details of the programmer feature see "Programmer" on page 257.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
e.accs edit access LEV1 0 This parameter sets the lowest HMI access level in which a program may be Conf R/W
set up.
LEV2 1 Default: Level 2
LEV3 2
CONF 3
r.acces run access LEV1 0 This parameter sets the lowest HMI access level at which programs can be Conf R/W
run, held or reset from the front panel.
LEV2 1 Default: Level 2
LEV3 2

HA033650ENG Issue 1 135

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
recov recovery When a program is running and the power to the instrument is interrupted, the Conf R/W
strategy status of the program is retained during the power down period. Upon power
being restored the programmer can be configured to recover the program as
listed below.
RAmP 0 Upon recovery the programmer will servo the programmer setpoint to the
current PV and then ramp to the target setpoint at the rate set prior to the
power outage. Then depending on the current segment type, the ramping
behavior to the target setpoint (TSP) will be as follows:
If the segment is a Ramp Rate then the time remaining for the segment will be
recalculated using the rate prior to the power outage.
If the segment is a Ramp Time segment, the calculated ramp rate prior to
power outage will be used.
If the interrupted segment was a dwell, then the ramp rate will be determined
by the previous ramp segment. On achieving the dwell setpoint, the dwell
period will continue.
If there is no previous ramp segment e.g. the interrupted segment is the first
segment of a program, then the dwell will continue at the current programmer
setpoint.
Default: Ramp
RSEt 1 Reset. The process is aborted by resetting the program. All event outputs will
take the reset state.
CONt 2 Continue. The program setpoint returns immediately to its last value prior to
the power interruption or sensor break, then continues to dwell or ramp to the
target setpoint at the ramp rate set for that segment. This may cause full
power to be applied to the process for a short period to heat the process back
to its value prior to the power outage.
servo servo to PV 0 The programmer setpoint (PSP) will start at the current level of the process Conf R/W
variable input (PV input).
Default: PV
sp 1 The programmer setpoint (PSP) will start at the setpoint input (SP input).
r.resn ramp rate Configures the display resolution of segment ramp rate parameters when Conf R/W
resolution read/written via scaled integer comms.
nnnnn 0 No decimal places.
nnnn.n 1 One decimal place.
Default: nnnn.n
nnn.nn 2 Two decimal places.
nn.nnn 3 Three decimal places.
n.nnnn 4 Four decimal places.
resn program Configures the time resolution of the segment time left and the program time Conf R/W
resolution left.
When read/written via scaled integer comms, the time format displayed on the
HMI is shown as:
SEC will be MM:SS.
MIN will be HH:MM.
HOUR will be HHH.H.
SEC 0 Seconds.
Default: Seconds
mIN 1 Minutes.
HOur 2 Hours.
max.ev max events 0 to 8 Configures the maximum number of events which are available in the Conf R/W
program.
Default: 1

136 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
r,evt reset event This parameter sets which event outputs are to be turned on when the
program is in its reset state. This is a bit field where the decimal value entered
into the HMI converts to binary, as shown in the table below, to determine
which events are turned on.
For example, set the value to 15 to turn on event outputs 1,2, 3,and 4 in reset.
If iTools is used to set the event outputs it is only necessary to tick which
events are to be switched on in a segment, see "Event Outputs" on page 272.
Default: 0 (all off)
mx.prg max programs Shows the maximum number of programs that can be configured. R/O
This parameter has been added from firmware versions V3.02 and greater.
mx.seg max segments Shows the maximum number of segments that can be configured. The R/O
number includes the End segment.
This parameter has been added from firmware versions V3.02 and greater.

Enable block number

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Value
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 15
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 31
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 63
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255

Note: A running program shows further parameters in Operator Levels 1 and 2.

These are shown in sections "Level 1 Programmer Display" on page 83 and "Level 2
Operator Parameters" on page 86.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 137

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Program Setup List (P.SEt)

The Program setup list allows you to set up and edit the profiles of one to ten stored
programs and the profile of the currently running program. The list, therefore, has one
instance and multiple numbered sub lists.

Access to the Program Setup parameter list is summarized in section "Programmer

List (PROG)" on page 135.

See also "Programmer" on page 257 for further details of the programmer feature.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
p.num program 1 to 10 Select the program number to configure or to run. The parameters which L3 R/W
number follow apply to the selected program number.
Default: 1
p.name program This parameter has been added from firmware versions V3.02 and greater. R/O
name It is set up in iTools.
hb.sty holdback To set the holdback style. L3 R/W
style
PROG 0 Holdback is applied to the whole program.
Default: Programmer
SEGm 1 Holdback is applied to every segment.
hb.typ holdback Off 0 Holdback is disabled. L3 R/W
type This parameter is shown only if Holdback style = PrOG.
Default: Off
Low 1 Holdback is entered when the PV is lower than the Program Setpoint minus
Holdback Value.
HigH 2 Holdback is entered when the PV is greater than the Program Setpoint plus
Holdback Value.
band 3 Holdback is entered when the PV is either greater than the Program Setpoint
plus Holdback Value or lower than the Program Setpoint minus Holdback
Value.
hb.val holdback 0.0 To set the value at which holdback will be entered. This parameter is not L3 R/W
value shown if Holdback Type = OFF.
Default: 0.0
ramp.u ramp units Sets the units for segment ramp rate and ramp time values when
read/written via scaled integer comms.
p.sec 0 The setpoint will ramp at units per second.
Default: Per second
p.mIN 1 The setpoint will ramp at units per minute.
P.Hr 2 The setpoint will ramp at units per hour.
dwel.u dwell units Sets the units for dwell duration values when read/written via scaled integer L3 R/W
comms.
SECS 0 Each dwell period will be in seconds.
Default: Secs
mINS 1 Each dwell period will be in minutes.
HRS 2 Each dwell period will be in hours.
p.cyc program CONt or 0 The program will repeat continuously or for the set number of times. L3 R/W
cycles 1 to 9999 Default: 1

138 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
p.end program end dWEL 0 At the end of the program the programmer setpoint (PSP) will dwell (remain) L3 R/W
type at its current value until manual intervention.
Default: Dwell
RSEt 1 At the end of the program the programmer will go into reset state and the
program setpoint will servo to either the PVInput or the SPInput depending
on the ServoTo parameter value
tRAk 2 At the end of the program the programmer setpoint (PSP) will dwell at its
current value and the control loop will be placed in Track mode.
s.num currnt 1 to 25 This shows which segment number is currently running. The controller R/O
segment supports 24 segments plus an END segment.
number
s.name segment This parameter has been added from firmware versions V.xxx and greater. R/O
name It is set up in iTools.
s.type segment ENd 0 Program ends. L3 R/W
type Default: End
RAtE 1 Ramp to the target value using a configured ramp rate.
tImE 2 Ramp to the target value within a configured TimeToTarget value.
dWEL 3 Dwell at the current programmer setpoint (PSP) for a configured time
duration.
StEP 4 Immediate change of the programmer setpoint from the current value to the
target setpoint value (followed by a 1s dwell period to allow event outputs to
be triggered).
CALL 5 A call segment allows the main program to call another program as a
subroutine. See also C.PRG.N below.
tsp target To set the level which the programmer setpoint (PSP) will reach at the end of L3 R/W
setpoint the segment.
Default: 0.0
r.rate ramp rate This applies if the Segment Type = ‘rAtE . It sets the ramp rate, in L3 R/W
units/time, at which the programmer setpoint (PSP) is to change to reach the
target setpoint (TSP).
Default: 0.1
r.time time to 00:00 This applies if the Segment Type = ‘TIme’. It sets the ramp time, which is L3 R/W
target the time it will take, in the selected segment, for the programmer setpoint
(PSP) to move from the current level to the target setpoint (TSP).
Default: 0
dur dwell 00:00 This applies if the segment type is Dwell. It sets the time for a soak period in L3 R/W
duration that segment.
Default: 0.0
c.prg.n call 2 to 10 To select a program number to be run as a subroutine of the current L3 R/W
program program. The Call program number will be defaulted to the next higher
program number, for example, when configuring a Call segment in Program
5, the Call Program Number will default to Program 6. Programs can only
call program numbers greater than its own to prevent cyclic calls.
ev.op event This parameter sets which event outputs are to be turned on in a particular L3 R/W
outputs segment. This is a bit field where the decimal value entered into the HMI
converts to binary, as shown in the table below, to determine which events
are turned on.
For example, set the value to 6 to turn on event outputs 2 and 3 in the
selected segment. If iTools is used to set the event outputs it is only
necessary to tick which events are to be switched on in a segment, see
"Event Outputs" on page 272.
Default: 0 (all off)
When a segment has been set up the next segment will be selected and the above parameters will be repeated.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 139

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Enable block number

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Value
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 15
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 31
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 63
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255

140 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Alarms List (ALm)

See also Chapter "Alarms" on page 245 which describes alarm features.

Access to the Alarms parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From previous To next list
 ALm 
list (P.SEt) LIST (BCD)


1 2
Repeat for up
INST INST to 6 alarms

   
TYPE TYPE
STAT STAT
IN IN
THLD THLD
HYST HYST
LATCH LATCH
BLOCK BLOCK
DELAY DELAY
OUT OUT
ACK ACK
INHIB INHIB
S.INHB S.INHB
REF REF
RATE RATE
RT.UNIT RT.UNIT
FILT.T FILT.T

HA033650ENG Issue 1 141

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The following parameters are available in the Alarms Menu.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Description

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
INST Alarm number 1 to 6 Up to 6 alarms may be configured. Select each alarm as required. L3 R/W
The parameters in the following list apply to each alarm number. Conf R/W
Type Alarm Type Off 0 The alarm is disabled. L3 R/O
Default: Off Conf RW
Abs.H 1 The alarm is triggered when the input value becomes greater than the
threshold.
Abs.L 2 The alarm is triggered when the input becomes less than the threshold
DeV.H 3 The alarm is triggered when the input becomes higher than the reference
by the amount of the deviation.
DeV.L 4 The alarm is triggered when the input becomes lower than the reference
by the amount of the deviation.
DeV.B 5 The alarm is triggered when the input differs from the reference by the
amount of the deviation.
R.ROC 6 The alarm is triggered when the input changes positively by more than a
specified amount within a specified period (second, minute, hour). It will
remain active until the input value's positive rate of change falls below the
specified rate.
F.ROC 7 The alarm is triggered when the input changes negatively by more than a
specified amount within a specified period (second, minute, hour). It will
remain active until the input value's negative rate of change falls below the
specified rate.
Dig.H 8 The alarm is triggered when the input is equivalent to a Boolean '1' i.e.
>=0.5.
Dig.L 9 The alarm is triggered when the input is equivalent to a Boolean '0' i.e. <
0.5.
stat aLarm status This shows that the alarm is Off, Active, InactiveNotAcked or R/O
ActiveNotAcked.
OFF 0 No alarm. Always shows ‘Off’ when the alarm is inhibited.
Act 1 Active. The alarm is still present but has been acknowledged.
INA 2 Inactive Not Acknowledged means that the alarm trigger source has
returned to a non-alarm state, but the alarm is still active because it has
not been acknowledged. applies to ‘Auto’ and ‘Manual’ latching alarms
only,
ANa 3 Active not acknowledged means that the source is still active and the
alarm has not been acknowledged.
in input The value being monitored. R/O
thld threshold 1.0 For absolute alarms only, this is the trip point for the alarm. For absolute L3 R/W
high alarms, if the input value exceeds the threshold value, then the alarm Conf R/W
becomes active, and remains active until the input falls below the value
(threshold − hysteresis).
For absolute low alarms, if the input falls below the threshold value, then
the alarm becomes active and remains active until the input rises above
(Threshold + Hysteresis).
Default: 1.0
hyst hysteresis 0.0 Hysteresis is the difference between the point at which the alarm switches
‘ON’ and the point at which it switches ‘OFF’. It is used to provide a definite
indication of the alarm condition and to help prevent alarm relay chatter. A
value of 0.0 disables hysteresis.
Default: 0.0

142 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Description

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
Latch Latching None 0 No latching methodology i.e. when the alarm condition is removed the L3 R/W
type alarm will become inactive without being acknowledged. Conf R/W
Default: None
Auto 1 The alarm will remain active until the alarm condition has been removed
and the alarm has been acknowledged. The alarm can be acknowledged
at any time after the alarm has become active.
Man 2 The alarm will remain active until the alarm condition has been removed
and the alarm has been acknowledged. The alarm can only be
acknowledged after the alarm condition has been removed.
EVnt 3 Same as a non-latching alarm except the alarm is used as a trigger and
therefore will not be announced.
block blocking Off 0 Blocking disabled. L3 R/W
enable Default: Off Conf R/W
On 1 Alarms with ‘Block’ set to ‘On’ are inhibited until the monitored value has
entered the working condition after a start-up. This helps to prevent such
alarms from becoming active whilst the process is brought into control. If a
latching alarm is not acknowledged then the alarm is reasserted (not
blocked), unless the alarm threshold or reference value is changed, in
which case the alarm is blocked again.
delay delay 0.0 to Initiates a delay in seconds between the trigger source becoming active, L3 R/W
9999.9 and the alarm becoming active. If the trigger source returns to a non alarm Conf R/W
state before the delay time has elapsed, then the alarm is not triggered
and the delay timer is reset.
A value of 0 turns off the delay timer.
Default: 0.0.
out output Off 0 Boolean output which is set to '1' when status is not ‘off’. R/O
ON 1
ack acknowledge No 0 Not acknowledged. L3 R/W
Yes 1 Select YES to acknowledge the alarm. The display then returns to No. Confi R/W

inhib inhibit the OFF 0 Alarm not inhibited. L3 R/W

alarm Conf R/W
On 1 When ‘Inhibit’ is enabled, the alarm is inhibited and Status is set to ‘Off’. If
the alarm is active when inhibit is enabled, then it becomes inactive until
inhibit is disabled, when its status depends on its configuration. Similarly if
the alarm trigger becomes active when the alarm is inhibited, the alarm
remains ‘off’ until inhibit is disabled, when its status depends on its
configuration.
Default: Off
s.inhb inhibit in OFF 0 When the instrument is in standby mode, the alarm will be inhibited if this L3 R/W
standby parameter is On. Conf R/W
On 1
Default: Off
ref reference 1 For deviation alarms only, this provides a ‘center point’ for the deviation L3 R/W
band. Conf R/W
For ‘deviation high’ alarms, the alarm becomes active if the input rises
above the value (Reference + Deviation) and remains active until the input
falls below (Reference + Deviation - Hysteresis).
For ‘deviation low’ alarms, the alarm becomes active if the input falls below
the value (Reference - Deviation) and remains active until the input rises
above (Reference - Deviation + Hysteresis).
For ‘deviation band’ alarms, the alarm is active whenever the input lies
outside the value (Reference ± Deviation) and remains active until the
input returns to within the band, minus or plus Hysteresis as appropriate.
Default: 1.0
Note: If blocking is enabled, changing this parameter will activate alarm
blocking. This includes when being wired to. You must ensure that the
source value is not noisy, otherwise the alarm will always be
blocked.Range −19999 to 99999.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 143

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Description

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
dev deviation 1 Used in deviation alarms. The deviation value added to or subtracted from L3 R/W
the reference value at which the input is evaluated against. Range −19999 Conf R/W
to 99999.
Default: 1.0
rate rate 1.00 For rate-of-change alarms only. The alarm becomes active if the input R/O
rises (Rising ROC) or falls (Falling ROC) at a rate that is greater than the Conf R/W
specified 'Rate' per 'Rate Unit'.
The alarm remains active until the rate of change falls below the set 'Rate'.
Range −19999 to 99999.
Default: 1.0
rt.unit Rate units Sec 0 The rate units, used in rate of change alarms, selects the units for the rate L3 R/W
parameter in seconds, minutes or hours. Conf R/W
Min 1
Default: Seconds
Hr 2
filt.t filter time 0.0 For rate-of-change alarms only. This allows a filter period (for the input) to L3 R/W
be entered to reduce nuisance trips due to electrical signal noise, or if the Config RW
rate of change is hovering around the trip value.
Range 0.0 to 9999.9 seconds.
Default: 0.0

144 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

BCD List (bCd)

The BCD Input Function block takes eight digital inputs and combines them to make
a single numeric value, typically used to select a program or a recipe.

The block uses 4 bits to generate a single digit.

Two groups of four bits are used to generate a two digit value (0 to 99).

Access to the BCD parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation Diagram
is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From
bCd
To next list
previous list  
LIST (RECP)
(ALM)
 
BCD.1
BCD.2
BCD.3
BCD.4
BCD.5
BCD.6
BCD.7
BCD.8
BCD.OP
BCD.ST

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
bcd.1 bcd input 1 OFF 0 L2 R/O
On 1 Digital input 1. Conf R/W

bcd.2 bcd input 2 OFF 0

On 1 Digital input 2.
bcd.3 bcd input 3 OFF 0
On 1 Digital input 3.
bcd.4 bcd input 4 OFF 0
On 1 Digital input 4.
bcd.5 bcd input 5 OFF 0
On 1 Digital input 5.
bcd.6 bcd input 6 OFF 0
On 1 Digital input 6.
bcd.7 bcd input 7 OFF 0
On 1 Digital input 7.
bcd.8 bcd input 8 OFF 0
On 1 Digital input 8.
bcd.op bcd output Reads the value (in BCD) of the switch as it appears on the digital R/O
inputs. See the examples in the table below.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 145

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
bcd.st bcd settle 1.0 As a BCD switch is turned from the current value to another,
time Range intermediate values may be seen on the output parameters of the
0.0 to block. These could cause issues in some applications.
10.0 The Settle Time can be used to filter out these intermediate values by
seconds applying a settling period between the inputs changing and the
converted values appearing at the outputs.
Default: 1s

in1 In2 In3 In4 In5 In6 In7 In8 BCD.OP

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 9
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 90
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 91
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 99

For BCD Switch wiring example, refer to "Example 1 BCD Switch Wiring" on page 56.

146 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Recipe List (RECP)

A recipe is a list of parameters whose values can be captured and stored in a
dataset. This dataset can then be loaded into the controller at any time to restore the
recipe parameters, thus providing a means of altering the configuration of an
instrument in a single operation even in operator mode.

A maximum of 5 datasets are supported, referenced by its name, defaulted to be the

dataset number i.e. 1…5.

Access to the Recipe parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From
previous list  RECP  To next list
LIST
(BCD (COMM)
 
LOAD
SAVE
E. ALT

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
load dataset to NONE 0 Selects which recipe dataset to load. Once selected, the values stored in the
load dataset will be copied back over the active parameters.
Default: None
1 to 5 Dataset 1 to 5.
DONE 101 Load completed successfully.
u.suc 102 Dataset selection unsuccessful .
save dataset to NONE 0 Selects which of the 5 recipe datasets in which to store the current active
save parameters. When selected, this parameter initiates a snapshot of the
current parameter set into the selected recipe dataset.
1 to 5 Dataset 1 to 5.
DONE 101 Save completed successfully.
u.suc 102 Unsuccessful will be displayed if the values were not saved successfully. If it
completes OK, then the display does not change.
e.alt Enable YES 1 Enabled. Set to ‘Yes’ to check all parameters can be written in the current
alterability mode before loading a recipe dataset.
checks Default: Yes
No 0 Disabled. Set to ‘No’ to write all parameters regardless of their ‘config-only’
status.
See Note below.

Note: Changing configurations and certain parameters whilst in Operator mode

can cause disturbances in the process and, therefore, by default, a dataset will not be
loaded (no parameters written to) if a parameter contained in the recipe is not
writeable in operator mode. To cater for users who require the loading to operate in a
similar manner to the 3200 controller (no parameter checking), this functionality can
be disabled. However, to reduce disturbances in the process, whilst loading a dataset
which contains configuration parameters the Instrument will be forced into standby
whilst the loading is in progress.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 147

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

If the recipe load cannot be completed for any reason (values are invalid or out of
range), the instrument will be half configured. The instrument will put itself into
Standby and display the "REC.S - INCOMPLETE RECIPE LOAD" message. This will
continue after a power cycle, but can be cleared by entering and exiting config mode.

There is no default list of parameters for the EPC3000 series controllers. The
parameters required to be held in recipe are defined using iTools, see "Recipes" on
page 237.

148 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Save Recipes
1. Add your required parameters to the Recipe Definition list as described in
"Recipe Definitions" on page 237.

2. In the controller adjust any of the parameters in the above list (or in your
customized list) as required for a particular process or batch.

3. Scroll to the Recipe List, and select ’dataset to save’.

4. Select a recipe number (1 to 5) in which to store the current parameter values.

When the current values have been successfully saved the display will show
dONE.

5. Repeat the above for a second or subsequent process or batch and save under a
different recipe number.

To Load a Recipe
To recall a saved recipe:

1. Scroll to the Recipe List, and select ‘dataset to load’.

2. Select the required Recipe number. The display will flicker once to show that the
selected recipe has been loaded.

Notes:
1. Recipes may be saved and recalled in Operator Levels 2, 3 and Configuration by
default. It is also possible to Promote the Recipe parameters to Level 1 if
required. This is done using iTools as explained in "Parameter Promotion" on
page 233.
2. Recipes can also be saved and recalled using iTools as described in "Recipes"
on page 237.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 149

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Communications List (COmm)

There are three communications ports available in EPC3000 series controllers.
These are:

• Configuration communication port accessed by the Config clip, see "Using the
Configuration Clip" on page 213. The configuration communication port has fixed
settings and is used in conjunction with iTools to configure the controller. No
passwords are required to place the controller into configuration mode via the
CPI clip.

• Fixed communication port accessed via the rear terminal connections HD to HF.
This supports the RS-485 interface on EPC3008 and EPC3004. EPC3016 has
no Fixed communication port but has an Option communication port (see below).
The Fixed communications port is used, for example, to communicate with
SCADA packages via Modbus RTU or EI-Bisynch protocols. It can also be used
to configure the controller using iTools but passwords are required to place the
controller into configuration mode.

• Option communication port currently supports serial RS-232, RS-422, RS-485

and Ethernet (RJ45) interfaces for the EPC3016 and Ethernet interface for the
EPC3004 and EPC3008.

Communication settings for Fixed and Option communication ports, sometimes

referred to as "User Comms", can be configured via the HMI and iTools using the
Comms list. The Fixed and Option lists contain the same parameters, however some
parameters may become available/unavailable depending on the interfaces and
protocols selected

Access to the Digital Communications parameter list is summarized below. The full
Navigation Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

From 

previous COMM
list (RECP) LIST


Fixed F.COM O.COM Option
INST
Comms INST Comms
   
To next
mAIN NWRK BCST mAIN NWRK BCST
s.list s.list s.list s.list s.list s.list list
(MATH)
           

INTF BAUD ENABL INTF IP.MD ENABL

PROT PRTY DEST PROT IP.A1-4 DEST
N.STA NODE VALUE N.STA IP.S1-4 VALUE
W.TIME m.fmt W.TIME IP.G1-4
W.ACTN W.ACTN MAC1 -6
W.RCOV W.RCOV B.STM
W.FLAG W.FLAG R.PRT
DELAY DELAY M.FMT
T.FMT T.FMT

150 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Main Sub List (mAIN)

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access
Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
intf interface Communications interface. For the Fixed communication port, interface is set R/O
according to the hardware fitted. For the Option communication port, it is set
according to the configured expected option board in the Instrument function block.
none 0 No interface.
r485 1 EIA485 (RS-485).
r232 2 EIA232 (RS-232). EPC3016 option only.
r422 3 EIA422 (RS-422). EPC3016 option only.
ETH 4 Ethernet (only shown if the Ethernet options is expected). See also section "IP
Mode Settings" on page 324.
RSP 7 Remote setpoint. In EPC3016 this enumeration will not be shown
prot protocol Protocol running on the comms interface. Conf R/W
nonE 0 No protocol - when a serial interface is fitted. (No further parameters are shown).
Default: None serial
m.sLV 1 Modbus RTU (slave) protocol enabled.
EI.bS 2 EI-Bisynch protocol enabled.
m.mST 3 Modbus RTU master protocol enabled.
nonE 10 No protocol - when Ethernet interface is fitted.
Default: Ethernet
m.tcp 11 Modbus TCP protocol enanled - only shown if the Ethernet option is fitted.
EIP.m 12 EthernetIP and Modbus TCP protocol enabled - available in firmware versions
V4.01 and above.
bAC.m 13 BACnet protocol enabled - available in firmware versions V4.01 and above.
m.mst 15 Modbus TCP master and slave protocol enabled.
n.sta status Status of the communications used by Modbus TCP. R/O
OFFL 0 Offline and not communicating.
INIT 1 Initializing communications.
RDY 2 Ready to accept connection. Not used by Modbus TCP.
Run 3 Ready to accept connections or controller communicating.
The following 4 parameters configure the Comms Watchdog Strategy. Used by Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP.
w.time watchdog 0.0 If the communications stop addressing the instrument longer than this configurable Conf R/W
timeout period, the Watchdog Flag will become active. A value of 0 disables the watchdog.
Default: 0
w.actn watchdog mAN 0 The Watchdog Flag may be cleared Automatically upon reception of valid messages Conf R/W
action or Manually by clearing the Watchdog Flag parameter.
Auto 1
Default: Manual
w.rcov watchdog 0.0 This parameter is only shown when the Watchdog Action is set to Auto. It is a timer Conf R/W
recovery that determines the delay, after reception of valid messages recommences, before
the Watchdog Flag is cleared.
A value of 0 will reset the Watchdog Flag upon the first valid message received.
Other values will wait for at least 2 valid messages to be received within the set time
before clearing the Watchdog Flag.
Default: 0
w.flag watchdog OFF 0 The Watchdog Flag will become active if the communications stop addressing the L3 R/O
flag instrument longer than the Watchdog Timeout period,
On 1
delay delay No 0 Introduces a delay between end of receive and beginning of transmit. This is Conf R/W
sometimes necessary if the line transceivers require an extended time to switch to
YES 1
tristate. Comms delay is used by Modbus RTU and EI-Bisynch communication
protocols.
Default: No

HA033650ENG Issue 1 151

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
t.fmt time mSEC 0 Sets the resolution of time parameters on this communications port when L3 R/W
format read/written via scaled integer comms (Milliseconds, Seconds, Minutes, Hours).
SEC 1
Default: ms
mIN 2
HOuR 3

152 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Network Sub List (nWrk)

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access
Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
The first three parameters apply to Modbus and EI-Bisynch Communications protocols.
baud baud rate Baud rate of the network communications.
19k2 Default for ModbusRTU
9600 Default for EI-bisynch
4800 Applies to EI-Bisynch protocol only.
paty parity Parity of the network communications.
Default: None
NONE 0 No parity.
EVEN 1 Even parity.
Odd 2 Odd parity.
node node address 1 The address used by the instrument to identify itself on the network.
254 Default: 1
The following parameters apply to Ethernet in the Option Communications sub-list. See also section "IP Mode Settings" on page 324.
a.disc auto discovery The controller and iTools software supports automatic discovery of Conf R/W
MODBUS TCP enabled instruments.
Default: Off
OFF 0 For cyber security reasons the auto discovery feature is turned OFF by
default.
On 1 To enable this feature set this parameter to ON.
Please ensure that your network interface card is set to local.
If, for any reason, the controller is not auto-detected and Wi-Fi is
enabled on your PC, turn off Wi-Fi and re-start iTools.
ip.md ip mode StAt 0 Static. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are set Conf R/W
manually.
Default: Static
dHCP 1 DHCP. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are supplied
by a DHCP server on the network.
ip.a1 IP Address 1 1st byte of the IP Address: XXX.xxx.xxx.xxx. Default: 192 Conf R/W
ip.a2 IP Address 2 2nd byte of the IP Address: xxx.XXX.xxx.xxx. Default: 168 Conf R/W
ip.a3 IP Address 3 3rd byte of the IP Address: xxx.xxx.XXX.xxx. Default: 111 Conf R/W
ip.a4 IP Address 4 4th byte of the IP Address: xxx.xxx.xxx.XXX. Default: 222 Conf R/W
ip.s1 subnet mask 1 1st byte of the Subnet Mask: XXX.xxx.xxx.xxx. Default: 255 Conf R/W
ip.s2 subnet mask 2 2nd byte of the Subnet Mask: xxx.XXX.xxx.xxx. Default: 255 Conf R/W
ip.s3 subnet mask 3 3rd byte of the Subnet Mask: xxx.xxx.XXX.xxx. Default: 255 Conf R/W
ip.s4 sub net mask 4 4th byte of the Subnet Mask: xxx.xxx.xxx.XXX. Default: 0 Conf R/W
ip.g1 Default gateway 1 1st byte of the Default Gateway: XXX.xxx.xxx.xxx. Default: 0 Conf R/W
ip.g2 Default gateway 2 2nd byte of the Default Gateway: xxx.XXX.xxx.xxx. Default: 0 Conf R/W
ip.g3 Default gateway 3 3rd byte of the Default Gateway: xxx.xxx.XXX.xxx. Default: 0 Conf R/W
ip.g4 Default gateway 4 4th byte of the Default Gateway: xxx.xxx.xxx.XXX. Default: 0 Conf R/W
mac1 mac 1 1st byte of the MAC address in decimal: XX:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Conf R/O
mac2 mac 2 2nd byte of the MAC address in decimal: xx:XX:xx:xx:xx:xx Conf R/O
mac3 mac 3 3rd byte of the MAC address in decimal: xx:xx:XX:xx:xx:xx Conf R/O
mac4 mac 4 4th byte of the MAC address in decimal: xx:xx:xx:XX:xx:xx Conf R/O
mac5 mac 5 5th byte of the MAC address in decimal: xx:xx:xx:xx:XX:xx Conf R/O
mac6 mac 6 6th byte of the MAC address in decimal: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:XX Conf R/O
b.stm broadcast storm No 0 Broadcast storm active. If the reception rate of Ethernet broadcast R/O
packets rises too high, broadcast storm mode will become active and
the reception of broadcast packets will be disabled until the rate drops.
YES 1

HA033650ENG Issue 1 153

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
r.prt rate protection No 0 Rate protection active. If rate at which Ethernet unicast packets are R/O
received becomes too high, the instrument will enter a special mode
YES 1
that slows down Ethernet processing to preserve core functionality.
m.fmt MsgFormat Defines the format of EI-Bisynch messages.
free 0 Messages are right aligned within 6 characters including padding
spaces if necessary. For example, the value -3.45 will be represented as
"-<space>3.45".
Default: Free
fI.FM 1 Messages consist of 5 characters between 0 and 3 decimal places
using zeroes as padding if necessary. Decimal point is replaced with
minus symbol for negative values. For example, the value -5.30 will be
represented as "05-30".

Note: IP Addresses are usually presented in the form "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". Within the
instrument each element of the IP Address is shown and configured separately.

Note: It is recommended that the communications settings for each instrument are
set up before connecting it to any Ethernet network. This is not essential but network
conflicts may occur if the default settings interfere with equipment already on the
network. By default the instruments are set to a static IP address of 192.168.111.222
with a default subnet mask setting of 255.255.255.0.

Broadcast Sub List (bCSt)

Broadcast comms applies to serial Modbus only. In EPC3016 this requires the
relevant option board to be fitted.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
enabl Enable No 0 Broadcast comms not enabled. Conf R/W
Default: No
YES 1 Enable single value Modbus broadcast.
dest destination 0 If the Modbus broadcast facility is enabled, this address will be used as the Conf R/W
destination register for the value to be written. For example, if the remote
instrument requires a setpoint at register address 26 decimal, the parameter
should be set to this value.
Default: 0
value broadcast 0 If the Modbus broadcast facility is enabled, this value will be sent to the slave Conf R/W
value devices, after being transformed into a 'scaled integer' 16 bit value. To use the
feature, enable broadcast using BroadcastEnable, and wire any instrument
value to this parameter.
Default: 0

154 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EtherNet/IP Sub List

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access
Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
H.Name EtherNet/IP
Host Name
C.STAT EtherNet/IP Comms Status of the EtherNet/IP Comms. R/O
Status
OFLN 0 Not Started.
RDY 1 Ready.
StBY 2 Standby.
RUN 3 Running.
To.STA EtherNet/IP TO Displays the EtherNet/IP Target to Originator comms status. R/O
Status
DATA 0 Data Correctly Exchanged.
CONN 1 Connection in Progress.
N.CON 2 No Connection Detected.
T.OUT 3 Connection Timed Out.
N.MAC 4 Unknown MAC Address.
N.CSM 5 Consumption Timeout.
CLSD 6 Connection Closed.
STOP 7 Module Stopped.
ENC.E 8 Encapsulation Error Detected.
TCP.E 9 TCP Connection Error Detected.
N.RSC 10 No Resource.
BAD.F 11 Bad Format.
IDLE 12 Idle Mode.
UNKN 13 Unknown Status.
OT.STA EtherNet/IP OT Same As Above Displays the EtherNet/IP Originator to Target comms status. R/O
Status
N.STAT EtherNet/IP Status of the EtherNet/IP network. R/O
Network Status NO.IP 0 No IP Address Found.
N.CON 1 No Connection Established.
CONN 2 Connection Established.
T.OUT 3 Connection Timed Out.
ERR 4 Error Detected in Network Comms.
M.STAT EtherNet/IP Status of the EtherNet/IP comms module. R/O
Module Status N.PWR 0 No Power.
N.CFG 1 Not Configured.
RUN 2 Running.
ERR 3 Module Error Detected.
M.ERR 4 Major Error Detected.
T.OUT EtherNet/IP TCP 1 to EtherNet/IP TCP comms timeout in seconds. R/O
Timeout 3600 If no exchange during this time, TCP connection will be closed by
EPC3000. Can be configured using Attribute 13 of TCP/IP Object
via EtherNet/IP comms.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 155

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

BACnet Sub List (b.NEt)

BACnet is configured through the HMI or through iTools using the parameters in this
list. The list is only shown if the BACnet comms option has been ordered or enabled
using feature codes. BACnet is described in section "BACnet" on page 341.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
ID Device id 0 -9999 The instance ID for this instrument. Must be unique on the network. Conf R/W
Default: 0
port port 7808 The BACnet standard port is 7808. Range 0 to 9999. Conf R/W
Default:7808
pass password 100 The BACnet password for Remote Device Management. Conf R/W
Default: 100
DB.REV BACNET 0-65535 Revision number of BACnet database, increments upon change of device Conf R/W
DATABASE name.
REVISION
state BBMD STATUS OFF 0 Enable/Disable registration of the instrument as a foreign device. L3 R/W
Default: OFF (disabled)
On 1 Enabled
b.ip.a1 bbmd ip 0 The first byte of the BACnet Broadcast Management device (BBMD) IP Conf R/W
address 1 address. Range 0 to 255.
Default: 0.0.0.0.
b.ip.a2 bbmd ip 0 The second byte of the BBMD IP address. Range 0 to 255. Conf R/W
address 2 Default: 0.0.0.0.
b.ip.a3 bbmd ip 0 The third byte of the BBMD IP address. Range 0 to 255. Conf R/W
address 3 Default: 0.0.0.0.
b.ip.a4 bbmd ip 0 The fourth byte of the BBMD IP address. Range 0 to 255. Conf R/W
address 4 Default: 0.0.0.0.
b.port bbmd port 7808 The port number of the BBMD device. Range 1024 to 9999. Conf R/W
Default: 7808
b.ttl bbmd ttl 0 Timeout in seconds for registering as a foreign device with BBMD device. Conf R/W
Range 0 to 9999.
Default: 0

156 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Modbus Master List (mOd.m)

From firmware version V4.xx the Modbus Master list is available when the
communication protocol Modbus Master (Modbus Master TCP/IP) has been ordered
(or additionally purchased). Modbus Master can be configured using either the
products HMI or using Eurotherm’s iTools software, iTools being the preferred
method.

Access to the Modbus Master and ‘master slave’ configuration parameter list is
summarized in the following diagram. The full Navigation Diagram is shown in
section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

The communication protocol Modbus Master allows a product to be configured as a

Modbus Master to either Ethernet (TCP) or serial (RTU) Modbus slaves which
extends the functionality of the modbus communications protocol as it allows the
instrument to send data transactions (dt.1 to dt.32) to user configured slave
instruments.

The following sub lists are used to configure Modbus Master:

• Main (m.AIN) sub list used to add and configure a maximum of three slaves (SLV.1,
SLV.2, SLV.3), see page 158.

• Diagnostic (dIAG) sub list, used to diagnose the Modbus Master configuration
see page 161.

• Data (dAta) sub list, used to configure the data type requests to the slave devices
added to the Modbus Master configuration see page 163.

For further information see "Modbus Master" on page 344.

Return to previous list

Enter CONF level

From previous
list (COMM) mOd.M
LIST

SLV.1 SLV.2 SLV.3 Dt.1 Dt.32

INST INST INST INST INST

       
 

mAIN DIag DAta

s.list s.list S.LIST

    


DESC AC.HI DESC

NTWK AC.M SLV.D
ONLN AC.LO P.LST
FAIL Idle PV
IP.A1 Ping stat
IP.a2 totL M.ADR
Ip.a3 Sent F.COD
IP.a4 Fail D.TYp
Unit Retr pRio
SRCH t.out
PROF Fcn.e
RETR Add.e
s.res Dat.e
t.out Slv.e
BLK.s Gw.e
HI.RT Rest
MI.RT
Lo.RT

HA033650ENG Issue 1 157

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Main Sub List (mAIN)

The multiple slave lists, one for each slave device configured contain the same
parameters, however parameter availability may differ depending on the interfaces
and slave profile selected.
Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access
Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
SLV.1 DESCription The devices unique string name description used for each Modbus Conf R/W
slave device.
Defaults: SLV.n where n is the instance number
NTwk Network Network Hardware choice: Conf R/W
eNET 1 Ethernet
SER 2 Serial
oNLN oNLine If the EPC3000 is in Operator mode, it will always attempt to Conf R/W
communicate with a slave device using cyclic communications while
online. When not online all cyclic communications with the slave
device will be suspended, and no cyclic transactions will be sent.
Acyclic transaction however can still be sent even when the EPC3000
is in Configuration mode.
OFF 0 Off
On 1 On
FAIL COMMS FAILURE If communications with the slave device have been lost for whatever Conf R/W
reason then this output is set high.
No 0 Off
YES 1 On
Ip.a1 IP Address 1 The Internet Protocol (IP) address of the slave device. Conf R/W
IP Address format is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
This parameter represents the first byte, i.e. XXX.xxx.xxx.xxx.
Ip.a1 IP Address 2 The Internet Protocol (IP) address of the slave device. Conf R/W
IP Address format is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
This parameter represents the second byte, i.e. xxx.XXX.xxx.xxx.
Ip.a1 IP Address 3 The Internet Protocol (IP) address of the slave device. Conf R/W
IP Address format is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
This parameter represents the third byte, i.e. xxx.xxx.XXX.xxx.
Ip.a1 IP Address 4 The Internet Protocol (IP) address of the slave device. Conf R/W
IP Address format is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
This parameter represents the fourth byte, i.e. xxx.xxx.xxx.XXX.
unit UNIT ID The Modbus unit ID used in transactions to identify a specific slave on Conf R/W
a Modbus TCP network. A separate parameter (Modbus slave
address) is used for identifying a specific slave in a Modbus RTU
network.
SLAVE SLAVE ADDRESS The Modbus slave address of the instrument to communicate to in a Conf R/W
Modbus RTU network. A separate parameter (Modbus Unit ID) will be
used for Modbus TCP communications.Modbus slave address.
SRCH Detect Now Attempts to determine the type of slave device using the configured Conf R/W
Internet Protocol (IP) address or, if serial, the Modbus slave address.
If successful the device profile will be automatically selected for
recognised devices otherwise the device profile will remain at default
(Third Party). Determines a slave device type.
Default: No
No 0 Off.
YES 1 On.

158 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
PROF PROFILE Type A profile that defines the device type. Conf R/W
A profile provides the user with a list of pre configured parameters
that can be read/written to a specific slave device. This greatly
simplifies the need for the user to know detailed information about a
specific parameter in a particular slave device.
Default: 3
3Rd.p 0 A 3rd party device for which no information is known.
3200 3 A 3200 device.
EPWR 4 An ePower device.
epak 5 An ePack device.
EPC 6 An EPC device.
retr retries Transaction retries. Conf R/W
The number of attempts at sending a transaction to a slave device
before giving up. Retries are only attempted after the first transaction
failure.
S.RES STATUS Current search status. Conf R/W
The current status of a slave device search. Note also that an attempt
to recognise a slave device may take several seconds.
SRCH 0 Searching - Searching for selected device on network.
AVAL 1 Available - The device is available for communicating.
uNAV 2 Unavailable - The device was unavailable for communicating.
uNRC 3 Unreachable - The device was unreachable on the network
ABRT 4 Aborted - The user aborted the current search
T.OUT TIMEOUT The configurable time in milliseconds the master will wait for a Conf R/W
response from a slave device before attempting the next retry.Time in
milliseconds the master will wait for a response.
Default: 250 milliseconds
BLK.S BLOCK SIZE Maximum amount of data in a single transaction. Conf R/W
The maximum amount of 16bit words that can be transfered between
the master and slave device, in any single transaction.
Default: 124
HI.RT DEVICE HIGH High priority rate interval. Conf R/W
PRIORITY The interval between each transaction in this queue. It is not
guaranteed that this rate will be maintained and is highly dependent
upon the complexity of the master comms configuration.
0.125 0 125 milliseconds.
0.250 1 250 milliseconds.
0.500 2 500 milliseconds.
1.S 3 1 second.
2.s 4 2 seconds.
5.S 5 5 seconds.
10.S 6 10 seconds.
20.s 7 20 seconds.
30.S 8 30 seconds.
1.m 9 1 minute.
2.m 10 2 minutes.
5.m 11 5 minutes.
10.m 12 10 minutes.
20.m 13 20 minutes.
30.m 14 30 minutes.
1.H 15 1 hour.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 159

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
MI.RT DEVICE MEDIUM Medium priority rate interval. Conf R/W
PRIORITY The interval between each transaction in this queue. It is not
guaranteed that this rate will be maintained and is highly dependent
upon the complexity of the master comms configuration.
0.125 0 125 milliseconds.
0.250 1 250 milliseconds.
0.500 2 500 milliseconds.
1.S 3 1 second.
2.s 4 2 seconds.
5.S 5 5 seconds.
10.S 6 10 seconds.
20.s 7 20 seconds.
30.S 8 30 seconds.
1.m 9 1 minute.
2.m 10 2 minutes.
5.m 11 5 minutes.
10.m 12 10 minutes.
20.m 13 20 minutes.
30.m 14 30 minutes.
1.H 15 1 hour.
LO.RT DEVICE LOW Low priority rate interval. Conf R/W
PRIORITY The interval between each transaction in this queue. It is not
guaranteed that this rate will be maintained and is highly dependent
upon the complexity of the master comms configuration.
0.125 0 125 milliseconds.
0.250 1 250 milliseconds.
0.500 2 500 milliseconds.
1.S 3 1 second.
2.s 4 2 seconds.
5.S 5 5 seconds.
10.S 6 10 seconds.
20.s 7 20 seconds.
30.S 8 30 seconds.
1.m 9 1 minute.
2.m 10 2 minutes.
5.m 11 5 minutes.
10.m 12 10 minutes.
20.m 13 20 minutes.
30.m 14 30 minutes.
1.H 15 1 hour.

160 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Diagnostics Sub List (dIag)

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access
Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
AC.HI HIGH Actual high priority rate for this device. R/O
The actual rate in seconds between each transaction in the high
priority queue.
AC.m Medium Actual medium priority interval for this device. R/O
The actual rate in seconds between each transaction in the
medium priority queue.
AC.LO LOW Actual low priority interval for this device. R/O
The actual rate in seconds between each transaction in the low
priority queue.
DEV.S Device Status The status of the last transaction for this slave device. R/O
SUCS 0 Success.
The transaction was successfully actioned by the slave device.
I.FNC 1 Illegal function.
The request to the slave device contained an invalid function code.
I.ADR 2 Illegal Address.
The request to the slave device contained an invalid Modbus
address. The address may be for a read only parameter.
I.VAL 3 Illegal Value.
The request to the slave device contained invalid data for the
specified parameter.
BUSY 6 Slave Busy.
The slave device is currently busy and was unable to action the
request.
PAR.E 8 Parity Error detected.
The request was not received in the correct format.
BAD.S 9 Bad Sub.
The sub function code in the request was invalid.
BAD.G 10 Bad Gateway.
There was no suitable gateway or route to send the request to the
specified slave device.
N.RSP 11 No Response.
There was no response from the slave device to a given request.
IDLE 12 Idle.
This data item is currently idle and not communicating with the
slave device.
PEND 13 Pending.
The request is waiting to be sent, likely cause is the slave device
has not been set to online.
T.OUT 14 Timeout.
There was no response from the slave device to a given request in
the configured time.
UNK.H 15 Unknown Host.
The slave device being used is not recognised.
BAD.C 16 Connect Fail.
The connection to the specified slave device was unsuccessful.
NO.SK 17 No Sockets.
There are currently no available free sockets to establish a
connection to the slave device.
LB.F 18 Loopback Fail.
The loopback request to the slave device failed.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 161

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
DEV.S Device Status LOG.F 19 Login Fail. R/O
An attempt to login to the slave device was unsuccessful.
UNK.E 20 Unknown Error.
An unknown error occurred.
BAD.W 22 Write Fail, the write request failed.
M.REJ 23 Master Reject, the request was rejected by the master prior to
sending to the slave device, due to a malformed request
Totl toTaL REquests Total number of requests sent to the slave device. R/O
The total number of transactions sent to the slave device, including
all good and failed and retries.
SENT SucCessful Successful requests sent to the slave device. R/O
requests The number of transactions sent to the slave device that did not
produce an exception response.
FAIL UNSUCCESSFUL Number of unsuccessful requests sent to this slave. R/O
REQUESTS
RETR Retries Retries. R/O
The number of transactions that were resent due to timed out
responses from the slave device.
T.out Timeouts Timeouts. R/O
The number of transactions that have had no response from the
slave device and have exceeded their configured timeout value.
FCN.E ILLEGAL function Illegal Function Exception. R/O
The number of illegal function exception responses from the slave
device.
add.e illegal address Illegal Address. R/O
The number of illegal address exception responses from the slave
device.
DAT.e ILLEGAL DATA Illegal Data. R/O
The number of illegal data exception responses from the slave
device.
SLV.E SLAVE FAilure Slave Failure. R/O
The number of times that the slave device has failed to
communicate.
GW.E no gateway No gateway path found. R/O
The number of times no gateway or route to the slave device was
found.
REST RESET COUNT Resets the diagnostics counts. Conf R/W
On selection resets all the diagnostics count values. Note that
counts are never retained over a power cycle, and once actioned
the current count values are lost forever.
No 0 No.
Yes 1 Yes.

162 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

DataPoint Sub List (DATA)

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
DESC DESCRIPTION dt.1 Descriptive data name for the data being read or written. Conf R/W
Default: dt.n where n is the instance number.
SLV.D SLAVE Device Slave device to communicate with. Conf R/W
A list of available slave devices to which a parameter can be
associated.
SLV1 0 Slave 1.
Slave device 1.
SLV2 1 Slave 2.
Slave device 2.
SLV3 2 Slave 3.
Slave device 3.
P.LST PARAmeter List Parameter list for a specific slave device. Conf R/W
Provides a list of parameters that the user can choose to read/write
without having to know the Modbus address, data type, etc.
For EPower Controller:
Lp.pV 30 Control PV. Conf R/W
Reads a process value from a control network in an EPower.
tSP.S 31 Control SP.
Reads a set point value from a control network in an EPower.
tSP.S 32 Control SP (set).
Writes a set point value to a control network in an EPower.
VOLt 33 Voltage.
Reads a voltage value from a power module in an EPower.
CuR 34 Current.
Reads a current value from a power module in an EPower.
POWR 35 Power.
Reads a power value from a power module in an EPower.
uSR.d 36 User Defined.
The user can specify all configuration data required to read any
parameter from an EPower.
OFF 37 Off.
No data to be exchanged.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 163

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
For EPC controller:
LP.PV 40 Loop PV. Conf R/W
Reads the control loop process value from an EPC instrument.
wsp 41 Working SP.
Reads the working setpoint value from an EPC instrument.
W.OP 42 Working OP.
Reads the working output value from an EPC instrument.
aI.pV 43 Analog Input PV.
Reads the analog input process value of an EPC instrument.
aI.st 44 Analog Input PV Status.
Reads the analog input status of an EPC instrument.
aL.Op 45 Alarm output.
Reads the alarm output of an EPC instrument.
p.mOD 46 Programmer running mode.
Reads the current running mode of an EPC programmer.
P.Lft 47 Programmer program time left.
Reads the running time left of an EPC program.
S.LFt 48 Programmer segment time left.
Reads the running time left of an EPC program segment.
Rmt.U 49 Remote input value.
Reads the remote input value of an EPC instrument.
L.mOd 50 Loop auto/manual mode.
Reads the loop auto/manual mode of an EPC instrument.
tsp.s 51 Set loop target setpoint.
Set loop target setpoint of an EPC instrument.
a-m.s 52 Set loop auto/manual mode.
Set loop auto/manual mode of an EPC instrument.
m.0p.s 53 Set loop manual output.
Set loop manual output of an EPC instrument.
RuN.s 54 Set programmer run.
Set EPC instrument programmer run digital input.
HLd.s 55 Set programmer hold.
Set EPC instrument programmer hold digital input.
RsT.s 56 Set programmer reset.
Set EPC instrument programmer reset digital input.
tuN.S 57 Set loop autotune enable.
Set EPC instrument loop autotune enable.
uSR.d 58 User defined.
The user can specify the data required to read/write to an EPC
instrument.
OFF 59 Off.
No data to be exchanged.

164 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
For EPack series controller:
LP.PV 81 Control PV. Conf R/W
Reads a process value from a control network in an EPack.
tsp 82 Control SP.
Reads a set point value from a control network in an EPack.
tsp.s 83 Control SP (set).
Writes a set point value to a control network in an EPack.
VoLt 84 Voltage.
Reads a voltage value from a power module in an EPack.
CuR 85 Current.
Reads a current value from a power module in an EPack.
POWR 86 Power.
Reads a power value from a power module in an EPack.
uSR.d 87 User Defined.
The user can specify all configuration data required to read any
parameter from an EPack.
Off 88 Off.
No data to be exchanged.
Third Party device:
uSR.d 100 User Defined. Conf R/W
The user can specify all configuration data required to read any
parameter from any 3rd party device.
Off 101 Off.
No data to be exchanged.
PV PRocess Value Process value received from slave device. R/O
The process value received for the data items read transaction.
DIG.ST Digital Digital status. The status of the digital being read from the slave R/O
Status device.
Off 0
On 1
ON.OFF SET Sets a value to on or off. Conf R/W
The on/off value to write to a digital parameter in the configured
slave device.
OFF 0
On 1
A-M Mode Auto Manual mode selection. Conf R/W
Allows selection of auto manual mode.
AUTO 0 Auto.
Set to auto mode.
MAN 1 Manual.
Set to manual mode.
VALUE VALUE TO WRITE The value to be written to the slave device. Conf R/W
The value that is to be written to the slave device, this may be
wired from another parameter or manually configured.
FB.VAL FALLBACK VALUE Fall back value to be written to the slave device. Conf R/W
If configured as a write request and the parameter has a status
other than OK, then this value will be written instead. It is not
possible to wire from another parameter and can only be manually
configured.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 165

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
SEND Send Now If selected will send the write value to the slave Conf R/W
If selected or triggered via a wire, the data in the value parameter
or the fall back parameter (if the write value status is not OK) will be
written to the slave device once only.
NO 0 No.
YES 1 Yes.

STAT TRANSACTION Transaction status. R/O

STATUS The status of the transaction. This may differ to the status of the
process value at the slave device, as this status is determined by
the communications status.
SUCS 0 Success.
The transaction was successfully actioned by the slave device.
I.FNC 1 Illegal function.
The request to the slave device contained an invalid function code.
I.ADR 2 Illegal Address.
The request to the slave device contained an invalid Modbus
address. The address may be for a read only parameter.
I.VAL 3 Illegal Value.
The request to the slave device contained invalid data for the
specified parameter.
BUSY 6 Slave Busy.
The slave device is currently busy and was unable to action the
request.
PAR.E 8 Parity Error Detected.
The request was not received in the correct format.
BAD.S 9 Bad Sub.
The sub function code in the request was invalid.
BAD.G 10 Bad Gateway.
There was no suitable gateway or route to send the request to the
specified slave device.
N.RSP 11 No Response.
There was no response from the slave device to a given request.
IDLE 12 Idle.
This data item is currently idle and not communicating with the
slave device.
PEND 13 Pending.
The request is waiting to be sent, likely cause is the slave device
has not been set to online.
T.OUT 14 Timeout.
There was no response from the slave device to a given request in
the configured time.
UNK.H 15 Unknown Host.
The slave device being used is not recognised.
BAD.C 16 Connect Fail.
The connection to the specified slave device was unsuccessful.
NO.SK 17 No Sockets.
There are currently no available free sockets to establish a
connection to the slave device.
LB.F 18 Loopback Fail.
The loopback request to the slave device failed.
LOG.F 19 Login Fail.
An attempt to login to the slave device was unsuccessful.

166 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
UNK.E 20 Unknown Error Detected.
An unknown error occurred.
BAD.W 22 Write Fail, the write request failed.
M.REJ 23 Master Reject.
The request was rejected by the master prior to sending to the
slave device, due to a malformed request.
INSTC NUMBER Parameter instance number. Conf R/W
Used for parameters in the slave device that have multiple
instances.
R.ADDR REGISTER Modbus register address of the data to be read/written. Conf R/W
ADDRESS The Modbus register address at the slave device where this data is
to be read/written.
F.CODE FUNCTION CODE The Modbus function code. Conf R/W
The function code required to read/write data to the slave device.
1 1 Read Coil.
Read contiguous status coils.
2 2 Read Discrete.
Read contiguous discrete inputs.
3 3 Read Holding.
Read contiguous holding registers.
4 4 Read Input.
Read contiguous input registers.
5 5 Write Coil.
Write a single coil to on/off.
6 6 Write Single.
Write to a single register.
16 16 Write Multiple.
Write to contiguous registers.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 167

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
D.TYPE DATA TYPE Data type of the data being read/written Conf R/W
The data type is very important as it determines how the data is to
be interpreted by the Modbus master and displayed to the user as
a process value.
REAL 0 REAL.
32-bit floating point.
DINT 1 DINT.
32-bit signed double integer.
INT 2 INT.
16 bit signed integer.
BYTE 3 BYTE.
8-bit signed byte.
UDINT 4 UDINT.
32-bit unsigned double integer.
UINT 5 UINT.
16-bit unsigned integer.
UBYTE 6 UBYTE.
8-bit unsigned byte.
RL.SW 8 REAL (swap).
32-bit floating point, with MSW and LSW swapped.
DT.SW 9 DINT (swap).
32-bit signed double integer, with MSW and LSW swapped.
UD.SW 10 UDINT (swap).
32-bit unsigned double integer, with MSW and LSW swapped.
BIT 11 BIT.
A specific bit from a 16-bit unsigned integer, range of 0 - 15.
SCALE SCALING X 0 Scaling in decimal places for non floating point data types. Conf R/W
X.X 1 A zero represents no scaling is required for the specified data type.
X.XX 2
X.XXX 3
X.XXXX 4
PRIO PRIOrity Frequency at which the data is read/written. Conf R/W
There are 4 priorities at which data can be assigned, high, medium,
low and acyclic, which determines the frequency at which data is
transferred. All read/write data is placed in a priority queue and
these queues are processed in order of priority.
HIGH 0 High.
Adds the data item to the high priority queue.
MEDIUM 1 Medium.
Adds the data item to the medium priority queue.
LOW 2 Low.
Adds the data item to the low priority queue.
ACYCLIC 3 Acyclic.
Does not add the data item to any queue, the request must be
manually sent.

168 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Maths List (mAth)

From firmware version 3.01, one Maths Operator is available as standard. If the
Enhanced Toolkit option has been ordered this may be increased up to eight Maths
Operators (the Standard Toolkit option has four).

Maths Operators (sometimes known as Analog Operators) allow the controller to

perform mathematical operations on two input values. These values can be sourced
from any available parameter including Analog Values, User Values and Digital
Values. Each input value can be scaled using a multiplying factor or scalar.

The parameters to use, the type of calculation to be performed and the acceptable
limits of the calculation are determined in Configuration level. In access level 3 the
values of each of the scalars can be changed.

Access to the Maths parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From previous To next list
 MATH 
list (COMM) LIST (LGc2)



1 2 Repeat for up to 8
INST INST Maths operators

   
OPER OPER
IN1.X IN1.X
IN2.X IN2.X
UNITS UNITS
RES RES
L.LIM L.LIM
H.LIM H.LIM
FBACK FBACK
FB.VAL FB.VAL
SEL SEL
IN1 IN1
IN2 IN2
OUT OUT
STATE STATE

HA033650ENG Issue 1 169

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
oper operation OFF 0 The selected Analog Operator is turned off. Conf R/W
Default: Off L3 R/O
Add 1 The output result is the addition of Input 1 and Input 2.
Sub 2 Subtract. The output result is the difference between Input 1 and Input 2
where Input 1 > Input 2.
muL 3 Multiply. The output result is Input 1 multiplied by Input 2.
diV 4 Divide. The output result is Input 1 divided by Input 2.
AbS.d 5 Absolute Difference.
The output result is the absolute difference between Input 1 and Input 2.
S.Hi 6 Select Max. The output result is the maximum of Input 1 and Input 2.
S.Lo 7 Select Min. The output result is the minimum of Input 1 and Input 2.
H.SwP 8 HotSwap. Input 1 appears at the output provided input 1 is 'good'. If input 1
is 'bad' then input 2 value will appear at the output. An example of a bad
input occurs during a sensor break condition.
S.HLd 9 Sample and Hold. Normally input 1 will be an analog value and input B will
be digital.
The output tracks input 1 when input 2 = 1 (Sample).
The output will remain at the current value when input 2 = 0 (Hold).
If input 2 is an analog value then any non zero value will be interpreted as
'Sample'.
Pwr 10 The output is the value at input 1 raised to the power of the value at input 2,
i.e. Input 1Input 2.
SQrt 11 Square Root. The output result is the square root of Input 1. Input 2 has no
effect.
LoG 12 The output is the logarithm (base 10) of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect.
Ln 13 The output is the logarithm (base n) of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect.
E 14 The output result is the exponential of Input 1. Input 2 has no effect.
10 15 The output result is 10 raised to the power of Input 1 value.
i.e. 10input 1. Input 2 has no effect.
SEL 51 Select input is used to control which Analog Input is switched to the output
of the Analog Operator. If the select input is true input 2 is switched through
to the output. If false input 1 is switched through to the output. See "Select
Input" on page 171.
in1.X input 1 scale 1.0 Input 1 scaling factor. L3 R/W
Default: 1.0
in2.X input 2 scale 1.0 Input 2 scaling factor. L3 R/W
Default: 1.0
units output units See section "Units" on page 105 for a list of units used throughout. Conf R/W
RES Output Resolution of the output value. Conf R/W
resolution L3 R/O
nnnnn 0 No decimal places.
Default: nnnnn
nnnn.n 1 One decimal place.
nnn.nn 2 Two decimal places.
nn.nnn 3 Three decimal places.
n.nnnn 4 Four decimal places.
l.lim output low -999 To apply a low limit to the output. Conf R/W
limit Default: -999
h.lim output high 9999 To apply a high limit to the output Conf R/W
limit Default: 9999

170 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
fback fallback The fallback strategy will come into effect if the status of the input value is Conf R/W
strategy bad or if the input value is outside the range of Input Hi and Input Lo.
C.bad 0 If the input value is above 'High Limit' or below 'Low Limit', then the output
value is set to the appropriate limit, and 'Status' is set to 'Bad'. If the input
signal is within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the
'Fallback' value.
Default: Cbad
C.Gd 1 If the input value is above 'High Limit' or below 'Low Limit', then the output
value is set to the appropriate limit, and 'Status' is set to 'Good'. If the input
signal is within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the
'Fallback' value.
F.bAd 2 If the input value is above 'High Limit' or below 'Low Limit', then the output
value is set to the 'Fallback' value, and the 'Status' is set to 'Bad'.
F.Gd 3 If the input value is above 'High Limit' or below 'Low Limit', then the output
value is set to the 'Fallback' value, and the 'Status' is set to 'Good'.
u.bAd 4 If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is above 'High Limit' or below
'Low Limit', the output value is set to the 'High Limit'.
d.bAd 6 If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is above 'High Limit' or below
'Low Limit', the output value is set to the 'Low Limit'.
fb.val fallback value 0.0 Defines (in accordance with Fallback) the output value when fallback Conf R/W
strategy is active.
Default: 0
SEL select IP1 0 Select between input 1 and Input 2. Comms only
parameter
IP2 1
in1 input 1 value 0 Input 1 value (normally wired to an input source). Range −99999 to 99999 L3 R/W
(decimal point depends on resolution).
in2 input 2value 0 Input 2 value (normally wired to an input source). Range −99999 to 99999 L3 R/W
(decimal point depends on resolution).
out output value The analog value of the output, Between high and low limits. R/O
state status This parameter is used in conjunction with Fallback to indicate the status of R/O
the operation. Typically, it is used to flag the status of the operation and
used in conjunction with the fallback strategy. It may be used as an
interlock for other operations.
See section "Status" on page 106 for a list of enumerated values.

Select Input

Select Input

Input 1
If Select Input = 1, then input 2 is selected.
Input 2 If Select Input = 0, then input 1 is selected.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 171

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Logic Operator List (LGC2)

The Logic Operator is only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered. From
firmware version 3.01 and greater up to eight Logic Operators are available with the
Enhanced Toolkit option (the Standard Toolkit option has four).

The two-input Logic Operator allows the controller to perform logical calculations on
two input values. These values can be sourced from any available parameter
including Analog Values, User Values and Digital Values.

The parameters to use, the type of calculation to be performed, invert the input value
and 'fallback' type are determined in Configuration level. In levels 1 to 3 you can view
the values of each input and read the result of the calculation.

Access to the Logic Operator parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From To next list
 Lgc2 
previous list LIST (LGc8)

(MATH)

1 2 Repeat for up to 8
INST INST Logic operators

   
OPER OPER
IN1 IN1
IN2 IN2
FBACK FBACK
INV INV
OUT OUT
STATE STATE

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

oper operation OFF 0 The selected logic operator is turned off Conf
Default: Off L3 R/O
ANd 1 The output result is ON when both Input 1 and Input 2 are ON.
OR 2 The output result is ON when either Input 1 or Input 2 is ON.
E.OR 3 Exclusive OR. The output result is true when one and only one input is
ON. If both inputs are ON the output is OFF.
LtCH 4 Input 1 sets the latch, Input 2 resets the latch.
EqL 5 Equal. The output result is ON when Input 1 = Input 2.
NEqL 6 Not equal.The output result is ON when Input 1 ≠ Input 2.
Gt 7 Greater than. The output result is ON when Input 1 > Input 2.
Lt 8 Less than. The output result is ON when Input 1 < Input 2.
GtEq 9 Greater than or equal. The output result is ON when Input 1 ≥ Input 2.
LtEQ 10 Less than or equal. The output result is ON when Input 1 ≤ Input 2.
in1 input 1 0 Normally wired to a logic, analog or user value. May be set to a L3
constant value if not wired.
in2 input 2

172 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

fback Fallback type fbAd 0 The output value is FALSE and the status is BAD. Conf
Default: Fbad L3 R/O
tbAd 1 The output value is TRUE and the status is BAD.
FGd 2 The output value is FALSE and the status is GOOD.
tGd 3 The output value is TRUE and the status is GOOD.
inv invert NonE 0 The sense of the input value, may be used to invert one or both of the Conf
inputs. L3 R/O
Default: None
In1 1 Invert input 1.
In2 2 Invert input 2.
both 3 Invert both inputs.
out output On 1 The output from the operation is a Boolean (true/false) value. R/O
OFF 0
state output status The status of the result value (good/bad). R/O
See section "Status" on page 106 for a list of enumerated values.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 173

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

8 Input Logic Operator List (LGC8)

The 8 Input Logic Operators are only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered.
From firmware version 3.01, up to four 8 Input Logic Operators are available with the
Enhanced Toolkit option (the Standard Toolkit option has two).

The eight input Logic Operator allows the controller to perform logical calculations on
up to eight input values. These values can be sourced from any available parameter
including Analog Values, User Values and Digital Values. Up to two eight input logic
operators are available.

Access to the 8 Input Logic Operator parameter list is summarized below. The full
Navigation Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +

From previous Lgc8 To next list

 
list (LGc2) LIST
 (TMr)


1 2
There are 4 instances of
INST INST Logic 8 operators

   
OPER OPER
N.IN IN1
IN.inv IN2
Op.inv FBACK
IN1 - 8 INV
Op OUT
STATE STATE

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
oper operation OFF 0 Operator is turned off. Conf R/W
Default: Off L3 R/O
ANd 1 Output is ON when ALL inputs are ON.
OR 2 Output is ON when one or more of the 8 inputs are ON.
E.OR 3 Exclusive OR.
The output is based on the inputs being cascaded XOR'd together (True
logical XOR equation) i.e:
Cascading XOR performs an odd parity function, so if an even number of
inputs are on, the output is off. If and odd number of inputs are on, the
output is on.
n.in number of 2 to 8 This parameter is used to configure the number of inputs for the Conf R/W
inputs operation. L3 R/O
Default: 2

174 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
in.inv invert inputs 0 to 255 Invert selected inputs. This is a status word with one bit per input. L3 R/W
0x1 - input 1
0x2 - input 2
0x4 - input 3
0x8 - input 4
0x10 - input 5
0x20 - input 6
0x40 - input 7
0x80 - input 8
op.inv invert output No 0 Output not inverted. L3 R/W
Default: No
YES 1 Output inverted.
in1 to in8 input1 to Normally wired to a logic, analog or user value. L3 R/W
input8 All values are interpreted as follows: <0.5 = Off, >=0.5 = On
May be set to a constant value if not wired.
OFF 0 Input is false.
On 1 Input is true.
op output OFF 0 Output result of the operator (output not activated). R/O
On 1 Output result of the operator (output activated).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 175

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Timer List (tmr)

The Timer list is only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered. From firmware
version 3.01 and greater up to two timers are available with the Enhanced Toolkit
option (the Standard Toolkit option has one).

Access to the Timer parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation Diagram
is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From
tmr To next list
previous list  
LIST (Cntr)
(LGc8) 


1 2
inst inst

   

Type Type
Time Time
e.time e.time
In In
Out Out
trigd trigd

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
type type OFF 0 Timer not activated. Conf R/W
Default: Off
On.PS 1 On Pulse. Generates a fixed length pulse from an edge trigger.
On.d 2 On delay. Provides a delay between input trigger event and timer output.
OnE.S 3 One shot. Simple oven timer which reduces to zero before switching off
min.O 4 Minimum on time. Compressor timer so that the output remains ON for a
time after the input signal has been removed.
time time 00:00 Duration of the timer. For re-trigger timers this value is entered once and Conf R/W
copied to the time remaining parameter whenever the timer starts. For L3 R/W
pulse timers the time value itself is decremented.
Range 00:00 to 999:59 minutes.
Default: 0
e.time elapsed time 00:00 Elapsed time. Range 00:00 to 999:59 minutes. R/O
in input OFF 0 Trigger/Gate input. Conf R/W
Default: Off L3 R/W
On 1 Turn On to start timing.
out output OFF 0 Timer output is off. R/O
On 1 Timer output is on.
trigd triggered This is a status output to indicate that the input to the timer has been L3 R/O
detected.
Off 0 Not timing.
On 1 Timer has been triggered and is operational.

176 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Timer Modes

On Pulse Timer Mode

Output goes ‘on’ as soon as the trigger input goes active, and remains on until the
time period has elapsed. If the timer is re-triggered during the timing period, the timer
restarts.

Trigger
Time Time Time

Output
Re-trigger

Elapsed time

Triggered

On Delay Timer Mode

Provides a delay between the trigger point and the timer output becoming active.

This type of timer is used to help ensure that the output is not set unless the input has
been valid for a pre-determined period of time, thus acting as a kind of input filter.

Rules

1. After the trigger goes active, the output switches on after the delay time has
elapsed, and stays on until the trigger goes inactive.

2. If the trigger goes inactive before the delay time has elapsed, the output does not
switch on.

Trigger

Time Time

Output

Elapsed time

Triggered

HA033650ENG Issue 1 177

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

One Shot Timer Mode

• The Time value is decremented on each tick until it reaches zero. When the timer
reaches zero the Output is cleared to OFF.

• The Time value can be edited at any instant to increase/decrease the duration of
the On time.

• Once set to zero, the Time is not reset to a previous value, it must be edited by
the operator to start the next On-Time.

• The input is used to gate the output. If the Input is set, the Time will count down
to zero. If the Input is cleared to OFF, then the Time will Hold and the Output will
switch OFF until the Input is next set.

• Since the Input is a Digital Wire, it is possible for the operator to NOT wire it, and
set the Input value to ON which permanently enables the timer.

• The Triggered variable will be set to ON as soon as the Time is edited. It will reset
when the Output is cleared to OFF.

The behavior under different conditions is shown below:

Input

Time edited Time edited

Output Time
A + B = Time

Time

Elapsed time

Triggered

This diagram shows how the Input can be used to gate the Timer as a type of hold

Input
Time edited A+B+C+D = Time
Output

178 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Minimum On Timer Mode or Compressor

The input goes active and remains on for a specified period after the input goes
inactive.

It may be used, for example, to help ensure that a compressor is not cycled
excessively.

• The output will be set to On when the Input changes from Off to On.

• When the Input changes from On to Off, the elapsed time will start incrementing
towards the set Time.

• The Output will remain On until the elapsed time has reached the set Time. The
Output will then switch Off.

• If the Input signal returns to On while the Output is On, the elapsed time will reset
to 0, ready to begin incrementing when the Input switches Off.

• The Triggered variable will be set while the elapsed time is >0. It will indicate that
the timer is counting.

The diagram illustrates the behavior of the timer under different input
conditions:

Input

Output Time
Time

Elapsed time

Triggered

HA033650ENG Issue 1 179

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Counter List (Cntr)

The Counter list is only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered. From firmware
version 3.01 and greater up to two counters are available with the Enhanced Toolkit
option (the Standard Toolkit option has one).

Each time the ‘Clock’ input is triggered the ‘Count’ output is incremented by 1 for an
Up Counter and decremented by 1 for a Down Counter. A target value can be set and
when this is reached the Ripple Carry flag is set. This flag can be wired to operate an
event or other output.

A simple wiring example is shown in the iTools chapter. "Graphical Wiring" on

page 223.

Access to the Counter parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From To next list
Cntr
previous list 
LIST
 (TOTL)
(Tmr) 


1 2
inst inst

   

Enbl Enbl
Dir Dir
r.cry r.cry
o.flow o.flow
Clock Clock
Targt Targt
Count Count
Reset Reset
o.clr o.clr

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
ENBL enable No 0 Count is frozen while Enable is FALSE. Conf R/W
Default: No L3 R/W
YES 1 Count responds to Clock events when Enable is TRUE.
dir direction of uP 0 Up counter. See note below. Conf R/W
count Default: Up L3 R/W
down 1 Down counter. See note below.
r.cry ripple carry Ripple carry is normally used to act as an enabling input to the next R/O
counter. However, in EPC3000 series controllers only one counter is
available. Ripple carry is turned On when the counter reaches the
target set. This can be wired to operate an event or alarm or other
function as required.
OFF 0 Off.
ON 1 On.
o.flow overflow flag No 0 Overflow flag is held true (Yes) when the counter reaches zero (Down) R/O
or passes target (Up).

YES 1

180 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
clock clock 0 Clock input to counter. The counter will increment (for an UP Counter) Read only if wired
1 on a positive going edge (FALSE to TRUE).
This is normally wired to an input source such as a digital input.
targt counter target 0 to Level count to which the counter is aiming. Conf R/W
99999 Default: 9999 L3 R/W
count count 0 Counts each time a clock input occurs until the target is reached. R/O
Range 0 to 99999.
reset counter reset No 0 Counter not reset. Conf R/W
YES 1 When the Reset is set TRUE, the Count is set to 0 in 'up' mode or to L3 R/W
Target in 'down' mode. The Reset also clears the overflow flag.
o.clr clear overflow No 0 Not cleared. Conf R/W
YES 1 Clears the overflow flag. L3 R/W

Note: When configured as an Up counter, Clock events increment Count until

reaching the Target. On reaching Target RippleCarry is set true. At the next clock
pulse, Count returns to zero. Overflow is latched true and RippleCarry is returned
false.

When configured as a down counter, Clock events decrement Count until it reaches
zero. On reaching zero RippleCarry is set true. At the next clock pulse, Count returns
to the Target count. Overflow is latched true and RippleCarry is reset false.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 181

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Totalizer List (tOtL)

The Totalizer list is only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered.

A totalizer is an electronic integrator, primarily used to record the numeric total over
time of a measured value that is expressed as a rate. For example, the number of
litres (since reset), based on a flow rate in litres per minute.

One totalizer function block is available in EPC3000 series controllers. A totalizer

can, by soft wiring, be connected to any measured value. The outputs from the
totalizer are its integrated value and an alarm state. The user may set a setpoint
which causes the alarm to activate once the integration exceeds the setpoint.

The totalizer has the following attributes:-

1. Run/Hold/Reset

◦ In Run the totalizer will integrate its input and continuously test against an
alarm setpoint. The higher the value of the input the faster the integrator will
run.

◦ In Hold the totalizer will stop integrating its input but will continue to test for
alarm conditions.

◦ In Reset the totalizer will be zeroed, and alarms will be reset.

2. Alarm Setpoint

◦ If the setpoint is a positive number, the alarm will activate when the total is
greater than the setpoint.

◦ If the setpoint is a negative number, the alarm will activate when the total is
lower than the setpoint.

◦ If the totalizer alarm setpoint is set to 0.0, the alarm will be off. It will not
detect values above or below.

◦ The alarm output is a single state output. It may be cleared by resetting the
totalizer, stopping the Run condition, or by changing the alarm setpoint.

3. The total is limited to max and min 32-bit floating point values.

4. The totalizer helps ensure that resolution is maintained when integrating small
values onto a large total. However, very small values will not be integrated into a
relatively very large value i.e. 0.000001 will not be integrated into 455500.0 this is
due to the limitations of 32-bit floating point resolution.

One totalizer function block is available in an EPC3000 controller.

182 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Access to the Totalizer parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +

From previous tOtL To next list

 
list (CnTr) LIST (AN.SW)

 
Total
In
Units
Res
Alm.sp
Alm.op
Run
Hold
reset

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

total total output 0 The totalized value. L3 R/O

in input 0.0 The value to be totalized. Conf R/W
The totalizer stops accumulating if the input is 'Bad'. L3 R/W
units units See section "Units" on page 105 for a list of units used throughout. Conf R/W
res resolution nnnnn 0 Totalizer resolution. Conf R/W
Default: nnnnn - no decimal places
nnnn.n 1 One decimal place.
nnn.nn 2 Two decimal places.
nn.nnn 3 Three decimal places.
n.nnnn 4 Four decimal places.
alm.sp alarm 0.0000 Sets the totalized value at which an alarm will occur.
setpoint
alm.op alarm output This is a read only value which indicates the alarm output On or Off. Conf R/O
The totalized value can be a positive number or a negative number. L3 R/O
If the number is positive the alarm occurs when:
Total > Alarm Setpoint
If the number is negative the alarm occurs when:
Total < Alarm Setpoint
Off 0 Off
On 1 On
run run No 0 Totalizer not running. See note below. Conf R/W
YES 1 Select to run the totalizer. L3 R/W

hold hold No 0 Totalizer not in hold. See note below. Conf R/W
YES 1 Holds the totalizer at its current value. L3 R/W

reset reset No 0 Totalizer not in reset. Conf R/W

YES 1 Resets the totalizer. L3 R/W

Note: The Run & Hold parameters are designed to be wired to (for example) digital
inputs. Run must be 'on' and Hold must be 'off' for the totalizer to operate.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 183

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

8 Input Analog MUX List (AN.SW)

The 8 Input Analog Multiplexer list is only available if a Toolkit option has been
ordered. From firmware version 3.01, up to four Analog Multiplexers are available
with the Enhanced Toolkit option (the Standard Toolkit has three).

The 8 Input Analog Multiplexer may be used to switch one of eight inputs to an
output. It is usual to wire inputs to a source within the controller which selects that
input at the appropriate time or event.

Access to the 8 Input Analog Multiplexer parameter list is summarized below. The full
Navigation Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

The following parameters are available.

Return to previous list header

 +

From AN.Sw
To next list
 
previous list LIST (u.VAL)

(TOTL)

1 2 Repeat for up to 3 Analog
INST INST Multiplexers

   
h.lim h.lim
l.lim l.lim
Fback Fback
Fb.val Fb.val
In.sel In.sel
In1–in8 In1–in8
Out Out
State State
res res

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
h.lim high limit 9999.0 The high limit for all inputs and the fall back value. Range Low Limit to Max Conf R/W
32-bit floating point value (decimal point depends on resolution).
Default: 9999
l.lim Low limit -999.0 The low limit for all inputs and the fall back value. Range Min 32-bit floating Conf R/W
point value to High Limit (decimal point depends on resolution).
Default: -999

184 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
fback fallback The state of the Output and Status parameters when either input is bad or Conf R/W
strategy operation cannot be completed.
This parameter could be used in conjunction with fallback value.
C.bAd 0 Clip Bad. If the input value is above 'High Limit' or below 'Low Limit', then the
output value is set to the appropriate limit, and 'Status' is set to 'Good'. If the
input signal is within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to the
'Fallback' value.
Default: C.bad
C.Gd 1 Clip Good. If the input value is above 'High Limit' or below 'Low Limit', then
the output value is set to the appropriate limit, and 'Status' is set to 'Bad'.
If the input signal is within the limits, but its status is bad, the output is set to
the 'Fallback' value.
F.bAd 2 Fall Bad. If the input value is above 'High Limit' or below 'Low Limit', then the
output value is set to the 'Fallback' value, and the 'Status' is set to 'Bad'.
F.Gd 3 Fall Good. If the input value is above 'High Limit' or below 'Low Limit', then
the output value is set to the 'Fallback' value, and the 'Status' is set to 'Good'.
u.bAd 4 Upscale. If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is above 'High Limit'
or below 'Low Limit', the output value is set to the 'High Limit'.
d.bAd 6 Downscale. If the input status is bad, or if the input signal is above 'High
Limit' or below 'Low Limit', the output value is set to the 'Low Limit'.
fb.val fallback 0.0 Used (in accordance with Fallback Strategy) to define the output value when Conf R/W
value fallback strategy is active.
Range Low Limit to High Limit (decimal point depends on resolution).
In.sel input In1 to Input values (normally wired to an input source). Conf R/W
selection In8 Default: In1 L3 R/W
in1 input 1 0.0 1 To input values if not wired. Range Min 32-bit floating point value to Max Conf R/W
32-bit floating point value. L3 R/W
in2 input 2 0.0 2
in3 input 3 0.0 3
in4 input 4 0.0 4
in5 input 5 0.0 5
in6 input 6 0.0 6
in7 input 7 0.0 7
in8 input 8 0.0 8
out output Indicates the analog value of the output between high and low limits. R/O
state status Used in conjunction with Fallback to indicate the status of the operation. R/O
Typically, status is used to flag the status of the operation and used in
conjunction with fallback strategy. May be used as an interlock for other
operations.
See section "Status" on page 106 for a list of enumerated values.
res resolution Indicates the resolution of the output. R/O
The resolution of the output is taken from the selected input. If the selected
input is not wired, or if its status is ’bad’ then the resolution will be set to 1dp.
nnnnn 0 No decimal places.
Default: nnnnn
nnnn.n 1 One decimal place.
nnn.nn 2 Two decimal places.
nn.nnn 3 Three decimal places.
n.nnnn 4 Four decimal places.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 185

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

User Value List (u.VAL)

The User Value list is only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered. From
firmware version 3.01 and greater up to twelve User Values are available with the
Enhanced Toolkit option (the Standard Toolkit option has four).

User values are registers provided for use in calculations. They may be used as
constants in equations or temporary storage in extended calculations.

Access to the User Value parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +

From
previous list  u.VAL  To next list
(AN.SW)
LIST
 (I.Mon)

1 2 Repeat for up to
INST INST 12 User Values

   
Units Units
Res Res
h.lim h.lim
l.lim l.lim
Value Value
statu statu

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
units units See section "Units" on page 105 for a list of units used throughout. Conf
res resolution nnnnn 0 User value resolution.. Conf
nnnn.n 1 One decimal place.
nnn.nn 2 Two decimal places.
Default: nnn.nn
nn.nnn 3 Three decimal places.
n.nnnn 4 Four decimal places.
H.lim high limit 9999.0 The high limit may be set for each user value to help prevent the value L3 and Conf
being set to an out-of-bounds value. Range Low Limit to Max 32-bit
floating point value (decimal point depends on resolution).
Default: 99999
l.lim low limit -999.0 The low limit of the user value may be set to help prevent the user value L3 and Conf
from being edited to an illegal value. This is important if the user value is
to be used as a setpoint. Range Min 32-bit floating point value to High
Limit (decimal point depends on resolution).
Default: -99999
value value To set the value within the range limits. See note below. L3 and Conf
statu status Can be used to force a good or bad status onto a user value. This is L3 and Conf
useful for testing status inheritance and fallback strategies.
See note below.
See section "Status" on page 106 for a list of enumerated values.

Note: If 'Value' parameter is wired but 'Status' parameter is not wired, then, instead
of being used to force the Status, it will indicate the value which is inherited from the
wired connection to the 'Value' parameter.

186 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Input Monitor List (I.mon)

The Input Monitor list is only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered.

The input monitor may be wired to any variable in the controller. It then provides three
functions:-

1. Maximum detect.

2. Minimum detect.

3. Time above threshold.

There are two instances of the Input Monitor.

Access to the Input Monitor parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +

From previous I.mon

To next list
 
header (u.VAL) LIST (SW.OV)


1 2 There are 2 instances of
INST INST Input Monitors

   
In In
Max Max
Min Min
Thold Thold
d.abv d.abv
t.abv t.abv
Alm.d Alm.d
Alm.tm Alm.tm
Al.op Al.op
reset reset
In.st In.st

HA033650ENG Issue 1 187

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
in input 0.0 Monitored input value. Conf R/W
L3 RW
max maximum 0.0 This function continuously monitors the input value. If the value is higher R/O
than the previously recorded maximum, it becomes the new maximum.
This value is retained following a power outage.
min minimum 0.0 This function continuously monitors the input value. If the value is lower than R/O
the previously recorded minimum, it becomes the new minimum.
This value is retained following a power outage.
thold threshold The input timer accumulates the time the input PV spends above this trigger Conf R/W
value. L3 RW
Default: 1.0
d.abv days above 0 Accumulated days the input has spent above threshold since the last reset. R/O
Days is an integer count of the 24 hour periods only. The Days value should
be combined with the Time value to make the total time above threshold.
t.abv time above 00:00 Accumulated time above the timer threshold since last reset. The time value R/O
accumulates from 00:00.0 to 23:59.59. Overflows are added to the days
value.
alm.d alarm days 0 Days threshold for the monitors time alarm. Used in combination with the Conf R/W
TimeAbove parameter. The AlmOut is set to true if the inputs accumulated L3 RW
time above threshold is higher than the timer high parameters.
Default: 0
alm.tm alarm time 00:00 Time threshold for the monitors time alarm. Used in combination with the Conf R/W
AlmDay parameter. The AlmOut is set to true if the inputs accumulated time L3 RW
above threshold is higher than the timer high parameters.
Default: 0
al.op alarm output OFF 0 R/O
On 1 Set true if the accumulated time that the input spends above the threshold
value is higher than the alarm setpoint.
reset reset No 0 Default: No Conf R/W
YES 1 Resets the Max and Min values and resets the time above threshold to zero. L3 RW
in.st input status Displays the status of the input. R/O
See section "Status" on page 106 for a list of enumerated values.

188 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Switchover List (SW.OV)

The Switchover list is only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered.

This facility is commonly used in temperature applications which operate over a wide
range of temperatures. For example, a thermocouple may be used to control at lower
temperatures and a pyrometer then controls at very high temperatures. Alternatively
two thermocouples of different types may be used.

The diagram below shows a process heating over time with boundaries which define
the switching points between the two devices. The higher boundary is normally set
towards the top end of the thermocouple range and this is determined by the ‘Switch
Hi’ parameter. The lower boundary is set towards the lower end of the pyrometer (or
second thermocouple) range using the parameter ‘Switch Lo’. The controller
calculates a smooth transition between the two devices.

Access to the Switchover parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From
Sw.OV To next list
previous list  
LIST (OR)
(I.Mon)
 
In.hi
In.lo
Sw.hi
Sw.lo
In.1
In.2
f.val
f.typ
Sel.in
b/mod
Out
stat

From this list you can configure the switchover function block. This is only appears if
the function has been enabled.

Input 1
Low temperature thermocouple Temperature
Controller
Input 2
High temperature thermocouple or pyrometer

Temperature

Controller operates entirely on

the higher temperature device
Switch High
Controller operates on a
combination of both devices
Switch Low
Controller operates entirely on
the lower temperature device

Time

HA033650ENG Issue 1 189

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
in.hi input high 9999.0 Sets the high limit for the switch high. It is the highest reading from input 2 Conf R/W
because input 2 is the high range input sensor. L3 R/W
Default: 9999.0
in.lo Input low -999.0 Sets the low limit for the switch low. It is the lowest reading from input 1 since
input 1 is the low range input sensor.
Default: -999.0
sw.hi switch high 0.0 Defines the higher boundary of the switchover region.
sw.lo switch low 0.0 Defines the lower boundary of the switchover region.
in.1 input 1 0.0 The first input value. This is taken from the low range sensor.
in.2 input 2 0.0 The second input value. This is taken from the high range sensor.
f.val fallback 0.0 Defines (in accordance with Fallback Type) the output value when fallback
value strategy is active.
Range between Input High and Input Low.
f.typ fallback c.bad 0 Clip Bad. L3 R/O
type The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is set to
BAD, such that any function block using this measurement can operate it's own
fallback strategy. For example the control loop may hold its output.
Default: c.bad
c.gd 1 Clip Good.
The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is set to
GOOD, such that any function block using this measurement may continue to
calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy.
f.bad 2 Fallback Bad.
The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value. Which has been set
by the user. In addition the status of the measured value will be set to BAD,
such that any function block using this measurement can operate its own
fallback strategy. For example the control loop may hold its output.
f.gd 3 Fallback Good.
The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value. Which has been set
by the user. In addition the status of the measured value will be set to GOOD,
such that any function block using this measurement may continue to calculate
and not employ its own fallback strategy.
u.bad 4 Up Scale.
The measurement will be forced to adopt its high limit, this is like having a
resistive pull up on an input circuit. In addition the status of the measurement is
set to BAD, such that any function block using this measurement can operate
its own fallback strategy. For example the control loop may hold its output.
d.bad 6 Down Scale.
The measurement will be forced to adopt it's low limit, this is like having a
resistive pull down on an input circuit. In addition the status of the
measurement is set to BAD, such that any function block using this
measurement can operate its own fallback strategy. For example the control
loop may hold its output.
sel.in selected in.2 0 Indicates which input is currently selected. R/O
input
in1 1
both 2
B.mod bad mode The action taken if the selected input is BAD. L3 R/O
s.gd 0 If the currently selected input is BAD the output will assume the value of the
other input if it is GOOD.
s.bad 1 If selected input is BAD the output is BAD.
out output The process variable produced from the 2 input measurements. R/O
stat status The status of the input block. See section "Status" on page 106 for a list of R/O
enumerated values.

190 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Logic OR List (OR)

The Logic OR function block allows multiple parameters to be wired to a single
Boolean parameter without the need to enable toolkit blocks for the LGC2 or LGC8
'OR' functionality.

There are 8 Logic OR blocks available.

Each block consists of 8 inputs which are OR’d together into one output. It may be
used, for example, to take the outputs from a number of alarm blocks and OR them
together to operate a single general alarm output.

Access to the Logic OR parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

 +
From
 OR To next list
previous list 
LIST
 (INST)
(Sw.OV)

1 2 Repeat for up to 8
INST INST instances of Logic OR

   
In1 In1
In2 In2
In3 In3
In4 In4
In5 In5
In6 In6
In7 In7
in8 in8
out out

HA033650ENG Issue 1 191

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

IN 1 INPUT 1 OFF 0 Input 1 to the OR block. R/O

On 1
IN 2 INPUT 2 OFF 0 Input 2 to the OR block.
On 1
IN 3 INPUT 3 OFF 0 Input 3 to the OR block.
On 1
IN 4 INPUT 4 OFF 0 Input 4 to the OR block.
On 1
IN 5 INPUT 5 OFF 0 Input 5 to the OR block.
On 1
IN 6 INPUT 6 OFF 0 Input 6 to the OR block.
On 1
IN 7 INPUT 7 OFF 0 Input 7 to the OR block.
On 1
IN 8 INPUT 8 OFF 0 Input 8 to the OR block.
On 1
OUT OUTPUT OFF 0 Output result .
On 1

192 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Instrument List (INSt)

This list contains five sub-lists: Information (INFO), HMI (Hmi), Security (SEC),
Diagnostics (diAG), Modules (mOdS), Calibration (CAL).

Access to the Instrument parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous list header

From  + To next list
previous list (REm.1)
(OR) INSt
 LIST 


INFO HmI SEC diAG mOdS CAL
s. list s. list s. list s. list s. list LIST

           
Lang h. disp L2. p New. al Io. f Id
t. unit H. TIME L3. p g. ack Io1. e Stat
i. num K. LOCK Cfg. p Smpl. t Io2. f Mode
i. type BG. TYP c. pas. d t. fmt Io2. e c. val
Psu BG. MAX c. pas. e f. stby Io4. f
i. ver BG. MIN p. lock e. stat Io4. e
cm. id BG. PV c. mem R,cnt Opt. f
Cs. id F1. FN Opt. e
F2. FN
PS. FN

HA033650ENG Issue 1 193

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Information Sub-List (INFO)

From this list you can read and adjust information such as Instrument Language,
Temperature Units, Customer ID, etc., as shown in the following table.

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

lang language eN 0 English Config RW

Default: English
fR 1 French
de 2 German
It 3 Italian
es 4 Spanish

t.unit temp units dEG.C 0 Sets the temperature units (℃). Config RW
When temperature units is changed, those parameters which are flagged L3 RO
as having a temperature type (Absolute or relative) will have their values
converted to reflect the new temperature units.
Default: deg.C
deg.f 1 Sets the temperature units (℉).
K 2 Sets the temperature units (K).
i.num instrument Unique instrument serial number. RO
number
i.type type 3016 0 Instrument type EPC3016 1⁄16 DIN. RO

3008 1 Instrument type EPC3008 ⅛ DIN.

3004 2 Instrument type EPC3004 ¼ DIN.
Native Type Comms parameter. Used by iTools.
PSU psu type HV 0 100 to 230Vac +/- 15% voltage PSU option. RO
LV 1 24Vac/dc voltage PSU option.
i.ver version Firmware version number. RO
Native version Comms parameter. Used by iTools.
cm.id company id 1280 Eurotherm CNOMO identifier. RO
cs.id customer id A non-volatile value for customer use: it has no effect on the instrument Config RW
functionality. Lev 3 RO
Default: 0
e.ver eip version V1.1 EtherNet/IP version. R/O

194 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Display Functionality Sub-List (HmI)

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
h.disp home display This configures which parameters are shown in the HOME display for Conf R/W
Levels 1 and 2. L3 R/W
PV.SP 0 The HOME display will show Loop PV, Setpoint when in Auto mode and
Output power when in Manual mode.
Default: PV.SP
PV.Pt 1 The HOME display will show Loop PV and program time left.
LPU 2 The HOME display will show Loop PV only.
PV1 3 The HOME display will show analog input 1 PV1 only.
PV.PS 4 The HOME display will show PV and the currently running program number
and segment number.
pV1.2 5 The HOME display will show Analog input 1 PV1 and PV2
pV2 6 The HOME display will show PV2.
val.3 home display An extra parameter value may be displayed on the home display. If the Conf R/W
3rd value Home Display is set to LPV/SP, LPV/Time Left or PV1/PV2 the 1/8 and 1/4
DIN displays will display the parameter value on the 3rd line. The 1/16 DIN
display will not show the parameter value. If the Home Display parameter is
set to display only LPV, PV1 or PV2, then, the value of this parameter will be
displayed on the second line.
This parameter is typically wired from the parameter which is to be
displayed.
h.time home timeout 0 to 60 Configures the timeout period (in seconds) for the home page - a value of 0
disables the Home Page Timeout. Range 0 to 60s.
Default: 60
k.lock keylock OFF 0 Front panel buttons are active (normal operation).
Default: Off
On 1 Lock the front panel buttons.
bg.tyP bargraph type Select the type of bargraph to be displayed. The bargraph is not available in Conf R/W
EPC3016. L3 R/W
L2R 0 Left to Right. Minimum value is on the left, maximum value is on the right.
The bar starts at the minimum value and extends to the right, to the current
value.
Default: Left to right
CEnt 1 Centered. Minimum value is on the left, maximum value is on the right. The
bar starts at the midpoint between maximum and minimum and extends
either left or right, to the current value.
bG.max bargraph max 1000 Scaling for maximum on the bar graph. Bargraph Max and Bargraph Min Conf R/W
can be wired as shown in the example in section "Example 4: To Configure L3 R/W
a Bargraph" on page 225.
Default: 1000
bg.min bargraph min 0 Scaling for minimum on the bar graph.
Default: 0
bg.pv bargraph pv The current value being displayed on the bar graph. RO
f1.fn F1 function A-m 1 To configure the F1 function button. Not available in EPC3016. Conf R/W
Default: Loop Auto/Manual
f2.fn F2 function P.HLd 12 To configure the F2 function button. Not available in EPC3016. Conf R/W
Default: Programmer Run/Hold
ps.fn page + scroll A.ACk 2 To configure the action when the Page + Scroll buttons are pressed Conf R/W
function together.
Default: Alarm acknowledge

HA033650ENG Issue 1 195

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Functionality of the F1 and F2 and Page + Scroll buttons

The functionality of the above three function buttons can be configured from the
following list:
Function Mnemonic Value Description
None None 0
Auto/Manual select A-m 1 Put Loop into Auto or Manual mode.
Alarm acknowledge A.Ack 2 Acknowledge all active alarms.
Segment advance p.AdV 3 Advance program by one segment.
SP1/SP2 select SP.SEL 4 Select SP1 or SP2.
RSP select S.RSP 5 Remote or Local auto mode.
Loop track L.tRk 6 Put the Loop into Track mode.
SP rate limit disable SP.RL 7 Enable/Disable the Sepoint Rate Limits.
Recipe select S.REC 8 Switch between recipe 1 and 2.
PID set select S.PID 9 Switch between PID set 1 and 2.
Tune enable tuNE 10 Start the auto-tune process.
Standby enable E.SbY 11 Put instrument into standby mode.
Program Run/Hold p.HLd 12 Switches the Programmer between Run and Hold mode.
Program Run/Reset P.RSt 13 Switches the Programmer between Run and Reset
mode.
Probe clean Z.CLN 14 Start a clean of the Zirconia probe. Only applies if the
application is Carbon Potential..

196 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Security Sub-List (SEC)

The security list sets up security settings as listed in the following table:

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
L2.P L2 password 2 The password that will be required to place the instrument into HMI level 2. Conf R/W
Note: a value of 0 will disable the need to enter a password to enter level 2.
Default: 2
L3.P L3 password 3 The password that will be required to place the instrument into HMI level 3. Conf R/W
Note: a value of 0 will disable the need to enter a password to enter level 3.
Default: 3
cfg.p conf password 4 The password that will be required to place the instrument into HMI Conf R/W
configuration mode. Note: a value of 0 will disable the need to enter a
password to enter configuration level.
Default: 4
c.pas.e cpass expiry 90 The number of days after which the comms configuration password will Conf R/W
days expire generating a notification message. This is to inform the user that the
password needs changing. It should be noted that a value of 0 will disable
the expiry feature.
Default: 90
p.lock password lock 00:30 After the maximum numberof invalid attempts to login, the HMI level Conf R/W
time passcode and comms password entry mechanism will be locked out for the
period set. This lockout time affects all access level passwords and the
comms config password. Note: A value of 0 will disable the lockout
mechanism. The lock can be cleared by entering a higher level.
Note: This does not apply to the OEM password and feature passcodes
which will always be locked out for 30 minutes.
Default: 30 minutes
c.mem clear memory yes 1 See CAUTION table below. Conf R/W
No 0 Clear memory will force all parameters to be set to their factory default
values.
This parameter is only shown if the ‘Configuration password is set 9999.
IM Instrument mode. Comms
parameter
MaxIM Maximum instrument mode.
CommsPassword The configured password that will be required to place the instrument into
comms configuration mode when connected via Fixed comms or Option
comms. This password is encrypted before being transmitted via comms
and is hashed with a random salt before being stored. See also section
"Comms Configuration Level Password" on page 21.
Default: Empty (must be set on first connect from iTools)
CommsPasswordEntry Yes 1 Write the correct password to this parameter to enter configuration mode.
No 0 The password entered should match the password configured in
CommsPassword. The entered password is excrypted before sending via
comms.
Default: Empty
ConfigAccess Operator 0 Indication that comms configuration mode can be accessed.
Standby 1 A value of '0' indicates that to enter instrument configuration mode via
Config 2 Modbus communications it will be necessary to write a value of 2
(configuration/engineer) to Instrument.Security.IM within a period of 5
seconds of writing the Comms Config password to
Instrument.Security.Commspassword parameter.
CommsPasswordExpiry Off 0 The number of days after which the comms configuration password will
expire. This will generate a notification message informing the user that the
password needs changing. It should be noted that a value of 0 will disable
the expiry feature.
Default: 90
CommsPasswordIsSet No 0 Flag to indicate if the comms password is set.
Yes 1 Default: No

HA033650ENG Issue 1 197

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
EnableUnencryptedLogin No 0 When this parameter is set, a string parameter (Modbus address 0x5500)
Yes 1 becomes available via comms for entering plain text passwords to enter
configuration mode.
Note: Unlike the encrypted password, the entered string is transmitted as
plain text via comms. Upon receipt, instrument hashes the message with
the saved random salt before comparing it to the saved hashed password.
Default: No
CommsUnencryptedLogin A comms-only parameter (Modbus address 0x5500) which is to be written
to with the comms password string which is transmitted in plain text to
place the instrument in configuration mode.
Note: Upon receipt, instrument hashes the plain text password with the
saved random salt before comparing it to the saved hashed password.
Default: Empty
ClearCommsPassword No 0 When set, the comms configuration password will be cleared.
Yes 1 Note: Clearing the comms configuration password will limit Fixed comms
and Option comms read/write access to a small set of parameters until a
new comms password is set.
Default: No
PassLockTime 0 to 24 hrs Password lockout time. Comms
The password entry mechanism will be locked out for this period after the parameter
maximum number of invalid attempts to login. This lockout time affects all
access level passwords and the comms config password. A value of 0 will
disable the lockout mechanism.
Default: 30 minutes
FeaturePasscode1 Feature passcodes are required to enable chargeable features. These can
be added after the controller has been supplied. Examples of chargeable
FeaturePasscode2
features include Programmer Types, Toolkit Blocks, some Digital
FeaturePasscode3 Communications protocols, etc.
FeaturePasscode4 The passcodes can only be added through iTools.
To request a feature, contact your supplier and provide the current values
FeaturePasscode5
of the feature passcodess. Your supplier will provide new values to be
entered to update the new feature. Enter these to enable your selected
features.
Three login attempts are allowed before lockout followed by a lockout
period of 30 minutes.
OEMPassword These parameters are only shown of the OEM Security feature has been
supplied.
OEMEntry
See Chapter "OEM Security" on page 380 for further information
OEMStatus
OEMParamLists
IMGlobal Comms config locked

CAUTION
CLEAR MEMORY PARAMETER
The clear memory parameter will force all parameters to be set to their factory
default values. This will cause all values previously set by the user to be lost and it
should, therefore, only be used in exceptional circumstances. This parameter is
only available if the CFG.P parameter has been set to 9999.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

198 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Diagnostics Sub-List (diAG)

The diagnostics list provides general diagnostic information as shown in the following
table:

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
new.al new alarm OFF 0 Conf R/O
On 1 This shows ON when a process alarm (see Alarm List) becomes L3 R/O
active and remains on until the alarm has become inactive (and
acknowledged depending upon the latching strategy of the alarm).
g.ack global ack No 0 Conf R/W
YES 1 A rising edge will acknowledge all active process alarms (see the L3 R/W
Alarm List).
smpl.t sample time Indicates the sample period (in seconds). This is the period between Conf R/O
each execution cycle. L3 R/O
t.fmt time format mSEC 0 Sets the resolution of time parameters on the config comms channel Conf R/W
when read/written via scaled integer comms L3 R/W
SEC 1
Default: msec
mIN 2
HOuR 3
f.stby force standby No 0 Default: No Conf R/W
mode L3 R/W
YES 1 Sets the instrument into Standby Mode (see "Standby" on page 77).
e.stat execution Indicates the status of the execution engine. This parameter can be Conf R/O
status used to determine if the instrument execution is running, in standby or L3 R/O
starting up.
RuN 0 Running
StbY 1 Standby
St.UP 2 Start up
r.cnt reset counter This indicates the number of times the instrument has reset due to a Conf R/W
power cycle, exit from configuration mode, exit from quick start, or an L3 R/W
unexpected software reset. The count value can be reset by writing a
value of 0.
Default: 0
V.LiNE Line voltage measurement, not available on low voltage instruments. Conf R/O
L3 R/O
mb.ver microboard Version number of the microprocessor board fitted. R/O
version
The following parameters are comms only parameters available in iTools
InstStatusWord Instrument Status Word. This is a 16-bit bitmapped parameter that
provides instrument status information. It is mapped as shown in the
next section.
AlarmStatusWord Alarm Status Word. This is a16-bit bitmapped parameter that provides
alarm status information. It is mapped as shown in the following
section.
NotificationStatus Notifications Status Word. This is a 16-bit bitmapped parameter that
provides instrument notification status information. It is mapped as
shown in the following section.
StandbyCondStatus Standby Conditions Status Word (include the bit map table).
L2PassUnsuccess Number of HMI Level 2 unsuccessful login attempts since the last
successful login.
L2PassSuccess Number of HMI Level 2 successful logins.
L3PassUnsuccess Number of HMI Level 3 unsuccessful login attempts since the last
successful login.
L3PassSuccess Number of HMI Level 3 successful logins.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 199

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Value Description Access

Mnemonic Name

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
CfgPassUnsuccess Number of HMI Configuration Mode unsuccessful login attempts
since the last successful login.
CfgPassSuccess Number of HMI Configuration Mode successful logins.
CommsPassUnsuccess Number of Communications Configuration Mode unsuccessful login
attempts since the last successful login.
CommsPassSuccess Number of Communications Configuration Mode successful logins.

Instrument Status Word Bitmap

Bit Number Description

0 Alarm 1 State (0=Off, 1=On)
1 Alarm 2 State (0=Off, 1=On)
2 Alarm 3 State (0=Off, 1=On)
3 Alarm 4 State (0=Off, 1=On)
4 Manual Mode (0=Auto, 1=Manual)
5 Global (PV1 or PV2) Sensor Break (0=Off, 1=On)
6 Loop Break (0=Good closed loop, 1=Open loop)
7 CT Load Alarm (0=Off, 1=On)
8 Auto Tune (0=Off, 1=On)
9 Program End (0=No, 1=Yes)
10 PV1 out of range (0=No, 1=Yes)
11 CT Over Current Alarm (0=Off, 1=On)
12 New Alarm (0=No, 1=Yes)
13 Programmer Running (0=No, 1=Yes)
14 PV2 out of range (0=No, 1=Yes)
15 CT Leak Alarm (0=Off, 1=On)

Alarm Status Word Bitmap

Bit Number Description

0 Alarm 1 in active region (0=No,1=Yes)
1 Alarm 1 not acknowledged (0=No,1=Yes)
2 Alarm 2 in active region (0=No,1=Yes)
3 Alarm 1 not acknowledged (0=No,1=Yes)
4 Alarm 3 in active region (0=No,1=Yes)
5 Alarm 3 not acknowledged (0=No,1=Yes)
6 Alarm 4 in active region (0=No,1=Yes)
7 Alarm 4 not acknowledged (0=No,1=Yes)
8 Alarm 5 in active region (0=No,1=Yes)
9 Alarm 5 not acknowledged (0=No,1=Yes)
10 Alarm 6 in active region (0=No,1=Yes)
11 Alarm 6 not acknowledged (0=No,1=Yes)
12 Reserved
13 CT Load Alarm (0=No, 1=Yes)
14 CT Leak Alarm (0=No, 1=Yes)
15 CT Over Current Alarm (0=No, 1=Yes)

200 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Notification Status Word Bitmap

Bit Number Description

0 Set comms password in iTools
1 Password has expired.
2 HMI level 2 access locked out.
3 HMI level 3 access locked out.
4 HMI configuration access locked out.
5 Comms configuration access locked out.
6 Control loop in demo mode.
7 Control loop in auto tune mode.
8 Comms in configuration mode.
9 Loop Autotune requested, but cannot run.
10 Reserved.
11 Reserved.
12 Reserved.
13 Reserved.
14 Reserved.
15 Reserved.

Standby Status Word Bitmap

Bit Number Description

0 Invalid RAM image of NVOL.
1 NVOL parameter database load/store was unsuccessful.
2 NVOL region load/store was unsuccessful.
3 Option NVOL load/store was unsuccessful.
4 Factory Calibration not detected.
5 Unexpected CPU condition.
6 Hardware Ident Unknown.
7 Fitted hardware differs from expected hardware.
8 Unexpected Keyboard condition during startup.
9 Instrument powered down, in config mode.
10 Recipe load was unsuccessful.
11 Reserved.
12 Reserved.
13 Reserved.
14 Reserved.
15 Reserved.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 201

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Modules Sub-List (mOdS)

This list provides information about the modules fitted in the controller as shown in
the following table:

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

IO1.F io1 fitted NonE 0 The module type that is actually fitted in IO1. Conf R/O
L.IO 1
rELY 2
SSr 3
dC.OP 4
io1.e io1 expected as above The module type that is expected in IO1. Conf R/W
io2.f io2 fitted as above The module type that is actually fitted in IO2. Conf R/O
io2.e io2 expected as above The module type that is expected in IO2. Conf R/W
io4.f io4 fitted as above The module type that is actually fitted in IO4. Conf R/O
io4.e io4 expected as above The module type that is expected in IO4. Conf R/W
OPT.f option fitted The module type that is actually fitted in the options slot. Conf R/O
NONE 0 None - EPC3004 and EPC3008.
aI.d8 1 Eight digital input - EPC3004 and EPC3008.
E.NEt 2 Ethernet - EPC3004 and EPC3008.
NONE 10 None - EPC3016.
RSP 11 Remote SP - EPC3016.
C.232 12 EIA232 - EPC3016.
C.485 13 EIA485 - EPC3016.
C.422 14 EIA422 - EPC3016.
E.NET 15 Ethernet -EPC3016.
OPT.E option expected as above The module type that is expected in the options slot. Conf R/W

Enables
Enables parameters are not shown on the controller HMI. They are comms only
shown in iTools.

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

WireMode Run 1 FOR TOOLS USE ONLY - Mode of the Wiring/Execution Engine. R/O
Reset 2
Restoring 3
Validate 4
MaxWires Maximum number of wires. R/O

202 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Calibration Sub-List (CAL)

Calibration information and instructions for User Calibration are given in "User
Calibration" on page 369.

Access to the Calibration parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

From previous
 CAL
sub list (mOdS) LIST

 
Id
Stat
Mode
c.val

The calibration list provides user calibration status information and a means of input
and output calibration.

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
id id aI.1 0 Analog input 1. Conf R/W
AI.2 1 Analog input 2. L3 R/W

dC.1 2 Analog output 1.

dC.2 3 Analog output 2.
dC.3 4 Analog output 3.
Ct 5 Current transformer.
r.mA 6 Remote setpoint milliamps.
RSP.V 7 Remote setpoint Volts.
stat status FACt 0 Factory. R/O
Adj.d 1 Adjusted.
mode mode IdLE 0 Idle. Conf R/W
Strt 1 Start calibration. L3 R/W

U.SUC 2 Unsuccessful.
Lo 3 Low calibration point.
SEt.L 4 Set low point.
disC 5 Discard calibration.
Hi 6 High calibration point.
SET.H 7 Set high point.
disC 8 Discard calibration.
AdJ.d 9 Adjusted.
disC 10 Discard calibration.
C.VAL cal value This parameter only appears if MODE is equal to Low and Conf R/W
High calibration point. For input user calibration this is the L3 R/W
value the input is expected to be at the point of calibration.
For output user calibration this is the externally measured
output value at the point of calibration.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 203

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Input Linearization (LIN16)

The LIN16 list is only available if a Toolkit option has been ordered.

A LIN16 function block converts an input signal into an output PV using a series of up
to 14 straight lines (16 points) to characterize the conversion.

In EPC3000 series controllers, from firmware versions V3.01 and above, two
instances of the linearization function block have been added. It is an orderable
option protected by Feature Security see section "Security Sub-List (SEC)" on
page 197.

The LIN16 function block allows a user to create a their own linearization to match
the characteristics of a particular sensor not covered by any of the standard inputs. It
can also be used for the adjustment of the process variable to account for differences
introduced by the overall measurement system or to derive a different process
variable. These may be set up using the controller HMI and the parameters listed
below, but it may be found more convenient to use iTools. For this reason the
configuration of the LIN16 block is described in the iTools section "Input Linearization
(LIN16)" on page 360.

The Parameter navigation using the HMI and parameter descriptions for the LIN16
block are shown in the following sections:

LIN16 Parameter Navigation

Access to the parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation Diagram is
shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Lin
LIST



1 2
INST INST

   

in in
out out
state state
form form
units units
Res Res
Fback Fback
Fb.val Fb.val
Out.lo Out.lo
Out.hi Out.hi
Num.pt Num.pt
Edt.pt Edt.pt
In1 In1
Out1 Out1

In16 In16
Out16 Out16

204 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Linearization Block Parameters

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
inst 16 point 1 Select the input to linearize. L3 R/W
lineraization 2
table
in input The Input Value to linearize through the Linearization Table. L3 R/W
out output The Output Value that is the result of the linearization of the Input Value R/O
through the Linearization Table.
state status Status of the linearization block. R/O
Good 0 Good status indicates a correct linearization of the Input..
Bad 1 May be caused by a bad input signal. Examples are, sensor break, output
out of range or invalid series of points, the output is over/under range or the
list of points does not define a correct curve.
form curve form Automatically reads the format of the curve configured. R/O
FREE Freeform Curve
All the selected input points are used to generate a freeform curve.
INCR Increasing Curve
All the selected input points are used to generate an increasing curve.
dECR Decreasing Curve
All the selected input points are used to generate a decreasing curve.
SkIP Skipped Points from list
At least one input point has been skipped because of not expected order
with respect to the previous ones.
NONE No Form
No valid pair of points has been found that has strictly monotonically
increasing input values.
units output units See "Units" on page 105 for the list of available units. Conf R/W
res output nnnn 0 No decimal places. Conf R/W
resolution
nnn.n 1 One decimal place.
nn.nn 2 Two decimal places.
n.nnn 3 Three decimal place.
.nnnn 4 Four decimal place.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 205

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
fback Fallback type Selected Output Fallback Strategy that is actuated when the input status is R/O
bad the output is over its limits or the table contains an invalid series of
points.
C.Bad 0 Clip Bad
The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is
set to BAD, such that any function block using this measurement can
operate its own fallback strategy. For example the control loop may hold its
output.
Good 1 Clip Good
The measurement is clipped to the limit it has exceeded and its status is
set to GOOD, such that any function block using this measurement may
continue to calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy.
F.bAd 2 Fallback Bad
The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value. Which has been
set by the user. In addition the status of the measured value will be set to
BAD, such that any function block using this measurement can operate its
own fallback strategy. For example the control loop may hold its output.
f.Gd 3 Fallback Good
The measurement will adopt the configured fallback value. Which has been
set by the user. In addition the status of the measured value will be set to
GOOD, such that any function block using this measurement may continue
to calculate and not employ its own fallback strategy.
u.bAd 4 Up Scale
The measurement will be forced to adopt it's high limit, this is like having a
resistive pull up on an input circuit. In addition the status of the
measurement is set to BAD, such that any function block using this
measurement can operate its own fallback strategy. For example the
control loop may hold its output.
d.bAd 6 Down Scale
The measurement will be forced to adopt it's low limit, this is like having a
resistive pull down on an input circuit. In addition the status of the
measurement is set to BAD, such that any function block using this
measurement can operate its own fallback strategy. For example the
control loop may hold its output.
Fb.val fallback value In the event of a bad status, the output may be configured to adopt the Conf R/W
fallback value. This allows the strategy to dictate a known output value.
Int Bal Integral Balance No 0 The Integral Balance output can be wired to the PID Loop; The function Comms
Request Yes 1 block will issue a bumpless transfer of the Loop should there be any parameter
change of the linearization table that can cause an undesired step change
on its output.
out.lo output low limit Minimum Value allowed for the Output. If the linearization table would L3 R/W
result in an output value that is less than the low limit, then the Fallback
strategy will be actuated.
out.hi output high Maximum Value allowed for the Output. If the linearization table would
limit result in an output value that is greater than the low limit, then the Fallback
strategy will be actuated.
num.pt number of points Number of Points selected to define the linearization table. It can be set
between 2 and 16.
edt.pt insert or delete A point can be added or deleted by specifying the desired position.
point Set EditPoint equal to 1, 2, ..., 16 in order to insert a point at the associated
position; each following point will be moved into the next position.
Set EditPoint equal to -1, -2, ..., -16 in order to remove the point at the
associated position; each following point will be moved into the previous
position and the last one is maintained.
in1 input point 1 Input Coordinate of Point 1 of the linearization table.
out1 output point 1 Output Coordinate of Point 1 of the linearization table.
Up to 16 Input and output points are available depending on the setting of the Number of Points parameter.
in16 input point 16 Input Coordinate of Point 1 of the linearization table.
out16 output point 16 Output Coordinate of Point 1 of the linearization table.

206 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Remote Input List (REm.1)

This list configures the remote input as shown in the following table.

Access to the Remote Input parameter list is summarized below. The full Navigation
Diagram is shown in section "Navigation Diagram" on page 94.

Return to previous header

 +

From previous list  Rem.1  Return to CONF

LIST
(INSt) or Level 3
 
in
Rng. hi
Rng. lo
Scl. hi
Scl. lo
Time. o
Res
Units
Out
stat

Parameter Parameter Name Value Description Access

Mnemonic

Press  to select in turn Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)
in remote input This parameter can be written to via a remote master, or by the Conf R/W
Remote Setpoint Module (if fitted). The Modbus address is 277 if L3 R/W
being written to by an external master.
rng.hi range high Maximum value of the input. Conf R/W
Default: 100 L3 R/O
rng.lo range low Minimum value of the input. Conf R/W
Default: 0 L3 R/O
scl.hi scale high The maximum value of the scaled output PV. Conf R/W
Default: 100 L3 R/O
scl.lo Scale lo The minimum value of the scaled output PV. Conf R/W
Default: 0 L3 R/O
time.o timeout This is the period in which the input has to be written to (in seconds). Conf R/W
If this period is exceeded the output PV status will be set to Bad. If L3 R/O
this period is set to 0, the timeout strategy is disabled.
Default: 1s
res resolution nnnnn 0 Resolution of the input /output. No decimal places. Conf R/W
nnnn.n 1 One decimal place. L3 R/O
Default: nnnn.n
nnn.nn 2 Two decimal places.
nn.nnn 3 Three decimal places.
n.nnnn 4 Four decimal places.
units units See section "Units" on page 105 for a list of units used throughout.
Default: AbsTemp
out pv The output PV that has been linearly scaled Range High to Scale Conf R/O
High and Range Low to Scale Low.
stat status Status of the output PV. Conf R/O
See section "Status" on page 106 for a list of enumerated values.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 207

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Comms Indirection Table

EPC3000 controllers make a fixed set of parameters available over digital
communications using Modbus addresses. This is known as the SCADA Table. The
SCADA Modbus address area is 0 to 15615 (0x3CFF). There are three addresses
reserved to allow iTools to detect the instrument: 107, 121 and 122 - these cannot be
set as a Destination value. The following Modbus addresses have been reserved for
use via the Comms Indirection Table. By default the addresses have no associated
parameters:

Modbus Range (Decimal) Modbus Range (Hex)

15360 to 15615 3C00 to 3CFF

The programmer area (2000h - 27BFh) within the SCADA table is not supported.

When accessed here, the parameter may be presented as scaled integer, minutes or
Native format and may be flagged as read-only. The Comms IndirectionTable allows
additional parameters which are not in the SCADA table to be made available over
Modbus communications for specific applications. It is recommended that iTools is
used to set up the Comms Indirection Table using the Commstab function block.

The following parameters are available in the Commstab function block:

Parameter Name Value Description Access

Press  to select Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

in turn
Dest The Modbus address where the selected Not Used Modbus destination Configuration
parameter will appear in the SCADA table area.
Range is 0 to 15615.
A value of -1 indicates not used.
Source The parameter that will be mapped into the Source parameter Configuration
Destination Modbus address.
It should be noted that setting this parameter via
iTools will allow sources that are unavailable to the
HMI. If such a setting is subsequently examined
using the front panel it cannot be edited, only
deleted.
Native The data format in which the source parameter will Integer Native data format Configuration
be presented at the destination address.
0 Integer - causes a scaled integer representation
of the value to appear at the Modbus address.
1 Native - causes the native format of the value to
appear at the Modbus address. It should be noted
that if a 32 bit value is returned, it will use two
adjacent 16 bit Modbus addresses.
ReadOnly This parameter may be used to override the Read only Configuration
normal alterability rule for the parameter and force Read/Write only if source is R/W
it to be Read Only.
Setting this value to 'Read/Write' enables the
normal alterability rule(s).
0 Read/Write - Allow the value's normal alterability
rule to be applied at the selected Modbus address
1 Read-Only- Overrides the parameter's normal
alterability rule to present it as read only at the
selected Modbus address

208 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Name Value Description Access

Press  to select Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

in turn
Minutes This allows for Time parameters to be presented in Seconds Time parameter resolution Configuration
alternate resolutions, for example 1/10th of
minutes or 1/10th of seconds.
0 Seconds- the Time parameter will be presented
as sss.s
1 Minutes - the Time parameter will be presented
as mmm.m

HA033650ENG Issue 1 209

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Q Code List
These are the Quick Start Code function block parameters which are available via
comms. They are the Quick Codes shown on the HMI when the instrument starts-up.
They can be seen in iTools but there is no separate list on the controller HMI.

Parameter Name Value Description Access

Press  to select in Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

turn
Quick Start Code Set 1 Comms only
Application Defines the application.
None 0 No application configured. The controller has no soft wiring.
PID heat only 1 PID heat only controller.
PID heat/cool 2 PID heat/cool controller.
VPU heat only 3 Valve position heat only controller.
Carbon potential 4 Carbon potential controller.
Dew point control 5 Dew point controller.
Input 1 Sensor Type Defines the type of the input sensor connected to input 1.
X 0 Use Default.
B 1 Type B.
J 2 Type J.
K 3 Type K.
L 4 Type L.
N 5 Type N.
R 6 Type R.
S 7 Type S.
T 8 Type T.
Pt100 20 PT100.
Pt1000 21 PT1000.
80mV 30 0-80mV.
10V 31 0-10V.
20mA 32 0-20mA.
4-20mA 33 4-20mA.
Input 1 Range Defines the range of the input 1.
X 0 Use Default.
1 1 0-100°C.
2 2 0-200°C.
3 3 0-400°C.
4 4 0-600°C.
5 5 0-800°C.
6 6 0-1000°C.
7 7 0-1200°C.
8 8 0-1300°C.
9 9 0-1600°C.
A 10 0-1800°C.
F 11 Full Range.
Input 2 Sensor Type Defines the type of the input sensor connected to input 2.
The enumerated values are the same for Input 1 Type above
with the following addition available on input 2 only.
HiZ 40 High Impedance (Zirconia).
Input 2 Range Defines the range of the input 2. The enumerated values are
the same for Input 1 range.

210 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Level EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Name Value Description Access

Press  to select in Press or to change values (if read/write, R/W)

turn
Quick Start Code Set 2 Comms only
CT input Not used 0 Defines the range of the current transformer input.
10A 1 10 Amps.
25A 2 25 Amps.
50A 5 50 Amps.
100A 6 100 Amps.
1000A 7 1000 Amps.
Digital input A Not used 0 Defines the functionality of digital input A.
Alarm acknowledge 1
Loop Auto/Manual 2
Programmer Run/Hold 3
Keylock 4
Setpoint Select 5
Programmer Run/Reset 6
Loop Remote/Local 7
Recipe Select 8
Loop Track 9
Digital input B Defines the functionality of digital input B. The enumerated
values are the same as for Input A above.
D1-D8 Not used 0 Digital inputs 1 to 8.
(See also "Quick Codes DIO" on page 70).
Config1 1
Config2 2
Config3 3
Config4 4
Config5 5
Config6 6
Config7 7
Config8 8
Config9 9
Temperature units Default 0 Default temperature units.
Celsius 1 Degrees Celsius.
Fahrenheit 2 Degrees Fahrenheit.
Kelvin 3 Kelvin.
Save and exit NoExit 0 Do not exit quick start mode.
Save 1 Save quick start settings.
Discard 2 Discard quick start settings.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 211

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configuration Using iTools

What is in this Chapter?
This chapter describes how to configure the controller using iTools.

This chapter describes those feature which are specific to the EPC series controllers.
iTools is generally described in the iTools Help Manual Part No. HA028838 which can
be obtained from www.eurotherm.com.

What is iTools?
iTools is a configuration and monitoring package which can be used to edit, store and
'clone' complete controller configurations. It is a free downloadable package available
from www.eurotherm.com.

iTools can be used to configure all the functions of the controller already described in
this manual. It is also possible using iTools to configure additional functions such as
Customized Messages, Recipe Storage and Download and Parameter Promotion.
These features are described in this chapter.

What is an IDM?
The Instrument Descriptor Module (IDM) is a Windows file that is used by iTools to
determine the properties of a specific device. Each version of a device requires its
own IDM file. This is normally included with the iTools software and allows iTools to
recognize the software version of your instrument.

To Load an IDM
In the unlikely event that the build of your instrument is a non-standard, it may be
necessary for you to obtain the IDM from the Eurotherm web site
www.eurotherm.com. The file will be of the format IDxxx_v106.exe, where IDxxx is
the instrument and v--- is the software version number of the instrument.

Having downloaded the new IDM installer, ensure all of iTools and the iTools OPC
Server have been stopped. Then launch the installer and follow the instructions to
complete the IDM installation onto your system.

Once installed, start iTools as usual. If the installation was successful, the new device
details should be listed under the "New" dialog under the appropriate tab.

212 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Connecting a PC to the Controller

This may been done using the configuration CPI clip, the Fixed Communications port
(EPC3004/EPC3008) or by Option Comms modules (if fitted).

Using the Configuration Clip

A Configuration Clip is available with iTools by quoting USB in the iTools ordering
code. Alternatively, it may be ordered with the controller by quoting
EPCACC/USBCONF in the Accessory Order Code. The clip can be fitted into the
side of a controller as shown and has a USB interface to a PC.

Connecting via the Configuration Clip offers the simplest and quickest method of
establishing communications to the controller, as it provides easy access whatever
configuration the controller is set to.

Ensure that the controller is powered down before the clip is attached.

The benefit of using this arrangement is that it is not necessary to power the
controller, since the clip provides the power to the internal memory of the controller.

Note: In some cases it may be preferable to have the configuration clip connected
but not power the instrument from the USB port. For example, when the controller is
powered by the standard Low Voltage (24Vdc) or Mains (110Vac -240Vac) and iTools
is connected to monitor, configure or clone it. The power can be disconnected by
removing Pins 1 & 5 in the following diagram.

Pin 5: +5V
Pin 4: Gnd
Pin 3: Rx
Pin 2: Tx
Pin 1: 7.5V

Note: An existing earlier version of this clip with a serial interface to a PC may also
be used.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 213

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Using the Communications Port

Connect the controller to the EIA485 serial communications port of the PC shown in
"Serial Communications EIA-485" on page 59.

Using Option Comms

In EPC3016, if the relevant options board is fitted, the controller may be connected
using EIA232, EIA422 or Ethernet as shown in "Digital Communications
Connections" on page 58.

In EPC3008 and EPC3004, if the relevant options board is fitted, the controller may
be connected using the Ethernet connector, see "Ethernet Wiring" on page 60.

Note: Ensure that the Comms block in the controller is suitably configured - i.e. in
the Comm/Main Sub List the Protocol parameter is configured to "m.tCP"
(MODBUS/TCP), and in the Comm/Network Sub List the IP Mode parameter is
correctly set (STAT/dHCP - depending on whether there is a DHCP server).

Also, to enable iTools to automatically Discover the controller, ensure that the Auto
Discovery parameter found in the Comm/Network Sub List is turned to ‘On’.

Refer to sections "Main Sub List (mAIN)" on page 151 and "Network Sub List (nWrk)"
on page 153.

214 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Starting iTools
Open iTools and, with the controller connected, press ‘Scan’ on the iTools menu bar.
iTools will search the communications ports and TCP/IP connections for recognisable
instruments. Controllers connected with the configuration clip (CPI), will be found at
address 255 regardless of the address configured in the controller.

Note: The Scan will only find the devices if the configuration clip or serial comms is
used. If Ethernet is used then it will be necessary to add the IP address to the iTools
control Panel list. This is described in section "Ethernet Parameters" on page 320.

When the controller is detected a screen view similar to the one shown below will be
displayed. The browser on the left shows the List Headers. To display parameters
within a list double click the Header or select ‘Parameter Explorer'. Click on a list
header to display parameters associated with this list.

The controller view may be turned on or off using the 'View' menu and selecting
'Panel Views'. This view mimics the connected controller HMI. The buttons are active
which means that the controller can be operated directly from these buttons in exactly
the same way as the connected instrument.

The controller may be configured using the Browser view above. The following pages
show a number of examples of how to configure various functions.

It is assumed that the user is generally familiar with iTools and has a general
understanding of Windows.

If the controller uses Ethernet comms, iTools needs to be set up to communicate with
the controller. This is described in "IP Mode Settings" on page 324.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 215

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The 'Browser' List

Parameters are available under list headings in the same way as in the controller
Level 3 or Configuration level.

Double click on a heading to display parameters associated with the selected

heading in the right hand side of the iTools view.

Parameters colored blue are read only in the selected level.

Parameters shown in black may be modified within preset limits. Enumerated

parameters are selected from a drop-down list and analog parameters may be
modified by typing in the new value.

The actual controller HMI may be displayed in the top or bottom section of the iTools
display as shown. The controller may be operated from this view. The controller HMI
may also be displayed by pressing ‘Device Panel’ in the menu bar.

216 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configuration Access
The controller may be configured from the front panel (HMI) as described in
"Configuration Level" on page 96 or it may be configured over comms using more
than one serial or Ethernet channel (if ordered). In order to avoid multiple users from
writing to the same configuration parameter at the same time, comms connections
are separated into a maximum of five sessions (1x config comms, 1x serial comms,
3x Ethernet). When a session is created it restricts access to another channel also
being in Configuration mode simultaneously.

Access levels are Operator/Configuration.

By default, a connection has operator privilege. Upon disconnection (or timeout) the
session will be deleted, with the associated mode reverted back to operator level.

If a power cycle occurs while any session is in configuration mode, the instrument will
start up in standby mode with the HMI displaying the standard P.Cnf notification. All
sessions will be disconnected during startup. When connections are re-established,
all will be in operator mode. Any session (or HMI) must then enter and exit
configuration mode to remove this notification.

When one comms session puts the instrument into configuration mode, all other
sessions will report the instrument in standby mode, but will not provide configuration
level privilege. All other sessions will also be prevented from accessing configuration
mode.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 217

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Setting Comms Configuration Password

For EPC3000 V5.xx and later, the password will require configuration on first
connection to iTools via Option/Fixed comms. This can be done in two ways:
1. The user selects the “Add Devices” (using the “Add” button), the device will
display a padlock icon to the left of the device description.

If they select to add the device, iTools will display a message informing them
that they need to configure the Comms Configuration password before being
able to proceed.

Selecting ‘Yes’ will automatically launch the iDevPWSetup tool.

218 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

2. The user chooses to perform a network “Scan”, on detecting the device,

iTools will display a message:

informing the user that they need to configure the Comms Configuration
password before being able to proceed. Selecting ‘Yes’ will automatically
launch the iDevPWSetup tool.

Note the following:

• Passwords are required to be at least eight characters in length

• It is required that the password uses two out of the four following character types:

– UPPER CASE [A-Z]

– lower case [a-z]

– numeric [0-9]

– special characters [! $ # %, etc]

• Enforce a lockout period after five unsuccessful attempts

To Put iTools into Configuration Mode

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not attempt to configure the controller while it is connected to a active process.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or
equipment damage.

In configuration level the controller is in standby mode and does not control the
process or provide alarm indication.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 219

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Click on . A dialog message is displayed as shown.

If another session already has the controller in Configuration Mode, a different dialog
message is displayed, advising that the request to enter Configuration mode from
this session may not be successful.

Select ‘Yes’ if the process is not on line. You will be prompted to enter the Comms
password.

If connected via the CPI clip, no Comms password will be required.

The controller will display the scrolling message COMMS CONFIG ACTIVE together
with the letter H.

The controller may now be configured using iTools.

The controller may also be put into configuration mode.

If the controller is already in Configuration level and then is selected in

iTools a warning is message is shown to alert the user that the controller has
configuration access:

It may be possible to continue to put iTools into Configuration level by selecting ‘Yes’.
The comms password is required as above.

The controller can be configured from both iTools and the HMI but only the last
change will be accepted. If Access in iTools is then switched back the controller will
also return to Operator Level 1.

220 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Instrument List
The Instrument List is the first list shown in the Browser section of iTools. It allows
further features which are not available in the instrument HMI to be set. In particular
Security related features including the Comms Config password.

To change the Comms Config password, click on the ellipsis in the value cell on the
password dialog window and enter a new value.

The parameter ‘Comms password Expiry Days’ defaults to 90 days. This parameter
sets the number of days after which the comms configuration password will expire.
This will generate a message informing the user that the password needs changing.

The 'COMMS CONFIG password EXPIRED' notification appears as a scrolling

message in the display if password expires but can be disabled by setting
Instrument.Security.CommspasswordExpiry to ‘0’.

Note: However, this is not recommended as it potentially could lead to

unauthorized access to the instrument's configuration.

Feature passwords
Feature passwords are required to enable chargeable features. These can be added
after the controller has been supplied. Examples of chargeable features include
Programmer Types, Toolkit Blocks, some Digital Communications protocols, etc.

To add a new chargeable feature contact your supplier who will request the current
values of the feature passwords. New values will then be provided to be entered to
update to the new feature.

Three login attempts are allowed before lockout followed by a lockout period of 30
minutes.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 221

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Terminal Editor
Select ‘Terminal Wiring’ on the main tool bar.

From this view click on a set of terminals representing an IO module. In the ‘IO Ident’
drop down select an IO type. The diagram of the type of IO will be shown against the
chosen terminal set.

An Annotated Diagram and Summary of wiring can also be viewed.

222 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Graphical Wiring
Graphical wiring provides a means of connecting function blocks together to produce
a unique process. If the controller has been ordered or configured using the Quick
Codes for a particular application then an example of the application has already
been produced and is intended as a starting point for the user to modify as required,
where permitted.

Select ‘Graphical Wiring’ on the main toolbar.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This operation will require the controller to enter configuration mode. Ensure that
the controller is not connected to an active process.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

A list of function blocks is shown in the left hand side. Blocks are dragged and
dropped from the list into the Graphical Wiring section on the right.

They are ‘soft wired’ together to produce the application. The above example shows
the Analog Input 1 block wired to the PV input of the loop. This is produced by
clicking on the ‘PV’ parameter of the Analog Input block and dragging to the ‘Main
PV’ parameter of the Loop block. It is important to note that the value of a wired
parameter cannot be manually changed since it takes on the value of the parameter it
is wired from. The blocks and wires are shown dotted until the controller is updated
using the ‘Download Wiring to Instrument’ button in the top left corner of the
Graphical Wiring section.

For a full description of graphical wiring, please refer to the iTools User Manual
HA028838.

50 wires are available as standard, with 200 wires available if the enhanced Toolkit
option has been ordered.

If a controller is ordered or configured for a specific application it will already have the
wiring in place. Examples are displayed in "Applications" on page 228. Generally
Application specific wiring is intended as a starting point which can be modified by
the user to suit a particular process, with the exception to the Factory Mutual (FM)
approved version.

Note: The EPC3000 FM version is only available with preconfigured applications to

order/load, which are manadatory, hardcoded and comply with the approved FM
asssociated functionality - see "Applications" on page 228, for further details.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 223

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

If the controller is ordered unconfigured it will be necessary for the user to wire the
function blocks to suit the particular application.

Some examples of graphical wiring are shown in the following sections.

Note: The following examples may differ depending on the version of controller.
The EPC3000 FM version may differ, with regard to the function block numbering as
AI1, Alarm 1 and Alarm 2, OR1 and IO OP3 will already be utilized for specific
pre-configured application. The examples demonstrate the graphical wiring and
function block and asscociated connections, see "Applications" on page 228 for
further details.

Example 1: To Wire an Alarm

Unless specifically produced in an application, any alarm which is required must be
wired by the user.

The example below shows an absolute high alarm monitoring the Process Variable.

This is a ‘soft’ alarm in that it does not operate a physical output.

1. Drag and drop an alarm function block into the graphical wiring editor.

2. Drag and drop an analog input block into the graphical wiring editor.

3. Click on ‘PV’ of the input block and drag a wire to ‘input’ of the alarm block.

4. At this stage the wire is shown dotted and it must be transferred to the controller
by clicking the ‘Download Wiring to Instrument’ button in the top left hand
corner of the Graphical Wiring view.

Example 2: To Connect an Alarm to a Physical Output

To make a soft alarm operate an output it must be ‘wired’.

1. Drag and drop an alarm function block into the graphical wiring editor.

2. Drag and drop an output block into the graphical wiring editor.

3. Click on the ‘Output’ of the Alarm block and drag the wire to the ‘PV’ input of the
output block.

4. At this stage the wire is shown dotted and it must be transferred to the controller
by clicking the ‘Download Wiring to Instrument’ button

The example shown below uses Alarm 4 and IO2 (configured for On/Off output).

224 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Example 3: To Wire Sensor Break

If a sensor condition is required to operate an output it must be wired as shown in the
example below.

Sensor Break Alarm with Latching

In the above example a sensor break alarm has no latching ability. If latching is
required the sensor break output can be wired to an alarm function block configured
as a digital alarm which can be configured for auto or manual latching. A wiring
example is shown below:

Example 4: To Configure a Bargraph

In this example the bargraph will be wired to the PV input connected to Analog
Input 1.

1. Drag and drop the ‘Instrument’ function block into the graphical wiring editor.

2. Drag and drop an ‘AI1’ block into the graphical wiring editor.

3. Click on the ‘PV’ of the AI1 block and drag the wire to the ‘HMI.BargraphPV’ in
the Instrument block.

To apply limits to the bargraph:

4. In the AI1 function block click to open the list of parameters. Then click to

show all connections.

5. Drag InputHigh to HMI.BargraphMax in the Instrument block.

6. Drag InputLow to HMI.BargraphMin in the Instrument block.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 225

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

7. Click the ‘Download Wiring to Instrument’ button.

The above example will cause the bargraph to display the PV from AI1. Another
typical requirement is for the bargraph to show the output demand value. This may
be wired in a similar way by wiring the channel output to the HMI.BargraphPV as
shown below.

Example 5: To Wire a Retransmission Output

In this example, Analog Output 1 (IO1) is required to read 0 volts for a PV input of 0.0
and 10 volts for a PV of 500.0.

226 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The diagram shows a simple loop where the control output is connected to Output 3
and the PV is wired to Analog Output 1 configured for 0 - 10V.

In the IO1 settings adjust Demand Low to 0.0 and Demand High to 500.0.

The Output High and Output Low parameters may be adjusted to limit the analog
output if required. For example, set OutputHigh to 8.0V and OutputLow to 1.0V. The
retransmission will then read 1.0V for a PV of 0.0 and 8.0V for a PV of 500.0.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 227

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Applications
The EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM) controller is supplied with 2 default applications,
which are preconfigured and both contain five function blocks that are hardcoded and
interlinked, therefore cannot be removed, deleted or separated - even if the product is
cold started. Some user configuration is possible, see below for further details.

EPC3000 FM Limit Alarm - High

Once selected at start up stage (see Start Up Modes and Start Up—New
Unconfigured Controller) the EPC3000 FM Limit Alarm - High application,
automatically configures the controller and provides the following functionality;

• provides a High limit alarm function, which meets the requirements of Factory
Mutual (FM) Approval Standard FM 3545 - Temperature Limit and Supervisory
Switches

• monitors the temperature Process Variable (PV) value, as well as the sensor
status

• alarms, when the PV input is higher than the alarm threshold, or if a sensor break
event happens

• high limit alarm events, when triggered must be reset manually and will only
change when PV returns within the setpoint limit

Note: Additional wiring maybe added to the application, to provide further design
but the function blocks providing the FM High limit alarm function cannot be removed,
and will be reinstated if removed by mistake.

FM Limit Alarm (High) - Wiring

FM Limit Alarm

Sensor Fail Alarm

Analog Input 1 (AI 1)

A thermocouple is connected to Analog Input AI1 (1) and in turn the;

• PV output from AI1 is supplied to the Input of Alarm 1 (2), see Alarm 1 - FM Limit
Alarm (High)

• PVStatus from AI1 is supplied to Input of Alarm 2 (3), see Alarm 2 - Sensor Fail
Alarm.

228 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Alarm 1 - FM Limit Alarm (High)

In this application Alarm 1 (2) function block, is the Factory Mutual (FM) Limit Alarm -
High. The function block is preconfigured as an Absolute High alarm that monitors
the Process Variable and alarms when the PV input is higher than the alarm
threshold.

This is a ‘hard’ alarm meaning it operates, controls a physical output - see Output 3
(IO OP3) Alarm connections.

Note: PV for FM Limit alarm high fails upscale, so this is not configurable only
selectable at startup - see Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller.

Alarm 2 - Sensor Fail Alarm

In this application the Sensor Fail Alarm function block monitors the Process Variable
status (PVStatus) of Analog Input 1(AI 1) 1, constantly checking the PV is operating
and alarms if the sensor becomes open circuit or reads out of range.

This is a ‘hard’ alarm meaning it operates, controls a physical output - see Output 3
(IO OP3) Alarm connections.

OR Function Block (OR1)

A Logic OR function block modified for the FM Limit Alarm High application, which
only allows the 2 preconfigured inputs (Input1, from Alarm 1 and Input2, from
Alarm 2) to be wired to a single Boolean parameter OR 1 (4).

NOTE: No user configuration is required - default configuration only. (All Read/Write

availability is locked and the input settings are hardcoded as Input1: Wired from
Alarm.1.Output and Input2: Wired from Alarm.2.Output.

Output 3 (IO OP3) Alarm connections

Both alarms, Alarm 1 (2) and Alarm 2 (3) are wired, via an OR 1 (4) block to
output IO OP3 (5), which is mandatory configured as an On/Off output.

Therefore, the relay that is connected to output IO OP3 (5), goes high whenever;

• an alarm event is determined by Alarm 1 (2)

• and/or a sensor break or PV Status alarm is determined by Alarm 2 (3).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 229

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EPC3000 FM Limit Alarm - Low

Once selected at start up stage (see Start Up Modes and Start Up—New
Unconfigured Controller) the EPC3000 FM Limit Alarm - Low application,
automatically configures the controller and provides the following functionality;

• provides a Low limit alarm function, which meets the requirements of Factory
Mutual (FM) Approval Standard FM 3545 - Temperature Limit and Supervisory
Switches

• monitors the temperature Process Variable (PV) value, as well as the sensor
status

• alarms when the PV input is less than the alarm threshold, or if a sensor break
event happens

• low limit alarm events, when triggered must be reset manually and will only
change when PV returns within the setpoint limit

Note: Additional wiring may be added to the application, to provide further design
but the function blocks providing the FM Low limit alarm function cannot be removed,
and will be reinstated if removed by mistake.

FM Limit Alarm (Low) - Wiring

FM Limit Alarm

Sensor Fail Alarm

Analog Input 1 (AI 1)

A thermocouple is connected to Analog Input AI1 (1) and in turn the;

• PV output from AI1 is supplied to the Input of Alarm 1 (2), see Alarm 1 - FM Limit
Alarm (High)

• PVStatus from AI1 is supplied to Input of Alarm 2 (3), see Alarm 2 - Sensor Fail
Alarm.

Alarm 1 - FM Limit Alarm (Low)

In this application Alarm 1 (2) function block, is the Factory Mutual (FM) Limit Alarm -
Low. The function block is preconfigured as an Absolute Low alarm that monitors the
Process Variable and alarms when the PV input is less than the alarm threshold.

230 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

This is a ‘hard’ alarm meaning it operates, controls a physical output - see Output 3
(IO OP3) Alarm connections.

Note: PV for FM Limit alarm Low fails downscale, this is not configurable only
selectable at startup - see Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller.

Alarm 2 - Sensor Fail Alarm

In this application the Sensor Fail Alarm function block monitors the Process Variable
status (PVStatus) of Analog Input 1(AI 1) 1, constantly checking the PV is operating
and alarms if the sensor becomes open circuit or reads out of range.

This is a ‘hard’ alarm meaning it operates, controls a physical output - see Output 3
(IO OP3) Alarm connections.

OR Function Block (OR1)

A Logic OR function block modified for FM Limit Alarm Low application, which only
allows the 2 preconfigured inputs (Input1, from Alarm 1 and Input2, from Alarm 2) to
be wired to a single Boolean parameter OR 1 (4).

NOTE: No user configuration is required - default configuration only. (All Read/Write

availability is locked and the input settings are hardcoded as Input1: Wired from
Alarm.1.Output and Input2: Wired from Alarm.2.Output.

Output 3 (IO OP3) Alarm connections

Both alarms, Alarm 1 (2) and Alarm 2 (3) are wired, via an OR 1 (4) block to
output IO OP3 (5), which is mandatory configured as an On/Off output.

Therefore, the relay that is connected to output IO OP3 (5), goes high whenever;

• an alarm event is determined by Alarm 1 (2)

• and/or a sensor break or PV Status alarm is determined by Alarm 2 (3).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 231

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Flash Memory Editor

The Flash Memory Editor edits any device data that needs to be saved to the device
flash memory in addition to the OPC function block parameter editing mechanism
used for most configuration editing.

This includes:

1. Promote Parameters.

2. User Message Table.

3. Recipe Definition and Recipe data sets.

All these sets of data are presented on a series of tabs as shown in the following
views.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Any changes made to the controllers flash memory require the controller to enter
configuration mode. The controller will not control the process when in configuration
mode. Ensure that the controller is not connected to an active process when in
configuration mode.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

232 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Promotion
Parameters which are available in Level 1 and Level 2 may be configured to suit the
preferences of a particular user.

The name for each parameter can be changed (maximum 5 characters + '.').

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION

Ensure that parameters to be promoted are given user defined names.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

Some parameters, such as alarm thresholds, have the same default name. This is
described in section "User Defined Messages" on page 235.

Select ‘Flash Memory’ followed by ‘Promote Parameters’.

The list shows the parameters which are available in Levels 1 & 2, Level 2 only and
whether they are Read Only or Read/Write.

To change the level select the parameter. In the ‘Level’ drop down select ‘Level 1 + 2’
or ‘Level 2’.

In the Access drop down select ‘Read Only’ or ‘Read/Write’.

Parameters can be added to or removed from the list as follows:

HA033650ENG Issue 1 233

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To add a parameter to the list click in the list where you want the item to appear then
right click and select ‘Insert Item’. A pop up box will appear from which the required
parameter can be selected. To remove a parameter from the list, right click on the
parameter and select ‘Remove Item’.

Alternatively, highlight the blank line at the end of the list or at the point in the list
where the item is to appear (in the above example, line 30).

Press the ellipsis in the ‘Parameter’ drop down. This will open the full list of
parameters from which the new parameter can be chosen.

After changes have been made, press the "Download" button which is located in
the top left hand corner of the Flash Memory Editor view.

In order for the controller to be updated it needs to be put into configuration mode. A
confirmation message will be shown asking if you wish to proceed.

Changes will not be saved unless the Download button is pressed.

234 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

User Defined Messages

Process messages which scroll in the controller display may be customized. Default
user messages are overridden if an application is selected via Quick Codes.

Example 1: To Customize Alarm 1 Message

In this example the alarm 1 message will read ‘HIGH TEMPERATURE’.

1. Press the Flash Memory option from the menu bar.

2. Select and press the ‘Message Table’ tab.

3. Select Parameter ‘ALARM1 #1’.

4. In the ‘Message’ area change ‘Message’ to HIGH TEMPERATURE.

5. Press ‘Update Device Flash Memory’ button to download the new message
into the controller. To update the controller it needs to be put into configuration
mode. A confirmation message will be shown asking if you wish to proceed.

Note: # is a mechanism which allows values from parameters to be displayed in

accordance with the table below:
Escape code Inserted text
#1 Alarm 1 type (None, High, Low, Deviation High, etc)
#2 Alarm 2 type (None, High, Low, Deviation High, etc)
#3 Alarm 3 type (None, High, Low, Deviation High, etc)
#4 Alarm 4 type (None, High, Low, Deviation High, etc)
#5 Alarm 5 type (None, High, Low, Deviation High, etc)
#6 Alarm 6 type (None, High, Low, Deviation High, etc)
#T PV value
#U PV2 value
#O Active output power value
#S Working setpoint
#L CT leak current
#I CT load current
#C Custom ID
#Mnnnn Parameter Mnemonic, where nnnn = parameter modbus address in Hex
## Displays a single # character

HA033650ENG Issue 1 235

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Example 2: To Add Further Parameters

By default iTools shows 12 parameters which can have customized messages. This
default message table is overridden if an application has been selected via quick
codes.

The user can add further parameters and messages as follows:

Either double click in the next available parameter or click on the ellipsis button.

This opens a list of all available parameters.

In this example the message ‘VENT OPEN’ will be applied to the LA digital input.

1. Select IO.LA.PV.

2. Type the required message into the ‘Message’ Area.

3. Press the ‘Update Flash Memory’ button to download the message to the
controller. To update the controller it needs to be put into configuration mode. A
confirmation message will be shown asking if you wish to proceed.

When Digital Input LA is activated the scrolling message ‘VENT OPEN’ will now be
displayed in the controller display.

In the ‘Operator’ drop down it is possible to select:

= equals the ‘Value’

<> is greater or less than the ‘Value’

> is greater than the ‘Value’

< is less than the ‘Value’

Mask is generally used to activate a message for a number of parameters when

using a bitmap field.

236 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Recipes
A recipe is a list of parameters whose values can be captured and stored in a dataset
which can then be loaded at any time to restore the recipe parameters, thus providing
a means of altering the configuration of an instrument in a single operation even in
operator mode. Recipes can be set up and loaded using iTools or in the controller
itself, see "To Save Recipes" on page 149.

A maximum of 5 datasets are supported, referenced by name, and defaulted to be

the dataset number i.e. 1…5.

By default each dataset consists of 40 parameters which must be populated by the

user, see "Recipe List (RECP)" on page 147. A recipe can take a snapshot of the
current values and store these into a recipe dataset.

Each dataset can be given a name using iTools configuration software.

Recipe Definitions
Select ‘Flash Memory’ from the main toolbar to open the Flash Editor. Select the
‘Recipe Definitions’ and ‘Recipe Dataset’ tabs as required.

The Recipe Definition table contains a set of 40 parameters. Not all 40 parameters
need to be wired.

The Recipe Definition tab allows the user to produce a customized list.

To add parameters:

1. Double click in the next empty item.

2. This opens the parameter list to choose from.

3. Adding a parameter to the list will automatically populate the 5 datasets with the
current value of the added parameter.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 237

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Data Sets
Up to 5 DataSets are available each being a recipe for a particular batch or process.

To Save the Data Set

1. Set up the required values in the selected data set—see the example above.

2. Press Enter.

3. Press the ‘Update device flash memory’ (Ctrl+F)’ button in the top left of the
Flash Memory Editor display to update the controller. This sets the values into all
five of the controller datasets. (Note: saving in the controller will save the current
values into one dataset).

Since this operation may involve one or more switches between Operator Level and
Configuration Level it is recommended that the controller is disconnected from the
process. A warning message is shown.

To Load a Data Set

1. In the browser list select ‘Recipe’.

2. Select the required Dataset.

238 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Recipe Names
This tab simply allows a name to be assigned to each of the 5 Recipe data sets. This
name will be shown in the controller display.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 239

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Watch Recipe Editor

Click on the Watch/Recipe tool button, by selecting 'Watch/Recipe' in the Views
menu, or via the shortcut (Alt+A). The window is in two parts: the left part contains the
watch list; the right-hand part contains a data set, initially empty and unnamed.

Watch Recipes are run from iTools, and are not stored or run from the device, i.e.
iTools must be running and connected to a specific device.

The window is used:

1. To monitor a so-called 'watch list' of parameter values. The watch list can contain
parameters from many different lists within the same device.

2. To create 'data sets' of parameter values which can be selected and downloaded
to the device, in the sequence defined by the recipe. The same parameter may
be used more than once in a recipe.

Creating a Watch List

After opening the window parameters can be added to it as described below.
Parameters can be added only from the device to which the Watch/Recipe window
relates (that is, parameters from more than one device cannot be placed in one
Watch list). The values of the parameters update in real time, allowing the user to
monitor, simultaneously, a number of parameters which might otherwise be
unrelated.

Adding Parameters To The Watch List

1. Parameters can be clicked and dragged into the watch list grid from elsewhere in
iTools (for example: the main browse tree, the Parameter Explorer window, the
Graphical Wiring Editor (if applicable)). The parameter is placed either in the
empty row at the bottom of the list, or 'on top' of an existing parameter, in which
case it is inserted above this parameter in the list, the remaining parameters
moving down one place.

2. Parameters can be dragged from one position in the list to another. In such a
case, a copy of the parameter is produced: the source parameter remains in
place. Parameters can be also be copied by using the 'Copy Parameter' item in
the Recipe or right mouse-click menu, or by using the short cut (Ctrl+C). Data set
values are not included in the copy.

240 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

3. The 'Insert item...' tool button, the 'Insert Parameter' Recipe menu item or the
shortcut <Insert> can be used to open a browse window from which a parameter
can be selected. The selected parameter is inserted above the currently active
parameter.

4. A parameter can be 'copied' from (for example) the Graphical Wiring Editor and
subsequently 'pasted' into the watch list using the 'Paste Parameter 'item in the
Recipe menu, or the right mouse click context menu (short cut = Ctrl+V).

Creating a Data Set

All the parameters required for the recipe should be added to the watch list,
described above.

Once this has been done, if the empty data set is selected (by clicking on the column
header), the 'Snapshot' tool button (Ctrl+A) can be used to fill the data set with the
current values. Alternatively, the 'Snapshot Values' item in the Recipe or context
(right click) menu or the shortcut + can be used to fill the data set.

Individual data values can now be edited by typing directly into the grid cells. Data
values can be left blank or cleared, in which case, when the recipe is downloaded, no
value will be written for those values. Data values can be cleared by deleting all the
characters in the field, then, either moving to a new cell, or typing <Enter>.

The set is called 'Set 1' by default. The name can be edited by using the 'Rename
Data Set...' item in the Recipe or right mouse-click menu, or by using the shortcut
(Ctrl+R).

New data sets can be added and edited in the same way, by using the 'Create a new
empty....' tool button (Ctrl+W), or by selecting the 'New Data Set' item in the Recipe
or right mouse-click menu, or by using the shortcut +

Once all the data sets required for the Recipe have been created, and saved, they
can be downloaded to the device, one at a time, using the download tool (Ctrl+D), or
equivalent Recipe/context menu item.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 241

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Load a Custom Linearization Table

In addition to the built in standard linearization tables, custom tables can be
downloaded from files.

1. Press .

2. Select the linearization table to be loaded from files with the extension .mtb.
Linearization files for different sensor types are supplied with iTools and may be
found in Program Files  Eurotherm  iTools  Linearisations  Thermocouple
etc.

In this example a Pt-PTRh(10%) thermocouple has been loaded into the controller.

The controller will display the linearization table downloaded:-

242 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Cloning
The cloning feature allows the configuration and parameter settings of one
instrument to be copied into another. Alternatively a configuration may be saved to
file and this used to load into connected instruments. The feature allows new
instruments to be rapidly set up using a known reference source or standard
instrument. Every parameter is downloaded to the new instrument which means that
if the new instrument is used as a replacement it will contain exactly the same
information as the original. Cloning is generally only possible if the following applies:

• The target instrument has the same hardware configuration as the source
instrument.

• The target instrument firmware (i.e. Software built into the instrument) is the
same as or a later version than that of the source instrument. The instrument
firmware version is displayed on the instrument when power is applied.

• Generally, cloning will copy all operational, engineering and configuration

parameters that are writable. The communications address is not copied.

• A clone file cannot be generated if the OEM Security option is configured and
active.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
It is the users responsibility to ensure that the information cloned from one
instrument to another is correct for the process to be controlled, and that all
parameters are correctly replicated into the target instrument

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information contained within the clone
files is a replica of that configured in the instrument.

Below is a brief description of how to use this feature. Further details are available in
the iTools Manual.

Save to File
The configuration of the controller made in the previous sections may be saved as a
clone file. This file can then be used to transfer the configuration to further
instruments.

From the File menu use 'Save to File' or use the 'Save' button on the Toolbar.

To Clone a New Controller

Connect the new controller to iTools and Scan to find this instrument as described at
the beginning of this chapter.

From the File menu select 'Load Values From File' or select 'Load' from the toolbar.
Choose the required file and follow the instruction. The configuration of the original
controller will now be transferred to the new controller.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 243

Configuration Using iTools EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Clone Load Unsuccessful

A Message Log is produced during the cloning process. The log may show a
message such as 'Cloning of device completed with 1 unsuccessful entry'. This can
be caused by writing a parameter using iTools that is outside of the resolution of a
parameter. For example, the parameter Filter Time Constant is stored in the controller
to one decimal place (1.6 seconds by default). If it is entered as an IEEE float value
using iTools, as, for example, 1.66 it will be rounded up in the controller to 1.7
seconds. Under these circumstances it is possible that ‘Clone Load Unsuccessful’
can occur because iTools expects a value of 1.66 and the instrument contains 1.7.
Values should, therefore, be entered, when using iTools, within the resolution of the
parameter.

This cannot happen from values entered via the front panel but only if entered over
communications.

Cold Start
A Cold Start may be necessary if it is required to return the controller to its default
conditions when it left the factory. A cold start can only be carried out when the
controller is in configuration mode.

CAUTION
COLD START
A cold start of the controller must only be carried out under exceptional
circumstances as it will erase ALL previous settings and return the controller to its
original state.

A controller must not be connected to an active process when performing a cold

start.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

To Perform a Cold Start

In the ‘Instrument’ list ‘Security’ tab set the Configuration Passcode to 9999. The
parameter ‘Clear Memory’ will become available. Set this to Yes. The controller
restarts, resulting in the quickcode setup screen on the HMI (see "Start Up—New
Unconfigured Controller" on page 68).

244 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Alarms
What is in this Chapter
• This chapter provides a description of alarm types used in the controllers.

• Definitions of alarm parameters.

What are Alarms?

For the purposes of this section alarms alert an operator when a pre-set threshold,
determined by the user as applicable to his particular process, has been exceeded.

Unless they have been produced in a particular application, in EPC3000 series

controllers there are no specific alarms. It is then necessary to wire alarm blocks
using iTools (see "Graphical Wiring" on page 223.

They are indicated by flashing the red beacon in the display. The green PV value
will also turn red. If using the default user messages, a message will scroll indicating
which alarm is active. The scrolling message may be customized using iTools (see
"User Defined Messages" on page 235).

Alarms may also switch an output, usually a relay, to allow external devices to be
activated when an alarm is active (see "Example 2: To Connect an Alarm to a
Physical Output" on page 224).

Up to 6 process related alarms can be configured in all models.

Alarms can also be configured as ‘Events’. If an alarm has been configured as an

event, when it is active it will not be annunciated on the HMI or in the Instrument
Alarm Status Word. Events may be used to operate an output.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 245

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Alarm Types
There are 4 distinct types of alarm; Absolute, Deviation, Rate of Change and Digital.
These are split into the following 9 alarm types. The descriptions for these 9 alarm
types are for the algorithms only, blocking and latching is applied separately, after the
active/working state has been determined (See "Blocking" on page 252).

Absolute High
The Absolute High alarm is active when the input is greater than the threshold. It
remains active until the input falls below the threshold minus the hysteresis value.

Process value (PV)

Threshold
Hysteresis

Alarm active

Absolute Low
The Absolute Low alarm is active when the input is less than the threshold. It remains
active until the input increases above the threshold plus the hysteresis value.

Process value (PV)

Hysteresis

Threshold

Alarm active

Deviation High
The alarm is triggered when the input becomes higher than the reference by the
amount of the deviation. It remains active until the input falls below the hysteresis
value.

Process value (PV)

Hysteresis
Deviation

Reference

Alarm active

246 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Deviation Low
The alarm is triggered when the input becomes lower than the reference by the
amount of the deviation. It remains active until the input increases above the
hysteresis value.

Process value (PV)

Reference

Deviation
Hysteresis

Alarm active

Deviation Band
The Deviation Band alarm is a combination of Deviation High and Deviation Low
alarms. The alarm will be active when the input goes outside the deviation band i.e. is
greater than the reference plus the deviation OR is less than the reference minus the
deviation. It remains active until the input returns to within the reference value,
plus/minus the deviation, minus/plus the hysteresis value.

Process value (PV)

Deviation
Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis

Active Active

Rising Rate of Change

The Rising Rate of Change alarm sets the alarm active when the rate at which the
input increases exceeds the configured maximum rate of change (per change time).
It will remain active until the rising rate of the input falls below the configured rate of
change.

More than the

PV configured rate
of change Falling rate of
Less than the change has no
configured rate effect
of change
Process value (PV)

Active

HA033650ENG Issue 1 247

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Falling Rate of Change

The Falling Rate of Change alarm sets the alarm active when the rate at which the
input decreases exceeds the configured maximum rate of change (per change time).
It will remain active until the falling rate of the input falls below the configured rate of
change.

PV More than the

configured rate
of change
Less than the Rising rate of change
configured has no effect
rate of
change Process value (PV)

Alarm active

Digital High
The Digital High alarm is effectively an Absolute High alarm with a fixed threshold of
0.5 and 0 hysteresis. It sets the alarm to active when the input is greater than 0.5
(HIGH/TRUE for a digital/boolean input).

0.5

Input
0

Alarm active

Digital Low
The Digital Low alarm is effectively an Absolute Low alarm with a fixed threshold of
0.5 and 0 hysteresis. It sets the alarm to active when the input is less than 0.5
(LOW/FALSE for a digital/boolean input).

0.5

Input
0

Alarm active

Sensor Break
If the process sensor becomes open circuit an alarm can be generated. The chosen
application may already do this, but, if not it must be wired. This is shown in section
"Example 3: To Wire Sensor Break" on page 225.

248 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Hysteresis
Hysteresis helps to prevent an alarm output from oscillating (rapidly switching
between active and non active) due to electrical ‘noise’ on the monitored parameter.
As illustrated in the diagram below, the alarm will become active as soon as the alarm
condition has been met (that is, the monitored parameter crosses the threshold
value), however, it will only become inactive when the monitored parameter has gone
into the region defined by the hysteresis amount.

Threshold
Hysteresis

PV
Active

Hysteresis can be disabled by setting a value of 0.0, this is the default value.

Hysteresis is supported for the following analog alarm types: AbsHi, AbsLo, DevHi,
DevLo, DevBand.

Delay
Alarm Delay is supported for all alarm types. This is a small delay between sensing
the alarm condition and acting upon it. If in the time between the two, the measured
value returns to below the threshold, then the alarm will not be activated and the
delay timer is reset.

Threshold
Delay

Active

Effects of Delay and Hysteresis

The following diagrams show the effect of delay on hysteresis (for a very out of
control process!).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 249

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Deviation High

Deviation
Reference
Hysteresis
PV

Hysteresis: 0
Delay: 0
>D <D <D <D
Hysteresis: 0
D
Delay: D

Hysteresis: Yes
Delay: 0
<D <D >D
Hysteresis: Yes
D D
Delay: D

= Alarm active

Deviation Low

PV

Reference
Deviation
Hysteresis
Hysteresis: 0
Delay: 0
>D <D <D <D
Hysteresis: 0
Delay: D D

Hysteresis: Yes
Delay: 0

>D <D <D >D

Hysteresis: Yes
D D
Delay: D

= Alarm active

250 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Deviation Band
Hysteresis
Deviation
Reference
Deviation
PV
Hysteresis: 0
Delay 0
>D >D <D <D <D
Hysteresis: 0
D D
Delay: D

Hysteresis: Yes
Delay: 0
<D <D >D
Hysteresis: Yes
D D D
Delay: D

= Alarm active

Inhibit
Inhibit helps to prevent an alarm from activating when the Alarm Inhibit input is held
High. Alarm Inhibit is supported for all alarm types.

Standby Inhibit
Standby inhibit helps to prevent an alarm from activating when the instrument is in
Standby "Standby" on page 77. This includes when the instrument is in configuration
mode. Alarm Standby Inhibit is supported for all alarm types.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 251

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Latching
Alarm latching is used to hold the alarm condition active once an alarm has been
detected.

The following latching types are supported for all alarm types:

Type Description
None No latching methodology i.e. when the alarm condition is removed the alarm will
become inactive without being acknowledged.
Auto The alarm will remain active until the alarm condition has been removed and the
alarm has been acknowledged. The alarm can be acknowledged at any time
after the alarm has become active.
Manual The alarm will remain active until the alarm condition has been removed and the
alarm has been acknowledged. The alarm can only be acknowledged after the
alarm condition has been removed.
Event Same as a non-latching alarm except the alarm is used as a trigger and
therefore will not be displayed.

Blocking
Blocking stops an alarm from being activated until the value of the monitored
parameter (for example PV) has first achieved the desired working state. It is typically
used to ignore start-up conditions which are not representative of running conditions.
Blocking of alarms is supported for all alarm types.

Threshold

PV

Output

Blocking will be enforced after a power-cycle or after exit from configuration

depending upon the latching status of the alarm as follows:

• For a non-latching alarm or an event alarm, blocking will be enforced.

• For an auto-latching alarm, blocking will be enforced only if the alarm had been
acknowledged prior to the power cycle or exit from configuration level.

• For a manual-latching alarm, blocking will not be enforced.

• Blocking will be enforced for a Deviation alarm if the reference value is changed.
It should be noted that if the reference value is wired from an electrically 'noisy'
input then blocking should be disabled otherwise the alarm will continually be
blocked.

• Blocking will be enforced, regardless of current active state and latching method,
if the alarm is inhibited (either inhibit or standby inhibit).

252 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Set Alarm Threshold

The levels at which absolute high and absolute low process alarms operate are
adjusted by the threshold parameter, THLD, found, by default, in Level 3 or
Configuration Level.

It is also possible to ‘promote’ the threshold parameters to Levels 1 and 2 using

iTools (see "Parameter Promotion" on page 233).

Select the appropriate operating level as described in "Operator Levels" on page 79.

Press  until the required alarm threshold is shown.

Press or to raise or lower the alarm threshold.

Alarm Indication

If any alarm is active and not acknowledged, the red beacon will flash and the
scrolling message will show the alarm number and its type, for example ALARM 1
ABSH. When any alarm is active and not acknowledged then the PV value on the top
line will be red.

If more than one alarm is present each alarm message is scrolled in turn.

The alarm beacon will only turn off when all alarms are not active and have been
acknowledged (if required).

Any output (usually a relay) attached to an alarm will operate and its corresponding
beacon will be lit. To attach an output to an alarm see "Example 2: To Connect an
Alarm to a Physical Output" on page 224.

It is normal to configure the relay to be de-energized in alarm so that an alarm can be

indicated externally if power to the controller is removed.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 253

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Acknowledge an Alarm

When on the Home page, by default press

 and  togetherThis is true unless
the functionality of these buttons has been changed using the PS.Fn parameter, see
"Display Functionality Sub-List (HmI)" on page 195.

If the alarm is still active the beacon will go steady but the scrolling message still
shows.

There are other ways in which an alarm can be acknowledged:

1. In Level 3 or Configuration level select the list header which applies to the alarm

then scroll to the parameter ACK - acknowledge. Then press or toYES.
This reverts to No as soon as the command is confirmed.

2. The ACK parameter can be ‘promoted’ to levels 1 or 2 using iTools in which case
it appears in the chosen operator list. See "Parameter Promotion" on page 233.

3. F1 or F2 function keys can be configured to alarm acknowledge. See "Display

Functionality Sub-List (HmI)" on page 195.

4. A digital input can be wired using iTools to alarm acknowledge. The procedure is
the same as described in section "Example 2: To Connect an Alarm to a Physical
Output" on page 224.

5. Use the "Global Ack" parameter in the instrument block to acknowledge all
alarms.

The action which takes place depends on the latching type of the alarm configured.
The following table shows a step by step action which takes place in the controller:

None Non latching A non latching alarm will reset itself when the alarm condition is removed.

If it is still present when acknowledged the beacon illuminates constantly, the scrolling alarm messages remain
and the output remains active.
Auto Automatic An auto latching alarm requires acknowledgement before it is reset. The acknowledgement can occur BEFORE the
condition causing the alarm is removed.
An example of the action for Alarm 1 attached to OP3 is described below:
Alarm occurs
will flash. The top row changes to red. A scrolling message will be displayed.
Output 3 is active and beacon 3 is ON.
Acknowledge (the alarm
is still present) is constant. The scrolling message remains. Output 3 is active and Beacon 3 is
ON.
Alarm condition is All conditions are reset.
removed.
Alarm occurs
will flash. The top row changes to red. A scrolling message will be displayed.
Output 3 is active and beacon 3 is ON.
Alarm 1 condition is No change from the above.
removed
Acknowledge (the alarm The alarm indication and output are reset.
condition has been
removed)

254 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

mAn Manual The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged. The
acknowledgement can only occur AFTER the condition causing the alarm is removed.
An example of the action for Alarm 1 attached to OP3 is described below:
Alarm occurs
will flash. The top row changes to red. A scrolling message will be displayed.
Output 3 is active and Beacon 3 is ON.
Acknowledge (the alarm No change from above.
is still present)
Alarm condition is No change from above.
removed
Acknowledge (the alarm The alarm indication and output are reset.
condition has been
removed)
Evnt Event No alarm indication and no latching.
An example of the action for Alarm 1 attached to OP3 is described below:
Alarm occurs Beacon 3 is ON. Output 3 is active.
Acknowledge (the No change from above.
condition is still present)
Alarm 1 condition is The output is reset.
removed.

By default alarms are configured as non-latching, de-energized during an alarm.

It is possible to mix alarms between any of the latching types listed above. Each
alarm configured will behave independently.

A ‘Global Alarm Acknowledge’ parameter is available by default in Level 3 in the

‘Instrument - Diagnostics’ list. This may be wired in the same way as other
parameters (for example, to a digital input) and is used to acknowledge all alarms.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 255

Alarms EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Alarms Advanced
Behavior of Alarms after a Power Cycle
The response of an alarm after a power cycle depends upon the latching type,
whether it has been configured to be a blocking alarm, the state of the alarm and the
acknowledge status of the alarm.

The response of active alarms after a power cycle is as follows:

For a non-latching alarm, blocking, if configured, will be re-instated. If blocking is not

configured the active alarm will remain ‘active’. If the alarm condition has returned to
within the threshold value during the down time, then the alarm will return ‘inactive’.

For an auto-latching alarm, blocking, if configured, will be re-instated, only if the

alarm had been acknowledged prior to the power cycle. If blocking is not configured
or the alarm had not been acknowledged the active alarm will remain ‘active’. If the
alarm condition has returned to within the threshold value during the downtime, then
the alarm will return ‘inactive’ if it had been acknowledged prior to the power cycle
else it will return ‘inactive but not acknowledged’. If the alarm was ‘inactive but not
acknowledged’ prior to the power cycle the alarm will return ‘inactive but not
acknowledged’.

For a manual-latching alarm, blocking will not be re-instated and the active alarm will
remain ‘active’. If the alarm condition has returned to within the threshold value
during the downtime, then the alarm will return ‘inactive but not acknowledged’. If the
alarm was ‘inactive but not acknowledged’ prior to the power cycle the alarm will
return ‘inactive but not acknowledged’.

256 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Programmer
What is in this Chapter?
This chapter describes the functionality of a setpoint programmer.

NOTE: The Programmer function is not available for EPC3000 FM.

What is a Programmer?
A programmer provides a means of being able to vary the setpoint in a controlled
manner over a set period of time. This varying setpoint can then be used in the
control process.

SP units
80

70

60

50

40

30 Time
1 2 3 4 5 units
Type Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

TSP Rate Dwell Rate

Rate 80 30

Duration 25/time unit 50/time unit

2 time units

The example above shows a simple three segment program in which the
programmer setpoint (PSP) increases at a controlled rate of 25/time unit to a value of
75. It then dwells at that setpoint for 2 time units before decreasing to 30 at a
controlled rate of 50/time unit.

The programmer in the EPC range is a single channel programmer and can be
ordered in four different options. These are:

• 1 x 8 Basic Programmer (One program of 8 configurable segments, no event

outputs).

• 1 x 24 Advanced Programmer (One program of 24 configurable segments with

up to 8 event outputs).

• 10 x 24 Advanced Programmer (Ten programs of 24 configurable segments with

up to 8 event outputs).

• From firmware versions 3.01 and above,

20 x 8 Advanced Programmer (Twenty programs of 8 segments with up to 8

event outputs).

• For all options, an additional End segment is provided which may also have
event outputs if it is an Advanced Programmer.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 257

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The above programmer types are orderable options. They may be upgraded using
the feature codes described in section "Feature passwords" on page 221.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If the programmer option is changed from 24-segment programs to 8-segment
programs or vice versa, then previously stored programs will be lost. All segments
will be defaulted to End type segments. It is recommended to clone the controller
prior to upgrade so that a copy of the stored programs are retained before the
Feature Security change is implemented.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury or

equipment damage.

Programs
A program is a sequence of varying setpoints which executes with reference to time.
Up to a maximum of 20 programs are supported, the actual number of programs
depends on the programmer option ordered but may be upgraded using Feature
passwords (see "Feature passwords" on page 221). Program options are listed in the
previous section.

Programs are identifiable by a program number i.e. 1…20.

Segments
A segment is a single step within a program, typically it has a specified target setpoint
and either a duration to maintain that setpoint, or a ramp rate (or time) to achieve that
setpoint, however other segment types instruct the programmer to perform additional
tasks.

Up to 24 configurable segments are supported, plus a fixed end segment, in each

program. Each segment (in a program) is identifiable by a segment number i.e.
1…25.

The following types of segments are supported:

Ramp Time
A Ramp Time segment is specified by a target setpoint and a time in which to achieve
the ramp to target setpoint.

Dwell
A dwell segment specifies how long the setpoint is to be maintained.

Step
A step segment causes the programmer setpoint to change to the target setpoint in a
single execution cycle.

Note: the step will occur immediately followed by a 1 second dwell period to allow
event outputs to be set.

258 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Call
A call segment allows the main program to call another program as a subroutine. The
number of times the program is called is configurable, 1…9999 or continuous.

Note: A program can only call other programs which have a program number
greater than itself. This helps to prevent cyclic programs from being created.

This segment type is only available if multiple programs are enabled via Feature
passwords and the program is not the last program i.e. Program 10. All configurable
segments (1–24) can be configured as a call segment.

CAUTION
CALL SEGMENTS
If a call segment is selected the controller will default to calling the next program
number. This may not necessarily be the correct program so you must ensure that
the correct call program number is selected manually.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

End
An end segment is the very last segment in a program and using the
Program.ProgramEndType parameter, (this can be found in iTools in the Programmer
Editor, Program Parameters tab) the user can specify the programmer behavior when
the program ends, as follows:

• Dwell—the programmer setpoint (PSP) is maintained indefinitely and event

outputs remain at the states configured for the End segment.

• Reset—the program is reset and the programmer setpoint (PSP) will servo either
to PVInput value or SPInput value as configured by the
Programmer.Setup.ServoTo parameter. The event outputs will return to the
states specified by the Programmer.Setup.ResetEventOP parameter.

• Track - the programmer setpoint (PSP) is maintained indefinitely and event

outputs remain at the states configured for the End segment. If the Programmer
is wired to the Loop, the Loop will be forced into Track mode.

Note: The 1st end segment will terminate the program in the configured manner if
there no more program cycles left to run.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 259

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Standard Functionality
The EPC3000 process controller supports the following standard functionality:

Recovery Strategy after a reset or power outage

The recovery strategy after an instrument reset or a power outage can be configured
to be:

• Ramp Back—the programmer setpoint will servo (jump to) the input Process
Value (PV), and ramp to the target set-point at the rate prior to the power outage.

• Reset—the programmer will reset the program.

• Continue—the programmer setpoint will return immediately to its last value prior
to the reset and the program will continue to run.

This is shown diagrammatically in the following sections.

Ramp back (Dwell Segments)

If the interrupted segment was a during a Dwell, then the setpoint will ramp back at
the rate set in the previous ramp segment. The dwell period will continue when the
target setpoint is reached.

Setpoint T1 + T2 = segment dwell time

T1 T2

Power off Time

Seg n Seg n + 1

If a previous ramp segment does not exist, i.e. the first segment of a program is a
dwell, then the Dwell will continue at the "servo to PV" setpoint.

260 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Ramp back (Ramp or Time-to-target segments)

If the interrupt occurred during a ramp, then the programmer will servo the
programmer setpoint to the PV, then ramp towards the target setpoint using the ramp
rate prior to the power outage.

Setpoint

Target setpoint

Servo to new level

Power off Time

Sensor Break Recovery

If the recovery strategy is set to Reset, then, upon sensor break of the PV input, the
program will be reset. If the recovery strategy is other than Reset, then the program
will be placed in Hold. When the PV input goes out of sensor break, the programmer
will apply the recovery strategy described above.

Holdback
When the PV deviates from the Programmer Setpoint (PSP) by more than a specified
amount the program will temporally hold until the PV returns to within the specified
deviation.

Holdback Style configures Holdback to operate over the entire program or on a per
segment basis (mutually exclusive).

Holdback Type may be set to Off, Low, High or Band.

• Off: Holdback disabled.

• Low: Active if PV < (PSP − Holdback Value).

• High: Active if PV > (PSP + Holdback Value).

• Band: Active if PV < (PSP +/− Holdback Value).

Servo To PV/SP
The programmer can be set to servo (jump to) the PV input or the Setpoint input at
the start of a program.

Event Outputs
Up to 8 digital 'event' outputs can be configured for each segment within a program.
These event outputs will remain at their configured value for the entire duration of the
segment.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 261

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Digital Inputs
The following digital inputs are supported:

• Run - start the current program on the rising edge of this input.

• Hold - hold the current program whilst this input is High.

• Reset - current program is in reset whilst this input signal is High.

• Run/Hold - This is a dual action input. A rising edge will run the current program,
but hold the current running program whilst the input is Low.

• Run/Reset - This is a dual action input. A rising edge starts the current program,
but reset the current program whilst input is Low.

• Advance - a rising edge initiates the following sequence of actions:

◦ go to the end of the current segment.

◦ set the programmer setpoint to the target setpoint.

◦ start the next segment.

Program Cycles
A program can be configured to repeat 1…9999 times or to run continuously.

Configuration Mode Reset

It is not permissible to run a program whilst the instrument is in configuration mode. If
a program is running and the instrument is placed into configuration mode (either by
comms or HMI) the running program will be reset.

Program Selection
When multiple programs are configured, selecting the program to be run is done by
setting the Programmer.ProgramNumber parameter to the required program number.
This selection can be performed via the HMI or Comms.

It is often convenient to use a BCD switch physically connected to digital inputs as

shown in the "Example 1 BCD Switch Wiring" on page 56.

The program selected can then be run using Mode parameter or any of the Run
digital input parameters, i.e., Run, RunHold or RunReset digital input.

262 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Rules for Program Creation / Editing

It is possible to create and edit a stored program, i.e., Programs 1-10, (via Comms or
the HMI) when the programmer is in RUN, HOLD or RESET mode, with the changes
being retained.

When running one of the stored programs it will first be copied into the ’working’
program which will then be run. It is NOT be possible to edit the working program
when the programmer is in RESET, but it can be edited when the programmer is in
RUN or HOLD, however, the changes will be overwritten when a different program is
loaded to be run. Edits to the working program will not change the stored programs.
The working program will be overwritten when the next stored program is copied into
it, either as a result of running a new program or calling another program as a
subroutine.

A Programmer Run list is provided (both via Comms and HMI) which can edit a copy
of the working program segment that is currently running when the programmer is in
HOLD mode, however the changes will be overwritten when the next segment is
loaded and run.

The minimum operator HMI access level at which programs can be run, placed on
hold or reset can be configured as Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3 using the
Programmer.List.RunAccess parameter (see "Programmer List (PROG)" on
page 135).

Program & Segment Times

Segment Time Left is always available whilst a program is running.

The Programmer will attempt to calculate Program Time left when the program is
running or when the working program is edited while the program is on Hold. If the
calculation takes too long, it will be aborted and the Program Time Left parameter will
not be available.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 263

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Resolution
When read/written via scaled integer comms, the units of the following segment
parameters can be configured as follows:

• Segment.Duration (sec/min/hour) configured by Program.DwellUnits.

• Segment.TimeToTarget (sec/min/hour) configured by Program.RampUnits.

• Segment.RampRate (per sec/per min/per hour) configured by

Program.RampUnits.

In addition, when read/written via scaled integer comms, it is possible to configure the
units for the following time remaining parameters:

• Programmer.Run.ProgramTimeLeft (sec/min/hour) configured by

Programmer.Setup.Resolution.

• Programmer.Run.SegmentTimeLeft (sec/min/hour) configured by

Programmer.Setup.Resolution.

On the HMI, time-based parameters are displayed, depending on their configured

units, as follows:

• sec - MM:SS

• min - HH:MM

• hour- HHH.H

Times are stored as 32-bit integer millisecond values, and as such times will be
capped at 500hrs i.e. 1,800,000,000ms. When a program exceeds this value, the
displayed program time left will remain at 500hrs until such time that the
accumulative segment times is 500hrs or less. It will then start to count down.

Programmer Time Base Accuracy

The programmer timebase accuracy is dependent upon the timebase accuracy of the
microcontroller which is specified as <+/-50ppm between the temperature range
-40 to +85 degrees C. This equates to a worst case of +/-4.3s in 24hrs.

264 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Typical Loop to Programmer Graphical Wiring

‘Soft’ wiring is carried out using iTools as described in section "Graphical Wiring" on
page 223.

The figure below shows a simple soft wiring diagram for a programmer.

In the figure a thermocouple is connected to Analog Input AI1. The PV output from
AI1 provides the input to the control loop. The setpoint for the control loop is provided
by the programmer block using the parameter Run.PSP. The programmer will run
when the Setup.Run parameter changes to true. In this example the LA digital input
may be used to Run/Reset the programmer from an external source.

Integral balance is required so that there is no sudden change of output when the
programmer is operated.

The loop heat output is connected to output IO1.

As previously mentioned program selection can be wired to a BCD switch. An

example of the soft wiring for this for EPC3008 or EPC3004 using a four or eight
digital input option is shown in the diagram below.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 265

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Communications
Programs can be configured and run via Modbus and EI-Bisynch and EtherNet/IP
communications.

The Modbus parameter addresses and EI-Bisynch Mnemonics for the programmer
parameters, program parameters, and the segment parameters (for the 1st 16
segments) are compatible with the 2400 series controllers. EtherNet/IP
communications can read and write to programmer parameters using the same
Modbus parameter addresses via Explicit messaging to the Modbus object (0x44).

Note: In the 2400 series controllers, (and therefore in the EPC3000 process
controller to allow compatibility), several parameters within segments are mutually
exclusive and are accessed via comms using the same Modbus Address and
EI-Bisynch Mnemonic.

Modbus Address Ranges

1x8, 1x24 and 10x24 programmers are 2400 Compatible - Program General Data & Segments
1…16 Parameters.

Area Base Address - Decimal Base address - HEX

Program 0 8192 2000
(Currently running program)
Program 1 8328 2088
Program 2 8464 2110
Program 3 8600 2198
Program 4 8736 2220
Program 5 8872 22A8
Program 6 9008 2330
Program 7 9144 23B8
Program 8 9280 2440
Program 9 9416 24C8
Program 10 9552 2550
Non-compatible - Segments 17…26 & Additional Programmer Parameters
Area Base Address - Decimal Base address - HEX
Program 0 9688 25D8
Program 1 9768 2628
Program 2 9848 2678
Program 3 9928 26C8
Program 4 10008 2718
Program 5 10088 2768
Program 6 10168 27B8
Program 7 10248 2808
Program 8 10328 2858
Program 9 10408 28A8
Program 10 10488 28F8
Programmer (additional 10568 - 11007 2948 - 2AFF
parameters)

Note: In 20x8 programmer the number of segments is fixed as is the assignment of

Modbus Addresses. The mapping from segment instance to program/segment is
different from all existing EPC3000 controller programmer types. Modbus addresses
do not match 2400 series.

266 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EI-Bisynch Mnemonics

EI-Bisynch Mnemonics: n is dependent upon segment number i.e.

Segment 1, n is 1 Segment 2, n is 2 Segment 3, n is 3 Segment 4, n is 4
Segment 5, n is 5 Segment 6, n is 6 Segment 7, n is 7 Segment 8, n is 8
Segment 9, n is 9 Segment 10, n is : Segment 11, n is ; Segment 12, n is <
Segment 13, n is = Segment 14, n is > Segment 15, n is ? Segment 16, n is @

It should be noted that EI-Bisynch is intended for 2400 series controller compatibility
only and as such it is not extended to include mnemonics for segments 17–25.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 267

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Setup a Program from the HMI

By default programs can be set up and run via the controller HMI in Operator Level 2
or higher. Access levels can be configured using Edit access and Run access
parameters, refer to "Programmer List (PROG)" on page 135.

For the purposes of this example, it is assumed that parameters in the

PROGRAMMER LIST (PROG) have been set up and the HMI is in Operator Level 2.

Operation Action Display Notes

Select  Up to 10 programs may be
PROGRAM 1. Press until P.SEt is selected.
SETUP List shown 1
P. num
2. Press  to enter

3. Press or to
select the program
number
Programmer From firmware version 3.01 each
Name 4. Press  to view a program can be given a 4
name p1 character name using iTools.
P. name

Select the Prog = Holdback is applied to the

Holdback 5. Press  PROG whole program.
style Hb. sty SEGm = Holdback is applied
6. Press or to separately to each segment.
select the style
Select Low - in Holdback when PV <
Holdback type 7. Press  LOW (PSP - Holdback value)
Hb. typ High - in Holdback when PV >
8. Press or to (PSP + Holdback value)
select the Holdback type Band - in Holdback when (PV <
(PSP +/- Holdback Value)) OR (PV
> (PSP + Holdback Value))
Off - No Holdback
Set Holdback The program will hold if the low
value 9. Press  10.0 deviation is greater than 10.0 and
PSP > PV.
Hb. val
10. Press or to
select the Holdback value
Set Ramp Per second
Units 11. Press  P.seC Per minute
Ramp. u Per hour
12. Press or to
select the Ramp units
Set Dwell secs/ mins/ hrs
units 13. Press  P.seC
Dwel. u
14. Press or to
select the Dwell units
Set the 1 = The program will execute once
number of 15. Press  1 Cont = the program will repeat
times the p. cyc continuously.
program is to 16. Press or to
repeat select the number of
cycles

268 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Operation Action Display Notes

Set the action DweL = dwell at the last setpoint
at the end of a 17. Press  dWEL Rset = reset
program p. end
Trak = dwell at the last setpoint but
18. Press or to
also places the loop in Track mode
select the End action provided Loop is wired to
Programmer.
Set up the Segment number 1
first segment 19. Press  1
s. num
20. Press or to
select the segment
number
Segment From firmware version 3.01 each
name 21. Press  to view a s1 segment can be given a 4
segment name s. name character name using iTools.

Set up the Can be configured to Ramp rate,

segment type 22. Press  RATe Ramp time, Dwell, Step, End or
s. type Call segments (for
23. Press or to multiple-program Programmers
select the Segment type with Program number < 10).
These are described earlier in this
section.
The parameters which follow depend on the type of segment set but will include:
Target Setpoint, Ramp Rate for Rate type segments.
Target Setpoint, Ramp Time for Time type segments
Duration for Dwell type segments
Target Setpoint for Step type segments
Call Program number and Call Cycles for Call type segments
Event Outputs will be shown at the end of each segment if Programmer.Setup.MaxEvents > 0
When the currently selected segment has been set up the next parameter will automatically choose the
next segment number.
Set up the The last segment is an end type
end segment 24. Press  ENd
s. type

The previous example shows how to configure a stored program (Program 1). When
a program is running, the working program parameters will become available and can
be configured in the same manner.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 269

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Run/Hold the Program from the HMI

Assuming the program has been set up as described above, from the HOME display

1. Press
 to PROGRAMMER list (PROG)

2. Press  to select the Program number

3. Press  again to PROGRAM MODE

4. Press or to select RuN or HOLd

Alternatively, press a function key if configured as Program Run/Hold or Program
Run/Reset or activate a digital input, configured as Run, Hold, Run/Hold and
Run/Reset.

The status of the program is shown by the HMI program status indicator

The current status of the program is displayed as follows:

State Ramp/Step Up Dwell Ramp/Step Down
Reset

Run

Hold/Holdback

Flashing (1 second Flashing (1 second Flashing (1 second

period 66% duty cycle) period 66% duty cycle) period 66% duty cycle)
Complete (Dwell End) Not applicable Not applicable

Flashing (2 seconds
period 66% duty cycle)

270 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Setup a Program Using iTools

The EPC3000 controller can support up to 20 stored programs as stated at the
beginning of this chapter.

Programs are identifiable by a program number (1-10, for example). Each program
may also be given a name but it must be noted that only the last four characters will
be shown on the HMI.

Select ‘Programmer’ in the menu bar.

Menu options are shown in the bar above the graph and are also available as a
context menu by right clicking in the segment table. They are from left to right:

Select a segment by clicking into the top of the list (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.):

• Cut (Ctrl+X) : Removes the selected segment(s) and copies to the clipboard.

• Copy (Ctrl+C): Copies the selected segment(s) and places into the clipboard.

• Paste Insert (Ctrl+V): The copied segment(s) will be pasted to the right of a
selected segment(s).

• Paste Over (Shift+Ctrl+V: Replaces the selected segment(s) with segments from
the clipboard.

• Insert (Ins): Copies segment(s) and inserts the copied segment(s) to the right of
those selected.

• Delete (Ctrl+Del): Removes the selected segment(s).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 271

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Set up Segments
By default, a program will consist of a single End segment as shown in the opening
view above.

To add a segment click in the segment column (1) and select the ‘SegmentType’
using the segment type drop-down menu. A new segment of the required type will be
inserted and the End segment will be shifted to the right. Note that changes to the
program will be automatically written to the controller. Continue with further
segments.

The following diagram shows a program (Program 1) of 5 segments plus an End

segment. Segment 5 calls a another program (in this case program 2 consisting of a
ramp up and a ramp down) to repeat 3 times before the program ends. Four digit
segment names have been configured. Segment types are described in the
Programmer chapter, "Segments" on page 258.

CAUTION
CALL SEGMENTS
If a call segment is selected the controller will default to calling the next program
number. This may not necessarily the correct program so you must ensure that the
correct call program number is selected manually.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Event Outputs
In an Advanced Programmer up to 8 event outputs may be enabled using
Programmer.Setup.MaxEvents parameter in the iTools browser.

If more than one event is configured ‘EventOutput’ is shown as an ellipsis (‘...’), see
the diagram above.

If no events are configured then ‘EventOutput’ is not shown in the list.

If one event is configured, ‘EventOutput’ allows the event to be turned on or off

directly.

272 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Click on the ellipsis to display a bit map:

Tick bit 0 to turn on event 1 in the selected segment.

Tick bit 1 to turn on event 2 in the selected segment.

Alternatively, click on ‘Digital Event Outputs’ (Ctrl+D) to turn the events On or

Off directly in each segment including the End segment.

The above view shows 2 events configured.

Events may be indication only or may be soft wired to a function block input
parameter, including an IO block to operate external devices. This is explained in
section "Typical Loop to Programmer Graphical Wiring" on page 265.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 273

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Name Programs and Segments

From Firmware versions V3.01 and above programs and segments can be named.
The names are limited by the HMI to four characters as supported by the HMI.

Program Name
1. Select the Program Parameters tab.

2. In ‘ProgramName’ change the default text (P1) to a four character name.

3. A comment may be added in the Comment field as a reminder. This comment

does not affect the operation and is not visible on the controller HMI.

Segment Name
1. Select the Segment Parameters tab.

2. In ‘SegmentName’ enter a four character name to each segment.

3. When the program is run this name will be shown on the controller HMI.

Note: Although more than 4 characters may be entered, the controller HMI will limit
the text to the last 4 characters. Unsupported characters, such as X, will be shown on
the HMI as blank.

274 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Save and Load Stored Program Files (*.uip)

A configured Program can be saved to a named file. In a multi-program Programmer,
each Program will need to be saved individually. A saved Program may be re-loaded
into any Program location in the iTools Programmer Editor. In the case that similar
production processes are to be defined, a saved Program may be re-loaded,
modified and renamed.

To Save a Program
1. In the Programmer Editor, select the program number to be saved using the
program selector.

2. There are two ways to save a program. In the Programmer Editor click on "Save
current program to file (Ctrl+S)". Alternatively, in the main menu click on
Programmer and from the drop down menu select "Save current program to file
(Ctrl+S)".

Do not confuse this with on the main toolbar which saves a full
configuration to a Clone file.

To Load a Previously Saved Program

1. In the Programmer Editor, select the stored program number where the saved
program is to be loaded using the program selector.

2. There are two ways to load a program. In the Programmer Editor click on "Load
Program (Ctrl+L)". Alternatively, in the main menu click on Programmer and from
the drop down menu select "Load...(Ctrl+L)".

Do not confuse this with on the main toolbar as this will load a full
configuration from a Clone file.

Notes:
1. If an attempt is made to load a program which contains a Call segment into the
last stored program (e.g. program 10) iTools will prohibit the action and report a
message as follows:
‘Unable to load: Program 10' (the last program) cannot contain a call segment'.
2. A 1x8 or 1x25 programmer cannot contain any call segments.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 275

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Run, Reset and Hold a Program in iTools

In the browser view, open the Program Run list.

To run a program make sure that the controller is in Operator mode. Select the
program number of the program to run and select Run(2) from the Mode parameter
drop down enumeration. The program may also be put into Hold or Reset from the
mode Parameter.

When one of the programs (Program 1 to 10) is run, the program parameters are
copied into the working program. The Working Program and Working Segment
parameters are then made available to the user for monitoring and/or editing.

276 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The programmer loads each segment from the working program before it is run. If the
programmer is currently running segment 2 of the working program and working
segment 3 is edited, then the changes will be executed when working segment 3 is
run. If working segment 1 is edited, then the changes will be executed in the next
program cycle, (assuming there are any program cycles left). However, if the running
program completes or is reset and then run again, the stored program will be copied
to the working program thereby overwriting any changes made to the working
program. The working program can also be overwritten as a result of running another
program or calling another program as a subroutine.

Stored programs are always available and configurable via the HMI and iTools even
when a program is currently running. Working program parameters, however, are
only available and configurable via HMI and iTools when a program is not in reset.

Note: For a running program set for Continuous cycles (using the ProgramCycles
parameter in the Programmer Parameters tab) the ‘Program Time Left’ parameter
shows ‘CONt’ in the controller HMI. In iTools this is shown as −1. Similarly, in iTools
the Program Cycles Left parameter shows -1 but the controller HMI shows CONt. If
the program cycles is set to repeat for a set number of times, then the ‘Program Time
Left’ parameter and the Program Cycles Left parameter will count down in both iTools
and the controller HMI.

The Working Program provides the user read/write access to the program
parameters of the currently running program (which can be the main program or a
subroutine resulting from a call segment).

The Working Segment provides the user read/write access to the segment
parameters of the currently running program (which can be the main program or a
subroutine resulting from a call segment).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 277

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Programmer Parameters in iTools

The browser list contains the following:

• Programmer.
• Run.
• Setup.
• WorkingProgram.

• WorkingSegment.

Programmer.Run
The Run parameters are used to monitor and control the running program and the
table which follows details each parameter.

Parameter Name Description Available Values Value Description

ProgramNumber Program Number The number of the program to be run.
ProgramName Program Name The name of the program to be run.
CurrentProgramNo Current Program Number The number of the program currently running.
CurrentProgramName Current Program Name The name of the program currently running.
Mode Program Mode Allows users to perform actions to change the current program state (Run, Hold,
Reset – additionally indicates when a program is in Holdback or has
Completed).
Reset (1) Default: Reset (1)
Run (2)
Hold (4)
Holdback (8)
Complete (16)
PSP Programmer Setpoint Current setpoint in the program.

278 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Name Description Available Values Value Description

ProgramTimeLeft Program Time Left The amount of time left in the current program or -1 if the
program cycles is set to ‘Continuous’.
ProgramCyclesLeft Program Cycles Left The number of cycles left in the current program or -1 if
the program cycles is to set ‘Continuous’.
SegmentNumber Currently running segment number The number of the currently running segment.
SegmentName Segment Name The name of the currently running segment.
SegmentType Segment Type The type of the currently running segment.
End (0) The very last segment in a program.
RampRate (1) This is specified by a target setpoint and a rate at which
to ascend/descend to the setpoint.
RampTime (2) This is specified by a target setpoint and a time in which
to achieve the ramp to setpoint.
Dwell (3) This is specified by how long the setpoint is to be
maintained.
Step (4) This allows a step change in the target setpoint.
Note: The step will occur immediately followed by a 1
second dwell period to allow event outputs to be set.
Call (5) This allows the main program to call another program as
a subroutine. The number of times the program is called
will be configurable, 1…9999. A program can only call
other programs with a program number greater than
itself, this prevents cyclic programs from being created.
This segment type will only be available if multiple
programs are enabled via Feature Security, and it should
be noted that all configurable segments (1-24) can be
configured as a call segment.
SegmentTimeLeft Segment Time Left The remaining time for the segment to complete.
TargetSetpoint Current Target Setpoint The target setpoint for the current segment.
RampRate Segment Ramp Rate The current ramp rate to achieve the target setpoint.
Event (n) Event (n) Event Output (n) value for the current segment.
Off (0) The event is Off.
On (1) The event is On.
ProgramAdvance Program Advance Sets the Programmer Setpoint to the target setpoint of the current segment and
advances to the next segment in the program.
No (0) Default value.
Yes (1) Advances the segment to the next one with the
Programmer Setpoint assuming the Target Setpoint of
the original segment.
Track Track Output parameter which is typically wired to the Loop Track parameter which is
used to force the Loop into Track mode when the program completes and the
program end type has been configured to Track.
Off (0) Default value. Program has not completed.
On (1) Program has completed.
PVInput PV Input The PV Input used for Servo to PV, typically wired from
the Loop’s Track PV parameter.
SPInput SP Input The SP Input used for Servo to SP, typically wired from
the Loop’s Track SP parameter.
IntBal Integral Balance Requested This flag is set briefly when the Programmer performs a
servo to PV, which would require the Loop to perform an
integral balance in order to stop the working output from
reacting to the change in setpoint. This parameter should
be wired into the Loop.Main.IntBal parameter.
No (0) Integral balance is not requested.
Yes (1) Integral balance is requested.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 279

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Programmer.Setup
Programmer setup is used to configure programmer parameters which are unlikely to
change between programs used on the same or similar processes. In addition the
setup list also contains digital parameters which can be wired to Run, Reset and Hold
a program.

ProgrammerType Programmer Type The type of programmer

Disabled (0)
1x8 (1) Single program of up to 8 segments
1x24 (2) Single program of up to 24 segments
10x24 (3) Up to ten programs of up to 24 segments
20x8 (4) Up to twenty programs of up to eight segments
EditAccess Program Edit Access Sets the minimum local HMI user access level allowed to edit programs.
Level1 (0)
Level2 (1) Default: Level2 (1)
Level3 (2)
Config (4)
RunAccess Program Run Access Sets the minimum local HMI user access level allowed to run programs.
Level1 (0)
Level2 (1) Default: Level2 (1)
Level3 (2)
RecoveryStrategy Recovery Strategy Configures the Power Fail and Sensor Break recovery strategy.
Ramp (0)
Reset (1) Default: Reset (1)
Track (2)
ServoTo Servo To Configures the programmer to start from either the PV Input or the SP Input.
PV (0) Default: PV (0)
SP (1)

280 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

RateResolution Ramp Rate Resolution Configures the resolution (number of decimal places) of the rate used in ramp
rate segments.
X (0)
X.X (1) Default: X.X (1)
X.XX (2)
X.XXX (3)
X.XXXX (4)
Resolution Program Time Resolution Configures the resolution of Program & Segment Time Left.
sec (0) Default: sec (0)
min (1)
hour (2)
MaxEvents Maximum Events per segment Range (0 to 8) Default: 1
Note: This parameter is not available if Programmer
Type is 1x8.
ResetEventOP Reset Events Range (0 to 8) Defines the event output states when the program is in
the reset.
Run Program Run The digital input to start the program running.
No (0)
Yes (1)
Hold Program Hold The digital input to hold the running program.
No (0)
Yes (1)
Reset Program Reset The digital input to reset (abort) the running program.
No (0)
Yes (1)
RunHold Program Run Hold Dual functionality digital input, going from LOW to HIGH will start the program,
whilst LOW the program is in Hold.
No (0)
Yes (1)
RunReset Program Run Reset Dual functionality digital input, going from LOW to HIGH will start the program,
whilst LOW the program is in Reset.
No (0)
Yes (1)
MaxPrograms Maximum Programs Range (1 to 20) The maximum number of programs allowed. Read only.
MaxSegmentsPerProg Maximum Segments per Program Range (1 to 24) The maximum number of programs allowed. Read only.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 281

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

WorkingProgram
Parameters in the WorkingProgram function block are only available when the
controller is in Operator level and a program is actually running. The function block is
used to define parameters that are global to the program. The figure below shows the
parameters and the table which follows details each parameter.

Parameter Name Description Available Values Value Description

WorkingProgramName Working Program Name A text field which contains the name of the currently running program. The
default name is the character ‘P’ followed by the program number. If you have
named the program, that name is displayed here instead.
HoldbackStyle Holdback Style Holdback is when the PV deviates from the setpoint by more than the holdback
value, the program will temporarily hold until the PV returns to within the
specified value. It is possible to set holdback either for the entire program or on
a per-segment basis.
Program (0) Default: Holdback set for the entire program.
Segment (1) Holdback set for the segment only.
HoldbackType Holdback Type Holdback prohibits the program from advancing faster than the load can react.
Holdback continuously monitors the difference between the PV and the
programmer setpoint. The holdback type specifies whether holdback tests for
deviations above, below, or above and below the setpoint.
Off (0) Default: Off. No holdback tests are performed
Low (1) Holdback tests for deviations below the setpoint.
High (2) Holdback tests for deviations above the setpoint.
Band (3) Holdback tests for deviations above and below the
setpoint.
HoldbackValue Holdback Value Holdback is used to stop the program rates from exceeding the maximum rate
for the load.
A holdback value can be entered so that if the program setpoint differs from the
PV, then the program will pause until the PV has caught up. This feature is
useful for achieving the soak times of dwell segments. i.e, the Dwell does not
start until the PV has reached the target setpoint.
In the Programmer, the holdback value can be set once per program or for
every segment depending on the holdback style set. It is possible to select
whether the holdback is disabled or applied from above, from below, or both
directions.
RampUnits Ramp Units Ramp units can be defined as per second, per minute, or per hour. Ramp units
are set for the entire program. Changing ramp units will convert the ramp rate
parameter values of all Ramp Rate segments in the program.
PerSecond (0) Default: PerSecond(0). Ramp units are defined as
per second
PerMinute (1) Ramp units are defined as per minute.
PerHour (2) Ramp units are defined as per hour.

282 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Name Description Available Values Value Description

DwellUnits Dwell Units Dwell units can be defined as per second, per minute, or per hour. Dwell units
are set for the entire program.
PerSecond (0) Default: PerSecond(0). Dwell units are defined as per
second
PerMinute (1) Dwell units are defined as per minute.
PerHour (2) Dwell units are defined as per hour.
ProgramCycles Program Cycles If a program is called from another program, then this value is ignored and the
calling segment defines the number of sub-program loops.
Continuous (-1) The program cycles continuously.
1-9999 Default. The program cycles this number of times.
ProgramEndType Program End Type Defines the action to be taken after the final segment.
Dwell (0) The programmer setpoint is maintained indefinitely and
the event outputs remain at the states configured for the
end segment.
Reset (1) The program is reset at the programmer setpoint will
servo either to the PVInput value or the SPInput value as
configured by the Programmer.Setup.ServoTo
parameter. The event outputs will return to the states
specified by the Programmer.Setup.ResetEventOP
parameter.
Track (2) The programmer setpoint is maintained indefinitely and
event outputs remain at the states configured for the end
segment. If the programmer is wired to the Loop, the
Loop will b e forced into Track mode.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 283

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

WorkingSegment
Parameters in the WorkingSegment function block only become available when the
controller is in Operator level and a program is actually running. The function block is
used to define the behavior of the working segments. The figure below shows the
parameters and the table which follows details each parameter.

Parameter Name Description Available Values Value Description

WorkingSegmentName Working Segment Name A text field which contains the name of the working segment. The default name
is the character ‘S’ followed by the working segment number. If you have named
the segments, that name is displayed here instead.
SegmentType Segment Type Specifies the type of the current segment.
End (0) Default: The current segment is of type ‘End’.
Ramp Rate(1) The current segment is of type ‘Ramp Rate’.
Ramp Time (2) The current segment is of type ‘Ramp Time’.
Dwell (3) The current segment is of type ‘Dwell’.
Step (4) The current segment is of type ‘Step’.
Call (5) The current segment is of type ‘Call’.
TargetSetpoint Target SetPoint Shows the current setpoint, or can be used to define the desired setpoint to be
achieved by the end of the segment.
Duration Dwell Duration A dwell segment is specified by a duration, the length of time that the setpoint
(inherited from the previous segment) is to be maintained.
RampRate Ramp Rate Specifies the rate at which the setpoint is to be achieved.
The units of the ramp rate (per second, per minute, or per hour) is specified by
the Program Edit parameter RampUnits.
TimeToTarget Time to Target For Time to Target ramp segments, this parameter specifies the time to take to
achieve the setpoint.
CallCycles Call Cycles Defines the number of times the sub-program is run. To loop continuously, set
cycles to 0 (Continuous).
Continuous (0) The sub-program runs continuously.
1-9999 Default: 1. The number of times the sub-program is to
run.
EventOutput Event Output Defines the event output states. These event states can be wired to physical
outputs for driving external events.
HoldbackType Holdback Type Holdback prohibits the program from advancing faster than the load can react.
Holdback continuously monitors the difference between the PV and the
programmer setpoint. The holdback type specifies which type of deviation to
check.
Off (0) Default: Off. No holdback tests are performed
Low (1) Holdback tests for deviations below the setpoint.
High (2) Holdback tests for deviations above the setpoint.
Band (3) Holdback tests for deviations above and below the
setpoint.

284 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Programmer EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Name Description Available Values Value Description

HoldbackValue Holdback Value A holdback value can be entered so that if the program setpoint differs from the
PV, then the program will pause until the PV has caught up. This feature is
useful for achieving the soak times of dwell segments. i.e, the Dwell does not
start until the PV has reached the target setpoint.
In the Programmer, the holdback value can be set once per program or for
every segment depending on the holdback style set.
CallProgram Call Program The sub-program to call. This only applies to call segments. Only program
numbers greater than the calling program can be called.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 285

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Control
The ‘Loop’ function block contains and coordinates the various control and output
algorithms. The diagram below shows the top-level structure of the Loop function
block for a heat only or heat/cool temperature controller.

The actual temperature measured at the process (PV) is connected to the input of the
controller. This is compared with a setpoint (or required) temperature (SP). The
controller calculates an output value to call for heating or cooling so that the
difference between set and measured temperature is minimized. The calculation
depends on the process being controlled but normally uses a PID algorithm. The
output(s) from the controller are connected to devices on the plant which deliver the
demanded heating (or cooling). This, in turn. is detected by the temperature sensor.
This is referred to as the control loop or closed loop control.

Loop Function Block

Mode selection and status

DV Feedforward
subsystem

FB
PV ER Control (PID) +
-+ +
subsystem
Ch1
Output
wSP
subsystem
(including
Manual Station) Ch2

Setpoint Autotune
subsystem subsystem

286 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Types of Control
Three types of control loop may be configured. These are PID control, On/Off control,
or control of motorized valves

PID Control
PID, also referred to as 'Three Term Control', is an algorithm which continuously
adjusts the output, according to a set of rules, to compensate for changes in the
process variable. It provides more stable control but the parameters need to be set
up to match the characteristics of the process under control.

The three terms are:

Proportional term PB.

Integral term TI.

Derivative term TD.

The Eurotherm PID algorithm is based upon an ISA type algorithm in its positional
(non-incremental) form.The output from the controller is the sum of the contributions
from these three terms.The simplified Laplace transform is:

OP/ER = (100/PB) (1 + 1/sTI + sTD).

The combined output is a function of the magnitude and duration of the error signal,
and the rate of change of the process value.

It is possible to turn off integral and derivative terms and control on proportional only
(P), proportional plus integral (PI) or proportional plus derivative (PD).

An example of where PI control might be used i.e. D is turned off, is process plants
(flows, pressures, liquid levels), which are inherently turbulent and noisy, causing
valves to fluctuate wildly.

PD control may be used, for example, on servo mechanisms.

In addition to the three terms described above, there are other parameters which
determine how well the control loop performs. These include High and Low Cutback
and Manual Reset and are described in detail in subsequent sections.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 287

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Proportional Term 'PB'

The proportional term, or gain, delivers an output which is proportional to the size of
the difference between SP and PV. It is the range over which the output power is
continuously adjustable in a linear fashion from 0% to 100% (for a heat only
controller). Below the proportional band the output is full on (100%), above the
proportional band the output is full off (0%) as shown in the diagram below.

The width of the proportional band determines the magnitude of the response to the
error. If it too narrow (high gain) the system oscillates by being over responsive. If it is
too wide (low gain) the control is sluggish. The ideal situation is when the proportional
band is as narrow as possible without causing oscillation.

Output Temperature
Proportional band
Wide
Narrow Setpoint
100%

Increasingly narrower
50% proportional band

0% Temperature Time
Setpoint

The diagram also shows the effect of narrowing proportional band to the point of
oscillation. A wide proportional band results in straight line control but with an
appreciable initial error between setpoint and actual temperature. As the band is
narrowed the temperature gets closer to setpoint until finally becoming unstable.

The proportional band can be specified in engineering units or in percent of span

(RangeHigh – RangeLow). Engineering Units is recommended for its ease of use.

Previous controllers had the parameter Relative Cool Gain (R2G) to adjust the cool
proportional band relative to the heat. This has been replaced by separate
proportional bands for Channel 1 (Heat) and Channel 2 (Cool).

288 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Integral Term 'TI'

In a proportional only controller, a difference between setpoint and PV must exist for
the controller to deliver power. Integral is used to reduce this to a zero steady state
control.

The integral term slowly shifts the output level as a result of a difference between
setpoint and measured value. If the measured value is below setpoint the integral
action gradually increases the output in an attempt to correct the difference. If it is
above setpoint integral action gradually decreases the output or increases the
cooling power to correct the difference.

The diagram below shows the result of introducing integral action.

Temperature

Setpoint

Proportional Proportional +
only control integral control

The units for integral are measured in time. The longer the integral time constant, the
more slowly the output is shifted and results in a sluggish response. Too small an
integral time will cause the process to overshoot and even oscillate. The integral
action may be disabled by setting its value to Off(0), in which case manual reset will
be made available.

The integral time is always specified in seconds. In US nomenclature, the integral

time is equivalent to ‘seconds per repeat’.

Integral Hold
When the IntegralHold parameter is turned on, the output value contained in the
integrator will be frozen. It will be maintained even through mode changes. This can
sometimes be useful e.g. in a cascade to stop the master integral winding up when
the slave is saturated.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 289

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Derivative Term 'TD'

Derivative action, or rate, provides a sudden shift in output as a result of a rapid
change in error. If the measured value falls quickly derivative provides a large change
in output in an attempt to correct the perturbation before it goes too far. It is most
beneficial in recovering from small perturbations.

Temperature Temperature

SP SP

Proportional + Integral Proportional with derivative

response action included

Time Time

The derivative modifies the output to reduce the rate of change of the difference. It
reacts to changes in the PV by changing the output to remove the transient.
Increasing the derivative time will reduce the settling time of the loop after a transient
change.

Derivative is often mistakenly associated with overshoot inhibition rather than

transient response. In fact, derivative should not be used to curb overshoot on start
up since this will inevitably affect the steady state performance of the system.
Overshoot inhibition is best left to the approach control parameters, High and Low
Cutback, described below.

Derivative is generally used to increase the stability of the loop, however, there are
situations where derivative may be the cause of instability. For example, if the PV is
electrically noisy, then derivative can amplify that electrical noise and cause
excessive output changes, in these situations it is often better to disable the
derivative and re-tune the loop.

Derivative time is always specified in seconds. Derivative action can be turned off by
setting the derivative time to Off(0).

Derivative on PV or Error (SP - PV)

By default, derivative action is applied to the PV only and not to the error (SP - PV).
This helps to prevent large derivative kicks when the setpoint is changed.

If required, derivative can be switched to error using the DerivativeType parameter.

This is not usually recommended but can, for example, reduce overshoot at the end
of SP ramps.

Manual Reset (PD Control)

In a full three-term controller (that is, a PID controller), the integral term automatically
removes the steady state error from the setpoint. Turn off the integral term to set the
controller to PD Under these conditions the measured value may not settle precisely
at setpoint. The Manual Reset parameter (MR) represents the value of the power
output that will be delivered when the error is zero.

This value must be set manually in order to remove the steady state error.

290 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Cutback
Cutback is a system of approach control for process start-up and for large setpoint
changes. It allows the response to be tuned independently of the PID controller,
thereby allowing optimum performance for both large and small setpoint changes and
disturbances. It is available for all control types except OnOff.

The cutback high and low thresholds, CBH and CBL, define two regions above and
below the working setpoint. They are specified in the same units as the proportional
band. Operation can be explained in three rules:

1. When the PV is more than CBL units below WSP, maximum output is always
applied.

2. When the PV is more than CBH units above WSP, minimum output is always
applied.

3. When the PV exits a cutback region, the output is returned bumplessly to the PID
algorithm.

The effect of rule 1 and 2 is to bring the PV towards the WSP as rapidly as possible
whenever there exists a significant deviation, just as an experienced operator might
do manually.

The effect of 3 is to allow the PID algorithm to immediately start ‘cutting back’ the
power from maximum or minimum when the PV passes the cutback threshold.
Remember that, due to 1 and 2, the PV should be moving rapidly towards WSP, and
it is this that causes the PID algorithm to start cutting back the output.

By default, CBH and CBL are set to Auto (0), which means that they are
automatically taken to be 3 times the proportional band. This is a reasonable starting
point for most processes, but rise time to setpoint on start-up or large setpoint
changes may be improved by tuning them manually.

Magnitude Cutback region—apply full cool

CBH

SP
Proportional band

CBL

Cutback region—apply full heat

PV

Time

Note: Because cutback is a type of non-linear controller, a set of CBH and CBL
values that are tuned for one particular operating point may not be satisfactory for
another operating point. It is always advisable therefore not to try to tune the cutback
values too tightly, or otherwise to use gain scheduling to schedule different values of
CBH and CBL at different operating points. All the PID tuning parameters can be gain
scheduled.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 291

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Reverse/Direct Action
For single-channel loops, the concept of reverse and direct action is important.

The ControlAction parameter should be set appropriately:

1. If an increase in control output causes a corresponding increase in PV, such as in

a heating process, then set ControlAction to Reverse.

2. If an increase in control output causes a corresponding decrease in PV, such as

in a refrigeration process, then set ControlAction to Direct.

The ControlAction parameter is not available for split-range configurations, where

channel 1 is always reverse acting and channel 2 is always direct acting.

Loop Break
The loop is considered to be broken if the PV does not respond to a change in the
output. An alarm may be initiated but in EPC3000 series controllers this must be
explicitly wired using the ‘LoopBreak’ parameter. Since the time of response will vary
from process to process the Loop Break Time parameter allows a time to be set
before a Loop Break Alarm is initiated. In these circumstances the output power will
drive to high or low limit. For a PID controller, two parameters under diagnostics are
used to determine if the loop is broken, ‘Loop Break Time’ and ‘Loop Break Delta PV’.

If the control loop is broken, the output will tend to wind up and eventually hit a limit.

Once the output is at the limit, the loop break detection algorithm will monitor the PV.
If the PV has not moved by a specified amount (LoopBreakDeltaPV) in twice the
specified time (LoopBreakTime), then a loop break will be flagged.

Gain scheduling
Some processes exhibit non-linear dynamics. For example, a heat treatment furnace
may behave quite differently at low temperatures than at high temperatures. This is
commonly due to the effects of radiant heat transfer, which start to appear above
about 700℃. This is illustrated in the diagram below.

It is often unfeasible, then, for a single set of PID tuning constants to perform well
over the entire process operating range. To combat this, several sets of tuning
constants can be used and ‘scheduled’ according to the process operating point.

Each set of constants is called a ‘gain set’ or a ‘tune set’. The gain scheduler selects
the active gain set by comparing the value of the Scheduling Variable (SV) against a
set of boundaries.

An integral balance is issued whenever the active gain set changes. This helps to
prevent discontinuities (‘bumps’) in the controller output.

292 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Motorized Valve Positioning Control

Valve Positioning control is used for ‘three-step’ motorized valve actuators that are
driven with a digital ‘raise’ and ‘lower’ signal. A common example is a valve
modulating the firing rate of a gas-fired furnace or oven. Some valves are already
fitted with positioners, in which case these algorithms are not suitable and PID should
be used.

The EPC series contains the Boundless (VPU) (or Unbounded) algorithm which does
not require a feedback potentiometer.

This type of valve has an inherent travel time – that is the time needed to slew from
end-stop to end-stop. This time should be measured as accurately as possible in
both directions and the average entered into the appropriate travel time parameter.

Boundless Valve Position (VPU)

The Valve Positioner boundless (VPU) algorithm operates without knowledge of the
actual valve position. Therefore, it does not require a potentiometer on the valve.

VPU contains a special incremental form of the PID algorithm. It uses the valve itself
as an accumulator, to ‘add up’ the increments calculated by the algorithm. Because
of this special formulation, it can be treated as a positional algorithm, just like PID
itself.

It contains a simple software model of the valve, based on the entered Travel Time,
which estimates the valve position (the Working Output). It is important to realize that
this estimation is just that, and that over time, particularly long cycles, the displayed
Working Output and the real valve position may be completely different. This has no
effect on control performance—it is purely a display problem. This model is also used
in non-auto modes such as Manual.

With VPU, it is important that the valve travel time is measured and set as accurately
as possible. This helps to ensure that the tuning parameters retain their real physical
meanings and also helps to ensure proper autotuning, which may otherwise give an
unsatisfactory tune. Motor travel time is defined as valve fully open - valve fully
closed - it is not necessarily the time printed on the motor since, if mechanical stops
have been set on the motor, the travel time of the actual valve may be different.

Note: EPC series supports valve position but only without a potentiometer.

Motorized Valve Control in Manual mode

When manual is selected, the algorithm predicts where the valve will move to based
on the value of the manual power.The manual output is set as normal, and the
controller will position the valve according to the internal estimated position.

Every time the valve is driven to its end stops the estimated and real positions will
tend to realign themselves.

Parameters shown in this section are relevant to the subject being described. Further
information is available in the Configuration chapter.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 293

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

On-Off Control
Each of the two control channels can be configured for On-Off control. This is a
simple type of control often found in basic thermostats.

The control algorithm takes the form of a simple hysteretic relay.

For channel 1 (heat):

1. When PV > WSP, OP = 0%
2. When PV < (WSP – Ch1OnOffHyst), OP = 100%
For channel 2 (cool):
1. When PV > (WSP + Ch2OnOffHyst), OP = 100%
2. When PV < WSP, OP = 0%
This form of control will lead to oscillation about setpoint but it is by far the easier to
tune. The hysteresis should be set according to the trade-off between oscillation
amplitude and actuator switching frequency. The two hysteresis values can be gain
scheduled.

294 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Feedforward
The block diagram for the feedforward subsystem structure is shown below.

Feedforward Subsystem
FFType FFOffset

FFGain FFHold FFHighLimit

wSP

PV 1+sFFLeadTime + FFOutput
X +
DV 1+sFFLagTime

FFLowLimit

The Loop incorporates a feedforward controller in addition to the normal feedback

(PID) controller; it is capable of static or dynamic feedforward compensation. Broadly,
there are three common uses for feedforward in these instruments and are described
in turn below.

Disturbance feedforward
A disadvantage of a feedback (PID) controller is that it responds only to deviations
between PV and SP. By the time a PID controller first starts to react to a process
disturbance, it is already too late and the disturbance is in progress; all that can be
done is to try to minimize the extent of the disruption as much as possible.

Feedforward control is often used to overcome this disadvantage. It uses a

measurement of the disturbance variable itself and a priori knowledge of the process
to predict the controller output that will exactly counter the disturbance before it has a
chance to affect the PV.

Feedforward on its own also has a major disadvantage. It is an open-loop strategy

that relies entirely on a model of the process. Modelling error, uncertainty and
process variation all help to prevent zero tracking error being achieved in practice.
Further, the feedforward controller can only respond to disturbances that are explicitly
measured and modelled.

To counter the relative disadvantages, the Loop combines both types of control in an
arrangement known as “Feedforward with Feedback Trim”. The Feedforward
controller gives the principal control output and the Feedback controller can trim this
output appropriately to give zero tracking error.

The diagram below shows the feedforward with feedback trim structure.

Feedforward
subsystem
+PIDTrimLimit

Control (PID) Output

+
subsystem + subsystem

-PIDTrimLimit

HA033650ENG Issue 1 295

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

A symmetrical trim limit is provided around the PID component such that the
influence of the feedback trim can be restricted.

Setpoint feedforward
Setpoint feedforward is arguably the type most often seen in instrument applications.
A signal that is proportional to the working setpoint is fed-forward directly to the
controller output. The most common scenario is dead-time dominant processes.

Dead times are common in process control. Flow lines, packaging lines, food
processing lines and similar can all involve some amount of transport delay; that is to
say that there is a finite period of time between an actuation being made by the final
control element and a change being observed by the sensor.

Where this time delay is large with respect to other process dynamics, stable
feedback control becomes increasingly difficult. A solution to this is often to detune
the gain of the controller. Whilst this may well achieve stability, it also results in a
sluggish system response to setpoint changes.

The ‘Feedforward with Feedback Trim’ arrangement shown above can be used to
significantly improve the situation. The feedforward controller immediately gives an
output value close to the final value and the PID controller can then trim this to give
zero tracking error. The maximum amount of trim can be limited to help prevent the
PID component having too much influence.

First, obtain the static characteristics of the plant. This can be achieved by putting the
controller into Manual and, at a number of output values, record the final stead-state
PV. Determine values of Gain and Bias that approximate the relationship, such that
OP = Gain*PV + Bias.

If required, dynamic compensation can be used to change the feedforward output

response. For example, it may speed things up even more if the output gives an initial
kick in excess of its final value before settling back down. A lead compensation can
achieve this as discussed later.

296 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Static or dynamic compensation

An example of Feedforward output response to SPchange with Static (left) and
Dynamic (right) compensation is shown below.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 297

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Split Range (heat/cool)

Inherent in the Loop is the concept of split-range for heat/cool.

Each Loop has a single setpoint and single PV, but can have two outputs. These two
outputs operate in opposite directions. For example, consider a chamber with both a
heater and a chiller. Both of these actuators are used to influence the temperature
(the ‘process variable’, PV), but they operate in different directions: increasing heat
output causes increasing PV, whereas increasing chiller output causes decreasing
PV. Another example might be a gas carburizing furnace where the atmosphere is
either enriched with methane (channel 1) or diluted with air (channel 2).

The way that the loop implements this is to allow the control output to extend over the
span −100 to +100%. In this way, the range is split so that 0 to +100% is output on
channel 1 (heat) and −100 to 0% is output on channel 2 (cool). The diagram below
shows Split Range Outputs (Heat/Cool)

In addition, the loop allows each of the two channels to use different control types.
The available control algorithm types are:

1. PID with an absolute output.

2. PID with valve positioning (without measured position and VPU).

3. Hysteretic On-Off (‘bang-bang’) control.

For example, a process may have an electrical heater on channel 1, controlled with
the PID algorithm, whereas the flow of coolant through a jacket is modulated by a
valve which is controlled by the VPU algorithm on channel 2. Transfer between the
different algorithms is handled automatically.

In addition, different actuator gains are handled by having a separate proportional

band for each channel.

298 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Cooling Algorithm
The method of cooling may vary from application to application.

For example, an extruder barrel may be cooled by forced air (from a fan), or by
circulating water or oil around a jacket. The cooling effect will be different depending
on the method. The cooling algorithm may be set to linear where the controller output
changes linearly with the PID demand signal, or it may be set to water, oil or fan
where the output changes non-linearly against the PID demand. The algorithm
provides optimum performance for these methods of cooling.

Non-linear cooling
The loop provides a set of curves that can be applied to the cooling (ch2) output.
These can be used to compensate for cooling non-linearities thereby making the
process ‘look’ linear to the PID algorithm. Curves for Oil, Fan and Water cooling are
provided.

Curves are always scaled to fit between 0 and the output low limit. Tuning the curve
to the process is an important step in commissioning and can be achieved by
adjusting the output low limit. The low limit should be set to the point at which the
cooling effect is maximum, before it starts to drop off again.

Be aware that any output rate limiting is applied to the output before non-linear
cooling. Therefore, the actual controller output may change faster than any
configured rate limit, but the power being delivered to the process will move at the
correct rate, provided the curve has been correctly applied.

Air or Oil cooling

At low temperatures, the rate of heat transfer from one body to another can be
considered linear and is proportional to the temperature difference between them. In
other words, as the cooling media heats up, the rate of heat transfer slows down. So
far, this is linear.

The non-linearity arises when a flow of cooling media is introduced. The higher the
rate of flow (mass transfer), the less time a given ‘unit’ of media is in contact with the
process and so the greater the average rate of heat transfer.

The air and oil characteristic is shown in the diagram below.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 299

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Evaporative Water cooling

Vaporizing water requires about five times as much energy as is required to raise its
temperature from 0–100℃. This difference represents a large non-linearity, where at
low cooling demands, the principal cooling effect is evaporative, but at higher cooling
demands only the first few pulses of water flash off to steam.

To compound this, the mass transfer non-linearity described above for oil and air
cooling is also true for water cooling.

Evaporative water cooling is often used in plastics extruder barrels and so this
feature is ideal for that application. The evaporative water cooling characteristic is
shown below.

Channel 2 (heat/cool) Deadband

The channel 2 deadband introduces a gap between the point at which channel 1
switches off and the point at which channel 2 switches on, and vice versa. This is
sometimes used to help prevent small and fleeting demands for cooling during
normal process operation.

For a PID control channel, the deadband is specified in % output. For example, if the
deadband is set to 10%, then the PID algorithm must demand −10% before ch2 will
begin to switch on.

For an On/Off control channel, the deadband is specified in % of hysteresis. The

diagram shows heat/cool with 20% deadband.

300 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Bumpless Transfer
Where possible, the transfer to an Auto control mode from a non-Auto control mode
will be ‘bumpless’. This means that the transition will go smoothly without large
discontinuities.

Bumpless transfer relies on there being an integral term in the control algorithm to
‘balance out’ the step change. For this reason, it is sometimes called an ‘integral
balance’.

The IntBal parameter allows the external application to request an integral balance.
This is often useful if it is known that a step change in PV is to occur, for example a
compensation factor has just changed in an oxygen probe calculation. The integral
balance will help to prevent any proportional or derivative kick, instead allowing the
output to be smoothly adjusted under integral action.

Sensor Break
‘Sensor Break’ is an instrument condition that occurs when the input sensor is broken
or out of range. The Loop reacts to this condition by putting itself in Forced Manual
mode (see above description). The type of transfer when entering Forced Manual,
when the PV status is not good, can be selected using the PVBadTransfer parameter.
The options are:

• Enter Forced Manual mode with the output set to the Fallback Value.

• Enter Forced Manual mode with the output held at the last good value (typically a
value from about one second ago).

HA033650ENG Issue 1 301

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Operating Modes
The Loop has a number of possible operating modes. It is quite possible for several
modes to be requested by the application at once. The active mode is therefore
determined by a priority model, whereby the mode with the highest priority will always
win.

For details of the modes and their priorities, refer to "Loop - Main Sub-list" on
page 117.

Start-up and Recovery

Proper start up is an important consideration and varies depending on the process.
The Loop recovery strategy is followed under any of the following circumstances:

• Upon instrument start-up, after a power cycle, power outage event or power
disruption.

• Upon exit from Instrument Configuration or Standby conditions.

• Upon exit from Forced Manual (F_MAN) mode to a lower priority mode (e.g.
when the PV recovers from a bad status or an alarm condition goes away).

The strategy to follow is configured by the RecoveryMode parameter. The two

available options are:

1. Last mode with last output

The loop will return to Auto or Manual mode, whichever was last active. The
working output will be initialized to the last used output value.

2. Manual mode with fallback output

The loop will always enter Manual mode. The initial output will be the configured
Fallback Value, unless recovering from Forced Manual where the transfer will be
bumpless.

302 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Setpoint subsystem
The diagrams below show Setpoint function block. The first shows the ‘Remote
Setpoint with local trim’ configuration.

Setpoint Subsystem (Remote setpoint with Local Trim configuration)

SPSelect RSP_En== true

SPHighLimit RemoteLocal== Remote
SP1
PSPSelect TargetSP
SP2 AND
SPLowLimit
RangeHigh SPRateUp
PSP
Rate WorkingSP
RSPHighLimit ++ limit

RSP
RangeLow SPRateDown

RSPLowLimit SPTrimHighLimit
BackCalcSP
+
−
SPTrim

SPTrimLowLimit
PV − BackCalcPV
+

The second diagram shows Setpoint subsystem in the ‘Local Setpoint with remote
trim’ configuration.

Setpoint Subsystem (Local setpoint with Remote Trim configuration)

SPSelect
SPHighLimit TargetSP
SP1
PSPSelect
SP2 RangeHigh SPRateUp

SPLowLimit Rate WorkingSP

++
PSP limit
RemoteLocal== Remote
RSPHighLimit RSP_En== true RangeLow SPRateDown

RSP AND

SPTrimHighLimit +BackCalcSP
−
RSPLowLimit
SPTrim

SPTrimLowLimit
PV BackCalcPV
+−

The setpoint subsystem resolves and generates the working setpoint for the control
algorithms. The working setpoint can ultimately come from several different sources,
programmer, local or remote, have local or remote trims applied, and be limited and
rate limited.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 303

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Remote/Local Setpoint Source Selection

The RemoteLocal parameter selects between the remote or local setpoint source.

The SPSource parameter reports which source is currently active. The three values
are:

• Local – the local setpoint source is active.

• Remote – the remote setpoint source is active.

• F_Local – the remote setpoint source has been selected but it cannot become
active. The local setpoint source is active until the exceptional condition is
resolved.

In order for the remote setpoint source to become active, the following conditions
need to be fulfilled:

1. The RemoteLocal parameter has been set to ‘Remote’.

2. The RSP_En input is true.

3. The status of the RSP input is Good.

Note: The ‘RemoteLoc’ parameter is enumerated as 0 = Remote and 1 = Local.

In previous instruments such as 2400 series and 3200 series 0 = Local and
1 = Remote.

This difference may be noticed if, for example, a digital input is used to select
between local and remote. In 2400/3200 the contact must be open for local, closed
for remote. In an EPC3000 controller it must be open for remote and closed for local.

Local Setpoint Selection

There are three local setpoint sources: the two operator setpoints, SP1 and SP2; and
the program setpoint, PSP. For selection parameters and priorities, refer to the above
diagram.

Remote Setpoint
RSP is the remote setpoint source. It can be configured by the RSPType parameter
in one of two ways:
1. Remote setpoint (RSP) with a local trim (SPTrim).
For example, in a continuous oven with several temperature zones, the
master controller can transmit its setpoint to each slave’s RSP, and then a
local trim can be applied in each slave to achieve the desired temperature
gradient through the oven.
2. Local setpoint (SP1, SP2 or PSP) with a remote trim (RSP).
For example, in a combustion air/fuel ratio application where the ratio set-
point is fixed, but a remote controller analyses the excess oxygen in the
flue gases and is allowed to trim the ratio within a given band.
The remote setpoint is always limited by the RSPHighLimit and RSPLowLimit
parameters.

304 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Setpoint limits
The various setpoint parameters are subjected to limits according to the diagram
below. Some of the limits themselves are also subjected to limits.

Rng.hi
+Span
sp.hi

rsp.hi trim.hi

sp1 sp2 rsp psp TargetSP wsp trim

rsp.lo trim.lo
sp.lo
-Span
Rng.LO

The Span is taken to be the value given by (RangeHigh – RangeLow).

Note: Whilst it is possible to set the RSP Limits outside the Range Limits, the RSP
value will still be clipped to the Range Limits.

Setpoint Rate Limit

Rate limits can be applied to the final setpoint value. This can sometimes be useful to
help prevent sudden step changes in controller output, and therefore help to prevent
damage to the process or product.

Asymmetric rate limits are available. That is to say that the increasing rate limit can
be set independently of the decreasing rate limit. This is often useful, for example in a
reactor application whereby a sudden increase in flow should be reduced so that an
exothermic event does not overwhelm the cooling control loop. On the other hand, a
sudden decrease in flow should be permitted.

The setpoint rate limits may be set in units per hour, per minute or per second,
according to the SPRateUnits parameter.

Note: When transitioning into an automatic control mode from a non-automatic

control mode such as manual, the WSP will be set equal to the PV whenever a rate
limit is set. It will then move towards the target setpoint from there at the configured
rate.

In addition, if the SPRateServo parameter is enabled, the WSP will be set equal to
the PV whenever the Target SP is changed and will then move towards the target
from there. This only applies in Auto (including the transition to Auto) when SP1 or
SP2 is active. It does not apply when using a remote or program setpoint.

Target SP
The Target SP is the setpoint value immediately prior to rate limiting (the Working SP
is the value immediately after it). In many instruments it is possible to write to the
Target SP directly. The effect of this is to trigger a back-calculation, which takes into
account the trim value (either a local or remote trim), and then to write the
back-calculated value to the selected setpoint source. This is so that the calculated
Target SP on the next execution is equal to the entered value.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 305

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

This usefully allows the target setpoint to be set to a desired value immediately,
without having to manually make the calculations and determine which setpoint
source is active.

Writing to the TargetSP is not possible when a remote setpoint is active.

Tracking
There are three setpoint tracking modes available. They can each be turned on by
enabling the appropriate parameter.

1. SP1/SP2 tracks PV
Whilst the mode is MANUAL, whichever of SP1 or SP2 is active will track the PV
(less the trim). This is so that the operating point is maintained whenever the
mode is changed to Auto.

2. SP1/SP2 tracks PSP

Whilst PSPSelect is enabled, whichever of SP1 or SP2 is active will track the
PSP. This is so that the operating point is maintained when the programmer is
reset and PSPSelect goes false.

3. SP1/SP2/SPTrim tracks RSP

When the RSP is active and acting as a Remote Setpoint, whichever of SP1 or
SP2 is active will track RSP. If RSP is acting as a Remote Trim, then it is SPTrim
that will track RSP. This is so that the operating point is maintained if the setpoint
is switched to local.

Back-calculated SP and PV
Back-calculated versions of WSP and PV are provided as outputs. These are simply
WSP/PV minus the active trim value. These outputs are given so that an external
setpoint source (such as a setpoint programmer or a cascade master) can track their
output to them as necessary, thus helping to prevent bumps on mode changes and
switchovers.

Setpoint Integral Balance

When the SPIntBal parameter is enabled, the setpoint subsystem will issue an
integral balance request to the PID/VPU algorithms whenever a step change in SP1
or SP2 occurs. This will cause any proportional or derivative kick to be suppressed
and the PV will move smoothly to the new setpoint with the integral as the driving
force and with minimum overshoot. The effect is the same as what is sometimes
called ‘proportional and derivative on PV’ instead of error, but only applies to step
changes in SP1 or SP2 and on transition to local setpoint from remote.

306 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Output Subsystem
The diagram shows the block diagram of the Output subsystem.

Output Subsystem
(Hold OP
P)
WorkingOutput
Mode
PowerFeedforward
WrkOPHigh OPRateUp
TrackOP 0]
[0 to +100 Ch1Out
y = f(u, V Linee)
Rate
Auto Demand Limit [−100 o0
0 to 0]

Power
ManualOP WrkOPLow OPRateDown
splitter Ch 2Deadband NonlinearCooling

Ch2Out
−1

Output selection (including Manual Station)

The source of the output demand is resolved according to which controller mode is
active. In HOLD, the previous Working Output is held. In TRACK, the output demand
is taken from TrackOP. In MANUAL and F_MAN, the output is taken from ManualOP.
In other modes, the output is taken from the control subsystems output.

Output Limiting
The resolved demand is subject to position limiting. There are several different
sources of position limits:

• The master limits, OutputHighLimit and OutputLowLimit.

• The active gain scheduled limits: OutputHigh(n) and OutputLow(n).

• The remote limits, RemoteOPHigh and RemoteOPLow.

• The tune limits (only during auto-tuning), TuneOutputHigh and TuneOutputLow.

The most restrictive limits always take priority. That is to say, the minimum of the
upper limits and the maximum of the lower limits are used. These become the
working output limits, WrkOPHigh and WrkOPLow.

The output limits are always applied in Auto modes. In non-Auto modes such as
Manual, the FallbackValue may override a limit if that limit would help prevent the
FallbackValue being achieved. For example, if the OutputLowLimit is 20% and the
FallbackValue is 0%, then in Auto the working low limit will be 20%, while in Manual it
will be 0%.

The remote output limits are only applied in Auto mode.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 307

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Rate limiting
The working output can be rate limited by setting the two parameters, OPRateUp and
OPRateDown. They are always specified in % per second. Output rate limiting is only
available for PID control channels and should be used only where necessary since it
can significantly degrade process performance.

Power feedforward (line voltage compensation)

Power Feedforward is a feature that compensates for fluctuations in mains supply
voltage. This can be useful for processes being heated by an electrical heater, where
the heater is driven by the controller directly (e.g. via a relay or SSR).

Any fluctuation in line voltage can be immediately compensated for by adjusting the
output power appropriately, thereby attenuating any resultant deviation in PV. Its
effectiveness is illustrated below:

Power Feedforward Enabled Power Feedforward Disabled

Here, it can be seen that enabling power feedforward has greatly reduced the
magnitude of the process disturbance. However, the smaller disturbance persists for
a longer period of time.

Power Feedforward is usually available in mid-range instruments but only where they
are fitted with a ‘high volts’ power supply option. The controller measures its own
power supply input to determine the heater voltage, therefore, it should be powered
from the same supply as the heater itself. It should not be enabled if an intelligent
power controller is driving the heater, since the power controller will itself provide
compensation.

When enabled, power feedforward is applied to the heat channel (channel 1) only
and is active while the controller is in Auto mode. It has no effect in other operating
modes.

308 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Autotuning
The diagram below shows a simplified structure of a relay-based Autotuner.

Autotune Subsystem

Sequencing and analysis

WorkingSP
Tune setpoint

TuneOutputHigh
−100
PV

+100
TuneOutputLow

The function block contains sophisticated autotuning algorithms that can tune the
controller to the process. They work by performing experiments on the plant, by
inducing perturbations, and observing and analysing the response. The autotuning
sequence is described in detail below.

The diagram shows an example of heat/cool Autotune with ‘alternative’ CH2 Tune
Type.
Temperature

A B C D
Power

A B C D

HA033650ENG Issue 1 309

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Time Description

A Autotune Begins
Setting the AutotuneEnable parameter to On and the controller mode to Auto will cause
the autotune to begin.

Before starting an autotune, you should turn off the PID terms that you do not want to use.
For example, setting TD to Off will disable derivative action and the autotuner will
therefore tune for a PI controller. If you do not want any integral, set TI to Off and the
autotuner will tune for a PD controller.

If the cutback thresholds, CBH and CBL, are set to Auto then the autotuner will not
attempt to tune them.

An autotune may be triggered at any time, but it will not begin until the mode goes to
Auto. If autotune is triggered but the controller is not in Auto mode the scrolling message
autotune triggered but cannot run is displayed. In this case put the controller into
Auto mode, the message autotune active will be displayed and the controller will begin
the autotune process. Similarly, autotune will abort if the mode is changed away from
Auto at any time during the tune, including reasons such as sensor status is bad. In this
case it will be necessary to start autotune again.

Note that the PID tuning constants will be written to whichever gain set is active when
tuning completes.
A to B Initial Delay
This period always persists for precisely one minute.

If the PV is already at the WSP then the working output will be frozen. Otherwise, the
output is set to 0 and the process is allowed to drift while some initial measurements are
made.

The target setpoint may be changed during this initial delay, but not after it. You should set
the target setpoint to the operating point at which you would like to tune. Care should be
taken in setting the setpoint, to help to ensure that oscillations of the process will not
damage the process or load. For some processes, it may be necessary to use a setpoint
for tuning purposes that is below the normal operating point.
B Calculate Tune Setpoint
Once the initial delay has elapsed, the tune setpoint is determined. It is calculated by:

If PV = Target SP: Tune SP = Target SP

If PV < Target SP: Tune SP = PV + 0.75(Target SP – PV)

If PV > Target SP: Tune SP = PV − 0.75(PV – Target SP)

Once determined, this tune setpoint will be used for the duration of the autotune and any
changes to the target setpoint will be ignored until the autotune has completed. If you
wish to change the tuning setpoint, abort and restart the autotune.

310 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Time Description

B to C Relay Experiment
The autotuner will now insert a relay into the closed-loop. This establishes the limit-cycle
oscillations in PV.

The relay operates such that:

If PV > SP: OP = minimum.

If PV < SP: OP = maximum.

The minimum and maximum outputs are determined by the various limits. There is also a
small amount of hysteresis, not described, around the relay switching point to help
prevent electrical noise from causing nuisance switching.

The number of oscillations required before moving to the next stage depends on the
controller configuration:

If either channel is configured for VPU, or OnOff control, or if output rate limiting is
enabled, then the ‘Fourier’ autotune algorithm will run. This requires three cycles of
oscillation.

If only PID is configured and there is no output rate limiting, then the ‘PID’ autotune
algorithm will run. Only two cycles of oscillation are required.

There will be an additional half-cycle of oscillation at the beginning of this stage if the
initial PV is above the SP.

Once the required number of cycles is achieved, the algorithm moves to the next stage.
C to D Relative Channel 2 Tuning Experiment
This stage is only used for dual-channel heat/cool configurations. For heat-only or
cool-only, it is skipped.

The purpose of this stage is to determine the relative gain between channel 1 and
channel 2. This is used to set the correct proportional bands. For example, in a heat/cool
process, the heater and the chiller are typically not equally rated, e.g. the heater might be
capable of putting much more energy into the process in a given period of time than the
chiller is capable of removing. This non-linearity needs accounting for and the purpose of
this additional experiment is to collect the necessary information to make that correction.

The type of experiment that is used can be selected with the Ch2TuneType parameter:

The Standard experiment is the default and gives good results for most processes. It will
put the process into an additional cycle of oscillation but instead of applying minimum
output, it will apply 0 output and allow the PV to drift. This option is not available if
TuneAlgo is Fourier.

The Alternative experiment is recommended for processes that do not exhibit significant
losses—for example, a very well-lagged tank or oven. It attempts to control the PV to the
SP and collects data about the process input required to do so. The length of this stage is
equivalent to between 1.5 and 2 oscillation cycles.

The KeepRatio option should only be selected when the relative gain of the two channels
is well known. It causes this stage to be skipped and instead the existing proportional
band ratio will be maintained. So, for example, if you know that the heating channel will
deliver a maximum of 20kW and the cooling channel will deliver a maximum of -10kW,
then setting the proportional bands such that the ratio Ch2PB/Ch1PB = 2 before
autotuning will allow the correct ratio to be maintained.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 311

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Time Description

D Analysis and Completion

The autotune experiments are now complete. Finally, some analysis will be performed on
the collected data and the controller tuning constants will be chosen and written to
whichever gain set is active. This analysis may take a number of seconds, typically less
than 15, during which the output will be frozen.

After the tune has completed, the working setpoint is released and can be modified in the
usual manner. Authority over the output is returned bumplessly to the control algorithms.

Notes:
1. If any stage of the autotune sequence exceeds two hours in duration, the
sequence will timeout and be aborted. The StageTime parameter counts up the
time in each stage.
2. Channels configured for OnOff control cannot be autotuned but they will be
exercised during the experiments if the opposite channel is not OnOff.
3. For VPU channels, it is important that the associated Travel Time parameter is
set as accurately as possible before commencing the autotune.
4. Carbon Potential loops, which have a setpoint in the range 0–2.0% (and other
loops with small setpoint ranges), cannot be autotuned if the proportional band
type is set to ‘Engineering Units’. For these loops, proportional band type should
be set to ‘Percent’ and the RangeHigh and RangeLow set correctly. This allows
autotune to work.

A number of further examples under different conditions are pictured below.

The first shows an example Heat-only Autotune.

Temperature

A B C/D
Power

A B C/D

312 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The second example shows Heat/Cool Autotune with ‘Standard’ Ch2 tune type.

Temperature
Power A B C D

A B C D
The third shows an example of Heat/Cool Autotune from above with output rate
limiting.
Temperature

A B C D
Power

A B C D

HA033650ENG Issue 1 313

Control EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Autotuning multiple zones

Autotune relies completely on the principle of cause and effect. It perturbs the
process and then watches for what the effect will be. It is therefore essential that all
external influences and disturbances are minimized as much as possible during an
autotune.

When autotuning a process that has multiple interacting loops, for example a furnace
with multiple temperature zones, each loop should be autotuned separately. They
should not under any circumstances be autotuned at the same time, since the
algorithms will not be able to ascertain what cause produced what effect. The
procedure below should be followed:

1. Place all loops in manual and set the outputs to the approximate steady state
value for the desired operating point. Allow the process to settle.

2. Enable autotune on a single zone. Allow the tune to complete.

3. After the zone has finished autotuning, allow it to settle out in auto and then place
it back into manual.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each zone.

314 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Digital Communications
Digital Communications (or 'comms' for short) allows the controller to communicate
with a PC or a networked computer system or any type of communications master
using the protocols supplied. Connections to the PC are shown in "Digital
Communications Connections" on page 58. A data communication protocol defines
the rules and structure of messages used by all devices on a network for data
exchange. Communications can be used for many purposes - SCADA packages;
PLCs; data logging for archiving and plant diagnostic purposes; cloning for saving
instrument set ups for future expansion of the plant or to allow a controller to be
replaced by a spare. EPC3000 can have three available communications ports:
Config, Fixed and Option.

Config communications port uses the serial configuration clip to be able to connect to
the device from a PC using iTools software. Comms settings (baud rate, parity, etc.)
for the Config comms is fixed and user will need physical access to the physical
device.

The other two ports, Fixed and Option communications, can be accessed by a PC
using iTools (or any Modbus Master) from a distance without having physical access
to the device via serial (RS232, RS422, RS485) or Ethernet connections. Comms
settings (baud rate, parity, comms address, IP address, subnet, etc.) for Fixed and
Option comms can be configured depending on the network where the device is
installed.

Note: From EPC3000 firmware version v5.xx, default comms configuration

passcodes have been removed and users are prompted to set a password when first
connecting from iTools. Until a password is set, only a limited set of parameters will
be available to read and write via Fixed and Option comms.

NOTICE
COMMS SETTINGS SECURITY
To prevent Fixed and Option comms settings from being changed, rendering the
connection unusable, Fixed and Option comms setting can only be changed using
the front panel HMI or Config comms port using the serial configuration clip via PC
with iTools software (or any Modbus Master).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Serial Communications
EPC3000 supports EI-Bisynch and Modbus RTU serial comms protocols as a slave.
In controllers V4.01 and above, support for a Modbus RTU master has been added
as a chargeable option.

EI-Bisynch
EI-Bisynch is a proprietary Eurotherm protocol based on the ANSI X3.28-2.5 A4
standard for message framing. It is included in the EPC3000 series controller as an
EI-Bisynch slave so that it can replace earlier instruments such as 2000 series.
Despite its name, it is an ASCII based asynchronous protocol. Data is transferred
using 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 315

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EI-Bisynch identifies parameters within an instrument using (usually) two letter

abbreviations for a given parameter, for example, PV for Process Variable, OP for
Output, SP for Setpoint, and so on. The list of supported parameters is given in
"Appendix: EI-BISYNCH Parameters" on page 395.

Further information is available for both protocols in the Series Communications

Handbook part no. HA026230. This may be accessed via www.eurotherm.com.

316 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

EI-Bisynch Limitations
In the case of the detection of read or write message failures the instrument will
respond with the following single character replies:

Write message failure detected: 0x15 (Negative Acknowledge or NAK).

Read message failure detected: 0x04 (End of transmission or EOT).

iTools will display a generic notification "Failed to write data to device" or "Failed to
read data from device".

The actual reason for the error is saved in the mnemonic "EE". This special
mnemonic may then be read to give the status of the last communications
transaction. It is a hex format parameter, whose value corresponds to the following
status and errors:

EE Mnemonic value Description

0 No error

1 Invalid mnemonic

2 Parameter is read only

7 Incorrect message

8 Limit error

Further information on EI-Bisynch may be found in the 2000 Series Communications

manual part number HA026230 available from www.eurotherm.com.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 317

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Modbus RTU
MODBUS (JBUS) Protocol defines a digital communication network to have only one
MASTER and one or more SLAVE devices. Either a single or multi-drop network is
possible. All message transactions are initiated by the MASTER. Eurotherm
instruments communicate using the Modbus RTU binary protocol.

The JBUS protocol is identical in most respects to Modbus protocol - the main
difference being that Modbus uses a 0-based register addressing whereas JBUS
uses 1-based register addressing.

The list of Modbus addresses is available in iTools by opening the browser list.

A full description of the Modbus protocol can be found on www.modbus.org.

In EPC3000 V4.01 and above, Modbus RTU master feature will be available in
addition to the existing Modbus RTU slave.

For Modbus RTU master configuration please refer to Modbus TCP master
configuration.

Serial Comms Parameters

The parameters which follow are applicable to EI-Bisynch and Modbus RTU slave
while only Baud Rate and Parity are applicable to the Modbus RTU master.

Baud Rate
The baud rate of a communications network specifies the speed that data is
transferred between instrument and master. A baud rate of 9600 equates to 9600 Bits
per second. Since a single character requires 8 bits of data plus start, stop, and
optional parity, up to 11 bits per byte may be transmitted. 9600 baud equates
approximately to 1000 Bytes per second. 4800 baud is half the speed - approx. 500
Bytes per second.

In calculating the speed of communications in your system it is often the Latency

between a message being sent and a reply being started that dominates the speed of
the network.

For example, if a message consists of 10 characters (10msec at 9600 Baud) and the
reply consists of 10 characters, then the transmission time would be 20 msec.
However, if the Latency is 20msec, then the transmission time has become 40msec.

Parity
Parity is a method of ensuring that the data transferred between devices has not
been corrupted.

Parity ensures that every single byte in the received message contains the same
number of ones or zeros when it was received as when it was transmitted.

In industrial protocols, there are usually layers of checking to ensure that the first byte
transmitted is good. Modbus protocol applies a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) to
the data to ensure that the package is correct.

Communication Address
On a network of instruments a comms address is used to identify a particular
instrument. Each instrument on a network should have a unique comms address.
Address 255 is reserved for the configuration port.

318 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Comms Delay
In some systems it is necessary to introduce a delay between the instrument
receiving a message and sending its reply. This is sometimes necessary if the line
transceivers require an extended time to switch to tristate.

Ethernet Communications
From firmware versions V4.01 and above EPC3000 series controllers will support an
EtherNet/IP Adapter or a Modbus Master alongside the existing Modbus slave.

Setting Up the Ethernet Module

It is recommended that the communications settings for each instrument are set up
before connecting it to any Ethernet network. This is not essential but network
conflicts may occur if the default settings interfere with equipment already on the
network.

The IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and DHCP enable need to be
configured. This can be done via HMI or the config clip, but not via Option or Fixed
Comms.

Changing any one of these parameters may immediately move the instrument to a
new state. For this reason, it is recommended that such changes are made offline,
before connecting to an Ethernet network.

IP Addresses are usually presented in the form "abc.def.ghi.jkl".

HA033650ENG Issue 1 319

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Ethernet Parameters
The parameters which follow are applicable to Ethernet communications.

AutoDiscovery
The ’AutoDiscovery’ flag set to True (On) implements Bonjour™, which means it is
not necessary to add the EPC3000 controller IP address to the iTools control panel
applet.

Bonjour
Bonjour™ is an implementation of Zeroconf, which allows a plug 'n' play type feel to
instrument connectivity by providing a method of auto discovery of a device on an
Ethernet network and therefore negates the need for network configuration by the
user. It is used to provide an easy route for Ethernet connectivity configuration in the
EPC3000 controller range.

Bonjour™ is released under a terms-of-limited-use license by Apple.

Note: For cybersecurity reasons, the Bonjour™ service is disabled by default, as it

makes it easier for a malicious user to discover and access the controller via the
network. To turn on Bonjour™ auto-discovery, use the auto discovery parameter as
follows.

320 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Turn AutoDiscovery On or Off

When the controller is first switched on from new (or following a Cold Start) the option
to turn AutoDiscovery On or Off is given in the Quick Start codes, see section
"Configure the Communications Protocol" on page 73.

The option to turn AutoDiscovery on/off from the controller HMI may also be made in
Configuration mode.

 
Using the controller buttons: Page , Scroll , Up , Down

1. Enter Configuration level as described in section "To Select Configuration Level"

on page 98.

2. Press the Page button until COmm is shown.

3. Press the Scroll button. If F.Com is shown press the Up button to select O.Com
(Optional communications).

4. Press the Scroll button. mAIN will be displayed.

5. Press the Scroll button again to show EtH (Ethernet).

6. Press the Scroll button again. If NONE is shown use the UP button to select
m.tCP (Modbus TCP).

7. Press the Page button to return to mAIN.

8. Press the Up button to show NWRk.

9. Continue to press the Scroll button until A.DISC is shown.

10. Press the Up or Down button to select Off or On

Note: Make sure that the controller and PC are on the same subnet. At this point it
is possible to communicate with iTools but you must exit configuration level first to
apply configuration changes.

11. Exit configuration level and wait for a few seconds for iTools (version V9.79 or
later) to receive the controller broadcasts.

12. In iTools select ‘Add’. If AutoDiscovery is turned ‘On’ the controller will appear in
the list of devices connected via Ethernet.

Note: The EPC3000 controller will not appear in the list if it is in Configuration
Mode.

For security reasons, however, it may be advisable to turn AutoDiscovery off.

In this case, if AutoDiscovery and DHCP is not used, iTools must be set up for
Ethernet. This is described in the instructions which follow. iTools configuration
package, version V9.79 or later, may be used to configure Ethernet communications.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 321

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Manually Setup the Controller

To allow the iTools Scan function to find devices, they must be manually added to the
iTools Control Panel.

1. Ensure iTools is NOT running before taking the following steps.

2. Open the iTools control panel (Start ' All Programs ' Eurotherm iTools Advanced '
iTools Control Panel).

3. Within the iTools configuration settings select the ‘TCP/IP' tab.

322 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

4. Click the 'Add' button to add a new connection. Type in a name of your choice, eg
EPC3000, and press Add. (Ensure that no duplicate IP address entries are
enabled at the same time).

5. Enter the correct IP address of the device ensuring that the PC IP address is in
the same range as the controller, then click OK.

Note: The controller default address is 192.168.111.222; subnet mask

255.255.255.0.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 323

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

6. Click OK, the entries will appear in the iTools Control Panel.

iTools is now ready to communicate with an instrument at the Host Name/IP Address
configured.

7. Open iTools and press ‘Scan’.

The scan will find devices if they have been added to the iTools Control Panel. (And if
they are in the same range as the IP address of the PC).

IP Mode Settings
It will generally be necessary to consult with your network administrator to determine
if the IP addresses, Subnet mask and Default gateway for the instruments should be
static or dynamically allocated by a DHCP server.

324 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Dynamic IP Addressing
IP addresses may dynamically allocated by a DHCP server on the network. When IP
addresses are dynamically allocated the server uses the instrument MAC address to
uniquely identify them.

To configure dynamic IP addressing, the user must first set the IPMode parameter in
the "Option Comms" list to DHCP.

Once connected to the network and powered, the instrument will acquire its "IP
address", "Subnet Mask" and "Default gateway" from the DHCP Server and display
this information within a few seconds.

If DHCP is active but the DHCP server cannot be contacted then the IP address will
be set to 0.0.0.0.

Similarly, if a valid DHCP IP address lease expires and the server is not contactable
then the IP address will be set to 0.0.0.0.

Note: There will be a time delay (around 30 seconds) before the new address will
appear.

Static IP Addressing
IP addresses may be 'fixed' (’Static’) - meaning the user manually enters the IP
address and SubNet Mask values, which will remain unchanged, before connecting
the instrument to the network.

Within the "Comms.Option.Network" list of the instrument ensure that the "IP Mode"
parameter is set to "Static", then set the IP address and Subnet Mask and Default
gateway as required (and defined by your network administrator).

See section "Network Sub List (nWrk)" on page 153.

To set up an IP address for Ethernet via the front panel

If DHCP is not used the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway addresses
can be set up manually (the MAC addresses are set up in production and are read
only).

The default IP address is 192.168.111.222 and the default subnet mask is

255.255.255.0.

8. From 13 above press the Scroll button to scroll through the Ethernet options. The
Up and Down buttons allow the values to be altered.

9. Scroll through IP.A1, IP.A2, IP.A3, and IP.A4 to set each part of the IP
address, e.g. IP.A1 = 192, IP.A2 = 168, IP.A3 = 111, IP.A4 = 222.

The Subnet mask and Default gateway can be set in a similar way except the MAC
address which is read only.

Default Gateway
The "Comms.Option.Network" list also includes configuration settings for "Default
Gateway". These parameters will be set automatically when DHCP IP mode is used.
When static IP mode is used these settings are only required if the instrument needs
to communicate wider than the local area network- see your network administrator for
the required setting.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 325

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

MAC address display

Each Ethernet module contains a unique MAC address, normally presented as a 12
digit hexadecimal number in the format "aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff".

In EPC3000 controllers MAC addresses are shown as 6 separate decimal values in

the "COMMS" list. MAC1 shows the first pair of digits (example "170"), MAC2 shows
the second pair of digits and so on.

The MAC address is only available for communications port with Ethernet interfaces.
It can be found in the Option Comms list shown in section "Network Sub List (nWrk)"
on page 153.

Broadcast Storm Protection

Broadcast Storm Protection discards all broadcast packets if the broadcast rate
climbs too high. Broadcast Storm and Ethernet Rate Protection are intended to
favour maintaining the control strategy in certain high traffic network environments.

The diagnostic parameters Broadcast Storm and Rate Protection, see section
"Network Sub List (nWrk)" on page 153, which indicates when the protection is
active.

Ethernet Rate Protection

Certain excessive network loads on embedded products have the potential to impact
processor availability to the point that useful control is compromised and the product
restarts as there is no longer CPU to service the device watchdog.

The EPC3000 series controllers incorporate an Ethernet Rate Protection algorithm

which will de-prioritize Ethernet comms in very heavy traffic environments so that the
control strategy continues and the instrument does not watchdog reset.

326 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Protocols
From firmware version V4.01 and above, Modbus TCP master has been added in
addition to the existing Modbus TCP slave in earlier versions.

EtherNet/IP

EtherNet/IP Adapter (slave) is available in firmware versions V3.01 and above. The
controller has been conformance tested to CT15.

EtherNet/IP (Ethernet/Industrial Protocol) is a 'producer-consumer’ communication

system used to allow industrial devices to exchange time-critical data. Such devices
range from simple I/O devices such as sensors/actuators, to complex control devices
such as robots and PLCs. The producer-consumer model allows the exchange of
information between a single sending device (producer) and a large number of
receiving devices (consumers) without having to send data multiple times to multiple
destinations.

EtherNet/IP makes use of the CIP (Common Industrial Protocol), common network,
transport and application layers currently implemented by DeviceNet and ControlNet.
Standard Ethernet and TCP/IP technology is used to transport CIP communications
packets. The result is a common, open application layer on top of Ethernet and
TCP/IP protocols. With EtherNet/IP option enabled, an EPC3000 controller can act
as an EtherNet/IP Adapter (slave) in an EtherNet/IP configured installation. This is a
chargeable feature protected by Feature Security, section "Security Sub-List (SEC)"
on page 197. Note that an EPC3000 controller is NOT available as an EtherNet/IP
Scanner (master).

EPC3000 series controllers, in common with other Eurotherm controllers, have

available a large number of potential parameters but practical systems are
constrained by the total I/O space available in the EtherNet/IP Scanner (master)
being used and by the amount of traffic permissible on the network. The EPC3000
controller implicit IO exchange communications will be limited to a maximum of 64
configurable input and 64 configurable output parameters. A Fieldbus IO Gateway
tool is provided within iTools software to configure the IO exchange parameters
(section "Fieldbus IO Gateway" on page 358.

The EPC3000 controller EtherNet/IP adapter has been conformance tested and
certified by the OVDA (certificate number 11761). It is able to communicate to a
variety of ODVA approved EtherNet/IP Scanners.

EPC3000 Controller EtherNet/IP Features

The EtherNet/IP implementation features include:

• 10/100Mbit, full / half duplex operation: auto sensing.

• Galvanically isolated bus electronics.

• A selectable software option, at configuration.

• 3x Implicit IO messaging connections available.

• 6x Explicit messaging connections available.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 327

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

CIP Object Support

Class (hex) Name

01 Identity Object
02 Message Router Object
04 Assembly Object (64 inputs / 64 outputs <=> EPC3000
Fieldbus I/O Gateway)
06 Connection Manager Object
F5 TCP/IP Interface Object
F6 Ethernet Link Object
44 Modbus object

Setting Up The EtherNet/IP Scanner

This section is included for guidance only and you should refer to the instructions
provided by the manufacturer of the master. The EtherNet/IP Scanner used in the
following example is a CompactLogix L23E QB1B PLC from Allen Bradley.

Prerequisites:
1. FactoryTalk Activation Manager, RSLinx Classic and RSLogix 5000 software
must be installed in your PC.

2. Connect Allen Bradley CompactLogix L23E to PC via serial port.

3. Connect PC, Allen Bradley CompactLogix L23E and EPC3000 controller on the
same local Ethernet network using a hub or a switch.

4. Configure PC and EPC3000 controller to be on the same subnet.

5. Power up CompactLogix L23E with key set to PROG.

328 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Checking Software Licenses:

6. Click on Start/All Programs/Rockwell Software/FactoryTalk Activation/FactoryTalk
Activation Manager (needs Internet connection to verify activation). The
FactoryTalk Activation Manager window opens.

7. Click “Find Available Activations” and make sure that licenses for RSLogix 5000
and RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP are present in the Available Activations table.

Configuration Of PC Interfaces
8. Click on Start/All Programs/Rockwell Software/RSLinx/RSLinx Classic. The
‘RSLinx Classic’ window opens.

9. Click on ‘Communications’ and select ‘Configure Drivers’. When the ‘Configure

Drivers’ window opens, select ‘RS-232 DF1 devices’ in the ‘Available Drive
Types’ pull down menu and click “Add New”.

10. Click OK.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 329

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

11. Select PC Comm Port connection and the Device type connected to the port and
the click Auto-Configure. Make sure that auto-configuration was successful then
click OK.

12. Select ‘EtherNet/IP driver’ in the ‘Available Drive Types’ pull down menu and
click “Add New”.

13. Select “Browse Local Subnet” and select local PC network card to be used to
connect to the EtherNet/IP network then click OK.

330 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

14. PC Serial and EtherNet/IP drivers must now be running. Minimize window.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 331

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configuration Of RSLOGIX 5000 Application

The following describes the configuration of the Compactlogix L23E EtherNet/IP
Scanner network settings using the RXLogix 5000 software:

15. Start the RSLogix 5000 program (from ‘Start/All programs/... /RSLogix 5000).
When the ‘Quick Start’ window opens, close it.

16. In the ‘File’ menu select ‘New’, or click on the ‘New Tool’ icon. The ‘New
Controller’ window opens.

17. Select the relevant PLC from the drop-down menu. Enter a name for the
configuration and click on ‘OK’. After a few seconds, the window opens for the
selected controller.

18. Configure the Ethernet port settings of the CompactLogix L23E by right clicking
on the relevant Ethernet port in the left pane ‘tree’, and select ‘Properties’.

332 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

19. In the Module Properties window, configure the IP address and click OK.

Configure Scanner Connection Settings to the EPC3000

Controller EtherNet/IP Adapter

Method 1 (Without EDS File)

20. Configure the EPC3000 Adapter by creating a new module under the
CompactLogix L23E Ethernet node.

21. Select “Generic Ethernet Module” as module type and click “Create” button.

22. Fill in Module properties with EPC3016 Adapter settings then click OK.

Comm Format (Data - INT)

IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

HA033650ENG Issue 1 333

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Description Assembly Instance Size

Input 100 16 x 16-bit (EPC3000 default)
Output 150 7 x 16-bit (EPC3000 default)
Configuration 199 0 (EPC3000 default)

23. Configure connection properties of the newly created module by right-clicking it

and selecting “Properties”.

24. Set Requested Packet Interval (RPI) using Module Properties “Connection” tab
making sure that it is within 50 to 3200 ms then click OK.

334 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Method 2 (With EDS File)

To install the EPC3000 EDS, proceed as follows:

25. Click on Start/All Programs/Rockwell software/RSLinx/Tools/EDS Hardware

Installation Tool. The ‘EDS Hardware Installation Tool’ window opens.

26. Click Add to open the EDS Wizard window and then select the “Register a single
file” radio button. Browse to the EPC3000 EDS file and then click “Next”.

27. Click “Next” button on the next 3 windows and then click “Finish” on the final
window.

Configure Scanner Connection Settings to the EPC3000 Adapter

28. In the RSLogix 5000 Scanner Program, configure EPC3000 Adapter connection
settings by creating a new module under the CompactLogix L23E Ethernet node.
Right click Ethernet node and select “New Module” from context menu. On the
pop-up window “Select Module Type”. Click “Show Filters” button.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 335

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

29. Filter for Eurotherm devices and then select the EPC3000 device module
required (module installed in the previous section via EDS file) and then click
“Create” button.

30. A “New Module” window will pop up. Click “Change” button to configure the:
Connection type: Exclusive Owner / Input Only / Listen Only
Input Size: Default length of EPC3000 inputs in INT (16 x 16-bit)
Output Size: Default length of EPC3000 outputs in INT (7 x 16-bit)
Then click “OK”.

336 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

31. On the “New Module” window, configure the IP address of the EPC3000
EtherNet/IP adapter. Enter a descriptive name and then click “OK” button.

32. Close the “Select Module Type” window.

Downloading and Running the RSLOGIX 5000 Application to the

Scanner
33. Make sure that the Mode key of the CompactLogix hardware is set to "PROG"
and start download by clicking on the drop-down Offline menu and selecting
“Download”.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 337

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

34. Go Online to the CompactLogix L23E by clicking on the drop-down Offline menu
and selecting “Go Online”.

If there is a problem with the path, use RSLogix 5000>Communications > Who
Active, select AB_DF1 and select “Download”.

35. Now, select Port Configuration tab and configure CompactLogix L23E port
settings making sure that there is no duplication of IP address and it is in the
same subnet as the PC and EPC3016. Then click OK.

36. Switch CompactLogix L23E mode key to “RUN” and the CompactLogix L23E
EtherNet/IP scanner should start connecting to the EPC3000 EtherNet/IP
immediately.

338 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Establishing Communications
EtherNet/IP I/O messaging will commence when the EtherNet/IP network is correctly
cabled and powered, the EtherNet/IP scanner and adapter (EPC3000 controller) are
configured with valid and unique IP addresses in the same subnet and I/O parameter
data definitions are setup correctly.

The EPC3000 Input/Output definitions need to be matched with the EtherNet/IP

Scanner (e.g. PLC) data registers.

Parameters are either INPUT parameters read by the EtherNet/IP Scanner or

OUTPUT parameters written by the EtherNet/IP scanner.

Data Formats
16-bit data read from the EPC3000 controller EtherNet/IP are "scaled integers" and
the value will depend on the resolution of the parameter being read. A 32-bit float
value of 12.34 with resolution 2 will be encoded as 1234 while if the resolution is
changed to 1, it will be encoded as 123.

32-bit float and 32-bit time integers can also be read from the EPC3000 using I/O
exchange when the same parameter is configured in consecutive rows in the
Fieldbus I/O Gateway Input definition table. 32-bit values can also be read using
Explicit messaging via Modbus object when reading from the IEEE region (Modbus
address > 0x8000).

The EDS File

The EtherNet/IP EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) files for EPC3016, EPC3008,
EPC3004 controller are available by going to web site www.eurotherm.com or from
your supplier.

The EDS file is designed to automate the EtherNet/IP network configuration process
by defining the required device parameter information. Software configuration tools
utilize the EDS files to configure an EtherNet/IP network.

Notes:
1. There is a separate EDS file for each of the EPC3000 controller variants
(EPC3016, EPC3008 and EPC3004 controllers).
2. Selected parameters may be configured to exchange Input and Output data
across a network. These may be configured using iTools, see section "Fieldbus
IO Gateway" on page 358.

Troubleshooting
No Communications:

• Check the cabling carefully and ensure that the RJ45 connectors are fully
plugged into the sockets.

• Confirm that EtherNet/IP is available and enabled in the EPC3000 controller by

setting the Comms>Option>Main>Protocol to EipAndModTCP(12) in iTools or
EIP.m via HMI. If the enumeration is not available from the Protocol parameter,
then the controller does not have the EIP option available, contact your local
distributor.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 339

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

• Check that the EPC3000 controller network settings, 'IP Address', 'Subnet Mask'
and 'Gateway' in the 'Comms' list are correct and unique for the network
configuration in use, and that the EPC3000 controller and the EtherNet/IP
Scanner (master) are in the same subnet.

• Ensure that the configured EtherNet/IP Scanner Input and Output data length
matches the data length of the EPC3000 Adapter Input and Output definitions
configured using the Fieldbus I/O Gateway Editor. If the master is attempting to
read (input) or write (output) more or less data than has been registered on the
EPC3000 Adapter, using the iTools Fieldbus I/O Gateway Editor, the EPC3000
controller Adapter will refuse the connection.

340 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

BACnet
BACnet protocol is designed to exchange information for automation and control
applications in buildings. BACnet is available in controllers with firmware versions
V3.01 and above.

In EPC3000 series controllers, protocol selection is protected by feature security,

section "Feature passwords" on page 221. It is mutually exclusive with EtherNet/IP
but can coexist with Modbus TCP slave on the same internet connection.

Note: BACnet MS/TP is not supported in EPC3000 series controllers.

BACnet Objects
In BACnet, objects are collections of properties, each representing some item of
information. In addition to standard defined properties, objects may include
vendor-defined properties as long as they function in accordance with the standard.
BACnet also defines the expected behavior from each property for that object. What
makes the object-oriented approach work is that every object and every property as
defined by the system is accessible in exactly the same manner.

BACnet Services
The process of reading or writing to a property is what BACnet calls a service.
Services are the methods used by any BACnet device when it communicates with
another BACnet device, including retrieving information, transmitting information or
communicating an action. The standard defines a wide range of services for
accessing objects and their properties.

Examples of services required are:

Application Service Description Service Type

ReadProperty Request the value of one property of a Object Access
BACnet object

WriteProperty Modify value of a single property (if Object Access

permitted)

DeviceCommunicationControl Allows an operator to take device Remote Device

communications on or off-line. With support Management
for optional password.

Who-Is Asks about the presence of specified BACnet Remote Device

devices Management

Who-Has Asks about the presence of specified Objects Remote Device

either by type and instance or by name Management

BACnet Object Mapping

Please refer to the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement, document
number HA033299, for further details. This document is available from
www.eurotherm.com.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 341

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configuring BACnet
BACnet is configured using the parameters listed in the Comms.Option.BACnet list
shown below. BACnet parameters are also available on the instrument HMI. The
description of these is given in section "BACnet Sub List (b.NEt)" on page 156.

The Device Name is fixed by the Instrument Type parameter found in the
"Information Sub-List (INFO)" on page 194.

Read/Write Access to Internal Modbus Registers

Read/write access to any internal Modbus register is provided using pairs of BACnet
objects named ‘User Parameters’ as shown below.

30 User Parameter pairs (numbered 1 to 30) are supported.

This functionality allows the BACnet user to access any internal parameter that is
available in the standard Modbus address space. Pairs of values as shown in the
table above are implemented as two BACnet Analog Value objects. The BACnet
client (typically a BMS) will write the first value with the Modbus address for the data
parameter required as shown in the figure below. The user may obtain the Modbus
address from iTools.

342 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The BMS client may then read or write to the data referenced by this address

Note: The data value will always be represented over BACnet as a floating point,
even if the internal source data is of a different type (e.g. Bool). Strings are not
accessible using this mechanism.

Note: Values written to device parameters via BACnet may be overwritten (with
different values) internally by the device firmware under certain device configurations.
Due to this, when the values of the BACnet objects are read back, they may be
different to the value requested via the preceding BACnet write command.

Foreign Device Registration

A ‘foreign device’ has a different subnet address from the devices on the BACnet
network that it wishes to join. The device must register with a BBMD (BACnet
Broadcast Management Device) which then forwards broadcast messages allowing
full participation in the BACnet network.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 343

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Modbus Master

Overview
Modbus Master feature is available over serial (Modbus RTU) and over Ethernet
(Modbus TCP). Over Ethernet, it is mutually exclusive with EtherNet/IP but is
available in conjunction with Modbus TCP slave.

Modbus TCP Master is protected by feature security.

Slave profiles for Eurotherm products (EPCx (EPC3000 & EPC2000 generic), ePack,
3200, and ePower devices are supported for ease of configuration.

A maximum of three Modbus slave devices can be configured with timeouts and
retries configurable per slave. The slaves can be 3x Modbus TCP slaves, 3x RTU
slaves or any combination of RTU and TCP Modbus slaves.

A maximum of 32 data points are supported to be shared among the three slave
devices. These data points can be configured for writing to or reading from a
configured Modbus slave.

Modbus Master Configuration

Modbus Master can be configured using the EPC3000 HMI or via a PC using iTools
software.

Once the Modbus Master feature is enabled via Feature Security,

Comms.Option.Main.Protocol must be set to ModMstAndSlv(15) and/or
Comms.Fixed.Main.Protocol set to ModbusMaster(3). The instrument must then be
restarted to reinitialise comms settings and make the ModbusMaster function block
available.

Modbus Master configuration is divided into two parts:

• Setting up the Modbus Master slave(s)

• Defining the required slave data that will be read from or written to the configured
slave(s).

Notes:
1. Slave profiles are supported for some Eurotherm controllers. This simplifies the
configuration and minimizes the need to know detailed data information, for
example the Modbus address, data type and resolution for frequently used
parameters.
2. The Network configuration of the Modbus TCP Master is the same as the
Modbus TCP Slave and can be found in Comms.Option.Network. Confirm that
the IP address and subnet mask are configured correctly to be able to
communicate with Modbus slave devices within the subnet. If the slave device is
outside the subnet then the Comms.Option.Network.DefaultGateway must be
configured correctly.

344 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

HA033650ENG Issue 1 345

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Configuring Modbus Slaves

To configure communications to Modbus slaves, proceed as follows:
1. From iTools, place the instrument in Config mode and open
ModbusMaster>Slave1>Main to configure the first slave. Make sure that
the Network parameter is set to Ethernet(1) because we want to
communicate to the slave using the Option Comms Ethernet interface.
It can also be Serial(2) if we want to communicate with a slave through a
serial interface.

2. Configure the slave’s IP Address and unit ID.

346 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

3. You can now check if the device is online via the “Search device”
parameter by setting its value to “Yes”. The search status should change to
“Searching(0)”.

4. If the Modbus slave is online then the search result will be “Available(1)”
otherwise the result will be “Unreachable(3). If it is a Eurotherm instrument
with a supported profile, the “Profile” parameter will display the Modbus
slave’s profile otherwise it will display “3rdParty(0)”.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 347

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

5. We will now configure a second slave but this time using the Fixed comms
serial interface making sure that we select “Serial(2)” enumeration for the
Network parameter and set the correct Modbus slave address.
Note: Serial(2) can only be selected if Comms.Fixed.Main.Protocol is set to
ModbusMaster(3).

6. You can now check if the device is online via the “Search device”
parameter by setting its value to “Yes”. The search status should change to
“Searching(0)”.

7. If the Modbus slave is online then the search result will be “Available(1)”
otherwise the result will be “Unreachable(3). If it is a Eurotherm instrument
with a supported profile, the “Profile” parameter will display the Modbus
slave’s profile otherwise it will display “3rdParty(0)”.

348 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Note: Changes to the slave profile will default previous data configured to be read
from or written to the slave.

8. For the third slave we can configure a serial slave with an unsupported
profile by configuring the Modbus slave address and then starting
“SearchDevice”.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 349

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Data Configuration for Cyclic Read/Writes

To configure data for cyclic read/writes:
1. A maximum of 32 data points can be configured. These data points can be
shared among all three slaves or it can be used for a single slave.
2. For a slave with a known profile, a data read can be configured by
selecting the slave and then select the required parameter from the
Parameter list drop-down box. The register address, function code, data
type and priority for the parameter will be automatically configured. You still
have the option to change the recommended priority.

3. To configure a write for a known profile, select parameter to write from the
Parameter List drop-down box.
Note: The ‘Value’ parameter is usually wired from the source parameter of the
values to be written to the slave.

350 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

4. For a parameter that is not on the Parameter List. The data configuration
has to be done manually. Select “UserDefined” from the Parameter List
and configure the register address, function code, the data type and
priority of data read/write.

5. For a third party slave (unsupported profile), select “UserDefined” from the
Parameter List drop-down and configure the register address, function
code, the data type and priority of data read/write.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 351

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

6. To start cyclic communications to the slaves. Take the Modbus Master

device out of Config mode and set the Online parameter for each of the
slaves.

7. The data read and write status should succeed if the wiring, comms
configuration, slave configuration and data configuration are correct. The
PV read will be shown in the Data PV parameter.

352 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Data Configuration for Acyclic Data Writes

To configure data for Acyclic Data writes:
1. Place the Modbus Master device in Configuration mode.
Note: Cyclic communications to all slaves will stop in Configuration mode. We can
only set the slave online parameter in Operator mode.
2. For a supported slave profile select the slave and parameter to write to as
well as the value to write and then set the Priority to “Acyclic(3)”.

3. To send a write request, set the “Send” parameter. The Status will go to
“Pending(13)” briefly before going to “Success” when the parameter has
been written. If the write has failed then the Status will show the reason for
the failure.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 353

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

4. For an unsupported slave profile (Third party) select the slave, select
“UserDefined” from the Parameter List drop-down and configure the
register address, function code (must be a write), the data type, the value
to write and then set the Priority to “Acyclic(3)”.

5. To send a write request, set the “Send” parameter. The Status will go to
“Pending(13)” briefly before going to “Success” when the parameter has
been written. If the write has failed then the Status will show the reason for
the failure.

354 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Accessing Modbus Master Data from Modbus Indirection Table

To allow efficient reads from and writes to Modbus Master data, CommsTab Function
Block can be used to map Modbus Master data into a contiguous block of Modbus
addresses in the range:

15360(0x3C00) to 15615(0x3CFF)

1. Modbus Master data can be auto-configured to be accessible from the

Modbus Indirection table by placing the Modbus Master device into
Configuration mode and setting the UseCommsTable parameter from any
one of the slave configuration window and then taking the Modbus Master
device out of Configuration mode to initialize the CommsTab Function
Block settings.

2. In Operator mode, the CommsTab Function Block should now show every
configured Modbus Master data. The user can then change Native,
ReadOnly and Minutes parameters from default to configure how the data
is presented from the Modbus indirection table.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 355

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

3. Screenshots below show Modbus Master data auto-configured to appear

at the Modbus Indirection table and the values read by a 3rd party Modbus
Master from our Modbus Master device:

Third party Modbus TCP Modbus Master device

Master read data data
0x0686 16.70
0x0D7A 34.50
0x1630 56.80

Note: There are 32 parameters available for configuration in the CommsTab

Function Block, one for each Modbus Master data. It is left to the user to partition the
Modbus Indirection table for reads and writes for efficient data access.

356 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Comms Indirection Table

EPC3000 controllers make a fixed set of parameters available over digital
communications using Modbus addresses. This is known as the SCADA Table. The
SCADA Modbus address area is 0 to 15615 (0x3CFF).

Commstab function block allows a Source parameter value to be

available(read/write) from a Destination Modbus address.

The following parameters however cannot be set as a Destination Modbus address:

• Instrument Number

• Instrument Type

• Instrument Firmware Version

• Company ID

• Feature Security Words

The following contiguous Modbus addresses have been reserved for use by the
Commstab function block. By default the addresses have no associated parameters:

Modbus Range (Decimal) Modbus Range (Hex)

15360 to 15615 3C00 to 3CFF

HA033650ENG Issue 1 357

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Fieldbus IO Gateway
The EPC3000 controller contains a large number of parameters and some protocols,
such as EtherNet/IP, need a way of configuring a few selected parameters to
exchange Input and Output data across a network. The Fieldbus I/O tool available in
iTools allows the configuration of an Input and Output table definition which can be
used by the relevant protocol for I/O communications.

Select the 'Fieldbus I/O Gateway' tool from the lower toolbar, and an editor screen
will appear similar to that shown below:

By default, the Input and Output Definition tables are configured with the most
frequently used parameters.

There are two tabs within the editor, one for the definition of Inputs, and the other for
Outputs. 'Inputs' are values read from the EPC3000 controller and sent to the
EtherNet/IP scanner (master), for example, alarm status information or measured
values, i.e. they are readable values.

Note: The Input and Output buffer should not be empty. At least one parameter
should be selected so the data cyclic exchange functions correctly.

'Outputs' are values received from the master and are written to the controller, for
example, setpoints written from the master to the controller. Input and Output
parameter values are read and written cyclically. The frequency of the I/O data
exchange is determined by the Requested Packet Interval (RPI) which is set by the
EtherNet/IP master.

358 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Digital Communications EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The EPC3000 controller EtherNet/IP adapter (slave) supports an RPI range from 50 -
3200 milliseconds. The procedure for selecting and replacing variables is the same
for both input and output tabs. Double click the row to be edited in the input or output
table and select the variable to assign to it. A pop-up provides a browser from which
a list of parameters can be selected. Double click the parameter to assign it to the
selected row. Note that you should assign inputs and outputs contiguously, as a 'not
wired' entry will terminate the list even if there are assignments following it.

When the definition tables are populated with the variables required, note how many
'wired' entries are included in the input and output areas as this will be needed when
setting up the EtherNet/IP scanner (master). Input and Output Parameters are 16 bits
(2 bytes) each. In the example above, there are 16 input parameters (32 bytes) and 7
output parameters (14 bytes), so a total of 46 bytes of data. Make a note of this
number, as it is required when setting the I/O length when configuring the EtherNet/IP
scanner (master). Note that 32-bit float and 32-bit time parameters can also be
configured on the Input and Output tables by adding the same parameter in
consecutive rows.

Note: All the parameters in the Input table are assumed to be readable and Output
table writeable. If going through the Input/Output tables during I/O messaging a
parameter is not readable/writeable, the read/write aborts. Read parameter values
are sent along with 0 values for parameters that were not read. If the table read or
write is aborted, the EtherneNet/IP diagnostic parameter
Comms>Option>EtherNetIP>EIP_ModuleStatus will show a value of
ErrorDetected(3).

Once the changes have been made to the Input and Output definitions, they must be
downloaded to the EPC3000 controller.

This is done with the button on the top left of the Fieldbus I/O Gateway Editor marked

Note: iTools can place the EPC3000 controller in and out of Configuration mode
while downloading Fieldbus I/O Gateway changes.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 359

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Input Linearization (LIN16)

The linearization block converts an analog input into an analog output through a
user-defined table. This linearization table consists of a series of 16 points defined by
input breakpoints (In1 to In16) and output values (Out1 to Out16). In other words, the
linearization block implements a piecewise linear curve (a connected sequence of
line segments) defined by a series of input coordinates (In1 to In16) and associated
output coordinates (Out1 to Out16).

Two of the most typical applications for the LIN16 function block are:

1. Custom linearization of a sensor input

2. Adjustment of the process variable to account for differences introduced by the

overall measurement system or to derive a different process variable.

Custom Linearization
This application allows the user to create their own linearization table.

In the following example the LIN16 block is placed between the Loop block and an
Analog Input set to linear and Linearization Type to mV, V, mA, Ohms, etc. In the
following example the AI block is set to mV.

The following graph shows a typically increasing linearization curve. The decision of
the actual number of points depends of the required accuracy in converting the input
electrical signal into the required output value: the higher the number of points, the
higher accuracy can be obtained; conversely a lower number of points requires less
time to configure the function block. If less than 16 points are used, set the
'NumPoints' parameter to the required number. Points not selected will then be
ignored, the curve will continue in a straight line fit to the levels set in 'OutHighLimit'
or 'OutLowLimit' and the 'CurveForm' output will be 'Increasing'.

360 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Example 1: Custom Linearization - Increasing Curve

OutHighLimit

Out6=250

Out5=150

Out [deg]
Out4=0

Out3=-100

Out2=-200

Out1=-250

OutLowLimit

In [mV]
=- 0
49

50

10
2 .4

.0

.1
5.

3.

0.
In -6

=0

=6
=-

=1
=

5
1

In

In

6
In

In

In
To Setup the Parameters
1. Set the appropriate Fallback type and value, Output units and resolution (editable
only in Config mode); Units and resolution of the input and the input breakpoints
will be derived by the source wired to 'In'.

2. Set the ‘OutHighLimit’ and ‘OutLowLimit’ to restrict the output of the linearization
curve. The ‘OutHighLimit’ must be greater than the ‘OutLowLimit’.

3. Set the 'NumPoints' (6 in this example) to the required number of points for the
linearization table. This is an important and required step and the effects of
skipping it are reported in the Example 2.

4. Enter values of the first Input breakpoint ‘In1’ and Output value ‘Out1’ .

5. Continue with the remaining Input breakpoints and Output values.

6. Wire the ‘IntBal’ parameter to the ‘Loop.Main.IntBal’ parameter. This prevents

any proportional or derivative kick in the controller output when any change
occurs in the LIN16 configuration parameters.

Points on the linearization curve can be derived from reference tables or can be
found by associating the measurements of an external reference (e.g. temperature in
degrees Celsius) to the AI electrical readings (e.g. mV or mA).

The iTools view reproduced below shows how the parameters are set up in LIN block
1 for the above example. The list corresponds to the parameters shown on the
controller HMI, see section "Linearization Block Parameters" on page 205.
Parameter help is also available by right clicking the parameter in the iTools list.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 361

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The function block will automatically skip points that do not follow strictly
monotonically increasing order of the 'In' coordinates. If at least one point has been
skipped the 'CurveForm' parameter will show 'SkippedPoints'. If no valid interval is
found the 'CurveForm' parameter will show 'NoForm' and the Fallback strategy will be
applied. Other conditions when the Fallback strategy is applied are input source bad
status (e.g. sensor break or sensor over-range) and calculated LIN16 output
over-range (i.e. less than OutLowLimit or greater than InHighLimit).

362 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Example 2: Custom Linearization - Skipped Points Curve

If points defaulted to zero have not been disabled, by reducing 'NumPoints', - AND
assuming that at least one of the previous input breakpoints is positive (see the curve
below) - then those points will be automatically skipped. The output characteristics
will be the same as those obtained by disabling the points defaulted to zero but the
'CurveForm' will be 'SkippedPoints'.

OutHighLimit

Out [deg] Out5=16

Out4=8

Out3=2

Out2=1.5
Out1=-3
OutLowLimit

In [mV]
3

=0
1

0
=1
=-

=-

6=
=-

5
1

n1
3

In

In
In

In

In

..I
6.
In
In1 to In5 will be used. In6 to In16 will be ignored. ‘CurveForm’ will be ‘SkippedPoints’

HA033650ENG Issue 1 363

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

However, when the 'CurveForm' parameter is 'SkippedPoints' (because the number

of points 'NumPoints' has not been reduced to the required set) it is not guaranteed
that the output characteristics will be increasing or decreasing. In fact, for example, if
the input breakpoints are all negative and the final points are zero, then the first
"zero" point will be included in the characteristics - see the following picture.
Therefore, always set 'NumPoints' to the required value in order to get the expected
sensor linearization curve type - increasing, decreasing or free form.

OutHighLimit

Out5=16
Out [deg]

Out4=8

Out3=2

Out6,...,Out16=-0
Out2=-1.5
Out1=-3
OutLowLimit

In [mV]
4
5

=0
3

1
=-
=-

=-
=-

=-

6
2
1

n1
In
In

In

In

In

..I
...
6.
In
In1 to In5 will be used as well as In6, possibly resulting in a not expected curve.
In7, ..., In16 will be ignored. CurveForm will be SkippedPoints.

364 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Example 3: Custom Linearization - Decreasing Curve

The curve may also be a decreasing form as shown below.

OutHighLimit
Out1=20

Out2=0

Out [deg] Out3=-20

Out4=-30

Out5=-40

Out6=-50
OutLowLimit

In [Ohms]
In =12

In 0
7

77

37

72
=4

=9

=1

=3

6
6=
1
2

3
In

In
In

In
The procedure to setup the parameters is the same as in the previous example.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 365

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Adjustment of the Process Variable

This application allows the user to compensate for known inaccuracies introduced by
the overall measurement system. This not only includes the sensor but also the
overall measurement chain. Furthermore, this can also be used to derive a different
process variable, for instance, a temperature measured in a different place from
where the actual sensor is positioned. The adjustment is made directly on the value,
and in the units, of the process variable measured by the controller.

The process variable can be adjusted in different operating conditions (e.g. different
temperatures), by using the LIN16 multiple point adjustment curve: this extends the
simple PV Offset feature present in the AI block, which just adds or subtracts a single
value to the measured PV in all operating conditions.

Two alternative configurations can be used:

In the first case the LIN16 table contains the process variable values ‘In1’ to ‘In16’,
measured by the controller, and the reference values, ‘Out1’ to ‘Out16’, measured by
an external reference.

An example is shown below. The same setup procedure detailed before also applies
here apart from the different configuration of the AI block. As shown in the graph and
in the wiring diagram, the units of both the input and the output of LIN16 are absolute
temperatures.

OutHighLimit
Out7=51

Out6=44
Out [deg]

Out5=29

Out4=17
Out3=13

Out2=2

Out1=-12

OutLowLimit

In [deg]
10

=0

50
0
=1

=2

=4
=3
=-

7=
2
In

In
1

5
In

In

In
In

In

366 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

In the second case, for the same application, the LIN16 table stores the offsets
between the process variable values measured in the controller and a Math block, set
to Add, placed between the Analog Input (AI) and the Loop block. The adjustment is
made by adding the offset calculated by the LIN16 block to the measured process
variable. In the case of temperature adjustment (and differently from the previous
case) the output units of LIN16 should be set to relative temperature. This is in order
to select the correct conversion equation when a temperature units change is applied
to the offsets (e.g. from degrees Celsius to Fahrenheit).

Because offsets do not follow in general a continuously increasing or decreasing

trend, then the ‘CurveForm’ parameter will be ‘FreeForm’, ‘Increasing’ or
‘Decreasing’ depending on their values: see the following graph as an example of a
free form offset curve.

OutHighLimit

Out6=4

Out3=3
Out [deg]

Out2=2

Out7=1

Out5=-1

Out1=-2

Out4=-3

OutLowLimit

In [deg]
10

=0

50
=1

=2

=3

=4

7=
=-

2
In

In
1

In

In

In

In
In

Both the two above mentioned configurations provide the control Loop function block
with the same adjusted PV. The values are reported in table for the two examples.
The high values of the offsets are only to accentuate in the pictures the action of the
adjustment.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 367

Input Linearization (LIN16) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Input Output values: Alternative output values:

Breakpoints absolute temperature relative temperature
-10 deg -12 deg -2 deg

0 deg 2 deg 2 deg

10 deg 13 deg 3 deg

20 deg 17 deg -3 deg

30 deg 29 deg -1 deg

40 deg 44 deg 4 deg

50 deg 51 deg 1 deg

368 HA033650ENG Issue 1

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

User Calibration
The controller is calibrated during manufacture using traceable standards for every
input range. It is, therefore, not necessary to calibrate the controller when changing
ranges. Furthermore, the use of a continuous automatic zero correction of the input
ensures that the calibration of the instrument is optimized during normal operation.

To comply with statutory procedures such as the Heat Treatment Specification

AMS2750, the calibration of the instrument can be verified and re-calibrated if
considered necessary in accordance with the instructions given in this chapter.

For example AMS2750 states:- "Instructions for calibration and recalibration of "field
test instrumentation" and "control monitoring and recording instrumentation" as
defined by the NADCAP Aerospace Material Specification for pyrometry AMS2750E
clause 3.3.1 (3.2.5.3 and sub clauses)" Including Instruction for the application and
removal of offsets defined in clause 3.2.4.

User calibration allows the controller to be calibrated at any part of its range (not just
span and zero) or to allow for fixed known measuring offsets such as sensor
tolerances.

Note: The RSP option module in the EPC3016 can only be calibrated at high and
low points (4mA, 20mA, 0V, 10V) due to backwards compatibility. Calibrating at other
values may be unsuccessful, causing the RSP module to revert to Factory
Calibration.

Factory calibration is stored within the controller and can be returned to at any time.

In some cases it is only required to calibrate the controller itself, however, it is often
necessary to compensate for tolerances in the sensor and its connections as well.
This is particularly true for temperature measurement which uses, typically,
thermocouple or PRT sensors. In the latter case this may be done using an ice cell or
hot bath or dry block calibrator. The different methods are described in the following
sections

Controller only Calibration

To Calibrate the Analog Input

This can be done through the HMI or using iTools. The following points should be
observed:

• Place the controller into Operator Level 3 (or Configuration level).

• Allow at least 10 minutes for the controller to settle after switching on.

• Connect the input of the controller to a millivolt source. If the controller is

configured for thermocouple ensure that the millivolt source is set to the correct
CJC compensation for the thermocouple in use and that the correct
compensating cable is used.

• If the input to be calibrated is mV, mA or volts the measurement will be linear mV,
mA or volts. If it is configured for thermocouple or RTD the measurement will be
in degrees in accordance with the instrument configuration.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 369

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Using iTools
Open the Instrument list and select the Cal tab.

Status will show ‘Factory’ if user calibration has not been carried out before.

To Start User Calibration

Click the ‘Mode’ parameter and select ‘Start’.

The Mode will change to ’Low’

1. In ‘CalValue’ enter a value which represents the low reading required on the
controller display, in this case 0.00.

2. Set the mV source to 0.00mV. If the input is a thermocouple make sure that the
mV source is set to compensate for the type of thermocouple configured. It is not
necessary to calibrate for other thermocouple types.

3. In ‘Mode’ select ‘SetLow’. This will calibrate the controller to the selected input
mV (0.00). Discard will return to Factory calibration.

The ‘Mode’ will change to ‘High’

1. In ‘CalValue’ enter a value which represents the high reading required on the
controller display, in this case 300.00

2. Set the mV source to the correct input level. If the input is a thermocouple this will
be the mV equivalent to 300.00°C. It is not necessary to calibrate for other
thermocouple types.

3. In ‘Mode’ select ‘SetHigh’. This will calibrate the controller to the selected input
mV. Discard will return to Factory calibration.

370 HA033650ENG Issue 1

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

The ‘Status’ and ‘Mode’ will show ‘Adjusted’ which indicates that the controller has
been calibrated by the user.

It may be found useful to open the AI1 browser list when carrying out the calibration
since the PV can be read directly during the calibration procedure. This also allows
the input measurement settling to be viewed during the calibration process.

Note: If, at the end of a calibration process, the calibration has been unsuccessful
the Status will return to Factory and the Mode will show ‘Unsuccessful’ (u.suc)

To Return to Factory Calibration

In ‘Mode’ drop down select ‘Discard’.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 371

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Two Point Offset

A two point offset enables the controller display to be offset by different amounts at
the low end of the scale and at the high end of the scale. The basic calibration of the
controller is unaffected but the two point offset provides a compensation for sensor or
inter-connection errors. The diagrams below show that a line is drawn between the
low and high offsets values. Any readings above and below the calibration points will
be an extension of this line. For this reason it is good practice to calibrate with the
two points as far apart as possible.

Display
reading High offset
Factory
calibration

Low offset
Electrical input

The procedure is exactly the same as shown in the previous section. For the
minimum input set the ‘CalValue’ to the reading required on the controller display as
shown in the Low offset in the diagram above.

Similarly, for the maximum input set the ‘CalValue’ to the reading required on the
controller display as shown in the High offset in the above diagram.

Note: A ‘PvOffset’ parameter is available in the Analog Input list which provides a
fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the process variable. This is not part of
the User Calibration procedure but applies a single offset over the full display range
of the controller and can be adjusted in Level 3. It has the effect of moving the curve
up a down about a central point as shown in the example below:-

Display
reading

Factory
calibration

Fixed offset

Electrical input

372 HA033650ENG Issue 1

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Using the Controller HMI

The procedure is the same as using iTools. Observe the precautions listed in "To
Calibrate the Analog Input" on page 369.

The example below shows a step by step procedure using the controller HMI. In this
example a two point offset is applied

Operation Action Display Notes

In Level 3 or
Configuration CAL
level select the
Instrument List
S. list
then CAL S.List
Select the Analog If the MODE shows ’AdJ.d’
input AI.1 1. Press  to until the IdLE (adjusted) select ’diSC’
Mode parameter is (discard). This returns the
displayed
mode controller to Factory
Calibration.
Select Start The display will change to Lo
2. Press or to strt
select
mode Lo
mode
Set the mV source to the input value representing the required offset. In this example +1.80mV
Enter the value of In this example the controller
the reading 3. Press  to scroll to 0.0 display will read 0.00 for an
required on the C.val input of +1.80 mV
controller display c. val
for an input of 4. Press or to
1.80mV
enter the value
Scroll back to Lo The low calibration point will
5. Press  Scroll back to Set.L be entered and the display will
Lo change to Hi
mode
6. Press or to Hi
SEt.L
mode
Set the mV source to 17.327. This is the offset value (+1.00mv) at which a type J thermocouple is
required to read 300.0 (in this example).
Enter the value of The display will read 300.0OC
the reading 7. Press  to scroll to 300.0 for an input of 17.327mv (an
required on the C.val offset of +1.000 mV)
controller display
c. val
for an input of 8. Press or to
17.327mV.
enter the value
Scroll back to Hi The high calibration will be
9. Press  Scroll back to Set.Hi entered and the display will
Hi changeAdJ.d. showing that the
mode controller has been calibrated
10. Press or to by the user
SEt.H
AdJ.d
mode
To return to Factory calibration select diSc (discard) in place of Adj.d.
If the calibration is unsuccessful the controller will revert to Factory Cal.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 373

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Calibration using a Dry Block or Equivalent

A dry block, ice cell or hot bath are heated or cooled to a specific temperature and
accurately maintained at that temperature. Calibration is a comparison between two
devices. The first device is the unit to be calibrated, often called the unit under test.
The second device is the standard, which has a known accuracy. Using the standard
as a guide, the unit under test is adjusted until both units display the same results
while exposed to the same temperature. Using this method the tolerance of the
temperature sensor, CJC, etc is included in the calibration.

The procedure is essentially the same as that already described but the millivolt
source is replaced by the temperature sensor under test.

374 HA033650ENG Issue 1

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Calibrate a Voltage or Current Analog Output

Using the Controller HMI

The procedure is generally the same as for the Analog input except it requires the
output to be connected to a voltage or current meter.

In this example the output to be calibrated is OP2.

Voltmeter
2A (or
Copper cables
2B ammeter)
Controller

Operation Action Display Notes

In Level 3 or
Configuration level CAL
select the Instrument
List then CAL S.List
S. list
Select the Analog If MODE shows ‘AdJ.d’
output dC.1 (2 or 3) 1. Press  until the IdLE (adjusted) select ‘diSC’
Mode parameter is (discard). This returns the
displayed
mode controller to Factory Cal.
Select Start The display will change to Lo
2. Press or  strt
to select
mode Lo
mode
Read the DC output on the meter. For a voltage output, this should read 2.00 volts. (For a mA output this
should read 4.00mA). If, for example, the voltage reading is 1.90V, enter this value - the instrument
works out the difference as part of the calibration process.
Enter the meter In this example the user
reading, e.g. 1.9V 3. Press  to scroll 1.9 calibrated output will output 2V
to C.val instead of 1.9V
c. val
4. Press or
to enter the value
Scroll back to Lo The low calibration point will
5. Press  Scroll Set.L be entered and the display will
back to Lo change to Hi
mode
6. Press or  Hi
to SEt.L
mode
As above read the DC output on the meter. For a voltage output, this should read 10.00 volts. (For a mA
output this should read 20.00mA). If the voltage reading is 9.80V, enter this value into the C.VAL
parameter as shown below.
Enter the meter In this example the user
reading e.g. 9.80V 7. Press  to scroll 9.8 calibrated output will output
to C.val 10V instead of 9.8V
c. val
8. Press or
to enter the value
Scroll back to Hi The high calibration will be
9. Press  Scroll Set.Hi entered and the display will
back to Hi changeAdJ.d.
mode
10. Press or  AdJ.d
to SEt.Hi mode
To return to Factory calibration select diSc (discard) in place of Adj.d.
If the calibration is unsuccessful the controller will revert to Factory Cal.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 375

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Using iTools
Open the Instrument list and select the Cal tab.

Assuming that user calibration has not been carried out before the Status will show
Factory.

In ‘Mode’ select ‘Start’. The Mode parameter will change to ‘Low’.

1. Read the DC output on the meter. For a voltage output, this should read 2.00
volts. (For a mA output this should read 4.00mA). If the voltage reading is 1.90V,
enter this value, into the C.VAL parameter as shown below.

2. Change ‘Mode’ to ‘SetLo’. The new cal value will be stored and the ‘Mode’ will
change to ‘High’.

Repeat Step 1 above for the High Calibration point entering the required meter
reading for the high calibration point.

The ‘Mode’ parameter will now show ‘Adjusted’ signifying that calibration has been
adjusted by the user.

376 HA033650ENG Issue 1

User Calibration EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

To Calibrate the Current Transformer

The procedure is similar to the calibration of the Analog Input as described in section
"Using iTools" on page 370.

It is recommended to use a DC current source connected as shown in the diagram.

That is the +ve terminal of the source connected to ‘C’ and the -ve terminal of the
source to ‘CT’.

DC Current Source

CT -
Copper cables
C +
Controller

1. Connect a current source to the current transformer terminals C and CT

2. In the ‘Instrument Cal’ list. set the ID to CT

3. Adjust the ‘Mode’ parameter to ‘Low’.

4. Inject a current from the current source, for example, 35mA.

5. Enter 35.00 into the ‘CalValue’ parameter

6. Adjust the ‘Mode’ parameter to ‘SetLow’.

7. The CT low calibration point will be stored and the ‘Mode’ parameter will change
to ‘High’

8. Inject a current from the current source, for example, 70mA.

9. Enter 70.00 into the ‘CalValue’ parameter

10. Adjust the ‘Mode’ parameter to ‘SetHigh’.

11. On successful calibration the ‘Mode’ parameter will change to ‘Adjusted’ as in the
previous examples.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 377

Notification Messages EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Notification Messages
Notification messages indicate specific conditions within the controller or connected
devices.

The following messages can be displayed depending upon value, notifications, or

standby conditions:

Note: Scrolling messages can be customized using iTools, (see "User Defined
Messages" on page 235) so they may not be identical to those shown in the table
below.
Mnemonic Scrolling Message Description of notification / unexpected condition Possible Solutions
HHHH - Parameter value is greater than the maximum display
limit
LLLL - Parameter value less than the minimum display limit
S.brk input SENSOR BROKEN If the sensor becomes open circuit a message in the Typical reasons for this
upper display which alternates between S.brk and alarm may be caused by the
bAd. The controller will be placed into Manual mode. connections between the
The lower display will scroll the message ‘Input instrument and the sensor
Sensor Broken’. This message can be customized becoming disconnected or a
using iTools. detected break of the sensor
The actual message is defined in default message itself.
table. Change the sensor and
The Sensor Break Output parameter can be wired to a check the wiring and
process alarm to provide latching strategies. connections.
S.RNG INPUT SENSOR OUT OF A sensor is out of range. Reconfigure the Range High
RANGE If the PV input value rises above 5% of the input parameter in the Analog
O.RNG range, alarm messages will be shown. Input list in accordance with
O.RNG (over range in green) will alternate with the application requirements.
S.RNG (sensor out of range in red) and the controller
will be put into Manual mode.
A scrolling message, as defined in default message
table, will also appear.
S.RNG INPUT SENSOR OUT OF A sensor is out of range. Reconfigure the Range Low
RANGE If the PV input value falls below 5% of the input range, parameter in the Analog
u.RNG alarm messages will be shown. Input list in accordance with
u.RNG (under range in green) will alternate with the application requirements.
S.RNG (sensor out of range in red) and the controller
will be put into Manual mode.
A scrolling message as defined in default message
table will also appear,.
TUN.T - Control loop auto tune has timed out and did not Retry tune or clear by
complete. entering and exiting
configuration level.
please set comms The comms configuration password needs setting. Configure the
password VIA itools Fixed comms and Option comms will have limited Instrument>Security>Comm
read/write access until the comms password has been sPassword parameter using
configured. iTools.
COMMS CONFIG password The instrument contains user comms (fixed and/or
EXPIRED option) and the 'Comms Config password' has expired
HMI LEVEL 2 LOCKED. HMI Level 2 access has been locked due to too many Enter level 3 or config to
TOO MANY INCORRECT incorrect password entries. clear the lock, or wait for the
password ATTEMPTS timeout period to expire.
HMI LEVEL 3 LOCKED. HMI Level 3 access has been locked due to too many Enter config level to clear the
TOO MANY INCORRECT incorrect password entries. lock, or wait for the timeout
password ATTEMPTS period to expire.

378 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Notification Messages EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

HMI CONF LEVEL LOCKED. HMI Config access has been locked due to too many Use config clip to connect
TOO MANY INCORRECT incorrect password entries. and reset the timer to 0, to
password ATTEMPTS clear, then back to the
COMMS CONF LEVEL Comms Config access has been locked due to too required timeout period. Or
LOCKED. TOO MANY many incorrect password entries. wait for the timeout period to
INCORRECT password expire.
ATTEMPTS
LOOP DEMO MODE Control loop is in demo mode (controlling a simulated
load)
AUTO TUNE ACTIVE Control loop auto tune is active
AUTOTUNE TRIGGERED Control loop auto tune requested but can not run. Put the loop into auto.
BUT CANNOT RUN
COMMS CONFIG ACTIVE The instrument is in config mode via comms. This will Disconnect the comms
typically be displayed if the controller has been put source or take the controller
into configuration mode using iTools. out of config mode (if using
The controller will be in standby iTools).
OFF Channel is Off
HWE Detected hardware error
RnG Input Ranging
OFLw Input Overflow
bad Bad Input
HWC Hardware Exceeded
Ndat The PV has no data
RAM.S INVALID RAM IMAGE OF Periodic check of non-volatile memory has detected a Clear by going in and out of
NVOL corruption. config mode. If problem
This condition places the instrument in standby mode. persists, return to factory
OPT.S Option NVOL load or Option Board Non-Volatile Memory load or store was Return unit to factory.
store was unsuccessful.
unsuccessful
Pa.S NVOL parameter Option Board Non-Volatile Memory load or store was Return unit to factory.
database load or unsuccessful.
store was
unsuccessful
REG.S NVOL region load or Option Board Non-Volatile Memory load or store was Return unit to factory.
store was unsuccessful.
unsuccessful
CaL.S Factory Calibration AI or IO module has lost, or gone out of calibration. Return to factory for
not detected calibration.
CPu.S Unexpected CPU Unexpected internal CPU fuse settings. Return unit to factory.
condition
ID.S Hardware Ident Unsupported hardware detected. Return unit to factory
Unknown
HWD.S FITTED HARDWARE Detected hardware does not match the expected Clear by ensuring the
DIFFERS FROM EXPECTED hardware. expected hardware matches
hardware the fitted hardware in
Instrument.Modules
parameter list.
KEy.S UNEXPECTED KEYBOARD Unexpected keyboard condition detected at startup. Clear by power cycling. If
CONDITION problem persists, return to
factory
P.Cnf POWERED DOWN WHILST The instrument lost power while in config mode Clear by entering and exiting
IN CONFIG MODE config mode
REC.S incomplete recipe If the recipe load cannot be completed for any reason Enter config mode and
load (values are invalid or out of range), the instrument will re-enter Operator Level to
be half configured. The instrument will go into Standby clear the message
FL.Er Firmware will not run. Only shown at start up. Return to factory

HA033650ENG Issue 1 379

OEM Security EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

OEM Security
OEM security has been added from Firmware Versions V.3.01 and above. It is
available as an orderable option and is protected by Feature Security ("Security
Sub-List (SEC)" on page 197).

OEM security allows users, typically OEMs or distributors, to protect their intellectual
property and is designed to prevent unauthorized viewing, reverse engineering or
cloning of controller configurations. This protection includes application specific
internal (soft) wiring, limited access to certain Configuration level and Operator level
parameters either via comms (by iTools or a third party comms package) or via the
instrument's user interface.

When ‘OEM Security’ is enabled, users are prevented from accessing soft wiring
from any source, and it is not possible to Load or Save the configuration of the
instrument via iTools or by using the Save/Restore facility.

Altering configuration and/or operator parameters via HMI or Comms may also be
restricted when OEM security is implemented.

Once the security function has been set up for a particular application it may be
cloned into every other identical application without further configuration.

Implementation
When OEM Security is supplied four OEM parameters are displayed in the
‘Instrument - Security’ list. These parameters are only available in iTools - they are
not shown in the controller HMI.

OEMPassword This password is selected by the OEM. Any alpha/numeric

text can be used and the field is editable whilst the OEM
Status is ‘Unlocked’. A minimum of 8 characters should be
used. It is not possible to clone the OEM Security
Password. (Highlight the complete row before entering).

OEMEntry Enter the OEM security password to enable and disable

OEM security. The controller must be in configuration level

380 HA033650ENG Issue 1

OEM Security EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

to enter this password. When the correct password is

entered the OEM Status will toggle between ‘Locked’ and
‘Unlocked’. (Highlight the complete row before entering).
Three login attempts are allowed before lockout which is
followed by a 90 minute password lockout period.

OEMStatus Read only showing ‘Locked’ or ‘Unlocked’.

If Unlocked two lists are available which allow an OEM to
restrict which parameters are alterable when the controller
is in Operator and Configuration Access levels.
Parameters added in the ‘OEMConfigList’ WILL be
available to the operator when the controller is in
Configuration level. Parameters not added in this list will
not be available to the operator.
Parameters added to the ‘OEMOperList’ will NOT be
available to the operator when the controller is in Operator
access level.
If the ‘OEMStatus’ is ‘Locked’ these two lists are not
shown. The controller configuration is prevented from
being cloned and the internal wiring cannot be accessed
via comms.

OEMParameterLists This parameter is only writeable when the ‘OEM Status’ is

‘Unlocked’.
When ‘Off’, Operator type parameters are alterable in
Operator access level and Config parameters are alterable
in Configuration access level (all within other limitations
such as high and low limits). This applies both through the
HMI or comms.
When ‘On’, parameters added to the OEMConfigList WILL
be available to the operator when the controller is in
configuration level. Parameters not added in this list will
not be available to the operator. Parameters added to the
OEMOperList will NOT be available to the operator when
the controller is in Operator access level.
The table at the end of this section shows an example for
just two parameters ‘Alarm 1 Type’ (configuration type
parameter) and ‘Alarm 1 Threshold’ (operator type
parameter).
Note: When entering or exiting OEM Security a few seconds should be allowed for
iTools to synchronize.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 381

OEM Security EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

OEM Configuration List

The ‘OEMConfigList’ allows the OEM to choose up to 100 configuration parameters
which are to remain Read/Write while in Configuration level and OEM Security is
enabled (locked). In addition to these the following parameters are always writeable
in configuration mode:

OEM Security Password Entry, HMI Level 2 password, HMI Level 3 password, HMI
Configuration Level password, Comms Configuration password, Controller Coldstart
parameter.

The required parameters may be by dragged and dropped from a browser list (on the
left hand side) into the Wired From cell in the ‘OEMConfigList’. Alternatively, double
click into the ‘WiredFrom’ cell and select the parameter from the pop up list. These
parameters are those chosen by the OEM which are to remain alterable when OEM
Security is enabled and the controller is in Configuration access level.

The view shows the first 8 parameters of which Parameter 1 has been populated with
a configuration parameter (Alarm 1 Type). Examples of configuration parameters
include Alarm Types, Input Types, Range Hi/Lo, Modules Expected, etc.

When the OEM Status is Locked, this list is not shown.

OEM Operator List

The OEM Operator List operates in the same way as the OEM Configuration list
except the parameters selected are those which are available in Operator access
level. Examples are programmer mode, alarm setting parameters, etc. The example
below shows ‘Alarm 1 Threshold’ which is to be read only in Operator access level.

The example shows the first 8 of 100 parameters of which the first has been selected
as ‘Alarm 1 Threshold’. This parameter is to be read only when OEM Security is
enabled and the controller is in Operator access level.

When the OEM Status is Locked, this list is not shown.

382 HA033650ENG Issue 1

OEM Security EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Effect of the ‘OEM ParamList’ Parameter

The table below shows the availability of the two ‘Alarm 1’ parameters set up in the
previous pages when the ‘OEMParamList’ parameter is turned On or Off.

‘Alarm 2’ is used as an example of all parameters which have not been included in
OEM Security.

’OEMParamLists’ Parameter Controller in Controller in Operator

Configuration Access Access
Alterable Not alterable Alterable Not alterable
On A1 Type  
A2 Type  
A1 Threshold  
A2 Threshold  

Off A1 Type  
A2 Type  
A1 Threshold  
A2 Threshold  
The iTools views shown in the next page show how this example is presented in the
iTools browser:-

HA033650ENG Issue 1 383

OEM Security EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

‘OEMParamLists’ On
The iTools views shown below show the alterability of the alarm parameters used in
the previous examples. Alarm 1 has been set up in OEM Security. Alarm 2 is used as
an example of parameters not set up in OEM Security.

Text in black shows parameters are alterable. Text in blue is not alterable.

Controller in Configuration Mode

‘Alarm 1 Type’ is alterable ‘Alarm 2 Type’ is not alterable
’Alarm 1 Threshold’ is not alterable ’Alarm 2 Threshold’ is alterable

Controller in Operator Mode

‘Alarm 1Type’ is not alterable ‘Alarm 2 Type’ is not alterable
’Alarm 1 Threshold’ is not alterable ’Alarm 2 Threshold’ is alterable

‘OEMParaLists’ Off
Controller in Configuration Mode
‘Alarm 1 Type’ is alterable ‘Alarm 2 Type’ is alterable
’Alarm 1 Threshold’ is alterable ’Alarm 2 Threshold’ is alterable

Controller in Operator Mode

‘Alarm 1 Type’ is not alterable ‘Alarm 2 Type’ is not alterable
’Alarm 1 Threshold’ is alterable ’Alarm 2 Threshold’ is alterable

Notes:
1. Parameters are alterable within other set limits.
2. The availability applies to access both through the controller HMI or through
comms.

384 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Technical Specification

General
Controller Function • Single loop panel mount PID controller range with autotune, ON/OFF, Valve
Positioning (no slidewire required)
• Zirconia probe atmosphere control
• Single loop profile/program
• AC mains voltage and 24Vdc options
Measurement Inputs • 1 or 2 inputs. Accuracy ±0.1% reading (refer to detailed specification)
PID Control • 2 PID sets are available as standard with 8 as an optional extension. Each PID set
offers separate proportional band for heat and cool operation
• Enhanced Autotuning control with cutback to minimize overshoot and oscillation.
Fast reacting precision control to setpoint changes or after process disturbances
• Enhanced valve positioning (unbounded) algorithm
• Gain scheduling allows PID selection for a wide range of operating situations,
including deviation from setpoint, absolute temperature, output level and others
• AC supply voltage monitoring for feedforward. PV and SP feedforward functions
Setpoint Program/Profiler • Options include 20 profiles of 8 steps (20x8), 10x24, 1x24 and 1x8
• Holdback (“guaranteed soak”), event outputs, time to target, ramp rate, dwell, step
and call segment types
• Communications compatible with Eurotherm 2400 programmer
• Additional timer functions available
User function block wiring • Optional Totalizer
• Math
• Logic and multiplexing
• BCD conversion
• Counter/Timer, and many other special function blocks available including 16 point
linearization, zirconia and dual input switchover
Additional Functions • Digital and analog retransmission functions
• CT Input - Monitor partial load failure, load short and open circuit; Dual input
functions including switchover, redundant sensor, average, min, max, zirconia
• 6 Freely configurable alarms with manual, automatic, non-latching and event types
plus alarm delay function and blocking
• Alarms may be inhibited in standby
• 5 Recipes with 40 freely selectable parameters switchable from front panel or digital
input
• Scrolling parameter help and user messages displayed on event
• USB Backup lead and free configuration software
Backup and Configuration Tools • Free Eurotherm iTools software for backup and configuration
• USB Backup lead available for convenient desktop configuration and back up, (lead
powers the controller independently)
• iTools connects also using Ethernet Modbus TCP and serial Modbus RTU
OEM Security • Helps protect instrument configurations from unauthorized viewing, cloning or
backwards engineering

HA033650ENG Issue 1 385

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Function Blocks Available

Function Standard* Standard Enhanced
Blocks Function Toolkit Blocks* Toolkit Blocks*
Instrument Interface to Instrument wide settings 1 - -

Loop Enhanced Eurotherm PID Loop 1 - -

Programmer Ramp/Dwell Programmer 1 - -

BCD BCD Conversion 1 - -

Alarm General purpose analog alarm monitoring 6 - -

Recipe General purpose recipe function 1 - -

Comms Interface to serial and Ethernet 2 - -

communications

AI Interface to main analog input 2 - -

IP Monitor Input monitoring (min, max, other functions) 2 - -

IO Interface to Inputs and Outputs 6 - -

Modbus Master Maximum of 3 Modbus slaves and 32 data 35

points

Option DIO Digital I/O options 8 - -

Remote Input Interface to remote (communications) input 1 - -

OR Eight input logical “OR” operation 8 - -

Commstab Comms Indirection Table configuration 32

CT Current transformer 1 - -

Zirconia Zirconia Probe input 1 - -

Wires User wiring 50 200 200

Math2 Two input math functions - 4 8

Lgc2 Two input logical operations - 4 8

Lgc8 Eight input logical operations - 2 4

Timer Timer based functions - 1 2

SwitchOver Input switchover - 1 1

Mux8 Eight Input multiplexor - 3 4

Total Totalizer - 1 1

Counter Counter block (32-bit) - 1 2

UsrVal User values (freely assignable) - 4 12

Lin16 16 point linearization - 2 2

* Dependent on Instrument/options ordered

386 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Environmental specifications, standards, approvals and certifications

Operating Temperature 0℃ to 55℃ (32°F to 131°F)
Storage Temperature −20℃ to 70℃ (-4°F to 158°F)
Operating/storage humidity 5% to 90% RH non-condensing
Atmosphere Non-corrosive, non-explosive
Altitude <2000 Metres (<6562 feet)
Vibration / Shock EN61131-2 (5 to 11.9Hz @ 7mm peak to peak displacement,
11.9-150Hz @ 2g, 0.5 octave min.).
EN60068-2-6 Test FC, Vibration.
EN60068-2-27 Test Ea and guidance, Shock.
Front of panel sealing protection Standard bezel: EN60529 IP65, UL50E Type 12 (equivalent to
NEMA12).
Washdown bezel: EN60529 IP66, UL50E Type 4X (indoor use)
(equivalent to NEMA4X)
Rear of panel protection EN60529 IP10
Electromagnetic Emissions HV PSU units to EN61326-1 Class B – Light industrial
compatibility (EMC) LV PSU units to EN61326-1 Class A – Heavy industrial
Immunity EN61326-1 Industrial
Approvals and Europe CE (EN61326), RoHS (EN50581), REACH, WEEE, EN14597 TR Type
certification Approval
USA, Canada UL, cUL
Russia EAC (CUTR) pending
China RoHS, CCC: Exempt (Product not listed in catalogue of products
subject to China Compulsory Certification)
Global When subject to the necessary field calibration, EPC3000 series
controllers manufactured by Eurotherm are suitable for use in Nadcap
applications in all furnace classes, defined in AMS2750E clause 3.3.1.
Meets accuracy requirements of CQI-9
Achilles® Level 1 CRT Cyber Security Assessment
Schneider Electric Green Premium
Electrical safety EN61010-1: 2010 and UL 61010-1: 2012.
Pollution Degree 2
Insulation Category II

EN ISO 13849 Assessment Declaration

The EPC3000 has been assessed against the following standards:

• EN ISO 13849-1:2015 – Safety of Machinery – Safety Related Parts of Control

Systems

• EN ISO 13849-2:2012 – Safety of Machinery – Safety Related Parts of Control

Systems – Part 2: Validation

The results are shown in the following table.

Key safety values Value Standard

Performance Level (PL)1 c EN ISO 13849-1

Diagnostic Coverageavg None

Mean Time to Dangerous Failure (MTTFd) 100 years3

Category2 1

Maximum service life 10 years

1. The Performance Level is defined for the safety function of the EPC3000.A process can be monitored via the PV
inputs. In the event of a value being read outside of the acceptable band, the alarm relay will be activated.
2. The EN ISO 13849-1 performance level (PL) and safety category (Cat) of the overall system depends on multiple fac-
tors, including the selected modules, wiring practices, the physical environment, and the application.
3. For the level of assessment, 100 years is the maximum acceptable MTTFd which is exceeded by all modular variants
of the EPC3000.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 387

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Mechanical

Dimensions
Dimensions given as Width (tolerance -x.xx, +x.xx) × Height (tolerance -x.xx, +x.xx).

EPC3004 ¼ DIN Cut out 92 (-0.0, +0.8) mm x 92 (-0.0, +0.8) mm

3.62 (-0.0, +0.03) inch x 3.62 (-0.0, +0.03) inch
Front panel 96 (-0.0, +1.0) mm × 96 (-0.0, +2.0) mm
3.78 (-0.0, +0.05) inch × 3.78 (-0.0, +0.05) inch
EPC3008 ⅛ DIN Cut out 45 (-0.0, +0.6) mm × 92 mm (-0.0, +0.8) mm
1.77 (-0.0, +0.02) inch × 3.62 (-0.0, +0.03) inch
Front panel 48 (-0.0, +1.0) mm x 96 (-0.0, +1.0) mm
1.89 (-0.0, +0.04) inch x 3.78 (-0.0, +0.04) inch
EPC3016 1 ⁄16 DIN Cut out 45 (-0.0, +0.6) mm × 45 (-0.0, +0.6) mm
1.77 (-0.0, +0.02) inch × 1.77 (-0.0, +0.02) inch
Front panel 48 (-0.0, +1.0) mm x 48 (-0.0, +1.0) mm
1.89 (-0.0, +0.04) inch × 1.89 (-0.0, +0.04) inch

Depth behind panel (all controllers) 90 mm (3.54 inch)

Depth Total (all controllers) 101 mm (3.97 inch)

Weight
EPC3004 420 grams; 14.81 oz
EPC3008 350 grams; 12.34 oz
EPC3016 250 grams; 8.81 oz

388 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Input and Outputs

I/O and Communication types

I/O and Comms EPC3016 EPC3008/3004
Analog inputs 1 universal input 20Hz 1 or 2 (option) universal input 20Hz
1 auxiliary input 4-20mA, 0-10V 4Hz (option)
Optional I/O modules Up to 2, freely selectable: Up to 3, freely selectable:
• Form A relay output • Form A relay output
• Logic I/O • Logic I/O
• DC analog output • DC analog output
• TRIAC output • TRIAC output
Form C relay output 1 1
Contact closure logic input 1 (option) 2
Logic I/O (open collector) - 4 or 8 (option)
Current transformer 1 (option) 1
24V Transmitter PSU - 1
Communications 1 of the following options: 2 of the following options:
• EIA-485 • EIA-485 Modbus (or EI Bisynch)
• EIA-422 and Modbus TCP
• EIA-232 • Modbus TCP Slave + EtherNet/IP
• Modbus RTU slave (EI Bisynch available Server, or Modbus TCP Slave +
with serial comms) BACnet Slave
• Modbus TCP slave
• Modbus TCP Slave + EtherNet/IP Server,
or Modbus TCP Slave + BACnet Slave

I/O Specifications
Input types Thermocouples, Pt100/Pt1000 RTD, 4-20mA, 0-20mA, 10V, 2V, 0.8V, 80mV, 40mV, zirconia
(oxygen probe), Pyrometers. For other input types contact your Eurotherm supplier for advice.
Accuracy ±0.1% reading. When subject to the necessary field calibration, EPC3000 series
controllers manufactured by Eurotherm are suitable for use in Nadcap applications in furnace
classes as defined in AMS2750E clause 3.3.1.
Sample time • Process Inputs: 50ms (20Hz)
• Thermocouple: 62.5ms (16Hz)
• RTD: Automatic cycle time selection 100ms (10Hz)
• Automatic cycle time selection
Mains rejection • Series mode rejection: >80dB
(48-62Hz) • Common mode rejection: >150dB
Sensor break AC sensor break, detected within 3 seconds worst case.
Input filtering OFF to 60 seconds filter time constant.
User calibration User 2 point input adjust (offset/gradient), transducer scaling.
Thermocouple • K, J, N, R, S, B, L, T as standard, plus 2 downloadable custom curves
• Linearization accuracy
• Cold Junction (CJ) calibration accuracy: ±1.0ºC at 25ºC (±1.8ºF at 77ºF) ambient
• CJ ambient rejection ratio: better than 40:1 from 25ºC (77ºF) ambient
• External CJ selectable as 0, 45, 50ºC (32, 113, 122ºF) or measurable for EPC3004/EPC3008

HA033650ENG Issue 1 389

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Inputs and Outputs

Input ranges 40mV 80mV 0.8V 2V 10V RTD (Pt100/ mA
Pt1000)
Range Min -40mV -80mV -800mV -2V -10V 0Ω -32mA
(-200ºC; -328ºF)
Max +40mV +80mV +800mV +2V +10V 400Ω/4000Ω +32mA
(850ºC; 1562ºF)
Thermal stability from ±0.4µV/ºC ±0.4µV/ºC ±0.4µV/ºC ±0.4µV/ºC ±0.8µV/ºC ±0.01ºC/ºC ±0.16µA/ºC
25ºC (77ºF) ambient ±13ppm/ºC ±13ppm/ºC ±13ppm/ºC ±13ppm/ºC ±70ppm/ºC ±25ppm/ºC ±113ppm/ºC
Resolution 1.0µV 1.6µV 16µV 41µV 250µV 0.05ºC (0.09ºF) 0.6µA
unfiltered
Electrical noise (pk to pk 0.8µV 3.2µV 32µV 82µV 250µV 0.05ºC (0.09ºF) 1.3µA
with 1.6s input filter
Linearity accuracy (best 0.003% 0.003% 0.003% 0.003% 0.007% 0.033% 0.003%
fit straight line)
Calibration accuracy at ±4.6µV ±7.5µV ±75µV ±420µV ±1.5mV ±0.31ºC (±0.56ºF) ±3µA
25ºC (77ºF) ambient ±0.053% ±0.052% ±0.052% ±0.044% ±0.063% ±0.023% ±1.052%
Input resistance 100MΩ 100MΩ 100MΩ 100MΩ 57kΩ - 2.49Ω
(1% shunt)
Bulb current 190µA/180µA

Remote Setpoint (Aux) Analog input (EPC3016 only)

Range 0 to 10V and 4 to 20mA. Max ranges -1V to 11V and 3.36mA to 20.96mA.
Accuracy ±0.25% of reading ± 1LSD, 14 Bits.
Sample Rate 4Hz (250ms).
Functions • Remote setpoint input
• Auxiliary analog input
Thermal Stability 100ppm (typical) < 150ppm (worst case).
Mains Rejection Common Mode (48-62Hz) >120dB.
Series Mode >90dB.
Input Impedance Voltage 223kΩ. Current 2.49Ω.

Current transformer input

Input range • 0 - 50mA RMS, 48 to 62Hz
• 10Ω burden resistor fitted inside module

Measurement Scaling 10, 25, 50 or 100 Amps

Calibration accuracy <1% of reading (typical), <4 % of reading (worst case)

Input Functions • Partial load failure. SSR open or short circuit

• Other functions including power usage totalization using soft wiring

Contact closure inputs LA and LB

Thresholds Open >400Ω, Closed <100Ω
Input functions • Auto/Manual select
• SP2 select
• Integral Hold
• Control inhibit
• Program run functions
• Keylock
• Recipe select
• PID select
• BCD Bit
• Autotune enable
• Standby
• PV Select plus other functions using soft wiring

390 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Logic I/O modules

Output Rating ON 12Vdc 44mA max.
Minimum control cycle time 50mS (auto).
Output Functions Time proportioned heat, Time proportioned cool.
SSR Drive Alarm and event outputs, interlock outputs, other functions
using soft wiring.
Contact Closure (input) Open >500Ω.
Closed <150Ω.
Input Functions • Auto/Manual select
• SP2 select
• Integral Hold
• Control inhibit
• Program run functions
• Keylock
• Recipe select
• PID select
• BCD bit
• Autotune enable
• Standby
• PV Select, plus other functions using soft wiring

Logic I/O open collector type (EPC3008/3004 controllers only)

Output Rating 15 to 35Vdc
Output limit Maximum current sinking 40mA
Output Functions Alarm and event outputs, interlock outputs, other functions available
using soft wiring. Cannot be used as a control output.
Voltage sensing input OFF <1V, ON >4V.
Max 35V, Min -1V
Contact Closure (input) OFF >28kΩ
ON <100Ω
Input Functions • Auto/Manual select
• SP2 select
• Integral hold
• Control inhibit
• Program run functions
• Keylock
• Recipe select
• PID select
• BCD bit
• Autotune enable
• Standby
• PV select plus other functions available using soft wiring

HA033650ENG Issue 1 391

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Relays (form A modules and form C fixed built in)

Types Form A (normally open)
Form C (changeover)

Output Functions Time proportioned heat, time proportioned cool. SSR Drive. Direct
Valve raise/lower.
Alarm and event outputs, interlock outputs, other functions using soft
wiring.

Rating Min 100mA @ 12V, Max 2A @ 264V AC resistive.

External Snubber recommended.

Relay Electrical Endurance

The number of operations which the relays are expected to endure is limited in
accordance with the graph shown below. Typically at a load of 2A, 250Vac resistive at
23°C this is 500,000 operations – see below. Differences in load current, ambient
temperature, load type and switching frequency will impact the number of operations.

Electrical Endurance

Cycles

250Vac resistive

Switching current (Amps)

392 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

TRIAC module
Rating Min. 40mA, 30V RMS
Max. 0.75A :@ 264V, AC resistive
Output Functions Time proportioned heat, time proportioned cool. SSR drive.
Alarm and event outputs, interlock outputs, other functions using soft
wiring.
Surge Rating Max. current surge 30A (<10mS).
Max. continuous operating voltage 540V peak, 385V RMS.
Max surge voltage 800V peak, 565V RMS (<10mS)

Isolated DC output module

Current Output Voltage output
Range 0-20mA 0-10V
Load resistance <550Ω >450Ω
Calibration accuracy ±(0.5% of reading + 100µA offset) ±(0.5% of reading + 50mV offset)
Resolution 13.5 Bits resolution
Output Functions • SCR/Power control drive
• Proportional valve
• Retransmission to chart recorder or other instrumentation.
• Other functions using soft wiring
Digitial Input (DI), where The DC output module can be configured as contact closure input see
configured "I/O List (io)" on page 107. In this case:
• Open state >365 Ohms
• Closed state <135 Ohms

Power supply and transmitter power supply

Controller supply voltage 100-230Vac +/- 15%, 48 to 62Hz
or
24Vac +10/-15%, 48 to 62Hz
24Vdc +20/-15%, max 5% ripple voltage.
Power Supply Rating EPC3016 controller 6W
EPC3008/3004 controller 9W
Power Measurement Only available in 100-230Vac powered instruments.
Measures direct from power supply (no additional connections).
Uncalibrated.
Electrical noise 0.5V filtered, used by the PID function for power
feedforward.
Transmitter Power supply 24Vdc. 2 to 28mA load. Isolated from system (300Vac insulation)
(EPC3008, EPC3004 controllers only)

Communications
Ethernet • Ground shielded RJ45 Jack supporting 10/100Base-T auto sensing
• Modbus/TCP, BACnet and EtherNet/IP Protocols
• Fixed IP address or DHCP
• Bonjour Auto-Discovery
• Certified to Achilles® communications robustness testing level 1
Serial • EIA-485 Half duplex
• EIA-422/EIA-232 Full duplex
• Baud rates 4800 (EI-Bisynch only), 9600, 19200
• Modbus RTU 8 data bits, odd/even/no parity selectable
• EI-Bisynch 7 data bits even parity fixed

HA033650ENG Issue 1 393

Technical Specification EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Operator interface
Type High Visibility LCD with backlight.
Flat “washdown” membrane bezel with superior panel sealing, or sculpted
bezel with fully tactile keys.

Keyboard 100,000 Operations typical.

Main PV All - Green/Red Bicolor (Red in alarm);

EPC3016 4 Digits, 3 decimal places.
EPC3008 4.5 Digits, 4 decimal places.
EPC3004 5 Digits, 4 decimal places.

Second Line 5 Character 16 segment text or numeric.

Third Line 16 Segment scrolling text or numeric display.

(EPC3004/3008 only)

Text Character Sets Roman, Simplified Cyrillic.

Additional Display • Program status indicator (ramp up, ramp down or dwell)
Functions • Output indicators
• Alarm indication
• Units
• Bar graph (EPC3004, EPC3008 only)
• Communications activity indicator

HMI Functions • Configurable display contents

• Configurable scroll lists for operator/supervisor
• Configurable scrolling event messages
• Password level protection with lockout period
• Two Programmable function keys (EPC3004, EPC3008 only)

394 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Appendix: EI-BISYNCH Parameters EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Appendix: EI-BISYNCH Parameters

The following table lists the EI-Bisynch parameters which are supported by EPC3000
series controllers.

Parameter Mnemonics
Loop.Main.PV PV
Loop.OP.ManualOP OP
Loop.Main.TargetSP SL
Loop.Main.AutoMan mA
CurrentTransformer.LoadCurrent LI
Instrument.Info.CustomerID ID
Loop.Main.WorkingSP SP
Loop.Main.WorkingOutput OO
Loop.OP.ManualOP VM
Loop.Main.WorkingOutput VP
Programmer.Run.ProgramNumber PN
Programmer.Run.ProgramMode PC
Programmer.Run.ProgramSetpoint PS
Programmer.Run.ProgramCyclesLeft CL
Programmer.Run.SegmentNumber SN
Programmer.Run.SegmentType CS
Programmer.Run.SegmentTimeLeft TS
Programmer.Run.TargetSetpoint CT
Programmer.Run.RampRate CR
Programmer.Run.ProgramTimeLeft TP
Programmer.Run.Event1 z1
Programmer.Run.Event2 z2
Programmer.Run.Event3 z3
Programmer.Run.Event4 z4
Programmer.Run.Event5 z5
Programmer.Run.Event6 z6
Programmer.Run.Event7 z7
Programmer.Run.Event8 z8
Alarm.1.Threshold A1
Alarm.2.Threshold A2
Alarm.3.Threshold A3
Alarm.4.Threshold A4
Alarm.1.Hysteresis n5
Alarm.2.Hysteresis n6
Alarm.3.Hysteresis n7
Alarm.4.Hysteresis n8
Loop.Diags.LoopBreakTime lt
Loop.Atune.AutotuneEnable AT
Loop.PID.Boundary GS
Loop.PID.ActiveSet Gn
Loop.PID.Ch1PropBand XP
Loop.PID.IntegralTime TI
Loop.PID.DerivativeTime TD
Loop.PID.ManualReset MR
Loop.PID.CutbackHigh HB
Loop.PID.CutbackLow LB

HA033650ENG Issue 1 395

Appendix: EI-BISYNCH Parameters EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Mnemonics
Loop.PID.Ch2PropBand RG
Loop.PID.Ch1PropBand2 P2
Loop.PID.IntegralTime2 l2
Loop.PID.DerivativeTime2 D2
Loop.PID.ManualReset2 M2
Loop.PID.CutbackHigh2 hb
Loop.PID.CutbackLow2 lb
Loop.PID.Ch2PropBand2 G2
Loop.FF.FFGain FP
Loop.FF.FFOffset FO
Loop.FF.PIDTrimLimit FD
Loop.PID.Ch1OnOffHyst HH
Loop.PID.Ch2OnOffHyst hc
Loop.OP.Ch2Deadband HC
Loop.OP.SafeValue BO
Loop.OP.Ch1TravelTime TT
Loop.OP.SafeValue VS
Loop.SP.SPSelect SS
Loop.Main.RemoteLoc rE
Loop.SP.SP1 S1
Loop.SP.SP2 S2
Loop.SP.RSP uq
Loop.SP.RSP ur
Loop.SP.SPTrim LT
Loop.SP.SPLowLimit LS
Loop.SP.SPHighLimit HS
Loop.SP.SPLowLimit L2
Loop.SP.SPHighLimit H2
Loop.SP.SPTrimLowLimit TL
Loop.SP.SPTrimHighLimit TH
Loop.SP.SPRateUp RR
AI.1.MVIn VA
AI.2.MVIn VD
AI.1.CJCTemp t5
AI.2.CJCTemp t6
AI.1.PV QY
AI.2.PV QZ
Loop.OP.OutputLowLimit LO
Loop.OP.OutputHighLimit HO
Loop.OP.RemoteOPLow RC
Loop.OP.RemoteOPHigh RH
Loop.OP.OPRateUp OR
Loop.OP.ManualStepValue FM
IO.1.CycleTime CH
IO.1.MinOnTime MH
IO.2.CycleTime C2
IO.2.MinOnTime MC
Loop.OP.SafeValue BP
Comms.Network.Address Ad
Instrument.HMI.HomeDisplay WC
Loop.Main.WorkingOutput WO
Loop.FF.FFOutput FN
Loop.Diags.ProportionalOP Xp
Loop.Diags.IntegralOP xI

396 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Appendix: EI-BISYNCH Parameters EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Mnemonics
Loop.Diags.DerivativeOP xD
Loop.OP.Ch1Output Vv
RemoteInput.input RI
Loop.Diags.Deviation ER
Instrument.Info.NativeVersion V0 (HEX Format)
Instrument.Info.NativeType II (HEX Format)
Instrument.Security.InstrumentMode IM
Programmer.Set.EditProgram EP
Loop.Main.Hold FC
AI.1.SensorBreakOutput sb
Loop.Diags.LoopBreak Lb
Loop.Main.IntegralHold IH
Instrument.Diagnostics.GlobalAck AK
Loop.SP.SPRateDone Rc
Instrument.HMI.Keylock DK
RemoteInput.RemStatus RF
AI.2. SensorBreakOutput IF
Loop.SP.RangeHigh QL
Loop.SP.RangeLow QM
Instrument.Diagnostics.InstrumentStatus SO (HEX Format)
Loop.Setup.Ch1ControlType Q0
Loop.Setup.ControlAction CA
Loop.OP.NonLinearCooling Q9
Loop.Setup.DerivativeType Qe
Loop.OP.PowerFeedforward Pe
Loop.FF.FFType QO
Loop.OP.SafeValue QP
Loop.OP.ManualStepValue QR
BCD.BcdOP BF
Loop.PID.GainScheduler QW
Instrument.Info.TemperatureUnits Q1
Loop.SP.SPTracksRSP QE
Loop.SP.SPTracksPV QF
Loop.SP.SPTracksPSP QG
Loop.SP.SPRateUnits QJ
Loop.SP.RSPType QA
*WorkingProgram.HoldbackType $0
*WorkingProgram.HoldbackValue s0
*WorkingProgram.RampUnits d0
*WorkingProgram.DwellUnits p0
*WorkingProgram.ProgramCycles o0
*WorkingSegment.1.SegmentType $1
*WorkingSegment.1.TargetSetpoint s1
*WorkingSegment.1.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d1
*WorkingSegment.1.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p1
*WorkingSegment.1.EventOutput/CallCycle o1 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.2.SegmentType $2
*WorkingSegment.2.TargetSetpoint s2
*WorkingSegment.2.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d2
*WorkingSegment.2.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p2
*WorkingSegment.2.EventOutput/CallCycle o2 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.3.SegmentType $3
*WorkingSegment.3.TargetSetpoint s3
*WorkingSegment.3.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d3

HA033650ENG Issue 1 397

Appendix: EI-BISYNCH Parameters EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Mnemonics
*WorkingSegment.3.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p3
*WorkingSegment.3.EventOutput/CallCycle o3 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.4.SegmentType $4
*WorkingSegment.4.TargetSetpoint s4
*WorkingSegment.4.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d4
*WorkingSegment.4.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p4
*WorkingSegment.4.EventOutput/CallCycle o4 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.5.SegmentType $5
*WorkingSegment.5.TargetSetpoint s5
*WorkingSegment.5.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d5
*WorkingSegment.5.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p5
*WorkingSegment.5.EventOutput/CallCycle o5 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.6.SegmentType $6
*WorkingSegment.6.TargetSetpoint s6
*WorkingSegment.6.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d6
*WorkingSegment.6.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p6
*WorkingSegment.6.EventOutput/CallCycle o6 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.7.SegmentType $7
*WorkingSegment.7.TargetSetpoint s7
*WorkingSegment.7.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d7
*WorkingSegment.7.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p7
*WorkingSegment.7.EventOutput/CallCycle o7 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.8.SegmentType $8
*WorkingSegment.8.TargetSetpoint s8
*WorkingSegment.8.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d8
*WorkingSegment.8.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p8
*WorkingSegment.8.EventOutput/CallCycle o8 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.9.SegmentType $9
*WorkingSegment.9.TargetSetpoint s9
*WorkingSegment.9.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d9
*WorkingSegment.9.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p9
*WorkingSegment.9.EventOutput/CallCycle o9 (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.10.SegmentType $:
*WorkingSegment.10.TargetSetpoint s:
*WorkingSegment.10.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d:
*WorkingSegment.10.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p:
*WorkingSegment.10.EventOutput/CallCycle o: (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.11.SegmentType $;
*WorkingSegment.11.TargetSetpoint s;
*WorkingSegment.11.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d;
*WorkingSegment.11.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p;
*WorkingSegment.11.EventOutput/CallCycle o; (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.12.SegmentType $<
*WorkingSegment.12.TargetSetpoint s<
*WorkingSegment.12.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d<
*WorkingSegment.12.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p<
*WorkingSegment.12.EventOutput/CallCycle o< (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.13.SegmentType $=
*WorkingSegment.13.TargetSetpoint s=
*WorkingSegment.13.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d=
*WorkingSegment.13.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p=
*WorkingSegment.13.EventOutput/CallCycle o= (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.14.SegmentType $>
*WorkingSegment.14.TargetSetpoint s>

398 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Appendix: EI-BISYNCH Parameters EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Parameter Mnemonics
*WorkingSegment.14.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d>
*WorkingSegment.14.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p>
*WorkingSegment.14.EventOutput/CallCycle o> (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.15.SegmentType $?
*WorkingSegment.15.TargetSetpoint s?
*WorkingSegment.15.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d?
*WorkingSegment.15.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p?
*WorkingSegment.15.EventOutput/CallCycle o? (HEX Format)
*WorkingSegment.16.SegmentType $@
*WorkingSegment.16.TargetSetpoint s@
*WorkingSegment.16.Duration/RampRate/RampTime d@
*WorkingSegment.16.CallProgramNo/WorkingProgram.ProgramEndType p@
*WorkingSegment.16.EventOutput/CallCycle o@ (HEX Format)

HA033650ENG Issue 1 399

Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM)

The EPC3000 FM variant provides a FM Limit function (high or Low), that meets the
requirements of FM Approval Standard FM 3545 - Temperature Limit and
Supervisory Switches.

This Appendix will help aid the initial setup of the EPC3000 FM and will also help
explain functionality. (To see further information click the blue links).

Note: The name Factory Mutual is abbreviated to FM, for example EPC3000 FM.

Note: The Programmer function is not available for EPC3000 FM.

FM Limit function (Low & High) - Overview

The EPC3000 FM function provides a high or low limit function that meets the
requirements of FM Approval Standard FM 3545 - Temperature Limit and
Supervisory Switches.

The FM Limit function monitors the process temperature input, and when a threshold
temperature is exceeded, will activate an “FM” alarm relay. In EPC3000 the
monitored input is always the main PV input, and the FM relay is the fixed Form C
changeover relay, Output 3.

Note: No additional I/O options are required to use the function.

A single EPC3000 FM may be used either as an FM approved high limit, with the
alarm relay triggering when the measured temperature is greater than the threshold
value, or an FM approved low limit, triggering when the measured temperature is less
than the threshold.

Selection of the limit type (High or Low) is made during the instrument set up.

The FM function is supplied in instruments ordered with “FM” in field 1, “Type”. The
instruments will be supplied bearing the FM approval mark on the side label.

Note: It is not possible to use the EPC3000 Ramp/Soak functions with controllers
supplied as FM versions.

Other I/O and communications options may be ordered using the standard EPC3000
order code as required.

Additional monitoring and control configuration, including PID control, may be added
to the EPC3000 FM controller, using function block wiring. However, any additional
alarm function added in this way will NOT be FM Approved.

The FM function is fixed and cannot be deleted or modified.

400 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Setting up

Wiring and Connections

For further details on Connections, Wiring Input types see:

• Sensor Inputs (Measuring Input)

• Primary Sensor Input (Measuring Input)

• Terminal Wiring
Describes details of the controllers terminal wiring, which terminal connections
should be used, why and how they are wired, see page 38

• Terminal Layout EPC3016 Controller

Displays details of the terminal layout for the EPC3016 Controller for example the
FM Temperature Input and the FM Relay output, see page 39

• Terminal Layout EPC3008 and EPC3004 Controller

Displays details of the terminal layout for the EPC3008 and EPC3004 Controller
for example the FM Temperature Input and the FM Relay output, see page 40.

FM Relay (Output 3, OP3)

For further information regarding the FM Relay, such as:

• Location and connection, see Terminal Layout EPC3016 Controller on page 39

• Controller Inputs, see Inputs/Outputs (IO) on page 47

• FM Relay, also called Output 3 (OP3) on page 52

Application (FM Limit Alarm High / Low) selection

For details on how to select the required FM application at startup, see the following:

• Start Up—New Unconfigured Controller on page 68:

• Quick Start Tables on page 69

• Quick Code Set 1 on page 69 and Quick Code Set 2 on page 70

• If preconfigured, ordered as an EPC300 FM see Start Up - New Configured

Controller on page 75

• Applications on page 228, provides a summary of the FM applications, available

to select at startup for unconfigured controllers.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 401

Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Alarm Types (FM)

The FM Applications (FM Limit - High/Low) contain different default preconfigured
alarm types. The following will provide further information:

• What are Alarms? on page 245

• Alarm Types on page 246, explains all Alarm types

• Different default Alarm types are utilized for each FM Application - Absolute High
(for FM Limit High) and Absolute Low (for FM Limit Low)

• Alarm type Digital High on page 248, is utilized in both FM Limit Applications for
the Sensor break functionality

• See Applications, specifically EPC3000 FM Limit Alarm - High on page 228 and
EPC3000 FM Limit Alarm - Low on page 230 - this displays and explains the 3
reconfigured alarm types.

Setting an Alarm (FM)

The levels at which absolute high/low alarm types operate are adjustable (known as
a Threshold) and will need adjusting - by the relevant operator level.

The FM approvals standard requires adjustment of alarm thresholds to be protected,

only the relevant level of operator, usually Operator Level 2 or 3, may gain access to
adjust Alarms (and Threshold) settings, by entering a configured password.

The following provides further detail:

• To Set Alarm Threshold on page 253

• To Select Operator Level 2 on page 85, describes how to enter and gain
Operator Level 2 access

• To Enter Level 3 on page 90, describes how to enter and gain Operator Level 3
access

• See Alarms List (ALm) on page 141, which list and defines the Alarm
parameters, including Threshold, Hysteresis and Latch type

Note: Observe the default values. Not all of the parameters will be
available/configurable for EPC3000 FM.

402 HA033650ENG Issue 1

Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

Acknowledging an Alarm (FM)

The FM Approvals Standard requires alarms can only be reset, or acknowledged
when the process variable (i.e.temperature) is within the high or low threshold -
referred to as manual latching.

Note: This latching alarm function may not be changed for the EPC3000 FM alarm
function block.

The following provides further detail:

• Alarm Indication on page 253

• To Acknowledge an Alarm on page 254

• Only Manual latching is supported, see Latching on page 252 for a description of
how this works.

HA033650ENG Issue 1 403

Appendix: EPC3000 Factory Mutual (FM) EPC3016, EPC3008, EPC3004

404 HA033650ENG Issue 1

 Scan for Local contacts

Eurotherm Ltd

Faraday Close
Worthing, West Sussex, BN13 3PL
Phone: +44 (0) 1903 268500

www.eurotherm.com
Published August 2021

HA033650ENG Issue 1

©2021 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. Life Is On, Schneider Electric, EcoStruxure, Eurotherm, EurothermSuite, EFit,
EPack, EPower, Eycon, Chessell, Mini8, nanodac, piccolo and versadac are trademarks and property of Schneider Electric SE,
its subsidiaries and affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.